Graupner and KG MC-16 ComputerSystem Graupner/SJ HoTT User Manual Manual 3

Graupner GmbH & Co. KG ComputerSystem Graupner/SJ HoTT Manual 3

Contents

Manual 3

51Receiver initializationnot correspond to the product (e.g. a transmitter update fi le instead of a receiver update fi le), the "Product code error" popup window will appear and the update process will not start.Activate the control labeled "Program". Wait for the progress bar to start. Depending on the speed of the computer being used, this may take several seconds. Now switch on the receiver while holding its SET button down. After a few seconds the "Found target device …" message will appear in the status display. Now you can release the receiver's button. The actual fi rmware update will begin autonomously after this message has appeared.However, if the receiver is not detected, the "Target device ID not found" popup window will appear.If this process terminates before reaching the 100 % mark, switch off your receiver's power supply then try to start the update process all over again. Do this by performing the above steps again.The status display and progress bar will show you the progress of the fi rmware update. The update is concluded when the text "Complete … 100 %“ or "Complete!!" appears in the bottom line of the status display.Both LEDs on the receiver will illuminate during the update process. Upon successful conclusion of the update process, the green LED will extinguish and the red LED will begin to blink.Switch the receiver off and remove the interface cable. Repeat this procedure for any other receivers present.Receiver initialization4. Following a successful update process you MUST perform a receiver initialization procedure before using the receiver again. This is necessary for reasons of safety.Do this by pressing and holding the receiver's SET button then switching the receiver's power supply on. Now release the SET button again. When you subsequently switch the receiver on again, the receiver's green LED will illuminate continuously for about 2 or 3 seconds. Except for binding information, all other settings that may have been programmed into the receiver will now be reset to factory defaults and will have to be re-entered again if they are needed.
52 Installation noticesIn order to prevent uncontrolled movements of servos connected to the receiver during startupalways fi rst switch on the transmitter and then the receiverand when fi nished with operation fi rst switch off the receiver and then the transmitter.When programming the transmitter, be sure that electric motors cannot start running without control or that a combustion motor equipped with automatic starting cannot start up unintentionally. To be safe, disconnect the receiver's drive battery or, in the case of a combustion motor, disconnect the fuel supply.Several notices and suggestions for installing remote control components into a model are provided below.Wrap the receiver in a foam rubber pad that is at 1. least 6 mm thick. Attach the foam rubber to the receiver with rubber bands so it will be protected against vibration and/or the jars of a hard landing. All switches must be installed such that they are 2. not affected by exhaust gases or vibration. The switch knob must be freely accessible over its entire range of movement.Mount servos on rubber bushes/spacers with 3. hollow brass bearings to protect them from vibration. Do not tighten the fastening screws down too tight as this would negate the vibration protection to be provided by the rubber bush/spacer. Only when servo fastening screws are properly tightened will this arrangement provide security and vibration protection for your servos. The fi gure below shows how a servo is mounted properly. The brass bearings are to be pushed into the rubber bushes/spacers from below.Servo mounting lugRetaining screwRubber grommetTubular brass spacerServo arms must be free to move throughout their 4. entire range of motion. Pay attention that there are no objects which could hinder servo arm motion.The sequence in which servos are connected to the receiver depends on the type of model. Follow the connection layouts provided for this on pages 61 and 65.Also observe the safety notices provided on pages 4 … 9. Installation noticesReceiver installationRegardless of which Graupner receiver system you use, the procedure is always the same.Please pay attention that the receiver's antennas must be mounted at least 5 cm away from all large metal parts or any wiring that is not directly routed out of the receiver itself. In addition to steel parts, this also includes carbon fi ber parts, servos, fuel pumps and all kinds of cables etc. Optimally the receiver should be placed at a readily accessible location that is well away from all other equipment. Under no circumstances may servo cables be wrapped around the antennas or routed close to it.Please note that cables are subject to the acceleration forces which occur during fl ight and these forces may cause such cables, to shift in position. Therefore be sure the cables in the vicinity of the antennas are not able to move. Such moving cables can cause reception disturbances.Tests have shown that vertical (upright) antennas provide the best results during wide-range fl ights. In the case of diversity antennas (two antennas), the second antenna should be oriented at a 90° angle to the fi rst antenna.The connectors designated "B + -" on the GR-32 DUAL HoTT receiver are intended for battery connections. The power supply is bussed across all numbered connections so it can be attached at any of these 16 connectors. However, due to additional voltage losses associated with the traverse connectors, connections 13 through 16 should not be used for connecting the receiver's battery.The function of every individual channel is determined by the transmitter used, not by the receiver. However, channel assignments can be changed in the receiver by programming done in the »Telemetry« menu. Nevertheless, it is recommended this be done on the transmitter side via the "Transmitter output" option, see page 218.
53For your notes
54 Term defi nitions Term defi nitionsControl function, control, function input, control channel, mixer, switch, control switch, fi xed switchTo make use of this mc-16 HoTT manual easier, a number of the terms used repeatedly throughout this manual have been defi ned below.Control functionA "control function" is to be perceived – initially independent of its signal path – as a signal intended to affect a given control function. For example, this could be for throttle, rudder or aileron in a winged aircraft or pitch, roll or crow for a helicopter. A control function signal can be applied directly over a single control channel or also through a mixer and then applied over multiple control channels. A typical example of multiple control channels is separately operated aileron servos or the use of two roll or crow servos in helicopters. The control function explicitly includes the infl uence of the control's mechanical travel on the respective servo. This can not only be spread or compressed by software but even the travel characteristic can be modifi ed from linear to extremely exponential.Control"Controls" include all operating elements on the transmitter, which are directly activated by the pilot, that impose an effect on servos, speed controllers etc. connected to the receiver. This includes: both • joysticks for control functions 1 through 4, whereby these four functions can be freely swapped around for both model types ("winged aircraft" and "helicopters") by way of software "Mode" settings, e.g. throttle left or right. The joystick function for throttle/airbrake control is often also referred to as the C1 control (channel 1).both proportional controls located on the • transmitter's sides, which are, for example, given the designations SD1 (right-side "rotary slider") and SD2 (left-side "rotary slider") in the »Control adjust« menu, page 108 and 112.the three • proportional sliders in the middle console designated SR1 … 3, for example as shown in the »Control adjust« menu, page 108 and 112,all fi ve • proportional rotary controls on the transmitter's front side, which are, for example, given the designations DR1 … 5 in the »Control adjust« menu, page 108 and 112,the switches present, if they are assigned to a • control channel in the »Control adjust« menu.The proportional operating elements produce a direct effect on servos which is commensurate with the control's position whereas switch modules can only effect a two or three increment change.Just which of these controls and switches operate which of the servos 5 … 16 (max.) is freely programmable.Important notice:Inputs 5 … 15 for helicopters and 5 … 16 for winged aircraft are generally "free", i.e. not assigned, in the transmitter's basic programming.Function inputThis is an imaginary point in the signal path and must not be considered the same as the point on the circuit board where the transmitter control is connected. The choice of "Stick mode" and settings in the »Control adjust« menu have their effect "downstream" of these imaginary connection points. Thus differences between the physical control's number and the number of the downstream control channel can indeed emerge.Control channelFrom the point at which a signal contains all control information necessary for a particular servo – whether directly from the physical control or indirectly by way of a mixer – the term "control channel" is used. This signal is only yet to be infl uenced by settings made in the menus »Servo adjustment« and »Transmitter output« before it leaves the transmitter's RF module. Once it arrives at the receiver, this signal may still be modifi ed by settings made in the telemetry menu before fi nally being applied as a control quantity for the respective servo.MixerThe transmitter's software contains a variety of mixer functions. These can be used to apply one control function to multiple servos or, conversely, to apply multiple control functions to a single servo. Please look over the numerous mixer functions in the text beginning on page 159 of this manual.SwitchesThe four standard toggle switches, the two 3-way switches and both push-button switches can also be incorporated into control programming. However, these switches are generally intended for switching program options, e.g. to start and stop timers, to switch mixers on and off, or as a teacher/pupil switchover, etc. Each of these switches can be assigned any number of functions.Appropriate examples are detailed in the manual.Control switchesSince it is very practical to have some functions automatically switched on or off for a certain control's position (e.g. switch on/off of a stopwatch for acquisition of model run time, automatic extension of spoilers and other possibilities), eight control switches have been integrated into mc-16 HoTT software.These software switches, designated "C1 … C8", are merely defi ned by virtue of their contact state along the physical control's course of travel by the touch of a key. The switching action can be correlated to the physical control's travel direction by software.Of course control switches can also be freely combined with the aforementioned physical switches to solve even more complex problems.There is a series of instructive examples which make
55Term defi nitionsthis programming child's play. Learn about this by taking advantage of the programming examples beginning on page 268.Logical switchesThese functions permit two switches, control switches and/or logical switches or any combination of these to be combined with one another to create logical "AND" and "OR" functionality. A total of 8 logical switches, "L1 … L8" can be programmed, see page 138.Fixed switches FXI and FXThis type of switch turns a function, e.g. a timer, permanently on (closed fi xed switch) or off (open fi xed switch) or they can provide a fi xed input signal for a control function, e.g. FXI = + 100 % and FX = -100 %. For example, in fl ight phase programming, these fi xed switches can be used to switch a servo or speed controller between two settings.
56 Physical control, switch and control switch assignments Physical control, switch and control switch assignmentsPrinciple procedureMaximum fl exibility is offered by the mc-16 Hott system when it comes to assigning standard equipment operating elements to certain functions.Since the assignment of controls and switches is done in the same way, even though different menus may be involved, it is appropriate at this point to explain the fundamental programming technique so that users can concentrate on the particular contents when reading the detailed menu descriptions.Physical control and switch assignmentsThe third column of the »Control adjust« menu can be used to assign transmitter inputs 5 … 16 to operate servos, both in any given joystick direction (C1 … C4) as well as to assign any present control or switch. After tapping on the center SET key of the right touch pad, the window shown below will appear in the display.Gewünschten Schalteroder Geber betätigenNow simply move the desired control or switch.Notes:The control will only be recognized beyond a certain amount of travel. Therefore these controls can be moved back and forth until the correct assignment is shown in the display. If adjustment travel is insuffi cient, activate the control in the other direction.On the other hand, if the »Control switch« menu, page 135, is used to assign a control, the message shown below will appear: Move desiredcontrol adj.Important notice:Controls to be assigned MUST be pre-assigned in the »Control adjust« menu to one of the inputs 5 through 16!Switch assignmentWherever programming permits a switch to be assigned, a switch symbol will appear in the screen's bottom display line.Use the selection keys in the left or right touch pad to select the appropriate column.How to assign a switchBriefl y touch the 1. SET key of the right touch pad. The message shown below will appear in the screen.Move desired switchto ON position(ext. switch: ENTER)Now it is only necessary to put the selected switch 2. into the desired "ON" position or, as described at the right in "Assignment of external switches", to select a switch from the list of "External switches". This concludes the assignment. The switch symbol to the right of the switch's number indicates the current state of the particular switch.Changing switch actionIf the activation of a switch is to result in the opposite action, put the switch or joystick in the desired OFF position, again activate the switch assignment and reassign the switch again so it will respond with the desired action.Clear switchA switch which has been assigned as described under point 1 can be cleared with a brief simultaneous tap on the  or  key combination in the right key pad (CLEAR).Assignment from the "external switch" listThose menus in which the message …Move desired switchto ON position(ext. switch: ENTER)… appears permit the assignment of switches belonging to the so-called "external switches".Do this by confi rming the message text with the SET key. A new window will appear with a list of the eight control switches "C1 … C8", followed by two so-called "FX" fi xed switches and the eight inverted switches "L1 … L8".M wünschten Schalterto die EIN Position(erw. Schalter: SET)Control/Logic/fix switchC2 C4 C5 C6C7 C8 FX FXi L1 L2C3C1Use the selection keys in the left or right key pad to select the desired switch then assign it with a brief tap on the center SET key of the right touch pad.Notes:Switching for some special functions may • be better implemented from a certain freely programmable control position rather than switching them manually with a normal switch.To this end, there are a total of 8 so-called "control switches", C1 … C8, available whose switching direction can be established, even inverted, in the »Control switch« menu, page 135.Two switches and/or also control switches can be • combined with one another to form the logical "AND" or "OR" functions via the »Logical switch« menu, see page 138. A total of 8 logical switches "L1 … L8" (as well as another 8 inverted logical switches with inverted switching direction) are available.The result of a logical switch function can also be used as an input for another logical switch function. Refer to the appropriate menu for more details about this.
57Physical control, switch and control switch assignmentsThe two FX switches switch a function on "FXI" or • off "FX " permanently.All other switches mentioned can have multiple • assignments. Pay attention that you do not UNINTENTIONALLY assign reciprocally confl icting functions to a single switch. If necessary, note down the given switch functions.Typical applications:Shut-off of an on-board glow plug heater upon • underrun or overrun of an idle threshold point programmed for the C1 joystick. In this case the glow plug heater switch is controlled by a transmitter mixer.Automatic switch on/off of the timer to measure • pure "fl ight time" for a helicopter by way of a control switch on the throttle limiter.Automatic switch off of the "AI •  Rud" when brake fl aps are extended, for example to adapt the roll of a model to the ground when making a landing on a slope without inducing a change of fl ight direction due to infl uence on the rudder.Extending landing fl aps with elevator trim adjustment • during a landing as soon as the throttle stick is moved beyond its switch point. Switch on/off of the timer for measuring the • operating time of electric motors.
58 Digital trimming Digital trimmingFunctional description and description of C1 cut-offDigital trim with visible and audible indicatorsBoth joysticks are equipped for digital trimming. By default, turning trim wheels will offset the joystick's neutral position by 4 increments (out of a possible 100 steps per side). This offset is also reported acoustically. A brief press on the trim wheel will reset an existing trim offset back to "0". Any other "zero points" can be specifi ed with the help of the »Trim memory« menu. If fl ight phases have been created and each assigned with a fi tting name in the »Phase settings« and »Phase assignment« menus, then these names will appear at the bottom left in the »Trim memory« menu and their trim values will be stored on a fl ight-phase specifi c basis.The default 4-steps per click increment range placed in every new model memory upon initialization can be changed at any time in the »Stick mode« menu, page 104 or 106, separately for each joystick plane, in a range of 1 … 10 for fi xed-wing models and in a range of 0 … 10 for helicopter models. (A trim function can be deactivated by selecting "0" steps, which can be advantageous in helicopters with certain gyro systems.)Current trim values are automatically stored when a model memory change is made. Furthermore, – except for the trim of the throttle/airbrake joystick, the so-called "C1"(channel 1) control function – digital trim can be set to operate globally or on a fl ight-phase specifi c basis within a memory location. This choice is made, separate for each joystick plane, in the second column of the »Stick mode« menu, page 104 or 106.Notes:Finding the mid-point position during a fl ight is • easy and can be done without even looking at the display. A brief press on the trim wheel will reset trim to "0" or, in the »Trim memory« menu, will reset a stored fl ight-phase specifi c trim value. The "cut-off trim" function, known from other • Graupner remote control systems in the mc and mx series, and typically described in this section can be realized with the help of the "Thr. CutOff" option in the »Basic settings, model« menu, see page 81 and 90.
59For your notes
60 Winged models Winged models Convenient support is provided for up to four aileron servos and four fl ap servos on normal models or, for V tail and fl ying wing/delta models, up to two aileron/elevator servos plus four fl ap servos. The majority of motorized and glider models belong to the tail unit type "normal" and are equipped with one servo each for elevator, rudder and ailerons in addition to a motor throttle or electronic speed controller (or for brake fl aps in the case of a glider model). Beyond this, tail unit type "2 HR Sv 3+8" permits the connection of two elevator servos to receiver outputs 3 and 8."V-tail" is to be selected from the »Model type« menu if the model has a V-tail instead of a "normal" tail. This V-tail option provides coupled control functions for elevator and rudder such that both tail fl aps – each controlled by a separate servo – are able to handle both elevator and rudder functionality.For delta and fl ying wing aircraft models, aileron and elevator functionality is affected by way of a common rudder fl ap on the trailing edge of each side (right and left) of the wing. The program contains appropriate mixer functions for both servos.If ailerons, and conditionally the fl aps, are each actuated with two separate servos then settings can be made for differentiated control of all aileron and fl ap pairs in the »Wing mixers« menu, i.e. settings for downward rudder throw independent of upward throw. And fi nally, the positioning of fl aps can also be controlled by one or even more of the three proportional sliders or the seven proportional rotary controls. Alternatively, there is a phase-dependent trim function available for fl aps, ailerons and elevators in the »Phase trim« menu.Up to 8 fl ight phases can be programmed into each of the 80 model memory locations. Except for C1 trim, digital trim will be stored on a fl ight-phase basis. C1 trim permits easy location of a carburetor idle setting.Two timers are always available for fl ight operation. The transmitter operating time expired since the last battery charge is also displayed.All transmitter controls and switches can be assigned in the »Control adjust« menu to inputs 5 … 16 with almost no restrictions.The "Dual Rate" and "Exponential" functions for ailerons, rudder and elevators are separately programmable and each are convertible between the two variations on a specifi c fl ight-phase basis.In addition to 8 freely allocatable linear mixers, 4 curve mixers (»Free mixers« menu) and 4 dual mixers (»Dual mixer« menu) there are also fl ight-phase dependent 8-point curves available to control channel 1 (throttle/brake), see »Channel 1 curve« menu).Depending on the number of wing servos, fi xed-defi nition mix and coupling functions can be selected from a list in the »Wing mixers« menu.Multi-fl ap menu: control of fl aps as ailerons, • the infl uence aileron trim on fl aps controlled as ailerons, fl ap differentiation, fl ap function throw magnitude for all aileron and fl ap pairs, ailerons controlled as fl aps, elevator mixer  fl apsBrake settings: butterfl y, differential reduction, • elevator curvesaileron •  rudder mixerfl aps •  elevator mixerElevatorFlapFlapElevatorFlapAileronAileronFlapAileronRudderElevatorAileronleftrightElevatorFlapFlapElevatorAileronRudderAileronFlapAirbrake FlapAirbrake ElevatorAirbrake-Function 1leftrightRudder/ElevatorV-TailAIFLFLAIBrake FL, FL2Brake ElevatorBrake AI, AI2AIFLFL2AIFLFL2AI2FL  AIFL  AIEL  FLRU  AIEL  AIEL  FLAI2AI  FLAI  FL
61Winged models / Receiver layoutInstallation notices Servos MUST be connected to the receiver in the sequence illustrated here. Outputs which are not used are simply left empty. Also be sure to follow the notices on the next pages. Winged aircraft with and without motor having up to 2 aileron servos and up to 4 fl ap servos …… and tail plane type " normal" or "2 elevator servos"Receiver power supplyfree or AIL2 left or aux. functionfree or AIL2 right or aux. functionRudderAileron or left aileronElevator or 1st elevatorfree or 2nd Elevator or aux. functionReceiver power supplyAirbrake or throttle servoor speed controller (electric motor)Right aileron or aux. functionFlap or left flapRight flap or free or aux. functionfree or left flap2 or aux. functionfree or flap2 right or aux. function13 14 T 15 16 S77 8910 11 12Receiver power supplyfree or aux. functionfree or aux. functionTelemetry connectionReceiver power supplyfree or aux. functionfree or aux. functionSUMO / SUMI-connectionReceiver power supplyReceiver power supply… and tail plane type " V tail unit"Receiver power supplyfree or left AIL2 or aux. functionfree or right AIL2 or aux. functionAileron or left aileronfree or 2nd elevator or aux. functionReceiver power supplyAirbrake- or throttle servoor speed controller (electric motor)Right aileron or aux. functionFlap or left flapRight flap or free or aux. functionfree or left flap2 or aux. functionfree or right flap2 or aux. function13 14 T 15 16 S77 8910 11 12Receiver power supplyfree or aux. functionfree or aux. functionTelemetry connectionReceiver power supplyfree or aux. functionfree or aux. functionSUMO / SUMI-connectionReceiver power supplyReceiver power supplyLeft elevator/rudderRight elevator/rudder Delta/fl ying wing aircraft models with and without motor having up to two aileron/elevator servos and up to 2 fl ap/elevator servosReceiver power supplyReceiver power supplyAirbrake- or throttle servoor speed controller (electric motor)13 14 T 15 16 S77 8910 11 12Receiver power supplyTelemetry connectionReceiver power supplyfree or aux. functionfree or aux. functionSUMO / SUMI-connectionReceiver power supplyReceiver power supplyfree or aux. function or AIL2 / left EL free or aux. function or AIL2 / right EL free or aux. functionfree or flap / left elevatorfree or flap / right elevatorfree or aux. function or flap2 / left ELfree or aux. function or flap2 / right ELfree or aux. functionfree or aux. functionAIL / elevator leftAIL / elevator rightfree or aux. functionfree or rudder
62 Winged models - Servo direction wrongBecause of orientation differences for installed servos and their rudder linkages, the actuating direction of some servos may be initially backward. The table below provides remedies.Model type ServodirectionwrongRemedyV tail Rudder and elevator reversed Reverse polarity of servos 3 & 4 in the »Servo adjustment« menuRudder correct, elevators reversed Swap servos 3 & 4 on the receiverElevators correct,rudder reversed Reverse polarity of servos 3 & 4 in the »Servo adjustment« menu AND swap them on the receiverDelta,fl ying wingElevator and aileron reversed Reverse the polarity of servos 2 & 3 in the »Servo adjustment« menuElevator correct, aileron reversed Reverse polarity of servos 2 & 3 in the »Servo adjustment« menu AND swap them on the receiverAileron correct, elevators reversed Swap servos 2 & 3 on the receiverAll "program descriptions" for menus relevant to a winged aircraft model are marked with a winged aircraft symbol …… so only these menus need to be dealt with to program a winged aircraft model.
63For your notes
64 Helicopter modelssledom retpocileH The advanced developments incorporated into the transmitter as well as those now in helicopter models and their components like gyros, speed regulators, rotor blades, etc. make it possible to master a helicopter even in 3D acrobatic fl ight. On the other hand, a beginner needs only a few settings to get started with hovered fl ight training then, step-by-step, take advantage of mc-16 HoTT features with increasing expertise.The mc-16 HoTT program can operate all conventional helicopters having 1 … 4 servos for pitch control.Seven fl ight phases plus autorotation are available within a model memory, see menus »Control adjust«, »Phase settings« and »Phase assignment«.As with winged aircraft, here too, in addition to the basic screen's standard timers there are additional timers as well as a lap counter with fl ight-phase-dependent stopwatch functionality which are available for selection (menus »Timers (general)« and »Fl. phase timers«).Except for pitch/throttle trimming, digital trimming can be stored as "global" for all fl ight phases or as "fl ight phase specifi c". C1 trim permits easy location of an idle setting.The control assignments for inputs 5 … 16 is made separately for each fl ight phase (»Control adjust« menu).A fl ight phase copy function is helpful during fl ight trials (»Copy / Erase« menu)."Dual Rate" and "Exponential" functions can be coupled for roll, nick and tail rotor and programmable in two variations in every fl ight phase.There are 8 freely assignable linear mixers. There are also 4 curve mixers that can be programed and these can also be switched on or off, depending on the fl ight phase, in the »MIX active/phase« menu. Beyond this, there are also 4 dual mixers available.The »Helicopter mixer« menu provides fl ight-phase-dependent 8-point curves for the non-linear characteristics pitch, throttle and tail rotor mixer as well as two independent swashplate mixers each for roll and nick. Independent of this, the control curve of the channel 1 joystick can be defi ned with up to a total of 8 points in every fl ight phase. The beginner will initially only adapt the hover fl ight point to the control middle for the non-linear characteristics. Pre-programmed mixers in the »Helicopter mixer« menu:Pitch curve (8-point curve)1. .2 1C  throttle (8-point curve)Channel 1 3.  tail rotor (8-point curve)Tail rotor 4.  throttle .5 lloR  throttle .6 lloR  tail rotorPitch-axis 7.  throttlePitch-axis 8.  tail rotorGyro suppression9. Swashplate rotation10. Swashplate limiter11. The "Throttle limit" function (input Tl16 in the »Control adjust« menu) allows the motor to be started in any fl ight phase. The right-side proportional rotary slider is assigned to input "Tl16" by default. This "throttle limiter" establishes – depending on its given position – the maximum possible throttle servo position. This makes it possible for the motor to be controlled in the idle range, if necessary even by the proportional regulator. The throttle curves become effective only when the proportional regulator is pushed toward the full throttle direction.Collective Pitch CurveSwashplate RotationRoll ThrottlePitch-Axis ThrottleChannel 1 ThrottleRoll Tail RotorPitch-Axis Tail RotorChannel 1 Tail RotorChannel1TailRotorTailRotorThrottle
65Helicopters / Receiver layoutNotice for those transitioning from older Graupner systems:In comparison to previous receiver layouts, servo connector 1 (pitch servo) and servo connector 6 (throttle servo) have exchanged places. Servos must be connected to receiver outputs as illustrated at the right in the bottom fi gure. Outputs which are not used are simply left empty. More details about respective swashplate types can be found on page 98 in the »Helicopter type« menu.Installation noticesServos MUST be connected to the receiver in the sequence illustrated here. Outputs which are not used are simply left empty. Also be sure to follow the notices on the next pages.Note:A speed control is also to be connected to receiver output "6" in order to take full advantage of the throttle limiter's convenience and safety features, see text beginning on page 117. See page 181 about this. Receiver allocation for helicopter models with 1 to 3 swashplate servosReceiver power supplyReceiver power supply13 14 T 15 16 S77 8910 11 12Receiver power supplyTelemetry connectionReceiver power supplyfree or aux. functionfree or aux. functionSUMO / SUMI-connectionReceiver power supplyReceiver power supplyfree or aux. functionfree or aux. functionfree or aux. functionfree or aux. functionfree or aux. functionfree or aux. functionTail rotor servo (gyro system)Roll-1 servoPitch-axis 1 servofrei or speed governor or aux. functionCollective pitch or roll 2 or pitch-axis 2 servofree or aux. functionThrottle servo or speed controllerGyro gain Receiver allocation for helicopter models with 4 swashplate servosReceiver power supplyReceiver power supply13 14 T 15 16 S77 8910 11 12Receiver power supplyTelemetry connectionReceiver power supplyfree or aux. functionfree or aux. functionSUMO / SUMI-connectionReceiver power supplyReceiver power supplyfree or aux. functionfree or aux. functionfree or aux. functionfree or aux. functionfree or aux. functionfree or aux. functionfree or speed governor or aux. functionThrottle servo or speed controllerGyro gainTail rotor servo (gyro system)Roll 1 servoPitch-axis 1 servoRoll 2 servoPitch-axis 2 servoAll menus relevant to helicopter models are marked in the "program descriptions" section with a helicopter symbol …… so only these menus need to be dealt with to program a helicopter model.
66 Detail program description - Loading a new memory locationAnyone who has worked through to this part of the manual has certainly already tried out a bit of programming. Nevertheless a detailed description of every menu should not be left out. This section begins with the loading of a "free" memory location, a procedure which would be performed if a new model was being "programmed".#01 0:00hStop watchFlight timK780:00.04.1V0:00.0RX VOLT:0.0v000000:00hMVFrom the basic display, a jump to the "Multi-function list" is made with a tap on the center SET key of the right touch pad. (The center ESC key of the left touch pad will cause a jump back to the basic display.) By default, when the multi-function list is called for the fi rst time after switching on the transmitter, the »Model select« menu option will be active and displayed in inverse video. Otherwise use the  or  selection keys of the left or right touch pad to select the »Model select« menu option , whereby the upper of the two following fi gures shows a selection list for a fi xed-wing model and the lower shows the selection list for a helicopter model.Servo adjustment Stick modeControl adjust Dual Rate / ExpoChannel 1 curve Switch displayModel select Copy / EraseSuppress codes Suppress models Base setup model Model type Detail program description Loading a new memory locationServo adjustment Stick modeControl adjust Dual Rate / ExpoChannel 1 curve Switch displayModel select Copy / EraseSuppress codes Suppress models Base setup model Helicopter typeTap briefl y on the center SET key of the right touch pad to open this menu option:030405 free020106E16 free free free free00:12hIn the transmitter's delivered state, the fi rst model memory is initialized to the "fi xed-wing model" type and the receiver in the delivery is "bound" to this model. The time display located near the line's middle indicates the overall operating time of the respective model memory. The remaining memory locations, marked with "free", are still unoccupied and therefore also "non-bound". If you wish to program a fi xed-wing model then, after leaving the »Model select« menu with a tap on the center ESC key of the left touch pad, programming of the model can begin right away … or now use the  or  keys of the left or right touch pad to select one of the free memory locations …0304050106R16 free free free free00:12h free02… and then tap on the center SET key of the right touch pad to confi rm the choice.Afterward you will be prompted to select the basic model type, i.e. either "winged model" or "helicopter model".Select model type ( free model memory )Use the  or  keys of the left or right touch pad to select the basic model type then tap on the center SET key of the right touch pad. This initializes the selected model memory with the selected model type and the display will return to the base screen. The memory location is now accordingly occupied. However, if you wish to begin with a helicopter, select one of the memory locations marked "free" with the  or  keys of the left or right touch pad then confi rm the selection with a brief tap on the center SET key of the right touch pad. You will be now be prompted to specify the basic model type, in this case the "helicopter model". Select the appropriate symbol with the  or  keys of the left or right touch pad then again tap briefl y on the center SET key of the right touch pad to confi rm the choice. This initializes the selected model memory with the
67Detail program description - Loading a new memory locationFurther details about binding a receiver can be found on page 77 or 85.At the right and above the aforementioned "BIND. • N/A" warning message, the warning …Fail Safe setup t.b.d.… will appear (also for just a few seconds) to indicate that no no failsafe settings have yet been made. More about this can be found on page 208. If the screen should display the warning …• Throttle too high!… then move the throttle joystick, or the limiter for a helicopter, (by default this is rotary slider SD1) into its idle position.Whether or not this warning appears also depends on the settings selected for the "Motor on C1" and "Pitch min." options in the »Model type« menu, see page 94, or »Helicopter type« menu, see page 98. For winged aircraft models, select "None" to deactivate this message if you have no motor to enter.If the transmitter already has occupied model • memories then sub-menus of the »Copy / Erase« menu will display a pictograph of the selected model type at the respective memory location followed by a blank line or the model name which was entered in the »Basic settings, model« menu, page 76 or 84. To the right of this will be as display of the model operating time and, if present, "Info" about the model.If battery voltage is too low, the model switchover • cannot be made due to reasons of safety. An selected model type and you can now program your model into this model memory.Changing over to another model type is still possible if you fi rst erase this memory location (»Copy / Erase« menu, page 70).Notes:If, from the base screen, the currently active model • memory is to be erased then immediately after the erase action one of the two model types, "Winged" or "Heli" must be defi ned. You cannot avoid this selection even if you switch the transmitter off. When the transmitter is switched on again the undesired occupation of the that model memory will have to be erased from another memory location.If a non-active memory location is erased, it will subsequently be marked as "free" in the "Model select" menu.After the selected model memory is initialized with • the desired model type, the display will switch to the base screen of the freshly occupied model memory. At this time the warning …BIND. N/AOK… will appear for several seconds as notifi cation that a binding connection to a receiver is "not available". A brief tap on the center SET key of the right touch pad will cause a direct jump to the appropriate option.Model nameStick mode 1n/aBASIC SETTINGS, MODELInfon/an/aModule bindHoTT SEL BD1 BD2 BD3 BD4appropriate message will appear in the screen:not possible nowvoltage too lowAs a basic principle, there are four different ways to assign the four control functions, aileron, elevator, rudder and throttle or brake fl aps for winged models as well as rolling, pitching, tail rotor and throttle/pitch for helicopter models, to the two joysticks. Just which of these methods is used depends on the preferences of the individual model pilot. This function is set for the currently active model memory in the "Stick mode" line of the »Basic settings, model« menu, page 76 or 84.Model nameStick mode 1n/aBASIC SETTINGS MODELInfon/an/aModule bindHoTT SELIf this setting is desired as a default for future models, the setting can also be entered into the »General basic settings« menu, page 258:Owners namePre-set stick modePre-set DSC Output1GENERAL BASIC SETTINGSPPM10SELPre-set modulation HoTTIt should be noted here once again that, in the interest of greatest fl exibility in combination with the prevention of unintentional operating errors, no controls are preassigned to control channels 5 … 16 by default.This means that, in the system's delivered state,
68 Detail program description - Loading a new memory locationonly servos attached to receiver outputs 1 … 4 can typically be operated by the two joysticks and that any servos attached to receiver connectors 5 … 16 (max) will remain in their middle positions. A newly initialized helicopter model is also able to more-or-less move servo 6 – depending on the position of the right-side proportional rotary slider, which is the default throttle limiter control. With either model type, this situation will only change after appropriate assignments have been made in the »Control adjust« menu.On the other hand, if a newly initialized model memory is to be put into operation then it MUST fi rst be appropriately "connected" with one or more receivers before the servos attached to the receiver/s can be operated. More about this can be found in the section "Binding" on page 77 or 85. A fundamental description of programming steps for a winged aircraft model can be found in the programming examples section beginning on 268, or for helicopter models beginning on page 308.The menu descriptions below are arranged in the sequence individual menus are listed in the multi-function list.
69Detail program description - Model select Model selectCall up model 1 … 80The basic operation of the transmitters keys was explained on pages 28 and 29 and, on the previous double-page, explanations were provided for navigating to the multifunction list and about how to make allocations for a new model memory. At this point we now wish to begin with the "normal" description of individual menu items in the sequence they are arranged in the transmitter. Therefore we will begin with the menu …Model selectServo adjustment Stick modeControl adjust Dual Rate / ExpoChannel 1 curve Switch displayModel select Copy / EraseSuppress codes Suppress models Base setup model Model typeModel selectServo adjustment Stick modeControl adjust Dual Rate / ExpoChannel 1 curve Switch displayCopy / EraseSuppress codes Suppress models Base setup model Model typeAs many as 80 complete model settings, including digital trim values for the trim wheel, can be stored. Trimming is stored automatically such that a switchover from one model to another does not cause a loss of current trim settings. To the right of the model number, each occupied model memory line in this display shows a pictograph of the model type as well as the model's name entered for the model in its »Basic settings, model« menu, page 76 or 84. The code, if present, for the receiver "bound" to the model memory location will appear after the model number.Select the »Model select« menu with the selection keys of the left or right touch pad then briefl y tap on the SET key of the right touch pad.Attention!Switch-OFFthe Receiver first!If this message appears, there is a telemetry connection to an operationally ready receiver system. Switch that receiver system off.0304Ultimate02 00:44hR12StarletBELL47G00:33hR0800:22hR08Testtrim needed free free050601 01:23hR16Graubele 1234g/080811Now, with the  selection keys of the left or right touch pad, select the desired model memory from the list and activate it with a tap on the SET key. A tap on the ESC key will cause a return to the previous menu page without activating a model change.Notes:If, after a model change, the "Throttle too high" • warning appears, the throttle/pitch joystick (C1) or the throttle limiter – by default, the right-side proportional rotary slider – is too far in the full throttle direction.If a model change causes the message …• BIND. N/AOK… to appear then binding settings should be checked.If a model change causes the message …• Fail Safe setup t.b.d.… to appear then respective failsafe settings should be checked.If battery voltage is too low, the model switchover • cannot be made due to reasons of safety. An appropriate message will appear in the screen:not possible nowvoltage too low
70 Detail program description - Copy / Erase Copy model  modelSelect the »Copy model  model« sub-menu with the  selection keys of the left or right touch pad then tap the SET key.Copy flight en kopierenErase modelCopy modelodell –> ModellExport to SD-KarteImport fromn von SD-Karte=>OFFONPlease selectRF on/off?If the message shown above should appear, the transmitter's RF module is still active. Switch the RF module off as described on page 80 then also, if a receiver system is currently switched on, switch off that receiver too. This is to be done for reasons of safety. Choose the model to be copied with the  selection keys of the left or right touch pad …03040501 free01:23hR16Ultimate02Graubele 1234g/08081100:44hR12StarletBELL47G00:33hR0800:22hR08Testtrim neededCopy from model:… then, following the change into the "Copy to model" window caused by another tap on the SET key of the right touch pad, the destination memory can be selected with the  selection keys of the left or right touch pad. Yet another tap on the SET key will then confi rm the copy process or a tap on ESC key will cause the copy to be canceled. A memory location which is already occupied can be overwritten.030401 01:23hR16Ultimate02Graubele 1234g/08081100:44hR12StarletBELL47G00:33hR0800:22hR08Testtrim neededSelect model to be erased :… whereby another tap on the SET key will cause the confi rmation request …Model reallyUltimateto be erased? NO YES02… to appear. A NO response will cause the process to be canceled and a return to the previous screen. Selecting the YES response with the  selection key of the left or right touch pad followed by confi rmation of the selection with a brief tap on the SET key will erase the selected model memory.Caution:This erase process cannot be undone. All data in the selected model memory will be erased completely.Note:If the currently active model memory is to be erased, a model type "Winged" or "Heli" must be defi ned immediately after the erase process. If, however, an inactive memory location is erased, it will subsequently appear in "Model select" list as "free". Copy / EraseErase or copy model  model, copy from or to SD card, copy fl ight phases, store/cancel changes Use the  selection keys of the left or right touch pad to select the »Copy / Erase« menu …Servo adjustment Stick modeControl adjust Dual Rate / ExpoChannel 1 curve Switch displayModel select Copy / EraseSuppress codes Suppress models Base setup model Model typeServo adjustment Stick modeControl adjust Dual Rate / ExpoChannel 1 curve Switch displayModel select Copy / EraseSuppress codes Suppress models Base setup model Helicopter type… then briefl y tap the center SET key of the right touch pad. Erase modelCopy flight phaseErase modelCopy model –> modelExport to SDImport from SD =>Select the "Erase model" sub-menu with the  selection keys of the left or right touch pad then briefl y tap on the SET key.Choose the model to be erased with the  selection keys of the left or right touch pad …
71Detail program description - Copy / Erase030401 01:23hR16Ultimate02Graubele 1234g/08081100:44hR12StarletBELL47G00:33hR0800:22hR08Testtrim neededCopy to model: free 05After confi rming the selected model memory with a tap on the SET key, a confi rmation request will appear:Model reallyUltimateto be copied?NO YES02 05  freeA NO response will cancel the process and return the screen to the originating screen. If the  YES response is selected and confi rmed with a tap on the SET key then the selected source model will be copied into the selected model memory destination. Note:In addition to model data, binding data is also copied by this process. This means that a receiver system which was/is bound to the original model memory can also be operated by its copy without establishing the bond again. Exporting to SD cardUse the  selection keys of the left or right touch pad to select the »Export to SD« sub-menu then tap on the SET key.Copy flight sen kopierenErase modelCopy modeModell –> ModellExport to SDach SD-KarteImport from von SD-Karte=>OFFONPlease selectRF on/off?If the message shown above should appear, the transmitter's RF module is still active. Switch the RF module off as described on page 80 then also, if a receiver system is currently switched on, switch off that receiver too. This is to be done for reasons of safety. Choose the model to be exported with the  selection keys of the left or right touch pad …03040501 free01:23hR16Ultimate02Graubele 1234g/08081100:44hR12StarletBELL47G00:33hR0800:22hR08Testtrim neededexport to SD-Card:After confi rming the selected model memory with a tap on the SET key, a confi rmation request will appear:Model reallyUltimateexport?NO YES02A NO response will cancel the process and return the screen to the originating screen. If the  YES response is selected then confi rmed with a tap on the SET key, the selected model will be copied to the SD card.Notes:Should the notice …• SD-CARDINSERTOK… appears instead of a screen for model selection, there is no SD card in the transmitter's card slot, see page 23.In addition to model data, binding data is also • copied by this process. This means that a receiver system which was/is bound to the original model memory can also be operated in the SAME transmitter by its copy without establishing the bond again.An exported fi xed-wing model will be stored on • the memory card in the \\Models\mc-16 folder with a fi lename format of "aModelname.mdl" and a helicopter model with a fi lename format of "hModelname.mdl". On the other hand, if a "nameless" model is exported, its data will be stored on the memory card under "ahNoName.mdl" or "hNoName.mdl", as appropriate.Some special characters that can be used in • model names are subject to specifi c restrictions associated with the FAT or FAT32 fi le system used by the memory cards and these special characters will be replaced during the copy process with a tilde (~).A model fi le already on the memory having • the same name as the fi le to be copied will be overwritten without warning.
72 Detail program description - Copy / Erasepad then confi rmed with a tap on the SET key, or the process can be canceled with a tap on the ESC key. A memory location which is already occupied can be overwritten.030401 01:23hR16Ultimate02Graubele 1234g/08081100:44hR12StarletBELL47G00:33hR0800:22hR08Testtrim neededImport to model: free 05After confi rming the selected model memory with a tap on the SET key, a confi rmation request will appear:modelExtra 300import?NO YES05  freeA NO response will cancel the process and return the screen to the originating screen. If the  YES response is selected and confi rmed with a tap on the SET key then the selected source model will be imported into the selected destination model memory. Notes:If the message …• SD-CARDINSERTOK… appears instead of a screen for model selection, there is no SD card in the transmitter's Importing from SD cardUse the  selection keys of the left or right touch pad to select the »Import from SD« sub-menu then tap on the SET key.Copy flight sen kopierenErase modelCopy modell –> ModellExport to mnach SD-KarteImport from von SD-Karte=>OFFONPlease selectRF on/off?If the message shown above should appear, the transmitter's RF module is still active. Switch the RF module off as described on page 80 then also, if a receiver system is currently switched on, switch off that receiver too. This is to be done for reasons of safety. Select the model to be imported from the SD memory card with the  selection keys of the left or right touch pad.030401 11/06/06 06:06Extra 30002Soarmaster11/07/07 07:07T-Rex 250BellCobra11/08/08 08:0811/09/09 09:09import from SD-CARD:Note:The export date posted at the right end of each model name line is represented in the format "year/month/day".After another tap on the SET key of the right touch pad, the "import from SD-CARD" window will appear. Now the destination memory location can be selected with the  selection keys of the left or right touch card slot, see page 23.In addition to model data, binding data is also • imported by this process. This means that a receiver system which was/is bound to the original model memory can also be operated in the SAME transmitter by its copy without establishing the bond again. Copy fl ight phaseSelect the »Copy fl ight phase« sub-menu with the  selection keys of the left or right touch pad then tap on the SET key.Copy flight phaseErase modelCopy model –> modelExport to SDImport from SD =>In the "Copy fl ight phase" sub-menu …7Copy from phase:35=>=>24618… the fl ight phase to be copied (1 … 8 for fi xed-wing models or 1 … 7 for helicopter models) is selected with the selection keys of the left or right touch pad then confi rmed with a brief tap on the SET key of the right touch pad. In the next window to appear …
73Detail program description - Copy / Erase7Copy to phase:35=>=>24618… a destination must be selected and it must be confi rmed too. Another confi rmation request will follow:Phase to:to be copied?NO YES1 normal 2 ThermikA NO response will cancel the process and return the screen to the originating screen. If the  YES response is selected and confi rmed with a tap on the SET key then the selected source model will be imported into the selected destination model memory. Storing changes permanently Undoing changesThese two sub-menus permit programming changes to be backed up immediately or to be undone (restored) to the state when the model was called up or the state of the last backup.Copy flight en kopierenExport to SDImport fromvon SD-Karte=>Store changes ft speichernUndo changesgig machenOFFONPlease selectRF on/off?If the message shown above should appear, the transmitter's RF module is still active. Switch the RF module off as described on page 80 then also, if a receiver system is currently switched on, switch off that receiver too. This is to be done for reasons of safety. Data is only backed up by "Store change" or a switch from one model to another in the »Model select« menu. Switching the transmitter on or off will not store the permanently. To store changes permanently, select the appropriate line then briefl y tap on the center SET key of the right touch pad. The confi rmation request shown below will appear:Programming changes to beNO YESstore permanently?A NO response will cancel the process and return the screen to the originating screen. If the  YES response is selected and confi rmed with a tap on the SET key then the changes made since the last backup or model change will be stored permanently.If, however, the changes made since the last backup or model change are to be canceled, then select the line "Undo change". Following a brief tap on the center SET key of the right touch pad, the confi rmation request shown below will appear:Programming changes to beNO YESreset to original?A NO response will cancel the process and return the screen to the originating screen. If the  YES response is selected and confi rmed with a tap on the SET key then the changes made since the last backup or model change will be stored permanently.Note:When the transmitter is switched off, any changes made will not be lose but they are not permanently stored either. This means that a subsequent "cancel changes" would reset memory to the state of the last "permanent backup" (or model change).
74 Detail program description - Suppress menus Suppress menusSuppression of menus in the multifunction listUse the  selection keys of the left or right touch pad to select the »Suppress codes« menu …Model selectServo adjustment Stick modeControl adjust Dual Rate / ExpoChannel 1 curve Switch displayCopy / EraseSuppress codes Suppress models Base setup model Model typeModel selectServo adjustment Stick modeControl adjust Dual Rate / ExpoChannel 1 curve Switch displayCopy / EraseSuppress codes Suppress models Base setup model Helicopter type… then briefl y tap the center SET key of the right touch pad.Copy / EraseModel selectServo adjustmentStick mode Control adjustDual Rate / Expo Channel 1 curveSuppress models Base setup modelModel typeSuppress : SETCopy / EraseModel selectServo adjustmentStick mode Control adjustDual Rate / Expo Channel 1 curveSuppress models Base setup modelHelicopter typeSuppress : SETIn the menu which then appears, menu items which are no longer needed or those which should not be changed, can be blocked from appearing in th multifunction list.The option to be suppressed/displayed is selected with the selection keys of the left or right touch pad then its status is switched over with a tap on the center SET key of the right touch pad.Copy / EraseModel selectServo adjustmentStick mode Control adjustDual Rate / Expo Channel 1 curveSuppress models Base setup modelModel typeSuppress : SETCopy / EraseModel selectServo adjustmentStick mode Control adjustDual Rate / Expo Channel 1 curveSuppress models Base setup modelHelicopter typeSuppress : SETThis can reduce the multi-function list considerably, in some cases to only a few menus, thus substantially improving clarity of the multi-function list. Options are not deactivated by being suppressed. They will simply no longer appear in the list. This also blocks direct access to these functions.Tip:If you wish to forgo access-blockage to the multi-function list altogether, suppress the »Code lock« menu in the multi-function list by way of this menu as a precautionary measure. It is then not so easy for an unauthorized person to lock up the transmitter.
75Detail program description - Suppress models Suppress modelsSuppression of model memory locationsUse the  selection keys of the left or right touch pad to select the »Suppress models« menu …Model selectServo adjustment Stick modeControl adjust Dual Rate / ExpoChannel 1 curve Switch displayCopy / EraseSuppress codes Suppress models Base setup model Model typeModel selectServo adjustment Stick modeControl adjust Dual Rate / ExpoChannel 1 curve Switch displayCopy / EraseSuppress codes Suppress Models Base setup model Helicopter type… then briefl y tap the center SET key of the right touch pad.Model memories which are rarely needed or to which access is to be blocked for other reasons can be hidden from the model selection list. This also clarifi es the overview layout for model selection.The model to be suppressed/displayed is selected with the selection keys of the left or right touch pad then its status is switched over with a tap on the center SET key of the right touch pad.03040501 free 01:23hR16Ultimate02Graubele 1234g/08081100:44hR12StarletBELL47G00:33hR0800:22hR08Testtrim neededSuppress : SETA model memory which is "stricken through" will no longer appear in the »Model select« menu.0304StarletBELL47G00:33hR0800:22hR08trim neededfreefree050601 01:23hR16Graubele 1234g/080811free 07
76 Detail program description - Base setup models | Winged models Base setup modelModel-specifi c base settings for winged aircraft modelsBefore programming specifi c parameters, there are some basic settings to be made which effect the currently active model memory.Use the selection keys of the left or right touch pad to select the »Basic settings, model« menu … Model selectServo adjustment Stick modeControl adjust Dual Rate / ExpoChannel 1 curve Switch displayCopy / EraseSuppress codes Suppress models Base setup model Model type… then tap the center SET key of the right touch pad. Model name Model nameStick mode 1n/aBASIC SETTINGS,MODELInfon/an/aModule bindHoTT Change to the next screen page with a brief tap on the SET key of the right touch pad. This will open a screen of characters for entry of the model's name. A maximum of 13 characters can be used to specify a model name. !"#$%&’()Model name Graub@ACDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ[¥]^_?+,–./0123456789:;¢ÇüéâäàåçêëèïîìÄÅÉæÆôöòûùÖÜ`abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz{|}~Now the desired characters can be selected with the selection keys of the left touch pad. Move to the next position to select the next character with a tap on the  selection key of the right touch pad or its center SET key. A simultaneous tap on the  or  keys of the right touch pad (CLEAR) will place a space character at the current position.Positioning to any character position within the entry fi eld can be done with the  keys of the right touch pad.A return to the previous menu screen is accomplished with a tap on the center ESC key of the left touch pad.A model name entered in this manner will appear in the base screen of the »Model select« menu and in the sub-menus of the »Copy / Erase« menu item. Info Model nameStick mode 1n/aBASIC SETTINGS,MODELInfon/an/aModule bindHoTT GraubeleEvery model can be given a supplementary note of up to 12 characters (maximum) by following the same procedure as already described for creating a "Model name". This info note will appear as a supplement in the »Model select« menu and in the sub-menus of the »Copy / Erase« menu item. Stick mode “MODE 2” (Throttle at left stick)“MODE 3” (Throttle at right stick) “MODE 4” (Throttle at left stick)“MODE 1” (Throttle at right stick)elev. downelev. upleft rudderright rudderfull throttleidleleft aileronright aileronfull throttleleft rudderright rudderidleelev. downelev. upleft aileronright aileronelev. downelev. upleft aileronright aileronMotor Vollgasidleleft rudderright rudderfull throttleidleleft aileronright aileronelev. downelev. upleft rudderright rudderThere are four fundamental options for assigning the four control functions (aileron, elevator, rudder and throttle/brake fl ap) for a winged aircraft model to the two joysticks. Just which of these options is chosen depends on the individual preferences of the individual model pilot. Use the  selection keys of the left or right touch pad to select the "Stick mode" line. The option fi eld will be framed.Model nameStick mode 1n/aBASIC SETTING,MODELInfon/an/aModule bindHoTT SELGraubele1234g/111111Tap on the SET key. The currently displayed stick mode will be displayed in inverse video. Now use the selection keys of the right touch pad to select from among options 1 through 4.A simultaneous tap on the  or  keys of the right touch pad (CLEAR) will reset the display to stick mode "1".
77Detail program description - Base setup models | Winged modelsto the transmitter will fall into Fail-safe mode during the transmitter-side "binding" period. "Binding" multiple receivers per modelMultiple receivers per model can be bound if desired, whereby respective mc-16 HoTT programs offer the potential for managing up to four receivers directly and for dividing up the transmitter's 16 control channels (max) in any arrangement among these receivers under menu control. Refer to additional details further down in this section. First bind the receivers individually as described below. However, in subsequent operation only one of these receivers will establish a telemetry bond to the transmitter; the one which was activated in the "TELEMETRY RCV" line of the »Telemetry« menu.TELEMETRYSETTING & DATAVIEWSENSOR SELECTRF STATUS VIEWVOICE TRIGGERTELEMETRY RCV BIND. 1Any telemetry sensors which may be built into the model should therefore be connected to this receiver because the transmitter only receives and evaluates data from the return channel of the receiver activated on this line. The second, and all other receivers, operate in parallel but are fully independent in slave mode. "Binding" transmitter and receiverUse the  selection keys of the left or right touch pad to move into the "Module" line. The marker frame will be positioned by default to the column for the next free binding channel. In the example shown in the figure below, the marker frame is positioned above the column label "BD2" because the binding channel in the column labeled "BD1" is already in use by default for the receiver which was delivered with the set.Another tap on the SET key will again deactivate option selection so a change to another line can be affected. Module Model nameStick mode 1n/aBASIC SETTING,MODELInfon/an/aModule bindHoTT Graubele1234g/111111SEL BD1 BD2 BD3 BD4The mc-16 transmitter has a HoTT RF module as standard equipment. In addition to the built-in module, there is a connector for an external RF module behind one of the two front cover fl aps (see page 25) and a switchover to an external module connected there can be affected per software. To do this, use the selection keys of the left or right touch pad to move the marker frame left to the "Module" selection fi eld above the "SEL" column label.HoTTGraupner HoTT receivers must be "instructed" to communicate exclusively with a certain model (memory) in a Graupner HoTT transmitter. This procedure is known as "binding" and must only be done once for every new receiver/model-memory-location combination (and can be repeated anytime).Important notices:During the binding procedure be sure the • transmitter's antenna is always far enough away from the receiver's antenna. To be on the safe side, keep them at least one meter apart. Otherwise there is a risk of a faulty connection to the return channel and malfunctions will result.When binding additional receivers, note that any • other –switched on– receivers already bound Model nameStick mode 1n/aBASIC SETTING,MODELInfon/an/aModule bindHoTT Graubele1234g/111111SEL BD1 BD2 BD3 BD4If not already off, now switch the receiver on. The red LED on the receiver will blink.Press and hold the SET button on the receiver while the LED continues to blink red for about 3 seconds then, after about another 3 seconds, begins to blink red/green. The SET button on the receiver can now be released. As long as this LED blinks red/green, the receiver is in bind mode.Now, within this 3 second period, start the so-called "receiver binding" process for the receiver to the currently active model memory with a brief tap on the center SET key of the right touch pad. At this time, the screen's display will blend in a message window for the duration of the "binding" process.Model nameStick mode 1n/aBASIC SETTING,MODELInfon/an/aModule bindHoTT Graubele1234g/111111SEL BD1 BD2 BD3 BD4FINDING...If the receiver's LED, again blinking red, changes within about 10 seconds to continuous illumination in green, the binding process has been successfully completed. Your model-memory to receiver combination is now operationally ready. At this time the screen will now display " bind " (bound) instead of "n/a" (not attached).
78 Detail program description - Base setup models | Winged modelsModel nameStick mode 1bindBASIC SETTING,MODELInfon/an/aModule bindHoTT Graubele1234g/111111SEL BD1 BD2 BD3 BD4On the other hand, should the LED on the receiver blink red for longer than about 10 seconds, the binding process has failed. In this case the screen will continue to show the status as "n/a". If this should happen, try changing the position of antennas then repeat the entire procedure. Binding other receiversThe binding channel you have chosen is already bound (as indicated by the "bind" status). with another binding channel. After initiating the RF bind process, instead of displaying "BINDING", the message shown below appears.Model nameStick mode 1geb.BASIC SETTING,MODELInfon/an/aModule geb.HoTT Graubele1234g/111111SEL BD1 BD2 BD3 BD4 RF offOK is turned Drop down two lines in the screen and switch off the RF module as described on the page in section "RF module". Afterward, return again to the "Module" line and restart the binding process as described above.Alternatively, the transmitter can be switched off briefl y then, after switching it back on again, respond to the message window that appears …OFFONPlease selectRF on/off?… with "OFF" …ONPlease selectRF on/off?OFF… then confi rm the selection with a brief tap on the center SET key of the right touch pad. From the base screen jump again into the "Module" line of the »Basic settings, model« menu and restart the binding process. Dissolving a bondProceed as described above to initiate the binding process but WITHOUT fi rst putting a receiver in binding readiness.EXT. PPMImportant notice:With the activation of the value fi eld in the context of the following described changeover, any existing bonds to HoTT receivers which may be effective for the currently active model memory will be lost.Activate the fi rst value fi eld in the "Module" line with a tap on the center SET key of the right touch pad then use the selection keys to choose "EXT. PPM" instead of "HoTT". In parallel with the selection of "EXT. PPM", the other four value fi elds will be replaced by the type of modulation pre-selected in the line »DSC Output«, see page 81.Model nameStick mode 1BASIC SETTING,MODELInfoModuleGraubele1234g/111111SELPPM10EXT. PPMThis change also suppresses the lines for the options (described below): »HoTT«, »Rcv Ch Map«, »RF module« and »RF range test« and, in the basic display, "PPM" will be displayed instead of "HoTT".#01 0:00hStop watchFlight timK780:00.04.1V0:00.0RX VOLT:0.0v000000:00hMVPPMGraubeleH-J Sandbrunner Receiver channel mapping As long as there is at least one "bound" receiver in the "Module" line, the next line down will be the "Rcv Ch map" line.Model nameStick mode 1BASIC SETTING,MODELInfoGraubele1234g/111111SET SET SET SETRcv Ch map R16 R08 n/an/aAs mentioned in the introduction to the "Binding receivers" section, this menu item of the mc-16 HoTT offers both the opportunity to freely divide up the transmitter's control channels within a receiver as well as the opportunity to distribute the transmitter's 16
79Detail program description - Base setup models | Winged modelscontrol channels across as many as four receivers. This redistribution is subsequently referred to as "mapping" or "channel mapping" (channel correlation). Select the receiver to be "mapped" with the selection keys of the left or right touch pad then tap briefl y on the center SET key of the right touch pad.Channel mapping within a receiverAnalogous to the channel correlation function in the »Telemetry« menu on page 232, described as "Channel Mapping", it is very simple to use this menu item to freely assign the transmitter's control channels present on the receiver's inputs to any specifi c receiver outputs (servo connections) for the bound receiver designated by the column labeled BD1.RECEIVER CHANNEL MAP BIND1Rx Input Ch 1Rx Input Ch 2Rx Input Ch 3Rx Input Ch 4Rx Output Ch 1Rx Output Ch 2Rx Output Ch 3Rx Output Ch 4After selection of the desired output with the selection keys of the left or right touch pad, the appropriate value fi eld will be framed. Briefl y tap on the center SET key of the right touch pad. The current setting will be displayed in inverse video. Now use the selection keys of the right touch pad to select the desired input channel's respective transmitter output, see page 218.Note:The number of lines available in the list (outputs) corresponds to the maximum number of servos which can be attached to the given receiver.BUT CAUTION: If, for example, "2AIL" has been specifi ed in the "Aileron/camber fl aps" line of the »Model type« menu then the transmitter will have allocated control function 2 (ailerons) to control channels 2 & 5 for the left and right ailerons. The corresponding receiver inputs to be assigned in this case would be channels 2 & 5, refer to the example below.Examples:You would like to control each aileron of a large • model with two or more servos. Assign each of the appropriate outputs (servo connections) to one and the same input (control channel). In this case, depending on left or right wing, as the respective input to one of the two default aileron control channels (2 or 5).You would like to control the rudder of a large • model with two or more servos. Assign each of the appropriate outputs (servo connections) to one and the same input (control channel). In this case, the default rudder channel (4), see fi gure bottom right.Important notice:The mc-16 HoTT transmitter's »Tx. output swap« option permits the transmitter's 16 control functions to be freely swapped in a similar manner or even permits multiple outputs to be assigned to the same control function. To keep controls manageable, however, we strongly recommend using only one of the options at a time. Channel assignment on other receiversAs already mentioned, the "Rcv Ch map" menu option can be used to freely distribute the mc-16 HoTT transmitter's 16 control channels across up to four receivers, whereby the numbering of outputs (servo connections) as well as the maximum number of available lines (outputs) will correspond to the maximum number of servo connections available on the given receiver.RECEIVER CHANNEL MAP BIND2Rx Input Ch 16Rx Input Ch 16Rx Input Ch 16Rx Input Ch 16Rx Output Ch 1Rx Output Ch 2Rx Output Ch 3Rx Output Ch 4After selection of the desired output with the selection keys of the left or right touch pad, the respective input fi eld will be framed. Tap the center SET key of the right touch pad. The current setting will be displayed in inverse video. Now select the desired input channel with the selection keys of the right touch pad. For example, suitable to the above rudder example.RECEIVER CHANNEL MAP BIND2Rx Input Ch 4Rx Input Ch 4Rx Input Ch 4 Rx Input Ch 4Rx Output Ch 1Rx Output Ch 2Rx Output Ch 3Rx Output Ch 4Note:The number of lines available in the list (outputs) corresponds to the maximum number of servos which can be attached to the given receiver. RF transmit This menu line provides an option for manually switching the transmitter's RF transmission on and off to specifi c models while the transmitter is in operation. For example, to save power while a model is being programmed. If this line option was set to OFF, it will be canceled (i.e. set to ON) the next time the transmitter is switched on.If necessary, use the  selection keys of the left or right touch pad to move into the " RF transmit " line
80 Detail program description - Base setup models | Winged modelsthen activate the option with a brief tap on the center SET button of the right touch pad.Stick modeModule1bindbind n/an/aHoTT SET SET SEL SETRcv Ch Map R16 R08 n/an/aRF transmit onBASIC SETTING,MODELThe right selection keys can now be used to choose between OFF and ON. Another tap on the center SET key of the right touch pad will conclude the entry. Range test The built-in range test reduces transmission power to an extent that a functional test can be carried out even within a distance of less than 100 m.Perform a range test on the Graupner HoTT system according to the following instructions. If necessary, have someone assist you in carrying out the range test.Preferably, the receiver already bound to the 1. transmitter should be installed into the model in its intended position.Switch remote control on and wait for the green 2. LED to light up on the receiver/s. Now servo movements can be observed.Place the model on a level surface (pavement, 3. low-cut grass or bare ground) such that receiver antennas are at least 15 cm above ground level. It may be necessary to put something under the model to raise it up enough for this.Hold the transmitter at hip level and at some 4. distance from one's body. Do not point the antenna directly at the model but rather turn and/or kink the antenna's end so that it is oriented vertically during the test.If necessary, use the 5.  selection keys of the left or right touch pad to reach the "RF range test" line in the menu then start range test mode with a tap on the center SET key of the right touch pad.Module bindbind n/an/aHoTT SET SET SEL SETRcv Ch Map R16 R08 n/an/aRF transmit onRF range test 99sBASIC SETTING,MODELLWhen the range test has been initiated, the transmitter's transmission power will be signifi cantly reduced and the LED just to the right of the main switch on the transmitter, marked RF, will begin to blink; this will also be accompanied by acoustic tones. At the same time, the timer in the transmitter's display will start counting down and every 5 seconds a two-frequency tone will sound. Five seconds prior to the end of the range test a three-frequency tone will sound once every second. After expiration of the range test's 99th second the transmitter will again be switched to full output power and the LED just to the right of the main switch on the transmitter will again illuminate constantly.Move away from the model while manipulating 6. the joysticks during this timespan. If you notice an interruption anytime while still within a distance of about 50 m, try to reproduce this malfunction.If there is a motor in the model, it may be necessary 7. to switch it on to further check noise immunity.Continue moving away from the model until 8. perfect control is no longer possible. Wait at this distance for the remainder of the test 9. period with the still-operationally-ready model to expire. After the range test is ended it should again respond correctly to all RC controls. If this is not 100 % the case, do not use the system. Contact your area's Graupner GmbH & Co. KG service partner.Perform the range test before each fl ight and, in 10. doing so, simulate all servo movements which also take place during fl ight. The range must always be at 50 m on the ground in order to assure safe model operation.Caution:Never start the range test on the transmitter during normal operation of the model. DSC output If necessary, use the  selection keys of the left or right touch pad to switch to the "DSC Output" line then, with a brief tap on the center SET key of the right touch pad, activate the value window:SET SET SEL SETRcv Ch Map R16 R08 n/an/aRF transmit onRF range test 99sDSC Output PPM10BASIC SETTING,MODELNow you can use the right selection keys to choose between four types of modulation "PPM10", "PPM16", "PPM18" and "PPM24". Touch the center SET key of the right touch pad again to complete the entry.This choice primarily infl uences the maximum number of control channels which can be attached to the DSC (direct servo control) socket, and thus also available to a fl ight simulator or teacher/pupil system. By selecting "PPM10" this will be control channels 1 … 5, for "PPM16" channels 1 … 8, for "PPM18" channels 1 … 9 and for "PPM24" channels 1 … 12.
81Detail program description - Base setup models | Winged models Motor cutoff (Thr. CutOff) Note:This menu line is suppressed if "None" or "None/inv" is selected for the "Motor on C1" line.Depending on the "idle forward or back" choice made in the "Motor on C1" line of the »Model type« menu, this motor "cut off" option can be coupled to a switch for throttling down a speed controller or to move a servo on the carburetor of a motor to the OFF position. This option not only replaces the"Cut-off trim" function known from other Graupner mc and mx transmitters but also serves as an Emergency-OFF function at the same time, which was not possible with the"Cut-off trim" function.This motor OFF position (Thr. CutOff) is specifi ed in the left column fi eld over the column label SEL and its value is to be established through trial and error.A speed controller or throttle servo will only take on this preset position when a certain servo position or threshold is underrun and a switch is activated. This is done by setting the desired servo position (threshold value) into the middle column fi eld, directly over the column label STO, then selecting the appropriate ON/OFF switch function in the right column.If the percentage value specifi ed for the middle • column is greater than the current servo position, i.e. the current servo position lies below the threshold, the switchover will occur as soon as the switch is put into its ON position.If the percentage value specifi ed for the middle • column is less than the current servo position, i.e. the current servo position is above the threshold, the speed controller will initially reduce motor speed or close the carburetor's throttle servo only to the extent dictated by the value in the left column as soon as the servo's position once underruns the threshold (max. +150 %) after the switch is changed over to its ON position.The speed controller or throttle servo will remain in this cut-off position only until the selected switch is again changed over followed by a one-time throttle servo or speed controller movement beyond the preset threshold with the throttle/brake joystick control.The factory setting for the left column is -100 % for the throttle servo "cut-off" position and a threshold of +150 % servo position setting in the middle column.BASIC SETTING,MODELSEL SET STO SETRF transmit onRF range test 99sDSC Output PPM10–––Thr. CutOff +150%–100%Programming procedureTo change the throttle servo's preset "cut-off" position, tap on the center SET key of the right touch pad. The current setting will be displayed in inverse video. Now use the selection keys of the left or right touch pad to set a value at which the motor is reliably "off". If a combustion motor is involved, be sure the throttle servo does not perform mechanical runout, e.g. -125 %.BASIC SETTING,MODELSEL SET STO SETRF transmit onRF range test 99sDSC Output PPM10–––Thr. CutOff +150%–125%The – upper – preset value in the middle column ensures the motor can be stopped, throughout the maximum possible positioning range of the servo or speed controller, alone by the switch to be assigned in the right column. However, if you wish to set a lower threshold, by which an underrun will cause the throttle servo or speed controller with closed switch to switch into the cut-off position, reduce the preset servo travel from +150 % by placing the throttle servo or speed controller into the desired position with the throttle/brake joystick then touch the center SET key of the right touch pad.BASIC SETTING,MODELSEL SET STO SETRF transmit onRF range test 99sDSC Output PPM10–––Thr. CutOff +150%–125%Finally, use the column at the right to specify a switch with which you can cut off the motor directly (emergency) or which will be activated by the threshold. BASIC SETTING,MODELSEL SET STO SETRF transmit onRF range test 99sDSC Output PPM10Thr. CutOff +100%–125% 8Notes:Be sure the throttle servo does not run out • mechanically when the cut-off function is activated.A threshold over +100 % is reached by temporarily • increasing the travel for servo 1 in the »Servo adjustment« menu to over 100 % then, after storing the threshold, change servo travel back to
82 Detail program description - Base setup models | Winged modelsthe original value. Power-on warning BASIC SETTING,MODELSET SETRF range test 99sDSC Output PPM10Motor Stop +100%–125% 8Thr. CutOff –––When a switch, a control switch or a logical switch is assigned in this line as described in the section "Assigning transmitter controls, switches and control switches" on page 56, the respective switch or control position will be polled and an appropriate warning will be blended into the basic display under some conditions. In combination with logical switches, almost any switch setting can be called up for transmitter switch on.#01 0:00hStoppuhrFlugzeitK780:00.04.1V0:00.0000000:00hMV!Warning!GraubeleH-J Sandbrunner Auto trimBASIC SETTING,MODELSET SETDSC Output PPM10Thr. CutOff +100%–125% 8Power on warning L1Auto trim –––The "Auto trim" option makes it possible to trim a model quickly and without complications, e.g. in the context of a fi rst-fl ight or even after (major) repairs, etc.Typically such test fl ights are initially fl own with joysticks counter operated until the desired state of fl ight is achieved. This generally involves working the trim controls during the fl ight to "unburden" the joysticks.This is exactly what the "Auto trim" function is for. After the desired fl ight attitude has been achieved via control functions 2 … 4 (aileron, elevator and rudder), the switch assigned to "Auto trim" – ideally one of the standard-equipment momentary switches in the switch panels – is to be activated ONCE. At the instant the switch is activated, the joystick offsets from their neutral positions will be determined and adopted as trim values. However, this does not take place instantaneously but rather within about 1 second. During this period after the switch has been activated, the joysticks should be returned to their normal positions.Notes:Due to the complex interaction inherent to multi-• fl ap models, the Auto trim function for ailerons is deactivated if "2AIL 2FL" and "2AIL 4FL" or "4AIL 2FL" and "4AIL 4FL" is selected in the "Aileron/camber fl aps" line of the »Model type« menu.Be sure that during the switch assignment, the • joysticks for aileron, elevator and rudder are in their neutral positions as otherwise their offsets from neutral will be adopted right away in trim memory as the trim value.Since EVERY activation of the Auto trim switch • has a cumulative effect, after concluding an "auto trim" fl ight, the assigned auto trim switch should be deactivated for reasons of safety. Otherwise there is a residual danger that the "Auto trim" function could be activated accidentally. ext. PPM signalBASIC SETTING,MODELSET SETThr. CutOff +100%–125% 8Power on warning L1Auto trim –––ext. PPM signal normalSELSome RF modules which can be connected to the external (page 25) or internal (page 26) connectors for other RF modules require an inverted input signal. Be sure to follow the respective module's installation instructions for this.The choice of "inverted" instead of the default preset "normal" allows for appropriate adaptation of the provided PPM signal.A simultaneous tap on the  or  keys of the right touch pad (CLEAR) will reset the display to "normal".
83For your notes Auto timer resetBASIC SETTING,MODELSET SETPower on warning L1Auto trim –––ext. PPM signal normalSELAuto timer reset yesThe "yes/no" setting made in this line determines whether or not all of the transmitter's timers (except for "Model time" and "Transmitter operating time") are automatically reset to their given starting values when the transmitter is switched on.A simultaneous tap on the  or  keys of the right touch pad (CLEAR) will reset the display to "yes".
84 Detail program description - Base setup models | Winged modelsBefore programming specifi c parameters, there are some basic settings to be made which effect the currently active model memory. Use the selection keys of the left or right touch pad to select the »Basic settings, model« menu … Model selectServo adjustment Stick modeControl adjust Dual Rate / ExpoChannel 1 curve Switch displayCopy / EraseSuppress codes Suppress models Base setup model Helicopter type… then tap the center SET key of the right touch pad. Model nameModel nameStick mode 1n/aBASIC SETTINGS,MODELInfon/an/aModule bindHoTT Change to the next screen page with a brief tap on the SET key of the right touch pad. This will open a screen of characters for entry of the model's name. A maximum of 13 characters can be used to specify a model name. !"#$%&’()Model name Starle@ACDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ[¥]^_?+,–./0123456789:;¢ÇüéâäàåçêëèïîìÄÅÉæÆôöòûùÖÜ`abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz{|}~Now the desired characters can be selected with the selection keys of the left touch pad. Move to the next position to select the next character with a tap on the  of the right touch pad or its center SET key. A simultaneous tap on the  or  keys of the right touch pad (CLEAR) will place a space character at the current position.Positioning to any character position within the entry fi eld can be done with the  keys of the right touch pad.A return to the previous menu screen is accomplished with a tap on the center ESC key of the left touch pad.A model name entered in this manner will appear in the base screen of the »Model select« menu and in the sub-menus of the »Copy / Erase« menu item. InfoModel nameStick mode 1n/aBASIC SETTINGS,MODELInfon/an/aModule bindHoTT StarletEvery model can be given a supplementary note of up to 12 characters (maximum) by following the same procedure as already described for creating a "Model name". This info note will appear as a supplement in the »Model select« menu and in the sub-menus of the »Copy / Erase« menu item. Stick mode“MODE 2” (Throttle at left stick)“MODE 3” (Throttle at right stick) “MODE 4” (Throttle at left stick)“MODE 1” (Throttle at right stick)pitch axistail rotorpitch axistail rotorthrottlerollrollthrottletail rotortail rotorthrottle throttlepitch axispitch axisrollrollpitch axispitch axisrollrollMotor/Pitchthrottletail rotortail rotorthrottlethrottlerollrollpitch axispitch axistail rotortail rotorBasically there are four different ways to assign the four helicopter control functions, roll, nick, tail rotor and throttle/pitch to the two joysticks. Just which of these is used depends on the preferences of the individual model pilot.Use the  selection keys of the left or right touch pad to select the "Stick mode" line. The option fi eld will be framed.Model nameStick mode 1n/aBASIC SETTING,MODELInfon/an/aModule bindHoTT SELStarlet1234g/111111Tap on the SET key. The currently displayed stick mode will be displayed in inverse video. Now use the selection keys of the right touch pad to select from among options 1 through 4.A simultaneous tap on the  or  keys of the right touch pad (CLEAR) will reset the display to stick mode "1". Base setup modelModel-specifi c base settings for helicopter models
85Detail program description - Base setup models | Winged modelsAnother tap on the SET key will again deactivate option selection so a change to another line can be affected. ModuleModel nameStick mode 1n/aBASIC SETTING,MODELInfon/an/aModule bindHoTT Starlet1234g/111111SEL BD1 BD2 BD3 BD4The mc-16 transmitter has a HoTT RF module as standard equipment. In addition to the built-in module, there is a connector for an external RF module behind one of the two front cover fl aps (see page 25) and a switchover to an external module connected there can be affected per software. To do this, use the selection keys of the left or right touch pad to move the marker frame left to the "Module" selection fi eld above the "SEL" column label.HoTT systemGraupner HoTT receivers must be "instructed" to communicate exclusively with a certain model (memory) in a Graupner HoTT transmitter. This procedure is known as "binding" and must only be done once for every new receiver/model-memory-location combination (and can be repeated anytime).Important notices:During the binding procedure be sure the • transmitter's antenna is always far enough away from the receiver's antenna. To be on the safe side, keep them at least one meter apart. Otherwise there is a risk of a faulty connection to the return channel and malfunctions will result.When binding additional receivers, note that any • other –switched on– receivers already bound to the transmitter will fall into Fail-safe mode during the transmitter-side "binding" period. "Binding" multiple receivers per modelMultiple receivers per model can be bound if desired, whereby respective mc-16 HoTT programs offer the potential for managing up to four receivers directly and for dividing up the transmitter's 16 control channels (max) in any arrangement among these receivers under menu control. Refer to additional details further down in this section. First bind the receivers individually as described below. However, in subsequent operation only one of these receivers will establish a telemetry bond to the transmitter; the one which was activated in the "TELEMETRY RCV" line of the »Telemetry« menu, for example:TELEMETRYSETTING & DATAVIEWSENSOR SELECTRF STATUS VIEWVOICE TRIGGERTELEMETRY RCV BIND. 1Any telemetry sensors which may be built into the model should therefore be connected to this receiver because the transmitter only receives and evaluates data from the return channel of the receiver activated on this line. The second, and all other receivers, operate in parallel but are fully independent in slave mode. "Binding" transmitter and receiverUse the  selection keys of the left or right touch pad to move into the "Module" line. The marker frame will be positioned by default to the column for the next free binding channel. In the example shown in the fi gure below, the marker frame is positioned above the column label "BD2" because the binding channel in the column labeled "BD1" is already in use by default for the receiver which was delivered with the set.Model nameStick mode 1n/aBASIC SETTING,MODELInfon/an/aModule bindHoTT Starlet1234g/111111SEL BD1 BD2 BD3 BD4If not already off, now switch the receiver on. The red LED on the receiver will blink.Press and hold the SET button on the receiver while the LED continues to blink red for about 3 seconds then, after about another 3 seconds, begins to blink red/green. The SET button on the receiver can now be released. As long as this LED blinks red/green, the receiver is in bind mode.Now, within this 3 second period, start the so-called "receiver binding" process for the receiver to the currently active model memory with a brief tap on the center SET key of the right touch pad. At this time, the screen's display will blend in a message window for the duration of the "binding" process.Model nameStick mode 1n/aBASIC SETTING,MODELInfon/an/aModule bindHoTT Starlet1234g/111111SEL BD1 BD2 BD3 BD4FINDING...If the receiver's LED, again blinking red, changes within about 10 seconds to continuous illumination in green, the binding process has been successfully
86 Detail program description - Base setup models | Winged modelscompleted. Your model-memory to receiver combination is now operationally ready. At this time the screen will now display " bind " (bound) instead of "n/a" (not attached).Model nameStick mode 1bindBASIC SETTING,MODELInfon/an/aModule bindHoTT Starlet1234g/111111SEL BD1 BD2 BD3 BD4On the other hand, should the LED on the receiver blink red for longer than about 10 seconds, the binding process has failed. In this case the screen will continue to show the status as "n/a". If this should happen, try changing the position of antennas then repeat the entire procedure. Binding other receiversThe binding channel you have chosen is already bound (as indicated by the "bind" status). with another binding channel. If, after initiating the RF bind process, the message shown below appears in the screen instead of displaying "BINDING"Model nameStick mode 1geb.BASIC SETTING,MODELInfon/an/aModule geb.HoTT Starlet1234g/111111SEL BD1 BD2 BD3 BD4 RF offOK is turned Drop down two lines in the screen and switch off the RF module, as described several columns further below in the section "RF module". Afterward, return again to the "Module" line and restart the binding process as described on the previous page.Alternatively you can briefl y switch off the transmitter then, after switching it back on again, respond to the message window that appears …OFFONPlease selectRF on/off?… with "OFF" …ONPlease selectRF on/off?OFF… then confi rm the selection with a brief tap on the center SET key of the right touch pad. From the base screen jump again into the "Module" line of the »Basic settings, model« menu and restart the binding process. Dissolving a bondProceed as described above to initiate the binding process but WITHOUT fi rst putting a receiver in binding readiness.EXT. PPMImportant notice:With the activation of the value fi eld in the context of the following described changeover, any existing bonds to HoTT receivers which may be effective for the currently active model memory will be lost.Activate the fi rst value fi eld in the "Module" line with a tap on the center SET key of the right touch pad then use the selection keys to choose "EXT. PPM" instead of "HoTT". In parallel with the selection of "EXT. PPM", the other four value fi elds will be replaced by the type of modulation pre-selected in the line »DSC Output«, see page 88.Model nameStick mode 1BASIC SETTING,MODELInfoModuleStarlet1234g/111111SELPPM10EXT. PPMThis change also suppresses the lines for the options (described below): »HoTT«, »Rcv Ch Map«, »RF module« and »RF range test« and, in the basic display, "PPM" will be displayed instead of "HoTT".#02 0:00hStop watchFlight timK780:00.04.1V0:00.0000000:00hMVStarletPPMH-J Sandbrunner Receiver channel mappingStick ModeModule1bindBASIC SETTING,MODELbindInfon/an/aHoTT SET SET SET SET2345g/090911Rcv Ch Mapgang R16 R08 n/an/aAs mentioned in the introduction to the "Binding receivers" section, this menu item of the mc-16 HoTT offers both the opportunity to freely divide up the transmitter's control channels within a receiver as well
87Detail program description - Base setup models | Winged modelsas the opportunity to distribute the transmitter's 16 control channels across as many as four receivers. This redistribution is subsequently referred to as "mapping" or "channel mapping" (channel correlation). Select the receiver to be "mapped" with the selection keys of the left or right touch pad then tap briefl y on the center SET key of the right touch pad.Channel mapping within a receiverAnalogous to the channel correlation function in the »Telemetry« menu on page 232, described as "Channel Mapping", it is very simple to use this menu item to freely assign the transmitter's control channels present on the receiver's inputs to any specifi c receiver outputs (servo connections) for the bound receiver designated by the column labeled BD1.RECEIVER CHANNEL MAP BIND1Rx Input Ch 1Rx Input Ch 2Rx Input Ch 3Rx Input Ch 4Rx Output Ch 1Rx Output Ch 2Rx Output Ch 3Rx Output Ch 4After selection of the desired output with the selection keys of the left or right touch pad, the respective input fi eld will be framed. Briefl y tap the center SET key of the right touch pad: The current setting will be displayed in inverse video. Now use the selection keys of the right touch pad to select the desired input channel's respective transmitter output, see page 218.Note:The number of lines available in the list (outputs) corresponds to the maximum number of servos which can be attached to the given receiver.BUT CAUTION: If you wish to operate two servos with one control function, for example such as transmitter control function 2 (roll) which is divided up into control channels 1 & 2 for left and right roll servos for the "3Sv(2Roll)" option in the »Heli type« menu; then "map" the corresponding transmitter outputs, in this case for channels 1 & 2 (= inputs to the receiver) accordingly.Important notice:The mc-16 HoTT transmitter's »Tx. output swap« option permits the transmitter's 16 control functions to be freely swapped in a similar manner or even permits multiple outputs to be assigned to the same control function. To keep controls manageable, however, we strongly recommend using only one of the options at a time. Channel assignment on other receiversAs already mentioned, the "Rcv Ch map" menu option can be used to freely distribute the mc-16HoTT transmitter's 16 control channels across up to four receivers, whereby the numbering of outputs (servo connections) as well as the maximum number of available lines (outputs) will correspond to the maximum number of servo connections available on the given receiver.RECEIVER CHANNEL MAP BIND2Rx Input Ch 16Rx Input Ch 16Rx Input Ch 16Rx Input Ch 16Rx Output Ch 1Rx Output Ch 2Rx Output Ch 3Rx Output Ch 4After selection of the desired output with the selection keys of the left or right touch pad, the respective input fi eld will be framed. Tap the center SET key of the right touch pad. The current setting will be displayed in inverse video. Now select the desired input channel with the selection keys of the right touch pad. For example, appropriate for the above example with roll servos:RECEIVER CHANNEL MAP BIND2Rx Input Ch 1Rx Input Ch 2Rx Input Ch 16Rx Input Ch 16Rx Output Ch 1Rx Output Ch 2Rx Output Ch 3Rx Output Ch 4Note:The number of lines available in the list (outputs) corresponds to the maximum number of servos which can be attached to the given receiver. RF transmitThis menu line provides an option for manually switching the transmitter's RF transmission on and off to specifi c models while the transmitter is in operation. For example, to save power while a model is being programmed. If this line option was set to OFF, it will be canceled (i.e. set to ON) the next time the transmitter is switched on.If necessary, use the  selection keys of the left or right touch pad to switch to the "RF module" line then, with a brief tap on the center SET key of the right touch pad, activate the value window:Stick modeModule1bindbind n/an/aHoTT SET SET SEL SETRcv Ch Map R16 R08 n/an/aRF transmit onBASIC SETTING,MODELThe right selection keys can now be used to choose between OFF and ON. Another tap on the center SET key of the right touch pad will conclude the entry.
88 Detail program description - Base setup models | Winged modelsof the main switch on the transmitter, marked RF, will begin to blink; this will also be accompanied by acoustic tones. At the same time, the timer in the transmitter's display will start counting down and every 5 seconds a two-frequency tone will sound. Five seconds prior to the end of the range test a three-frequency tone will sound once every second. After expiration of the range test's 99th second the transmitter will again be switched to full output power and the LED just to the right of the main switch on the transmitter will again illuminate constantly.Move away from the model while manipulating 6. the joysticks during this timespan. If you notice an interruption anytime while still within a distance of about 50 m, try to reproduce this malfunction.If there is a motor in the model, it may be 7. necessary to switch it on to further check noise immunity.Continue moving away from the model until 8. perfect control is no longer possible. Wait at this distance for the remainder of the test 9. period with the still-operationally-ready model to expire. After the range test is ended it should again respond correctly to all RC controls. If this is not 100 % the case, do not use the system. Contact your area's Graupner GmbH & Co. KG service partner.Perform the range test before each fl ight and, in 10. doing so, simulate all servo movements which also take place during fl ight. The range must always be at 50 m on the ground in order to assure safe model operation.Caution:Never start the range test on the transmitter during normal operation of the model. DSC outputIf necessary, use the  selection keys of the left or right touch pad to switch to the "DSC Output" line then, with a tap on the center SET key of the right touch pad, activate the value window:SET SET SEL SETRcv Ch Map R16 R08 n/an/aRF transmit onRF range test 99sDSC Output PPM10BASIC SETTING,MODELNow you can use the right selection keys to choose between four types of modulation "PPM10", "PPM16", "PPM18" and "PPM24". Touch the center SET key of the right touch pad again to complete the entry.This choice primarily infl uences the maximum number of control channels which can be attached to the DSC (direct servo control) socket, and thus also available to a fl ight simulator or teacher/pupil system. By selecting "PPM10" this will be control channels 1 … 5, for "PPM16" channels 1 … 8, for "PPM18" channels 1 … 9 and for "PPM24" channels 1 … 12. AutorotationAutorotation is that state of descending fl ight in which the pitch of main rotor blades are set such that the rotor's speed matches the natural forces of air fl owing through, like a windmill. This built-up energy can be used for "recovery" lift to brake a descent by appropriate blade pitch adjustment.Autorotation is a means by which real and model helicopters are able to land safely in emergency situations, e.g. in the event of a motor failure. However, the prerequisite for this is a well-trained pilot familiar with the helicopter's characteristics. Quick reaction and good perceptiveness are necessary because the rotor's inertia can only be used once to generate recovery lift. Range testThe built-in range test reduces transmission power to an extent that a functional test can be carried out even within a distance of less than 100 m.Perform a range test on the Graupner HoTT system according to the following instructions. If necessary, have someone assist you in carrying out the range test.Preferably, the receiver already bound to the 1. transmitter should be installed into the model in its intended position.Switch remote control on and wait for the green 2. LED to light up on the receiver/s. Now servo movements can be observed.Place the model on a level surface (pavement, 3. low-cut grass or bare ground) such that receiver antennas are at least 15 cm above ground level. It may be necessary to put something under the model to raise it up enough for this.Hold the transmitter at hip level and at some 4. distance from one's body. Do not point the antenna directly at the model but rather turn and/or kink the antenna's end so that it is oriented vertically during the test.If necessary, use the 5.  selection keys of the left or right touch pad to reach the "RF range test" line in the menu then start range test mode with a tap on the center SET key of the right touch pad.Module bindbind n/an/aHoTT SET SET SEL SETRcv Ch Map R16 R08 n/an/aRF transmit onRF range test 99sBASIC SETTING,MODELLWhen the range test has been initiated, the transmitter's transmission power will be signifi cantly reduced and the LED just to the right
89Detail program description - Base setup models | Winged modelsWhen this technique is evaluated during competitions, the motor must be switched off for autorotation. On the other hand, for training mode it is advantageous to keep the motor at idle for autorotation.The Autorotation switch causes a switchover to the autorotation fl ight phase in which control of "throttle" and "pitch" are separate and all mixers which have an effect on the throttle servo are switched off. Corresponding parameter settings are made in the »Helicopter mixer« (see text beginning page 176); refer also to the "Principle of the Auto. C1 Pos." topic which follows.The "Autorotation" name is permanently assigned to phase 1 and it is included in the base screen of all fl ight phase dependent menus. This name can NOT be changed. It is only possible to assign a switch to this option at the right of this display, as described on page 56. If a switch is assigned, it will have absolute priority over all other fl ight-phase switches.BASIC SETTING,MODELSET SETRF transmit onRF range test 99sDSC Output PPM10–––AutorotationMore about fl ight-phase programming can be found in the text beginning on page 176 in the»Helicopter mixer« section. Autorotation C1 positionThe autorotation fl ight-phase can alternatively be activated by a threshold point for the C1 throttle/pitch joystick. To do this, use the  selection keys of the left or right touch pad to move into the "Autorot. C1-Pos." line. As soon as this display line has been selected, its value fi eld, located above the column label STO will be framed.BASIC SETTING,MODELSTO SETRF range test 99sDSC Output PPM10–––AutorotationAutorot. C1-Pos. 0% –––Move the C1 joystick into the desired threshold switchover position then tap the center SET key of the right touch pad. The current value will be displayed, e.g.:BASIC SETTING,MODELSTO SETRF range test 99sDSC Output PPM10–––AutorotationAutorot. C1-Pos. -55% –––After this has been done, use the selection keys to move into the column above the switch symbol then assign a switch to this fi eld, as described on page 56 in section "Switches, controls and control switches". Preferably one of the two self-restoring switchesBASIC SETTING,MODELSTO SETRF range test 99sDSC Output PPM10–––AutorotationAutorot. C1-Pos. –55% 4IOnce this activation switch is closed, the fi rst occurrence of a threshold underrun will cause the program to switch over to "Autorotation" and then remain independent of C1 position in this fl ight phase until the activating switch, in this example switch 4, is again "OFF"."Autorot. C1-Pos." has precedence over all other fl ight-phase switches.Corresponding parameter settings for …pitch servos• throttle servo• tail rotor servo• swashplate rotation, if available• gyro setting• … are made in the »Helicopter mixer« menu, page 176. Cut-offWithin the framework of autorotation settings for the mc-16 HoTT transmitter's helicopter program, there are parameters for an emergency "Thr. CutOff" of the throttle servo or motor actuator, refer to the programming proposal on page 314. However, this option is not available if an idle position is specifi ed in the "Throttle position AR" line of the »Helicopter mixer« menu instead of an (emergency) OFF position; for example, to avoid restarting the motor after every landing during autorotation practice. This option not only replaces the"Cut-off trim" function known from other Graupner mc and mx transmitters but also serves as an Emergency-OFF function at the same time, which was not possible with the"Cut-off trim" function.Depending on the "forw./rear" choice made for the "Pitch min" line of the »Helicopter type« menu, this "Thr. CutOff" option can be coupled to a switch for throttling down a speed controller or a carburetor servo to the motor OFF (or idle) position. This cut-off (or idle) position is specifi ed in the left column's fi eld, above the SEL column label, and its value is to be established through trial and error.
90 Detail program description - Base setup models | Winged modelsA speed controller or throttle servo will only take on this preset position when a certain servo position or threshold is underrun and a switch is activated. This is done by setting the desired servo position (threshold value) into the middle column fi eld, directly over the column label STO, then selecting the appropriate ON/OFF switch function in the right column.If the percentage value specifi ed for the middle • column is greater than the current servo position, i.e. the current servo position lies below the threshold, the switchover will occur as soon as the switch is put into its ON position.If the percentage value specifi ed for the middle • column is less than the current servo position, i.e. the current servo position is above the threshold, the speed controller will initially reduce motor speed or close the carburetor's throttle servo only to the extent dictated by the value in the left column as soon as the servo's position once underruns the threshold (max. +150 %) after the switch is changed over to its ON position.The speed controller or throttle servo will remain in this cut-off position only until the selected switch is again changed over followed by a one-time throttle servo or speed controller movement beyond the preset threshold with the throttle/brake joystick control.The factory setting for the left column is -100 % for the throttle servo "cut-off" position and a threshold of +150 % servo position setting in the middle column.BASIC SETTING,MODELSET SETDSC Output PPM10–––AutorotationAutorot. C1-Pos. 0% –––SEL STO–––Thr. CutOff +150%–100%Programming procedureTo change the throttle servo's preset "cut-off" position, tap on the center SET key of the right touch pad. The current setting will be displayed in inverse video. Now use the selection keys of the left or right touch pad to set a value at which the motor is reliably "off" without a startup of the throttle servo. For example -125 %:BASIC SETTING,MODELSET SETDSC Output PPM10–––AutorotationAutorot. C1-Pos. 0% –––SEL STO–––Thr. CutOff +150%–125%The – upper – preset value in the middle column ensures the motor can be stopped, throughout the maximum possible positioning range of the servo or speed controller, alone by the switch to be assigned in the right column. However, if a lower threshold is preferred, at which an underrun will cause the throttle servo or speed controller with closed switch to enter the throttle cut-off position for a closed switch condition – by default the right-side proportional rotary slider – put the throttle/pitch joystick into the desired position then tap on the center SET key of the right touch pad.BASIC SETTING,MODELSET SETDSC Output PPM10–––AutorotationAutorot. C1-Pos. 0% –––SEL STO–––Thr. CutOff +150%–125%Finally, use the column at the right to specify a switch with which you can cut off the motor directly (emergency) or which will be activated by the threshold. BASIC SETTING,MODELSET SETDSC Output PPM10–––AutorotationAutorot. C1-Pos. 0% –––SEL STOThr. CutOff +100%–125% 8Notes:Be sure the throttle servo does not run out • mechanically when the cut-off function is activated.A threshold over +100 % is reached by • temporarily increasing the travel for servo 1 in the »Servo adjustment« menu to over 100 % then, after storing the threshold, change servo travel back to the original value.
91Detail program description - Base setup models | Winged models MarkingBASIC SETTING,MODELSET SET–––AutorotationAutorot. C1-Pos. 0% –––SEL STOThr. CutOff +100%–125% 8Marker key –––When activated, the "Marker key" will place a marker in the "Pitch" curve, as well as in the "Channel 1  Throttle" and "Channel 1  Tail rotor" mixer curves of the »Helicopter mixer« menu, to mark the current pitch joystick position of the pitch joystick and it takes on the form of a vertical dashed line. This marker is helpful for setting curve points at the right places during fl ight testing, e.g. the hovering pointOne of the two standard momentary contact switches mounted into the switch panels should be the preferred choice of switch assignment.Example:The hovering point is to be placed at the midpoint of the throttle/pitch joystick for the «Hover» fl ight phase but it is found to be still located above control middle during fl ight testing. Press the switch in this position and, after the landing, examine, for example, the Pitch curve in the »Helicopter mixer« menu, page 176.PitchCurveoff PointOutputInput –30%–30%?+–100O U T P U TThe continuous vertical line shows the joystick's current position. Its position in this example lies at -30 % (= input) of control travel and, because of its (still) linear control curve, produces an output signal which is also -30 % (= output).On the other hand, the dashed vertical line represents the joystick position at which the marker switch was pushed.Move the joystick to this marker line to read the input and output values for the found hovering point. The marker points of the other two mixer curves are read similarly. Now these three curves can be alternately modifi ed as necessary in order to correct the hovering point. Curve point "1" in this simple example can be raised at the curve's midpoint to the output value that was determined to be the hovering point in the Pitch graph. Power-on warning BASIC SETTING,MODELSET SET–––Autorot. C1-Pos. 0% –––SEL STOThr. CutOff +100%–125% 8Marker key –––Power on warningWhen a switch, a control switch or a logical switch is assigned in this line, as described on page 56 in the section "Assigning transmitter controls, switches and control switches", the respective switch or control position will be polled when the transmitter is switched on and an appropriate warning will be blended into the basic display under some conditions. In combination with logical switches, almost any switch setting can be called up for transmitter switch on.#02 0:00hStoppuhrFlugzeitK780:00.04.1V0:00.0000000:00hMV!Warning!StarletH-J Sandbrunner Auto trimBASIC SETTING,MODELSET SET––––––SEL STOThr. CutOff +100%–125% 8Marker key–––Power on warningAuto trimThe "Auto trim" option makes it possible to trim a model quickly and without complications, e.g. in the context of a fi rst-fl ight or even after (major) repairs, etc.Typically such test fl ights are initially fl own with joysticks counter operated until the desired state of fl ight is achieved. This generally involves working the trim controls during the fl ight to "unburden" the joysticks.This is exactly what the "Auto trim" function is for. After the desired fl ight attitude has been achieved via control functions 2 … 4 (aileron, elevator and rudder), the switch assigned to "Auto trim" – ideally one of the standard-equipment momentary switches in the switch panels – is to be activated ONCE. At the instant the switch is activated, the joystick offsets from their neutral positions will be determined and adopted as trim values. However, this does not take place instantaneously but rather within about 1 second. During this period after the switch has been activated, the joysticks should be returned to their normal positions.
92 Detail program description - Base setup models | Winged modelsNotes:Be sure that during the switch assignment, the • joysticks for aileron, elevator and rudder are in their neutral positions as otherwise their offsets from neutral will be adopted right away in trim memory as the trim value.Since EVERY activation of the Auto trim switch • has a cumulative effect, after concluding an "auto trim" fl ight, the assigned auto trim switch should be deactivated for reasons of safety. Otherwise there is a residual danger that the "Auto trim" function could be activated accidentally. ext. PPM signalBASIC SETTING,MODELSET SETPower on warning –––Auto trim –––ext. PPM signal normalSELMarker key –––Some RF modules which can be connected to the external (page 25) or internal (page 26) connectors for other RF modules require an inverted input signal. Be sure to follow the respective module's installation instructions for this.The choice of "inverted" instead of the default preset "normal" allows for appropriate adaptation of the provided PPM signal.A simultaneous tap on the  or  keys of the right touch pad (CLEAR) will reset the display to "normal". Auto timer resetBASIC SETTING,MODELSET SETPower on warning –––Auto trim –––ext. PPM signal normalSELAuto timer reset yesThe "yes/no" setting made in this line determines whether or not all of the transmitter's timers (except for "Model time" and "Transmitter operating time") are automatically reset to their given starting values when the transmitter is switched on.A simultaneous tap on the  or  keys of the right touch pad (CLEAR) will reset the display to "yes".
93For your notes
94 Detail program description - Model type | Winged modelsThis "Model type" menu is used to establish the type of model to be programmed. This also activates all characteristic mixers, coupling functions, etc. in preparation for subsequent programming of the specifi ed model type.Model selectServo adjustment Stick modeControl adjust Dual Rate / ExpoChannel 1 curve Switch displayCopy / EraseSuppress codes Suppress models Base setup modelModel typeBriefl y tap the center SET key of the right touch pad: Motor at C1After selecting the "Motor at C1" line with the  selection keys of the left and right touch pad, the corresponding entry fi eld will be framed. Tail typeMotor on C1NormalNoneAileron/camber flaps 1 AILM O D E L L T Y PEBrake Offset Input 1+100%SELBriefl y tap the center SET key of the right touch pad: The current setting will be displayed in inverse video. Now use the selection keys of the right touch pad to select from among the following four options: "none" For operation of a model without a propulsion. The warning "Throttle too high", see page 30, is deactivated and the "Brake settings" sub-menu of the »Wing mixers« (beginning page 172) is available without any restrictions."Thr. min. rear": The idle position for the throttle/brake fl aps joystick (C1) is to the rear, i.e. toward the pilot. The warning "Throttle too high", see page 30, as well as the "Thr. CutOff" option in the »Basic settings, model« menu, see page 81, are activated and the "Brake settings" sub-menu of the »Wing mixers« menu, beginning page 172, will be available if the entry in the "Motor" column of the »Phase settings« menu, page 142, for the currently active fl ight phase is "none"."Thr. min. fwd.": The idle position for the throttle/brake fl aps control stick (C1) is at the front, i.e. away from the pilot. The warning "Throttle too high", see page 30, as well as the "Thr. CutOff" option in the »Basic settings, model« menu, see page 90, are activated and the "Brake settings" sub-menu of the »Wing mixers« menu, beginning page 172, will be available if the entry in the "Motor" column of the »Phase settings« menu, page 142, for the currently active fl ight phase is "none".Notes:Be sure to pay attention during the • programming procedures that motors do not start up unintentionally. Disconnect the fuel supply or battery terminals to motors before programming.C1 trimming will operate according to the choice • made between "normal" or only "back" or "fwd.", that is, either over the control's entire travel path or only in the respective idle direction. Tail typeAfter selecting the »Tail type« line with the  selection keys of the left or right touch pad, the corresponding entry fi eld will be framed.Tail typeMotor on C1NormalNoneAileron/camber flaps 1 AILM O D E L L T Y PEBrake Offset Input 1+100%SELBriefl y tap the center SET key of the right touch pad: The current setting will be displayed in inverse video. Now select the type appropriate for the model with the selection keys of the right touch pad."normal": Elevators and rudder are each operated by a single servo."V-tail": Elevator and rudder control is affected by way of two separate, articulated, V-shaped rudders. The coupling function for rudder and elevator control will be automatically taken over by the program. The relationship of rudder-to-elevator proportion is set in the »Dual Rate / Expo« menu, page 120, and servo travel in the »Servo adjustment« menu, page 102. If, beyond this, there is a desire to also make differentiation for rudder throw then the V-tail should be alternatively controlled via the »Dual mixer« menu, page 206. In this case however, the tail type entry specifi ed here must be "normal". "ELEVON": Aileron and elevator control is operated by one or two servos Model typeEstablishing winged aircraft model type
95Detail program description - Model type | Winged modelsper wing half. However, elevator trimming is also affected by selecting the "2AIL 2FL" option – see below – but only on servos 2 & 3. "2ELSv3+8": This option is intended for models with two elevator servos. The servo connected to output 8 will operate in parallel with servo 3 to actuate elevators. Elevator trim affects both servos.Note on "2ELSv3+8":One control, which assigns input 8 by way of the »Control adjust« menu, is then disconnected from servo "8" by software for reasons of safety i.e. it is made ineffective. Aileron/camber fl apsAfter selecting the »Aileron/camber fl aps« line with the  selection keys of the left or right touch pad, the corresponding entry fi eld will be framed.Tail typeMotor on C1NormalNoneAileron/camber flaps 1 AILM O D E L L T Y PEBrake Offset Input 1+100%SELBriefl y tap the center SET key of the right touch pad: The current setting will be displayed in inverse video. Now use the selection keys of the right touch pad to select the number of wing servos to be programmed for the model.Available Control channel used1AIL 21AIL 1FL 2 | 6In the majority of cases the default setting for "input 1" will remain as it is and the brake will be operated by way of the non-neutralizing C1 joystick.However, use of input 7, 8 or 9 makes it possible to operate the brake in an alternative manner, even by way of a supplementary control, if the C1 stick is to be used for something else.The neutral point (offset) can be set to any desired position. This is done by placing the control for input 1, 7, 8 or 9 into the position at which the landing fl aps are to be retracted, i.e. closed, then setting this "Offset" point in the column above the column label STO.The selection of this offset point in this context determines not only the control position at which the brake system is to be retracted, i.e. closed, but also also the activation direction of the C1 joystick for extending the brake system.Brake offset values with a "+" prefi x will cause • fl aps affected by the "Brake settings" option of the »Wing mixers« menu to be extended when the C1 joystick is moved from front to rear, in the direction of the pilot.Brake offset values with a "-" prefi x will cause • fl aps affected by the "Brake settings" option of the »Wing mixers« menu to be extended when the C1 joystick is moved from rear to front, in the direction away from the pilot.If the offset point is not set at the far end of control element travel, the remainder of travel to the end point will be "free travel", i.e. this "free travel" will no longer infl uence any mixer available for "Brake settings" in the »Wing mixers« menu. This idle path ensures that all brake settings remain at "neutral", even with minor deviations from the limit of the brake fl ap control. At the same time, the effective control path is automatically spread to 100 %.2AIL 2 & 52AIL 1FL 2 & 5 | 62AIL 2FL 2 & 5 | 6 & 72AIL 4FL 2 & 5 | 6 & 7 / 9 & 104QR 2WK 2 & 5 / 11 & 12 | 6 & 74AIL 4FL 2 & 5 / 11 & 12 | 6 & 7 / 9 & 10Depending on the option selected here, the given mixers needed and their settings will be activated in the »Wing mixers« menu, beginning page 172.Tips:Settings for all wing fl ap pairs (Al and Al2, FL and • FL2) can be trimmed on a fl ight-phase basis in both the »Phase trim« menu as well as in the Wing mixers« menu, page 172.The functionality of all wing fl ap pairs (Al and Al2, • FL and FL2) can also be operated by way of the "Throttle/brake-fl ap joystick" if this stick has not been assigned to other use, e.g. for certain brake settings, see »Wing mixers« menu, page 172. To confi gure this it is only necessary to assign "Control 1" to input 6 in the »Control adjust« menu, page 108. (If it is preferable to operate fl aps with switches, one of the transmitter's two or three position switches are good for this purpose.) Brake OffsetThis function not only has potential for gliders and electric models but also for models with combustion motors and landing fl aps.The mixers described in the »Brake settings« line of the »Wing mixers« menu can be operated by the C1 joystick ("input 1") or another transmitter operating element which has been assigned to input 7, 8 or 9 in the »Control adjust« menu. In this latter case, retain the "GL" default setting for the "Type" column in the »Control adjust« menu so the selected control can operate independent of fl ight phase.
96 Detail program description - Model type | Winged modelsTail typeMotor on C1NormalNoneAileron/camber flaps 1 AILM O D E L L T Y PEBrake Offset Input 1+90%SELTip:Preferably, the servo intended for operating any airbrake fl aps that may be on the model should be connected to the receiver output operated by the brake input channel, e.g. connect airbrake servo onto (free) receiver output 8 if input 8 has been chosen for the "brake", etc. A second airbrake servo is most conveniently operated by way of a free mixer.
97For your notes
98 Detail program description - Helicopter type Helicopter typeEstablishing helicopter model typeThis "Model type" menu is used to establish the type of model to be programmed. This also activates all characteristic mixers, coupling functions, etc. in preparation for subsequent programming of the specifi ed model type.Model selectServo adjustment Stick modeControl adjust Dual Rate / ExpoChannel 1 curve Switch displayCopy / EraseSuppress codes Suppress models Base setup modelHelicopter typeBriefl y tap the center SET key of the right touch pad: Swashplate typeControl of the swashplate will require an appropriate program variant which corresponds to the number of servos operating pitch control.In the meantime this selection is also infl uenced by the type of control exercised on swashplate servos. Since Flybar systems generally do not require transmitter-side swashplate mixers, when such a system is in use, "1 Servo" is generally to be selected as the swashplate type, regardless of the actual number of swashplate servos present. In this context, be sure the Flybar system complies with the included adjustment instructions as otherwise there is a risk the helicopter will not fl y.After selecting the »Swashplate type« line with the  selection keys of the left or right touch pad, the entry fi eld will be framed.Linearis. swashpl.Swashplate typeno1 ServoRotor direction rightHELTYPEPitch min. rearSELBriefl y tap the center SET key of the right touch pad. The current setting for number of pitch servos will be displayed in inverse video. Now choose the variant needed with the selection keys of the right touch pad. "1 Servo": A Flybar system is in use or the swashplate is tipped with one servo each for roll and pitch-axis. Pitch control will be affected by one separate servo. (Since helicopter models, like Flybar systems, which are operated with only 1 pitch servo, neither need any of the three swashplate servos for pitch, pitch-axis and roll NOR the transmitter's mixer functions for pitch, pitch-axis and roll, the »Swashplate mixer« menu option will be suppressed in the Multi-function menu.)"2 Servo": Two roll servos will displace the swashplate axially to affect pitch control; nick control will be decoupled by a mechanical compensation rocker."3Sv(2Roll)": Symmetric three-point control of the swashplate with three, radially offset articulation points, each offset by 120 °, connected to one pitch-axis servo (front or rear) and two roll servos (left and right). All three servos push the swashplate axially to affect pitch control."3Sv (140°)": Asymmetrical three-point control of the swashplate is affected at three articulation points connected to one nick servo (rear) and two roll servos (front left and right). All three servos push the swashplate axially to affect pitch control."3Sv (2Nick)": Symmetric three-point control as described above but radially offset by 90°, one lateral roll servo and two pitch-axis servos, front and rear."4Sv (90°)": Four-point swashplate control affected by two roll servos and two nick servos.Simultaneous tap on the  or  keys of the right touch pad (CLEAR) will reset the option back to "1 Servo".Swashplate type: 1 Servo2Swashplate type: 2 Servos21
99Detail program description - Helicopter typeSwashplate type: 3 Servos (2 Roll)312Swashplate type: 3 Servos (140°)312Swashplate type: 3 Servos (2 Nick)321Swashplate type: 4 Servos (90°) 2 Nick / 2 Roll2513Note:Except for the "1 Servo" choice, swashplate mixer proportions must also be set in the»Swashplate mixer« menu, page 208. Swashplate linearizionAfter selecting the »Linearis. swashpl.« line with the  selection keys of the left or right touch pad, the entry fi eld will be framed.Linearis. swashpl.Swashplate typeno1 ServoRotor direction rightHELTYPEPitch min. rearSELThe "yes" entry will prevent undesired side effects such as pitch change due to a roll function or tension between swashplate servo rods.This type of tension can arise when effected servos strain for different displacement positions due to travel which deviates from one another.Linearizing will require a bit of familiarization on the part of the pilot because, in order to linearize the entire rotation travel of the servo arm, servo travel is reduced in small control movements – similar to a pronounced exponential setting. Rotor directionAfter selecting the »Rotor direction« line with the  selection keys of the left or right touch pad, the entry fi eld will be framed.Linearis. swashpl.Swashplate typeno1 ServoRotor direction rightHELTYPEPitch min. rearSELAfter a tap on the center SET key, the main rotor's direction of rotation is entered in the »Rotor direction« line with the selection keys of the right touch pad:"right": The main rotor turns clockwise when viewed from above."left": The main rotor turns counter-clockwise when viewed from above.A simultaneous tap on the  or  keys of the right touch pad (CLEAR) will set the option to "right". right-turningleft-turningThis entry is necessary for the correct orientation of torque and power compensation mixer settings made in the »Helicopter mixer« menu: Pitch, Channel 1  Throttle, Channel 1  Tail rot., Tail rotor  Throttle Roll  Throttle Roll  Tail rot. Pitch  Throttle, Pitch-axis  Throttle Pitch-axis  Tail rotor
100 Detail program description - Helicopter typePitch minAfter selecting the »Pitch min.« (pitch minimum) line with the  selection keys of the left or right touch pad, the entry fi eld will be framed.Linearis. swashpl.Swashplate typeno1 ServoRotor direction rightHELTYPEPitch min. rearSELThe »Pitch min.« line is used to adapt the actuation direction of the throttle/pitch joystick to personal control preferences. All other helicopter program options which involve throttle and pitch functions, e.g. throttle curve, idle trimming, tail rotor mixer, etc., are dependent on this setting. Tap the center SET key of the right touch pad. The operating direction of the throttle/pitch joystick will be displayed in inverse video. Now choose the variant needed with the selection keys of the right touch pad.PitchThese mean: "fwd.": minimum pitch setting when the pitch joystick (C1) is "forward", i.e. away from the pilot."rear": minimum pitch setting when the pitch joystick (C1) is "back", i.e. toward the pilot.A simultaneous tap on the  or  keys of the right touch pad (CLEAR) will set this option to "rear".Notes:C1 trimming affects only the throttle servo. • The so-called "throttle limit" is set by default, see • text beginning page 117, by way of input "GL16" in the »Control adjust« menu with which the throttle servo can be limited, independent of the pitch servo, in the full throttle direction.Since a given user's models will typically be • operated with the same pitch-min direction, this specifi cation can be conveniently preselected in the "transmitter-specifi c" »General basic settings« menu, page 259. This specifi cation will then be adopted automatically when a new model memory is created in the »Helicopter type« menu but, if desired, can be adapted on a model-specifi c basis as described. Expo throttle limitAfter selecting the »Expo throttle lim.« line with the  selection keys of the left or right touch pad, the entry fi eld will be framed.Linearis. swashpl. noRotor direction rightHELTYPEPitch min. rearSELExpo throttle lim. 0%The "Throttle limit" function described in the »Control adjust« menu, see page 117, can be assigned an exponential characteristic curve.A pitch progression rate between -100 % and +100 % can be set with the selection keys.For example, it is practical to have the throttle limit – by default, the right-side proportional rotary slider – also regulate the idle setting. Further details about the throttle limit can be found in the text for the »Control adjust« menu beginning page 112.An example of two exponential throttle limit curve characteristics for 100 % servo travel.continuous line:negative exponential values;dashed line:positive exponential values " $ &    #        "    $   &       Throttle limit warningRotor direction rightHELTYPEPitch min. rearSELExpo throttle lim. 0%Thr. limit warning –70%If the carburetor is open too far when the transmitter is switched on, an acoustic warning will be sounded and a warning will be presented in the display.Throttle too high!The »Thr. limit warning« option permits the setting of a variable for the critical position of the throttle servo between 0 % and -100 %, above which the warning will be issued. The reference point for this option is the "fwd." or "rear" Pitch min. joystick position set in this menu.
101Detail program description - Helicopter typeA default value of -70 % control travel is provided.A simultaneous tap on the  or  keys of the right touch pad (CLEAR) will reset a changed value back to the default value.
102 Detail program description - Servo adjustmentnormalreversednormalreversedColumn 3 "cent."The servo midpoint (center) setting is intended for adapting a non-standard servo (a servo whose midpoint position does not correspond to a pulse length of 1.5 ms, i.e. 1500 µs), as well as for minor adjustments, e.g. for the fi ne tuning of the neutral position of model rudders.Independent of trim wheels and any mixer settings, the neutral point can be shifted in a range of -125 bis +125 % within a maximum servo travel of ± 150 %. Independent of all other trim and mixer settings, this setting is always based directly on the respective servo. Note that extreme offsets of the neutral point can lead to one-sided restrictions of servo travel because overall travel is limited by both electronic and mechanical aspects to a maximum of ±150 %.A simultaneous tap on the  or  keys of the right touch pad (CLEAR) will reset the entry fi eld value displayed in inverse video back to "0 %".Briefl y tap the center 3. SET key of the right touch pad. The corresponding input fi eld is shown highlighted.Use the selection keys of the right touch pad to set 4. the desired value.Briefl y tap the center 5. SET key of the right touch pad to complete data entry.A simultaneous tap on the 6.  or  keys of the right touch pad (CLEAR) will any setting made back to its respective default value.Important:Servo designation numerals are based on the respective receiver outputs to which they are connected, provided that no swapping of transmitter and/or receiver outputs has been specifi ed. This means that even a change of stick mode will not effect the numbering of servos.Column 2 "rev"The direction in which a servo turns is adapted to the practical reality of the given model so that the assembly of control rods and joints do not need to accommodate a specifi c servo rotation direction. Rotation direction is symbolized by the "=>" and "<=" character combinations. Servo rotation direction must be specifi ed before making settings for the options which follow below.A simultaneous tap on the  or  keys of the right touch pad (CLEAR) will reset rotation direction back to "=>". This menu is used to set the direction, neutralization, travel and limit parameters for a given selected servo exclusively. Model selectServo adjustment Stick modeControl adjust Dual Rate / ExpoChannel 1 curve Switch displayCopy / EraseSuppress codes Suppress models Base setup modelModel typeModel selectServo adjustment Stick modeControl adjust Dual Rate / ExpoChannel 1 curve Switch displayCopy / EraseSuppress codes Suppress models Base setup modelHelicopter typeBriefl y tap the center SET key of the right touch pad:0% 100%Servo 1Servo 2Servo 3Servo 4Servo 5Rev cent.100%150% 150%– travel + – limit +0% 100%100%150% 150%0% 100%100%150% 150%0% 100%100%150% 150%0% 100%100%150% 150%Begin setting servo parameters in the left column.Basic procedure:Select the desired servo, 1 … 16, with the 1.  selection keys of the left or right touch pad. If necessary, use the 2.  selection keys of the left or right touch pad to reach the desired column then, if desired, move the respective control out of its midpoint to make an asymmetric setting. Servo adjustmentServo direction, midpoint, travel and limit
103Detail program description - Servo adjustmentColumn 4, "–travel+"0% 100%Servo 1Servo 2Servo 3Servo 4Servo 5Rev cent.100%150% 150%– travel + – limit +0% 100%100%150% 150%0% 100%100%150% 150%0% 100%100%150% 150%0% 100%100%150% 150%This column is used to set servo travel symmetrically or asymmetrically for each side. The setting range is 0 … 150 % of normal servo travel. The values set are based on the settings that have been made for the "midpoint" column. To create a symmetric travel path, i.e. control-side independent travel, the respective control (joystick, proportional control or switch) is to be put into a position which covers travel to both sides of the marked frame. Note:It may be necessary to fi rst assign a control attached to one of the control channels 5 … 16. If necessary, this is to be done in the »Control adjust« menu, see page 108 or 112.To set asymmetric travel, the respective control (joystick, proportional control or switch) is to be moved to the side on which the marked frame only includes the value to be changed.The value setting is activated with a brief tap on the center SET key of the right touch pad. The value fi eld is shown highlighted. Values can be changed with the selection keys of the right touch pad. Complete the entry with a tap on the center SET key of the right touch pad.A simultaneous tap on the  or  keys of the right touch pad (CLEAR) will reset the changed parameter displayed in inverse video back to "100 %".Important:In contrast to settings made with the »Control adjust« menu, all settings made in this menu affect exclusively the respective servo, independent of how the control signal for this servo is produced, i.e. directly by a joystick or by way of any mixer functions.The adjacent fi gure shows and example of a side-dependent servo setting, -50 % and +150 %. Transmitter control travelServo travelColumn 5 "–limit+"The "– limit +" column is reached by moving the marker frame, with the  selection keys of the left or right touch pad, to the right beyond the "– travel +" column.0% 100%Servo 1Servo 2Servo 3Servo 4Servo 5Rev cent.100%150% 150%– travel + – limit +0% 100%100%150% 150%0% 100%100%150% 150%0% 100%100%150% 150%0% 100%100%150% 150%To create a symmetric limit, i.e. control-side independent limit, the respective control (joystick, proportional control or switch) is to be put into a position such that the marker frame covers both sides of the travel setting.To set asymmetric travel, the respective control (joystick, proportional control or switch) is to be moved to the side where it is to be set such that the marker frame only includes the value to be changed.A simultaneous tap on the  or  keys of the right touch pad (CLEAR) will reset the entry fi eld value displayed in inverse video back to "0 %".Example:A servo is controlled separately by two controls over a mixer and but, for model-specifi c reasons, must only be operated over a servo travel path of 100 % because, for example, the rudder would mechanically collide with the elevator if moved more than 100 %.As long as only one control is used at a time, this is no problem. But this does become a problem when the signals are summed by the simultaneous use of both controls (e.g. aileron and rudder) to total travel in excess of 100 %. The linkage and servos could be strained excessively …To prevent this, the travel should certainly be limited by way of an individual travel limit. In the case of the rudder used in the example, this would be a value slightly less than 100 % – because it is assumed the rudder would collide at 100 %.
104 Detail program description - Joystick setting | Winged modelsBoth joysticks are equipped for digital trimming. When turning trim wheels, every "click" will shift the joystick's neutral position by a certain value. The current position is shown on the screen and the adjustment is also made "audible" with acoustic tones. This makes fi nding the mid-point during fl ight easy, without looking at the screen. If the mid-point is overrun, a brief motion pause will be inserted.Current trim values are automatically stored when a model memory change is made.Furthermore – except for global control function trimming of the throttle/brake joystick, commonly referred to as control function "C1" (channel 1) – digital trimming is effective within a model memory location selectively as either a global parameter (i.e. consistent in all fl ight phases) or as a fl ight-phase specifi c parameter. This specifi cation as "global" or "phase" is made in the »Stick mode« menu described here, whereas software-side C1 trimming is generally set to "global", i.e. independent of fl ight phases.This setting is visualized in the base screen by a "shadow" on trim bars:shadow present = global,• no shadow = fl ight phase dependent.• In two corresponding fi gures below, elevator trim – shown in the middle text column with its default setting "global" – then in the right column set to fl ight "Phase" specifi c.#01 0:00hStop watchFlight timK780:00.04.1V0:00.000000:00hMVGraubeleH-J SandbrunnerNormalRX VOLT:4.9V Joystick setting Setting stick mode 1 through 4Use the selection keys on the left or right touch pad to scroll to the »Stick mode« option in the multi-function menu: Model selectServo adjustmentStick modeControl adjust Dual Rate / ExpoChannel 1 curve Switch displayCopy / EraseSuppress codes Suppress models Base setup modelModel typeOpen this menu option with a tap on the center SET key of the right touch pad.globalChannel 1AileronElevatorRudderTrim0.0sTr. step – time +global 0.0sglobal 0.0sglobal 0.0s0.0s0.0s0.0s0.0s4444This menu, adapted for winged models, permits the four digital trim wheels to be set and their trim effects to be assigned, selectively, as a "deceleration" factor to control functions 1 through 4.The desired line can be reached by using the selection keys of the left or right touch pad. Once the appropriate function fi eld has been selected and then the center SET key of the right touch pad is touched briefl y, the fi eld will appear in inverse video and the desired setting can be made with the selection keys of the right touch pad.TrimExcept for "Channel 1", this column can be used to switchover trim effect from "GL(obal)" to "PH(ase)" and vice versa. globalChannel 1AileronElevatorRudderTrim0.0sTr. step – time +global 0.0sPhase 0.0sglobal 0.0s0.0s0.0s0.0s0.0s4444"Global": The position of the respective trim wheel is effective "globally" for all fl ight-phases programmed for the given model, page 140."Phase": The position of the respective trim wheel is effective on a phase-specifi c basis and will be automatically stored upon change of fl ight phase so that the setting is again available following a return to this fl ight phase.A simultaneous tap on the  or  keys of the right touch pad (CLEAR) will reset the option back to "Global".Trim stepsThe four digital trim wheels shift the neutral point of the respective joystick in the given direction by one adjustable increment, as set here, for each "click". This is where the increment size (step) can be adjusted for a given direction, whereby maximum trim travel, independent of the selected number of trim steps, is always about ±30 % of control travel.After selecting the "Tr. step" column (trim steps) and the desired trim control with the  selection keys of the left or right touch pad, the corresponding entry fi eld will be framed.
105Detail program description - Joystick setting | Winged modelsglobalChannel 1AileronElevatorRudderTrim0.0sTr. step – time +global 0.0sPhase 0.0sglobal 0.0s0.0s0.0s0.0s0.0s4444Briefl y tap the center SET key of the right touch pad. The current setting will be displayed in inverse video. Now select the desired value, between 1 and 10, with the selection keys of the right touch pad. For example:globalChannel 1AileronElevatorRudderTrim0.0sTr. step – time +global 0.0sPhase 0.0sglobal 0.0s0.0s0.0s0.0s0.0s4484A simultaneous tap on the  or  keys of the right touch pad (CLEAR) will reset any change made to the active fi eld back to "4".TimeThe rate of control signal change with respect to the speed of joystick motion can be infl uenced by the entries made in the "– time +" column. Each joystick movement direction, i.e. joystick control channels 1 through 4, can be set individually. This means that respective servos will then follow rapid control position changes only at an accordingly delayed rate. This time delay has a direct effect on the control function and therefore also any servos controlled by this function.The time can be programmed symmetrically for both sides or separate for each control direction. This setting has a programmable range of 0 s to 9.9 s. In the case of side-separate settings, the joystick is to be moved to the respective side so that the inverse video fi eld will switch between sides to the one for which the change is to be made – for example, even to ensure gentle rev-up of the propulsion motor despite a (too) fast motion of the C1 stick.globalChannel 1AileronElevatorRudderTrim1.1sTr. step – time +global 0.0sPhase 0.0sglobal 0.0s0.0s0.0s0.0s0.0s4484On the other hand, for reasons of safety, the motor cut-off should always be "immediate".A simultaneous tap on the  or  keys of the right touch pad (CLEAR) will reset any change made to the active fi eld back to "0.0 s".
106 Detail program description - Joystick setting | HelicoptersBoth joysticks are equipped for digital trimming. When turning trim wheels, every "click" will shift the joystick's neutral position by a certain value. The current position is shown on the screen and the adjustment is also made "audible" with acoustic tones. This makes fi nding the mid-point during fl ight easy, without looking at the screen. If the mid-point is overrun, a brief motion pause will be inserted.Current trim values are automatically stored when a model memory change is made. Furthermore – except for trimming the throttle/brake joystick – digital trimming is effective selectively either as a global parameter, i.e. consistent in all fl ight phases, or as a fl ight-phase specifi c parameter. This specifi cation as "Global" or "Phase" is made in the »Stick mode« menu described here, whereas throttle trimming is always made "global" by software, i.e. independent of fl ight phases.This setting is visualized in the base screen by a "shadow" on trim bars:shadow present = global,• no shadow = fl ight phase dependent.• In the following fi gure, pitch-axis trimming is used as an example of fl ight-phase dependence – presented at the left in its default Mode 1.0:00hStop watchFlight timK780:00.04.1V0:00.000000:00hMVH-J SandbrunnerNormal#02StarletRX VOLT:4.9VUse the selection keys on the left or right touch pad to scroll to the »Stick mode« option in the multi-function menu: Joystick settingSetting stick mode 1 through 4Model selectServo adjustment Stick modeControl adjust Dual Rate / ExpoChannel 1 curve Switch displayCopy / EraseSuppress codes Suppress models Base setup modelHelicopter typeOpen this menu option with a tap on the center SET key of the right touch pad.Thr trimPitch/thrRollPitch axTail rot.Trim0.0sTr. step – time +global 0.0sglobal 0.0sglobal 0.0s0.0s0.0s0.0s0.0s4444This menu, adapted for helicopter models, permits the four digital trim wheels to be set and their trim effects to be assigned, selectively, as a "deceleration" factor to control functions 1 through 4.The desired line can be reached by using the selection keys of the left or right touch pad. Once the appropriate function fi eld has been selected and then the center SET key of the right touch pad is touched briefl y, the fi eld will appear in inverse video and the desired setting can be made with the selection keys of the right touch pad.TrimThese setting variations are confi gured to accommodate the needs of helicopter models, which is why the following alternative options are available for the "Thr." line:Thr trimPitch/thrRollPitch axTail rot.Trim0.0sTr. step – time +global 0.0sglobal 0.0sglobal 0.0s0.0s0.0s0.0s0.0s4444"Thr trim": (throttle limit) C1 trimming operates as idle trimming when the "throttle limit" function regulates the motor for starting, see »Control adjust« menu, page 117."Throttle AR": (Throttle Autorotation) C1 trim operates as idle trim exclusively in the «Autorot» fl ight phase. This makes it possible to assign a principle (fi xed) preset AR throttle position in the »Helicopter mixer« menu, page 176, e.g. during autorotation practice with the trim wheel "varied". A simultaneous tap on the  or  keys of the right touch pad (CLEAR) will reset the option back to "Thr trim"."Pitch": Due to internal coupling, C1 trimming acts equally on all pitch servos available without infl uencing the throttle servo.On the other hand, the trim effects of respective digital trim controls for the lines "Roll", "Pitch ax" and "Tail rot." can be switched over from "Gobal" to "Phase" and vice versa.
107Detail program description - Joystick setting | HelicoptersThr trimPitch/thrRollPitch axTail rot.Trim0.0sTr. step – time +global 0.0sglobal 0.0sPhase 0.0s0.0s0.0s0.0s0.0s4444"Global": The position of the respective trim wheel is effective "globally" for all fl ight-phases programmed for the given model, page 140."Phase": The position of the respective trim wheel is effective on a phase-specifi c basis and will be automatically stored upon change of fl ight phase so that the setting is again available following a return to this fl ight phase.A simultaneous tap on the  or  keys of the right touch pad (CLEAR) will reset the option back to "Global".Trim stepsThe four digital trim wheels shift the neutral point of the respective joystick in the given direction by one adjustable increment, as set here, for each "click". This is where the increment size (step) can be adjusted for a given direction, whereby maximum trim travel, independent of the selected number of trim steps, is always about ±30 % of control travel.After selecting the "Tr. step" column and the desired trim control with the  selection keys of the left or right touch pad, the corresponding entry fi eld will be framed.Thr trimPitch/thrRollPitch axTail rot.Trim0.0sTr. step – time +global 0.0sglobal 0.0sPhase 0.0s0.0s0.0s0.0s0.0s4444Briefl y tap the center SET key of the right touch pad. The current setting will be displayed in inverse video. Now select the desired value, between 0 and 10, with the selection keys of the right touch pad. For example:Thr trimPitch/thrRollPitch axTail rot.Trim0.0sTr. step – time +global 0.0sglobal 0.0sPhase 0.0s0.0s0.0s0.0s0.0s4404A simultaneous tap on the  or  keys of the right touch pad (CLEAR) will reset any change made to the active fi eld back to "4".TimeThe rate of control signal change with respect to the speed of joystick motion can be infl uenced by the entries made in the "– time +" column. Each joystick movement direction, i.e. joystick control channels 1 through 4, can be set individually. This means that respective servos will then follow rapid control position changes only at an accordingly delayed rate. This time delay has a direct effect on the control signal and therefore also commensurately on any servos controlled by the effected controls.The time can be programmed symmetrically for both sides or separate for each control direction. This setting has a programmable range of 0 s to 9.9 s. In this latter case, the given stick control is to be moved to the respective side so that the inverse video fi eld will switch between sides to the one for which the change is to be made. Example:All three servos are to be actuated for swashplate pitch control, e g. a "Pitch" control movement for a "3Sv (2Roll)" swashplate. However, travel for the middle servo is greater than that of the other two servos on the shorter lever.A rash "Pitch" control movement would not operate the nick servo in the middle as quickly as it would the two roll servos on the shorter lever. This would cause a momentary control motion in the "nick" direction. However, if response time for the "pitch" control function were to be reduced by at least the positioning time for the servo in the middle then all three servos would reach their proper positions at the same time. The necessary delay times typically amount to only a few tenths of a second. For example:Thr trimPitch/thrRollPitch axTail rot.Trim4.4sTr. step – time +global 0.0sglobal 0.0sPhase 0.0s0.0s0.0s0.0s0.0s4404A simultaneous tap on the  or  keys of the right touch pad (CLEAR) will reset any change made to the active fi eld back to "0.0 s".
108 Detail program description - Control adjust | Winged models Control adjust Basic procedure for transmitter control and switch assignmentUse the selection keys on the left or right touch pad to scroll to the »Control adjust« option in the multi-function menu: Model selectServo adjustmentStick modeControl adjust Dual Rate / ExpoChannel 1 curve Switch displayCopy / EraseSuppress codes Suppress models Base setup modelModel typeTap briefl y on the center SET key of the right touch pad to open this menu option:0% +100%I5I6I7I8TYP SEL+100%0.0 0.0– travel + –time+0% +100%+100%0.0 0.00% +100%+100%0.0 0.00% +100%+100%0.0 0.0GLGLGLfr ---frfrfr---------OffsetGLNormalIn addition to the two joysticks for control functions 1 to 4 and their trim wheels, the mc-16 HoTT transmitter also has other controls as standard equipment:two 3-way switches• two 2-way switches• two unlockable 2-way switches• two self-restoring 2-way switches• three proportional sliders on the middle console, • designated SR 1 … 3 in the menutwo side-mounted "rotary sliders", designated SD1 • and 2 in the menutwo depressible "rotary controls", designated DG2 • and 4 in the menuthree roller-shaped rotary controls, designated as • DG1, DG3 and DG5 in the menuIn contrast to the two joysticks which, when initialized for a new model memory as a "Winged aircraft" model type will already be confi gured to operate the servos connected to receiver outputs 1 … 4, these "other" operating elements initially remain inactive. Thus, at least in the system's delivered state – as already mentioned on page 68 – or even after initialization of a new model memory with an "aircraft" model type and its "binding" to the receiver intended for installation, only those servos connected to the two joysticks by way of receiver outputs 1 … 4 are able to be operated; any servos which may be connected to receiver outputs 5 … 16 will initially remain inactive in their middle positions.While this may appear a bit awkward at fi rst glance … this is the only way to ensure a completely free selection from among "additional" operating elements while, at the same time, not requiring the "deactivation" of unused operating elements. This is because the only way to ensure an unused operating element can have no effect on the model, even if operated by accident, is to make it inactive, i.e. not assigned to any function.All of the aforementioned operating elements can be freely assigned in this »Control adjust« menu, see page 54, to any function input just to accommodate personal requirements. Equally, this also means that each of these operating elements can also be assigned to to multiple functions at the same time, as needed. For example: the exact same toggle switch assigned to an input in this menu can, at the same time, also have an assignment in the »Timers (general)« menu as an "On/Off" switch, etc.Furthermore, all inputs can be selectively set to global or fl ight-phase specifi c operation if they have been defi ned for fl ight-phases in the »Phase settings« menu, page 142, and »Phase assignment« menu, page 148. The names assigned to given fl ight phases then appear in the second-from-the-bottom display line, e.g. «Normal».Basic procedureUse the 1.  selection keys of the left or right touch pad to select the desired input, "I5 … I16". If necessary, use the 2.  selection keys of the left or right touch pad to change to the desired column.Briefl y tap the center 3. SET key of the right touch pad. The corresponding input fi eld is shown highlighted.Operate the chosen operating element or set the 4. desired value with the selection keys of the right touch pad.Briefl y tap the center 5. SET key of the right touch pad to complete data entry.A simultaneous tap on the 6.  or  keys of the right touch pad (CLEAR) will any setting made back to its respective default value. Column 2, "TYP"Similar to the previously described »Stick mode« menu, this column can be used to defi ne whether further settings for the given input are to have a "GL(obal)" or a "PH(ase-specifi c)" effect. Do this by using the selection keys of the left or right touch pad to select the desired input 5 through 16 in the column labeled "TYP". 0% +100%I5I6I7EITYP SEL+100%0.0 0.0– travel + –time+0% +100%+100%0.0 0.00% +100%+100%0.0 0.00% +100%+100%0.0 0.0GLGLGLfr ---frfrfr---------OffsetGLNormal
109Detail program description - Control adjust | Winged models"GL": The settings for the input in question affect all fl ight phases programmed (if any) and thus act "globally" on the model memory in question."PH": The settings for this input take effect per fl ight phase and must therefore be confi gured separately for each fl ight phase.Note:See page 140 for more information about fl ight phases. Column 3, "Transmitter control/switch assignment"Select an input, 5 through 16, with the  selection keys of the left or right touch pad. Transmitter control assignment Use the selection keys to move into the column labeled SEL. After completing the activation of transmitter control assignment by tapping the center SET key of the right touch pad , the message shown below will appear in the display:0% +100%I5I6I7I8TYP SEL+100%0.0 0.0– travel + –time+0% +100%+100%0.0 0.00% +100%+100%0.0 0.00% +100%+100%0.0 0.0GLGLGLfr ---frfrfr---------OffsetGLNormalMove desiredcontrol adj.Now actuate the desired transmitter control: The notice window will disappear and the designation of the selected transmitter control will appear in the transmitter control assignment window.0% +100%I5I6I7EITYP SEL+100%0.0 0.0– travel + –time+0% +100%+100%0.0 0.00% +100%+100%0.0 0.00% +100%+100%0.0 0.0GLGLGLS11 ---frfrfr---------OffsetGLNormalAlternatively, the center SET key of the right touch pad can be tapped for a second time while the notice window, see above, is still on the display:0% +100%I5I6I7EITYP SEL+100%0.0 0.0– travel + –time+0% +100%+100%0.0 0.00% +100%+100%0.0 0.00% +100%+100%0.0 0.0GLGLGLfr ---frfrfr---------OffsetGLNormalNow use the selection keys of the left or right touch pad to select the desired input out of the list if the respective plug-in location on the transmitter board is occupied or switch the entry to "fr" if the input is to be decoupled from a transmitter control. In this case, or even when a non-existent transmitter control is assigned, the servo corresponding to this input will be in its neutral position and can only be controlled via mixers.0% +100%I5I6I7EITYP SEL+100%0.0 0.0– travel + –time+0% +100%+100%0.0 0.00% +100%+100%0.0 0.00% +100%+100%0.0 0.0GLGLGLS11 ---frfrfr---------OffsetGLNormal Switch assignment If the input is to be actuated like a switch module, the input can alternatively be assigned to a switch.A simple switch can be used to switch back and forth between two limit values, for example motor On/Off.A 2-way momentary or toggle switch, see appendix, achieves the same effect as a 2-channel switch module, for example motor Off/Half/Full. Use the selection keys to move into the column above the switch symbol label. Briefl y tap the center SET key of the right touch pad to activate the option for assigning a switch.0% +100%I5I6I7I8TYP SEL+100%0.0 0.0– travel + –time+0% +100%+100%0.0 0.00% +100%+100%0.0 0.00% +100%+100%0.0 0.0GLGLGL---frfrfr---------OffsetGL frNormalMove desired switchto ON position(ext. switch: ENTER)Actuate the desired toggle switch from its "OFF" to its "ON" position or, for a 3-way switch, beginning from its middle position, assign a switch direction – preferably the "second" direction. This means, if a function is to be switched on by moving the switch forward two positions, i.e. away from the pilot, then begin from the switch's middle position and move the switch away from the pilot. The display will then present the switch number together with a symbol indicating the given switch direction. At the same time, the column label in the footer line will change from SEL into another switch symbol.
110 Detail program description - Control adjust | Winged models0% +100%I5I6I7I8TYP+100%0.0 0.0– travel + –time+0% +100%+100%0.0 0.00% +100%+100%0.0 0.00% +100%+100%0.0 0.0GLGLGLfrfrfr---------OffsetGL ---Normal7Now put the 3-way switch back into its middle position. Move the marker frame as necessary to the left into the column labeled with the new switch symbol, briefl y tap on the center SET key of the right touch pad then assign the switch's other switch direction by once again starting from the middle position but this time move the switch in the other direction.The display will now present the given switch number together with a symbol indicating the given switch direction.0% +100%I5I6I7I8TYP+100%0.0 0.0– travel + –time+0% +100%+100%0.0 0.00% +100%+100%0.0 0.00% +100%+100%0.0 0.0GLGLGLfrfrfr---------OffsetGLNormal78 Erasing a transmitter control or switch assignmentA simultaneous tap on the  or  keys of the right touch pad (CLEAR) while on an input line with an active transmitter control or switch assignment – see above fi gures – will reset the given input back to "fr" and "---".Tips:When assigning switches, pay attention to the • desired switching direction and also that all unused inputs remain "free" or are again reset to "free". This is necessary to ensure that inadvertent actuations of these unused controls cannot cause malfunctions.The travel setting described below allows the • appropriate end state to be established for an assigned switch. Column 4, "Offset"The control center for the given control, i.e. its zero point, can be changed in this column. The adjustment range lies between -125 % and +125 %.0% +100%I5I6I7I8TYP+100%0.0 0.0– travel + –time+0% +100%+100%0.0 0.00% +100%+100%0.0 0.00% +100%+100%0.0 0.0GLGLGLfrfrfr---------OffsetGLNormal78A simultaneous tap on the  or  keys of the right touch pad (CLEAR) will reset the entry fi eld value displayed in inverse video back to "0 %". Column 5, "– travel +"This column is used to set servo travel symmetrically or asymmetrically for each side. The setting range is ±125 % of normal servo travel.Select an input, 5 through 16, with the  selection keys of the left or right touch pad.To set symmetric travel, i.e. control-side independent travel, the respective operating element (transmitter control or switch) is to be put into a position in which the travel setting will be covered on both sides by the marker frame.0% +100%E5E6E7E8Typ+100%0.0 0.0– Weg + –Zeit+0% +100%+100%0.0 0.00% +100%+100%0.0 0.00% +100%+100%0.0 0.0GLGLGLfrfrfr---------OffsetGLNormal78To set asymmetric travel, the respective operating element (transmitter control or switch) is to be moved to the side to be set such that the marker frame only includes the value to be changed.0% +100%I5I6I7I8TYP+100%0.0 0.0– travel + –time+0% +100%+100%0.0 0.00% +100%+100%0.0 0.00% +100%+100%0.0 0.0GLGLGLfrfrfr---------OffsetGLNormal78The value setting is activated by briefl y touching the center SET key of the right touch pad. The value fi eld/s will be displayed in inverse video. Values can be changed with the selection keys of the right touch pad.0% +111%I5I6I7I8TYP+111%0.0 0.0– travel + –time+0% +100%+100%0.0 0.00% +100%+100%0.0 0.00% +100%+100%0.0 0.0GLGLGLfrfrfr---------OffsetGLNormal78
111Detail program description - Control adjust | Winged models0% +88%I5I6I7I8TYP+100%0.0 0.0– travel + –time+0% +100%+100%0.0 0.00% +100%+100%0.0 0.00% +100%+100%0.0 0.0GLGLGLfrfrfr---------OffsetGLNormal78Another brief tap on the center SET key of the right touch pad will complete the entry.Negative and positive parameter values are possible in order to appropriately adapt the control's direction or effect.A simultaneous tap on the  or  keys of the right touch pad (CLEAR) will reset the changed parameter displayed in inverse video back to "+100 %".Important:In contrast to servo travel settings, changing the control travel setting affects all "downstream" mixer and coupling inputs, i.e. any and all servos actuated by the given transmitter control. Column 6, "–time+"Each of the function inputs 5 … 16 can be assigned a symmetrical or asymmetric time delay of between 0 and 9.9 s.Move the marker frame to the right beyond the column labeled "– travel +" with the  selection key of the left or right touch pad.To set a symmetric, i.e. control-side independent, time delay, the respective operating element (transmitter control or switch) is to be put into a position in which the time setting is covered on both sides by the marker frame.0% +111%I5I6I7I8TYP+111%0.0 0.0– travel + –time+0% +100%+100%0.0 0.00% +100%+100%0.0 0.00% +100%+100%0.0 0.0GLGLGLfrfrfr---------OffsetGLNormal78To set an asymmetric time delay, move the given transmitter control (proportional control or switch) as necessary to the side to be set such that only the value to be changed is covered.0% +111%I5I6I7I8TYP+111%0.0 0.0– travel + –time+0% +100%+100%0.0 0.00% +100%+100%0.0 0.00% +100%+100%0.0 0.0GLGLGLfrfrfr---------OffsetGLNormal78Briefl y tap the center SET key of the right touch pad to activate value setting. The value fi eld will be displayed in inverse video. Use the selection keys of the right touch pad to change the value in a range of 0.0 to 9.9 s.Another brief tap on the center SET key of the right touch pad will complete the entry.A simultaneous tap on the  or  keys of the right touch pad (CLEAR) will reset the changed parameter displayed in inverse video back to 0.0.
112 Detail program description - Control adjust | Helicopters Control adjustBasic procedure for transmitter control and switch assignmentUse the selection keys on the left or right touch pad to scroll to the »Control adjust« option in the multi-function menu: Model selectServo adjustment Stick modeControl adjust Dual Rate / ExpoChannel 1 curve Switch displayCopy / EraseSuppress codes Suppress models Base setup modelHelicopter typeTap briefl y on the center SET key of the right touch pad to open this menu option:0% +100%I5Thr6Gyr7I8TYP SEL+100%0.0 0.0– travel + –time+0% +100%+100%0.0 0.00% +100%+100%0.0 0.00% +100%+100%0.0 0.0GLGLGLGLfr ---frfrfr---------OffsetI15 GL 0% +100%+100%0.0 0.0fr ---………………………Tl16 GL 0% +100%+100%0.0 0.0Lv1 ---In addition to the two joysticks for control functions 1 to 4 and their trim wheels, the mc-16 HoTT transmitter also has other controls as standard equipment:two 3-way switches• two 2-way switches• two unlockable 2-way switches• two self-restoring 2-way switches• three proportional sliders on the middle console, • designated SR 1 … 3 in the menutwo side-mounted "rotary sliders", designated SD1 • and 2 in the menutwo depressible "rotary controls", designated DG2 • and 4 in the menuthree roller-shaped rotary controls, designated as • DG1, DG3 and DG5 in the menu In contrast to the two joysticks which, even for a newly initialized "Helicopter" model type will automatically use the servos attached to receiver outputs 1 … 4 and 6, the aforementioned "other" operating elements – except for the standard assignment of servo 6 to the right-side proportional slider, designated in this menu as SD1 (throttle limiter) – are initially inactive. One of the effects of this is that (as already mentioned on page 68) with a factory-fresh system – as with a newly initialized model memory for a "Helicopter" model type following its "binding" to the intended receiver – only those servos connected to receiver outputs 1 … 4 and – depending on the position of the throttle limiter – servo 6 can be moved by the two joysticks. Any servos connected to plug-in locations 5 and 7 through 15, on the other hand, will simply remain at their center positions.While this may appear a bit awkward at fi rst glance … this is the only way to ensure a completely free selection from among "additional" operating elements while, at the same time, not requiring the "deactivation" of unused operating elements. This is because the only way to ensure an unused operating element can have no effect on the model, even if operated by accident, is to make it inactive, i.e. not assigned to any function.All of the aforementioned operating elements can be freely assigned in this »Control adjust« menu, see page 54, to any function input just to accommodate personal requirements. Equally, this also means that each of these operating elements can also be assigned to to multiple functions at the same time, as needed. For example: the exact same toggle switch assigned to an input in this menu can, at the same time, also have an assignment in the »Timers (general)« menu as an "On/Off" switch, etc.Furthermore, all inputs can be selectively set to global or fl ight-phase specifi c operation if they have been defi ned for fl ight-phases in the »Phase settings« menu, page 142, and »Phase assignment« menu, page 148. The names assigned to given fl ight phases then appear in the second-from-the-bottom display line, e.g. «Normal».Note:As a rule, input 6 must kept "free" for a helicopter model. On this, see "Throttle" on the next double page.Basic procedureUse the 1.  selection keys of the left or right touch pad to select the desired input: I5, Thr6, Gyr7, I8 … 15 or Tl16. If necessary, use the 2.  selection keys of the left or right touch pad to select the desired column.Briefl y tap the center 3. SET key of the right touch pad. The corresponding input fi eld is shown highlighted.Operate the chosen operating element or set the 4. desired value with the selection keys of the right touch pad.Briefl y tap the center 5. SET key of the right touch pad to complete data entry.A simultaneous tap on the 6.  or  keys of the right touch pad (CLEAR) will any setting made back to its respective default value.
113Detail program description - Control adjust | Helicoptersin its neutral position and can only be controlled via mixers.0% +100%I5Thr6Gyr7E8TYP SEL+100%0.0 0.0– travel + –time+0% +100%+100%0.0 0.00% +100%+100%0.0 0.00% +100%+100%0.0 0.0GLGLGLS11 ---frfrfr---------OffsetGLNormal Switch assignment If the input is to be actuated like a switch module, the input can alternatively be assigned to a switch.A simple switch can be used to switch back and forth between two limit values, for example motor On/Off.A 2-way momentary or toggle switch, see appendix, achieves the same effect as a 2-channel switch module, for example motor Off/Half/Full. Use the selection keys to move into the column above the switch symbol label. Briefl y tap the center SET key of the right touch pad to activate the option for assigning a switch.0% +100%I5Thr6Gyr7I8TYP SEL+100%0.0 0.0– travel + –time+0% +100%+100%0.0 0.00% +100%+100%0.0 0.00% +100%+100%0.0 0.0GLGLGL---frfrfr---------OffsetGL frNormalMove desired switchto ON position(ext. switch: ENTER)Actuate the desired toggle switch from its "OFF" to its "ON" position or, for a 3-way switch, beginning from its middle position, assign a switch direction – preferably the "second" direction. This means, if a function is to be switched on by moving the switch forward two positions, i.e. away from the pilot, then begin from the switch's middle position and move the switch away from the pilot. Column 2, "typ"Similar to the previously described »Stick mode« menu, this column can be used to defi ne whether further settings for the given input are to have a "GL(obal)" or a "PH(ase-specifi c)" effect. Do this by using the selection keys of the left or right touch pad to select the desired input 5 through 16 in the column labeled "TYP".0% +100%I5Thr6Gyr7E8TYP SEL+100%0.0 0.0– travel + –time+0% +100%+100%0.0 0.00% +100%+100%0.0 0.00% +100%+100%0.0 0.0GLGLGLfr ---frfrfr---------OffsetGLNormal"GL": The settings for the input in question affect all fl ight phases programmed (if any) and thus act "globally" on the model memory in question."PH": The settings for this input take effect per fl ight phase and must therefore be confi gured separately for each fl ight phase.Note:See page 142 for more information about fl ight phases. Column 3, "Transmitter control/switch assignment"Using the  selection keys of the left or right touch pad to select an input: I5, Thr6, Gyr7, I8 … 15 or Tl16. Transmitter control assignmentUse the selection keys to move into the column labeled SEL. After completing the activation of transmitter control assignment by tapping the center SET key of the right touch pad , the message shown below will appear in the display:0% +100%I5Thr6Gyr7I8TYP SEL+100%0.0 0.0– travel + –time+0% +100%+100%0.0 0.00% +100%+100%0.0 0.00% +100%+100%0.0 0.0GLGLGLfr ---frfrfr---------OffsetGLNormalMove desiredcontrol adj.Now actuate the desired transmitter control: The notice window will disappear and the designation of the selected transmitter control will appear in the transmitter control assignment window.0% +100%I5Thr6Gyr7E8TYP SEL+100%0.0 0.0– travel + –time+0% +100%+100%0.0 0.00% +100%+100%0.0 0.00% +100%+100%0.0 0.0GLGLGLS11 ---frfrfr---------OffsetGLNormalAlternatively, the center SET key of the right touch pad can be tapped for a second time while the notice window, see above, is still on the display:0% +100%I5Thr6Gyr7E8TYP SEL+100%0.0 0.0– travel + –time+0% +100%+100%0.0 0.00% +100%+100%0.0 0.00% +100%+100%0.0 0.0GLGLGLfr ---frfrfr---------OffsetGLNormalNow use the selection keys of the left or right touch pad to select the desired input out of the list if the respective plug-in location on the transmitter board is occupied or switch the entry to "fr" if the input is to be decoupled from a transmitter control. In this case, or even when a non-existent transmitter control is assigned, the servo corresponding to this input will be
114 Detail program description - Control adjust | HelicoptersThe display will then present the switch number together with a symbol indicating the given switch direction. At the same time, the column label in the footer line will change from SEL into another switch symbol.0% +100%I5Thr6Gyr7I8TYP+100%0.0 0.0– travel + –time+0% +100%+100%0.0 0.00% +100%+100%0.0 0.00% +100%+100%0.0 0.0GLGLGLfrfrfr---------OffsetGL ---Normal7Now put the 3-way switch back into its middle position. Move the marker frame as necessary to the left into the column labeled with the new switch symbol, briefl y tap on the center SET key of the right touch pad then assign the switch's other switch direction by once again starting from the middle position but this time move the switch in the other direction.The display will now present the given switch number together with a symbol indicating the given switch direction.0% +100%I5Thr6Gyr7I8TYP+100%0.0 0.0– travel + –time+0% +100%+100%0.0 0.00% +100%+100%0.0 0.00% +100%+100%0.0 0.0GLGLGLfrfrfr---------OffsetGLNormal78A simultaneous tap on the  or  keys of the right touch pad (CLEAR) while on an input line with an active transmitter switch assignment – see above fi gure – will reset the input back to "fr" and "---".Tips:When assigning switches, pay attention to the • desired switching direction and also that all unused inputs remain "free" or are again reset to "free". This is necessary to ensure that inadvertent actuations of these unused controls cannot cause malfunctions.The travel setting described below allows the • appropriate end state to be established for an assigned switch. Column 4, "offset"The control center for the given control, i.e. its zero point, can be changed in this column. The adjustment range lies between -125 % and +125 %.0% +100%I5Thr6Gyr7I8TYP+100%0.0 0.0– travel + –time+0% +100%+100%0.0 0.00% +100%+100%0.0 0.00% +100%+100%0.0 0.0GLGLGLfrfrfr---------OffsetGLNormal78A simultaneous tap on the  or  keys of the right touch pad (CLEAR) will reset the entry fi eld value displayed in inverse video back to "0 %". Column 5, "–travel+"This column is used to set servo travel symmetrically or asymmetrically for each side. The setting range is ±125 % of normal servo travel.Use the  selection keys of the left or right touch pad to select an input: I5, Thr6, Gyr7, I8 … 15 or Tl16.To set symmetric travel, i.e. control-side independent, put the respective operating element (proportional control or switch) into a position where the marker frame encloses both sides of the travel setting.0% +88%I5Thr6Gyr7I8TYP+111%0.0 0.0– travel + –time+0% +100%+100%0.0 0.00% +100%+100%0.0 0.00% +100%+100%0.0 0.0GLGLGLfrfrfr---------OffsetGLNormal78To set asymmetric travel, the respective control (proportional control or switch) is to be moved to the side to be set such that the marker frame only encloses the value to be changed.0% +100%I5Thr6Gyr7I8TYP+111%0.0 0.0– travel + –time+0% +100%+100%0.0 0.00% +100%+100%0.0 0.00% +100%+100%0.0 0.0GLGLGLfrfrfr---------OffsetGLNormal78Briefl y tap the center SET key of the right touch pad to activate value setting. The value fi eld is shown highlighted. Values can be changed with the selection keys of the right touch pad.0% +111%I5Thr6Gyr7I8TYP+111%0.0 0.0– travel + –time+0% +100%+100%0.0 0.00% +100%+100%0.0 0.00% +100%+100%0.0 0.0GLGLGLfrfrfr---------OffsetGLNormal78
115Detail program description - Control adjust | Helicopters Thr60% +88%I5Thr6Gyr7I8TYP+111%0.0 0.0– travel + –time+0% +100%+100%0.0 0.00% +100%+100%0.0 0.00% +100%+100%0.0 0.0GLGLGLfrfrfr---------OffsetGLNormal78In principle, the helicopter program also permits the individual inputs to be assigned to any existing transmitter control (proportional controls and switches).However, please note here that some of the inputs available on this menu are already assigned to helicopter-specifi c functions, and therefore cannot be re-assigned in this way.Nevertheless, the receiver layout on page 65 indicates that the throttle servo or the speed controller of an electrically-powered helicopter must be connected to receiver output "6", since control channel "6" is reserved for motor power regulation.Unlike a fi xed-wing model aircraft, the throttle servo or speed controller is not directly controlled by the joystick or other transmitter control but rather by a complex mixer system, see »Helicopter mixer« menu beginning page 176. Furthermore, the "Throttle limit function" described on the next page also infl uences this mixer system.Assigning a transmitter control or switch on the "Throttle" line, or to its supplementary control signal, would unnecessarily "confuse" this complex mixer system. For this reason the "Throttle" input MUST be left "free".0% +88%I5Thr6Gyr7I8TYP+100%0.0 0.0– travel + –time+0% +100%+100%0.0 0.00% +100%+100%0.0 0.00% +100%+100%0.0 0.0GLGLGLfrfrfr---------OffsetGLNormal78Another brief tap on the center SET key of the right touch pad will complete the entry.Negative and positive parameter values are possible in order to appropriately adapt the control's direction or effect.A simultaneous tap on the  or  keys of the right touch pad (CLEAR) will reset the changed parameter displayed in inverse video back to "+100 %".Important:In contrast to altering servo travel, changing the control travel setting affects all "downstream" mixer and coupling inputs, i.e. any and all servos that could be actuated by the transmitter controls concerned. Column 6, "– time +"Each of the function inputs, I5 … 16, can be assigned a symmetric or asymmetric time delay of between 0 and 9.9 s.Move the marker frame to the right beyond the column labeled "– travel +" with the  selection key of the left or right touch pad.To set a symmetric time delay, i.e. control-side independent, move the affected transmitter control (proportional control or switch) as necessary to a position such that the marker frame encloses both sides of the time setting.0% +111%I5Thr6Gyr7I8TYP+111%0.0 0.0– travel + –time+0% +100%+100%0.0 0.00% +100%+100%0.0 0.00% +100%+100%0.0 0.0GLGLGLfrfrfr---------OffsetGLNormal78To set an asymmetric time delay, move the affected operating element (transmitter control or switch) as necessary to a position such that the marker frame encloses only the value to be changed.0% +111%I5Thr6Gyr7I8TYP+111%0.0 0.0– travel + –time+0% +100%+100%0.0 0.00% +100%+100%0.0 0.00% +100%+100%0.0 0.0GLGLGLfrfrfr---------OffsetGLNormal78Briefl y tap the center SET key of the right touch pad to activate value setting. The value fi eld is shown highlighted. Values can be changed with the selection keys of the right touch pad.Another brief tap on the center SET key of the right touch pad will complete the entry.A simultaneous tap on the  or  keys of the right touch pad (CLEAR) will reset the changed parameter displayed in inverse video back to 0.0.
116 Detail program description - Control adjust | Helicopters " Gyr7"0% +88%I5Thr6Gyr7I8TYP+111%0.0 0.0– travel + –time+0% +100%+100%0.0 0.00% +100%+100%0.0 0.00% +100%+100%0.0 0.0GLGLGLfrfrfr---------OffsetGLNormal78Most of the latest gyro systems not only feature infi nitely variable proportional gyro gain setting, but also offer a choice of two separate types of gain mode on the transmitter. If the gyro in use also has this feature then this menu option provides the opportunity to specify both a "normal" gyro effect as well as a "heading-lock mode" in the "Offset" column within a range of ±125 %. Such a specifi cation can include a certain effect to fl y normal, slow fl ights with maximum stability or the reduction of the gyro effect for fast circuit fl ights and aerobatics.To proceed as described above, use fl ight phase switching to enter different settings on the "Gyro" line.Important notice:The value of this option is identical to the offset value set in the "Gyro offset" option of the »Helicopter mixer« menu, page 185. For this reason, any changes made always affect the other menu directly, and vice versa.Beginning with these preset – static – fl ight phase-specifi c settings, a transmitter control assigned to the "Gyr7" line, for example one of the middle console sliders, can be used to vary the gyro effect around the respective "offset point". The center point of the control corresponds to the setting specifi ed by the offset. If the transmitter control is moved from this center point in the direction of full travel, gyro gain increases proportionally; it diminishes when moved in the opposite direction. This provides a fast and straightforward method of adjusting gyro effect even in fl ight – e.g. to suit changing weather conditions – or to test-fl y optimal settings. Furthermore, the range of the gyro's effect within transmitter control travel in both directions can be restricted by software. In this context, be sure to comply with the instructions accompanying the gyro, otherwise there is a risk the helicopter will be impossible to fl y.Adjusting the gyro sensorTo achieve the maximum possible level of stabilization for the helicopter with the gyro along the vertical axis, observe the following:The controls should have as little friction and • "play" as possible.There should be no "spring" in the control linkage.• Use a strong and – in particular – a fast servo. • When the gyro sensor detects a model rotation, the faster its response – a corresponding corrective change to tail rotor thrust – takes effect, the further the gyro gain adjuster can be moved without causing the tail of the model to start oscillating, and the better the model's stability about its vertical axis. If the response is slower, there is a risk that the model's tail will start to oscillate even at low gyro gain settings. Here, further reductions to gyro gain will need to be made – either by using the default value under "Gyro" or the associated transmitter control – to eliminate the oscillation.If the model is fl ying forward at high speed or hovering in a powerful headwind, the net result of the stabilizing effect of the vertical fi n combined with the gyro may also lead to an overreaction that once again manifests itself through tail oscillation. To achieve optimum gyro stabilization under all conditions, make use of the option to adapt gyro effect with one of the transmitter's proportional controls.
117Detail program description - Control adjust | Helicoptersnot only provides a convenient means to start and stop the motor but may also prove to be more than an insignifi cant safety improvement! For example, just imagine what could happen if, while carrying the helicopter to the take-off site with the motor running, the C1 joystick were to be inadvertently operated … If the carburetor or speed controller is open too far when the transmitter is switched on, an audible warning will be sounded and the basic display will show the message:Throttle too high!Tip:Take advantage of the »Servo display« to observe the infl uence of the throttle limit control. The »Servo display« screen can be reached from almost any menu position with a simultaneous tap on the  selection keys of the left touch pad, Bear in mind that servo output 6 controls the throttle servo on the mc-16HoTT! Basic idle settingPut the throttle limit into its "full throttle" position by pushing the throttle limit regulator – by default, the right side proportional slider SD1 – all the way to its forward position limit. Set the throttle/pitch joystick to the maximum pitch position and also check the sub-menu "Channel 1 CURVE" of the menu …»Helicopter mixer« (page 176 … 191)… to ensure that a standard throttle curve is active. If, for example, the standard throttle curve has already been changed following the initialization of a model memory then this must be at least temporarily reset to the values "Point L = -100 %", "Point 1 = 0 %" and "Point H = +100 %":"Tl16"The proportional slider SD1, mounted on the right side of the transmitter, is assigned by default to input "Tl16".0%I13 +100%I14I15Tl16TYP+100%– travel + –time+0% +100%+100%0.0 0.00% +100%+100%0.0 0.00% +100%+100%0.0 0.0GLGLGLfrfrLv1---------OffsetGLNormal0.0 0.0fr ---SETThis pre-assignment makes it unnecessary to program the two fl ight phases as may be familiar from use of other remote control systems – one "with idle-up" and one "without idle-up" – because the mc-16HoTT program offers a much more fl exible approach to fi ne-tuning and optimizing increases to system rotational speed below the hover point than the so-called "idle-up". If it is nevertheless preferable for the helicopter to be programmed "with idle-up", then deactivate the "throttle limit" function described below by setting input "Tl16" to "fr". Meaning and application of "throttle limit"As already mentioned under "Throttle", and in contrast to fi xed-wing models, the power output of a helicopter's drive system is not controlled directly with the C1 joystick, but only indirectly via the throttle curve settings in the »Helicopter mixer« menu or – if the model features a speed controller – via that mechanism.Note:Of course for different fl ight phases, fl ight phase programming can be used to set individual throttle curves.Nevertheless, both methods of output control de facto result in the helicopter carburetor never approaching Throttle limit functionanything near its idle speed under "normal" fl ight conditions, and that the motor can therefore neither be started or stopped cleanly without some other means of intervention. The "throttle limit" feature resolves this problem elegantly by using a separate transmitter control – by default the SD1 proportional slider mounted on the right side of the transmitter – to limit the throttle servo or the output level of a speed controller. In this way, it is possible to "throttle back" with the throttle limit control, even as far as the idle setting, at which point the trim control for the throttle/pitch joystick takes over or directly shuts off an electric drive. Conversely, the throttle servo or speed controller can only open up to its full-throttle position if the throttle limit control has also released the full servo travel path.The value set on the (right-hand) plus side of the "travel" column must therefore always be set high enough to ensure that the maximum setting of the throttle limit control never restricts the full-throttle position achievable with throttle curve settings – which typically means setting a value in the range +100 % to 125 %. 0%I13 +100%I14I15Tl16TYP+100%– travel + –time+0% +100%+100%0.0 0.00% +100%+100%0.0 0.00% +125%+100%0.0 0.0GLGLGLfrfrLv1---------OffsetGLNormal0.0 0.0fr ---SETThe value on the (left-hand) minus side of the "travel" column should be set so that the throttle limit control can safely cut off an electric drive or close a carburetor suffi ciently to cut off a combustion motor in conjunction with – digital – C1 trim. Because of this, leave this value (initially) at +100 %.Furthermore, this variable "limitation" of throttle travel
118 Detail program description - Control adjust | HelicoptersChannel 1 CURVECurveoff PointOutputInput +100%+100%H+–100O U T P U T0%+100%Note:Since throttle trim has no effect if the throttle limiter is open, its position here is meaningless.Now – without starting the combustion motor – adjust the throttle servo, preferably mechanically and, if necessary, also by way of the servo 6 travel adjustment option in the »Servo adjustment« menu, so that the carburetor is completely open. Now close the throttle limiter completely by moving the side proportional slider all the way to its rear limit. Use the trim wheel of the Throttle/Pitch joystick to place the trim position marker into the motor OFF position or actuate the "Thr. CutOff" option, see page 90.Note:In contrast, when the throttle limiter is closed, the position of the throttle/collective pitch stick is meaningless. It can therefore remain at the maximum collective pitch position so that, when adjusting carburetor linkages, the throttle limiter alone can be used to switch between full throttle (throttle limiter open) and "Motor OFF" (throttle limiter closed).Now, with the throttle limiter closed, adjust the carburetor linkages so that the carburetor is (just) completely closed. Take extreme care to ensure that the throttle servo does not become mechanically blocked in either of its end positions (full throttle/motor OFF).To complete this basic confi guration, the idle trim adjustment range must now be matched against point "L" on the throttle curve. Do this by setting Point "L" of the "Channel 1 CURVE" mixer, in the »Helicopter mixer« menu, to about -65 to -70 %.Channel 1 CURVECurveoff PointOutputInput –100%–66%L+–100O U T P U T0%–66%To confi gure a smooth transition from the idle trim to the throttle curve exactly, the collective pitch stick should be moved to and fro slightly at its minimum position with the throttle limiter closed and the idle trim fully open. The throttle servo must not move as well! Any further adjustments to the throttle curve must of course be made later in fl ight.The motor is always started with the throttle limiter fully closed, whereby idle is set exclusively by using the trim wheel of the throttle/pitch joystick and the motor is shut off by the "Thr. CutOff" option. Notes:Take advantage of the »• Servo display« to observe the infl uence of the throttle limit control. The »Servo display« screen can be reached from almost any menu position with a simultaneous tap on the  selection keys of the left touch pad, Bear in mind that servo output 6 controls the throttle servo on the mc-16 HoTT!A servo connected to output 16 can be used, • independently of this, for other purposes by means of mixers, provided that this servo is decoupled from the operating element specifi ed by function input 16 via the »Mix only channel« menu; see page 205.The throttle restriction set by the throttle limiter • is shown as a horizontal bar in the throttle curve diagram on the second display page of the "Channel 1 CURVE" option in the »Helicopter mixer« menu (see page 180). The output signal for the throttle servo cannot be higher than the level set by the horizontal bar:Channel 1 CURVECurveoff PointOutputInput 0%0%?+–100O U T P U T0%0%actualposition of theThrottle limiterThe above diagram shows precisely this scenario: in the above example, the throttle limit control is set to about -60 % and thus restricts the movement of the throttle servo to about -60 % of full travel.
119Detail program description - Control adjust | Helicopters Time delay for the throttle limiterTo safely prevent the carburetor from opening too rapidly, assign the throttle limiter input "Tl16" to a time delay that takes effect only in the direction of full throttle. This applies especially if the throttle limiter is controlled by a switch rather than, as preset, with the right-side proportional rotary slider.To set a delay time, push the throttle limit control to its forward limit or move the switch into its full-throttle position then use the selection keys of the left or right touch pad to select the "–time+" column.0%I13 +100%I14I15Tl16TYP+100%– travel + –time+0% +100%+100%0.0 0.00% +100%+100%0.0 0.00% +100%+100%0.0GLGLGLfrfrLv1---------OffsetGLNormal0.0 0.0fr ---0.0SETAfter a brief tap on the center SET key of the right touch pad, the selection keys of the left or right touch pad can be used to select the desired time delay, e.g. 5 seconds.0%I13 +100%I14I15Tl16TYP+100%– travel + –time+0% +100%+100%0.0 0.00% +100%+100%0.0 0.00% +100%+100%0.0GLGLGLfrfrLv1---------OffsetGLNormal0.0 0.0fr ---5.0SETA brief tap on the center SET key of the right touch pad or the ESC key of the left touch pad will complete the entry.As already explained on page 106, when "Thr AR" is selected in the "Pitch/thr" line of the …»Stick mode« (page 106)Pitch/thrRollPitch axTail rot.Trim0.0sTr. step – time +global 0.0sglobal 0.0sglobal 0.0s0.0s0.0s0.0s0.0s4444Thr AR… menu then digital trim of the throttle/pitch joystick is only active for the «Autorotation» fl ight phase. As a consequence, the motor's idle speed cannot be regulated in the "normal" fl ight phases with the C1 trim control. To ensure the availability of suffi cient setting options, use of the "Expo throttle limiter" is recommended.The exponential curve characteristic offered by the …»Helicopter type« (page 98)Linearis. swashpl. noRotor direction rightHELTYPEPitch min. rearSELExpo throttle lim. 0%… menu's sub-menu can be used to alter the control behavior of the throttle limit control such that the latter provides suffi ciently sensitive regulation of the idle setting and can also stop the motor.In this case, with a completely closed throttle limiter – in contrast to the previously described setting – use the »Control adjust« menu set the "-" side of the column labeled "- travel +" for the "Tl16" Throttle limit in combination with "Thr AR" in the »Stick mode« menuline such that the throttle limiter fully closes the carburetor, i.e. the motor is safely switched off at this control position.Following this, move the throttle limit control to its center point and change the % value of the "Expo thro lim." line in the »Helicopter type« menu, page 98, until the carburetor is in a position suitable for starting the motor. Now start the motor, and adjust the value if necessary until the motor idles reliably in this throttle limit control position.The value for the plus side of the "- travel +" column should be increased, as described before, to +125 % so that the full-throttle position of the throttle servo is also reliably released from the throttle limiter.Finally, set an asymmetrical time delay of, say 4.0 seconds, so the motor also picks up speed gradually even if the side proportional slider is pushed forward too quickly. Select the time preset to correlate to how far the carburetor opens up at the minimum collective pitch position. The value set is to be optimized by testing.
120 Detail program description - Dual Rate / Expo | Winged models Dual Rate / ExpoConfi gurable control characteristics for aileron, elevator and rudderUse the selection keys of the left or right touch pad to scroll to the »Dual Rate / Expo« menu option in the Multi-function menu: Model selectServo adjustmentStick modeControl adjust Dual Rate / ExpoChannel 1 curve Switch displayCopy / EraseSuppress codes Suppress models Base setup modelModel typeOpen this menu option with a tap on the center SET key of the right touch pad.0%0%0%AileronElevatorRudderDUAL–––––––––SEL–––––––––100%100%100%EXPOSELThe Dual-Rate-/Expo function permits fl ight-phase dependent switching and control over the defl ection and characteristics of the aileron (Ail), elevator (Ele) and rudder (Rud) (control functions 2 … 4) by way of switches. The »Channel 1 curve« menu, see text beginning page 128, can be used to set an individual curve characteristic for control function 1 (throttle/brake) with up to 8 separately programmable points.Similar to control travel settings in the »Control adjust« menu, Dual Rate operates directly on the respective control function, independent of whether it is an individual servo or multiple servos connected via complex mixer and coupling functions. The control travel for each switch position can be set to between 0 and 125 % of normal full travel. Expo, on the other hand, enables fi ner-grained control of the model for values larger than 0 % around the center position of the primary control function (aileron, elevator and rudder), without forfeiting full movement at the end-points of joystick travel. For values less than 0 %, the reverse is true: control increases around the neutral position and diminishes towards the end-points. The degree of "progression" can therefore be set within a total range of -100 % to +100 %, where 0 % equates to the normal, linear control characteristics.Rotary-output servos, now generally commonplace, offer another application. This is because the actual control surface movement is not linear: as the rotational angle of the output disc or lever increases, the control surface rate of travel over the control linkage continually decreases – depending on the position of the linkage point on the output disc. This effect can be counteracted with Expo values greater than 0 % such that rotational angle travel increases over-proportionally with increasing joystick throw.The Expo setting also affects the relevant control function directly, whether this controls a single servo or multiple servos – via any number of mixer and coupling functions.For both Dual Rate and Expo functions, switch assignment can be set up in any way desired, which therefore permits the triggering of multiple functions using one and the same switch. This, in turn, offers the opportunity to link the triggering of Dual Rate and Expo functions to a single switch: this offers many advantages – particularly for very high-speed models.The graphic screen displays the curve characteristics directly. After selecting the appropriate line, the dotted vertical line will follow the movement of the respective joystick so a better evaluation of the transmitter-control-travel dependent curve value can be made.Flight phase-dependent Dual Rate and Expo settingsIf fl ight phases are set up in the »Phase settings« and »Phase assignment« menus and each assigned a name,e.g. "Normal", the name in question will be displayed at the bottom left of the display. Just actuate the respective switch to switch between fl ight phases.Basic procedureSwitch to the desired fl ight phase then use the 1.  selection keys of the left or right touch pad to select the desired line: "Aileron", "Elevator" or "Rudder".Use the 2.  selection keys of the left or right touch pad to change into the column labeled "EXPO".Tap the center 3. SET key of the right touch pad. The corresponding input fi eld is shown highlighted.Use the selection keys of the right touch pad to set 4. the desired value.Tap the center 5. SET key of the right touch pad to complete the entry.A simultaneous tap on the 6.  or  keys of the right touch pad (CLEAR) will any setting made back to its respective default value.Dual Rate functionIf a switchover between two variants is desired, assign a switch in the column labeled with the switch symbol (as described in the section "Assigning transmitter controls, switches and control switches" on page 56).
121Detail program description - Dual Rate / Expo | Winged modelsbottom edge of the display in order to separately change the dual-rate values shown in inverse video for each of the two switch positions.0%0%0%AileronElevatorRudderDUAL––––––SEL–––––––––100%100%EXPOSEL3Normal111%0%0%0%AileronElevatorRudderDUAL––––––SEL–––––––––100%100%EXPOSEL3Normal88%At the same time, the Dual-Rate curve will be presented in the graph. A simultaneous tap on the  or  keys of the right touch pad (CLEAR) will reset a changed entry fi eld value displayed in inverse video back to "100 %".Caution:For safety reasons, Dual Rate value settings should not be less than 20 %.Some examples of Dual Rate values:Servo travelServo travelServo travelStick deflection Stick deflection Stick deflectionDual Rate = 100% Dual Rate = 50% Dual Rate = 20%0%0%0%AileronElevatorRudderDUAL–––––––––SEL–––––––––100%100%100%EXPOSELMove desired switchto ON position(ext. switch: ENTER)NormalIf necessary, this may also be one of the transmitter control switches C1 … C8 or C1i … C8i or one of the logical switches L1 … L8 or L1i … L8i from the list of "expanded switches".The switch so assigned appears on the display, together with a switch icon that indicates the switch's switching direction.In the case of "C" or "L" switches, the joystick or another transmitter control or a certain switching logic can itself be used as a switch. However, such a control switch must have been appropriately defi ned in the »Control switch« menu, see page 135, and a logical switch must have been appropriately defi ned in the »Logical switch« menu, see page 138.Whichever switch has been assigned … the respective switch will appear in the display together with a switch symbol indicating the switch's direction if actuated, e.g. in the «Normal» fl ight phase.0%0%0%AileronElevatorRudderDUAL––––––SEL–––––––––100%100%100%EXPOSEL3NormalOnce the value fi eld has been activated with a brief tap on the SET key of the right touch pad, use the selection keys of the left or right touch pad to move into the Dual-Rate value column labeled SEL at the Exponential functionIf a switchover between two variants is desired, assign a switch in the column labeled with the switch symbol (as described in the section "Assigning transmitter controls, switches and control switches" on page 56).0%0%0%AileronElevatorRudderDUAL––––––SEL–––––––––100%100%100%EXPOSELMove desired switchto ON position(ext. switch: ENTER)Normal3If necessary, this may also be one of the transmitter control switches C1 … C8 or C1i … C8i or one of the logical switches L1 … L8 or L1i … L8i from the list of "expanded switches".The switch so assigned appears on the display, together with a switch icon that indicates the switch's switching direction.In the case of "C" or "L" switches, the joystick or another transmitter control or a certain switching logic can itself be used as a switch. However, such a control switch must have been appropriately defi ned in the »Control switch« menu, see page 135, and a logical switch must have been appropriately defi ned in the »Logical switch« menu, see page 138.Whichever switch has been assigned … the respective switch appears on the display together with a switch icon that indicates the switch's respective direction when moved.
122 Detail program description - Dual Rate / Expo | Winged models0%0%0%AileronElevatorRudderDUAL–––SEL–––––––––100%100%100%EXPOSELNormal3Select the right-hand column at the lower edge of the display marked with SEL and activate the value fi eld with a brief tap on the center SET key of the right touch pad, the selection keys on the left or right touch pad can now be used to alter the Expo value shown in the highlighted fi eld, separately for each of the two switch positions.Now, for example, there is an opportunity to fl y with a linear curve characteristic with the switch in one direction, and to preset a value other than 0 % for the other switch direction:+50%0%0%AileronElevatorRudderDUAL–––SEL–––––––––100%100%100%EXPOSELNormal3At the same time, the Expo curve will be presented in the graph. A simultaneous tap on the  or  keys of the right touch pad (CLEAR) will reset a changed entry fi eld value displayed in inverse video back to "0 %".Some examples of Expo values:Servo travelServo travelServo travelStick deflection Stick deflection Stick deflectionExpo = +100% Expo = +50% Expo = –100%In each of these examples, the Dual Rate value equals 100 %.Combining Dual Rate and ExpoIf values have been entered for both the Dual Rate and the Expo function, the effects of both functions will overlap, for example, as follows:Servo travelServo travelServo travelStick deflection Stick deflection Stick deflectionExpo = +100%, DR = 125% Expo = +100%, DR = 50% Expo = –100%, DR = 50%Asymmetric setting of Dual Rate and ExpoTo make an asymmetric setting, i.e. a Dual Rate or Expo setting dependent on the direction of the respective joystick, fi rst access the »Control switch« menu and assign one of the C1 … C8 control switches – "C3", for example – to the desired transmitter control, e.g. control 3 for the elevator function. Do not change the switching point for the joystick's neutral position (0 %). Now return to the "Dual Rate / Expo" menu and select the corresponding control function ("Elevator" in this example). Now, with a brief tap on the center SET key of the right touch pad, activate the switch assignment and change to the expanded switches then use the selection keys to move on to the previously defi ned "C3" control switch.0%0%0%AileronElevatorRudderDUAL–––––––––SEL–––––––t–100%100%100%EXPOSELMoewünschten Schaltertoe die EIN Position(erw. Schalter: SET)NormalControl/Logic/fix switchC2 C4 C5 C6C7 C8 FX FXi L1 L2C1 C3A brief tap on the center SET key of the right touch pad will confi rm the assignment of this switch.0%0%0%AileronElevatorRudderDUAL––––––SEL–––––––––100%100%100%EXPOSELG3NormalNow use one of the selection keys to move into the right column then move the elevator joystick into its appropriate end-point to enter a separate Dual Rate value for each direction, e.g. for "Up elevator" … 0%0%0%AileronElevatorRudderDUAL––––––SEL–––––––––100%77%100%EXPOSELG3Normal… and "Down elevator":
123Detail program description - Dual Rate / Expo | Winged models0%0%0%AileronElevatorRudderDUAL––––––SEL–––––––––100%111%100%EXPOSELG3NormalThe vertical dashed line shows the current elevator joystick position.Set the Expo values as necessary in the same manner.
124 Detail program description - Dual Rate / Expo | Helicopters Dual Rate / ExpoConfi gurable control characteristics for roll, pitch-axis, tail rotorUse the selection keys of the left or right touch pad to scroll to the »Dual Rate / Expo« menu option in the Multi-function menu: Model selectServo adjustment Stick modeControl adjust Dual Rate / ExpoChannel 1 curve Switch displayCopy / EraseSuppress codes Suppress models Base setup modelHelicopter typeOpen this menu option with a tap on the center SET key of the right touch pad.0%0%0%RollPitch axTail rotDUAL–––––––––SEL–––––––––100%100%100%EXPOSELThe Dual Rate / Expo function permits switching or controlling of control travels and characteristics for the control functions roll, pitch-axis, tail rotor, i.e. control functions 2 … 4; it is switch-driven and fl ight-phase independent. An individual curve characteristic for control function 1 (motor/collective pitch), featuring up to 8 separately programmable points, can be set either in the »Channel 1 curve« menu or separately for throttle and pitch in the »Helicopter mixer« menu, see text beginning page 176 and 312.Similar to control travel settings in the »Control adjust« menu, Dual Rate operates directly on the respective control function, independent of whether it is an individual servo or multiple servos connected via complex mixer and coupling functions. The control travel for each switch position can be set to between 0 and 125 % of normal full travel. Expo, on the other hand, enables fi ner-grained control of the model for values larger than 0 % around the center position of the primary control function (roll, pitch-axis, tail rotor), without forfeiting full movement at the end-points of joystick travel. For values less than 0 %, the reverse is true: control increases around the neutral position and diminishes towards the end-points. The degree of "progression" can therefore be set within a total range of -100 % to +100 %, where 0 % equates to the normal, linear control characteristics.Rotary-output servos, now generally commonplace, offer another application. This is because the actual control surface movement is not linear: as the rotational angle of the output disc or lever increases, the control surface rate of travel over the control linkage continually decreases – depending on the position of the linkage point on the output disc. This effect can be counteracted with Expo values greater than 0 % such that rotational angle travel increases over-proportionally with increasing joystick throw.The Expo setting also affects the relevant control function directly, whether this controls a single servo or multiple servos – via any number of mixer and coupling functions.For both Dual Rate and Expo functions, switch assignment can be set up in any way desired, which therefore permits the triggering of multiple functions using one and the same switch. This, in turn, offers the opportunity to link the triggering of Dual Rate and Expo functions to a single switch: this offers many advantages – particularly for very high-speed models.The graphic screen displays the curve characteristics directly. Once you select a menu line, the dotted vertical line follows the movement of the respective joystick, so you can clearly see the dependency of the curve value on the transmitter control.Flight phase-dependent Dual Rate and Expo settingsIf fl ight phases are set up in the »Phase settings« and »Phase assignment« menus and each assigned a name,e.g. "Normal", the name in question will be displayed at the bottom left of the display. In this scenario, you can operate the corresponding switch to switch between fl ight phases.Basic procedureSwitch to the desired fl ight phase then use the 1.  selection keys of the left or right touch pad to select the desired line: "Roll", "Pitch ax" or "Tail rot".Use the 2.  selection keys of the left or right touch pad to change into the column labeled "EXPO".Tap the center 3. SET key of the right touch pad. The corresponding input fi eld is shown highlighted.Use the selection keys of the right touch pad to set 4. the desired value.Tap the center 5. SET key of the right touch pad to complete the entry.A simultaneous tap on the 6.  or  keys of the right touch pad (CLEAR) will any setting made back to its respective default value.Dual Rate functionIf a switchover between two variants is desired, assign a switch in the column labeled with the switch symbol (as described in the section "Assigning transmitter controls, switches and control switches" on page 56).
125Detail program description - Dual Rate / Expo | HelicoptersExponential functionIf a switchover between two variants is desired, assign a switch in the column labeled with the switch symbol (as described in the section "Assigning transmitter controls, switches and control switches" on page 56). 0%0%0%RollPitch axTail rotDUAL––––––SEL–––––––––100%100%100%EXPOSELMove desired switchto ON position(ext. switch: ENTER)Normal3If necessary, this may also be one of the transmitter control switches C1 … C8 or C1i … C8i or one of the logical switches L1 … L8 or L1i … L8i from the list of "expanded switches".The switch so assigned appears on the display, together with a switch icon that indicates the switch's switching direction.In the case of "C" or "L" switches, the joystick or another transmitter control or a certain switching logic can itself be used as a switch. However, such a control switch must have been appropriately defi ned in the »Control switch« menu, see page 119, and a logical switch must have been appropriately defi ned in the »Logical switch« menu, see page 138.Whichever switch has been assigned … the respective switch appears on the display together with a switch icon that indicates the switch's respective direction when moved.0%0%0%RollPitch axTail rotDUAL–––––––––SEL–––––––100%100%100%EXPOSELMove desired switchto ON position(ext. switch: ENTER)NormalIf necessary, this may also be one of the transmitter control switches C1 … C8 or C1i … C8i or one of the logical switches L1 … L8 or L1i … L8i from the list of "expanded switches".The switch so assigned appears on the display, together with a switch icon that indicates the switch's switching direction.In the case of "C" or "L" switches, the joystick or another transmitter control or a certain switching logic can itself be used as a switch. However, such a control switch must have been appropriately defi ned in the »Control switch« menu, see page 119, and a logical switch must have been appropriately defi ned in the »Logical switch« menu, see page 138.Whichever switch has been assigned … the respective switch will appear in the display together with a switch symbol indicating the switch's direction if actuated, e.g. in the «Normal» fl ight phase.0%0%0%RollPitch axTail rotDUAL––––––SEL–––––––––100%100%100%EXPOSEL3NormalOnce the value fi eld has been activated with a brief tap on the SET key of the right touch pad, use the selection keys of the left or right touch pad to move into the Dual-Rate value column labeled SEL at the bottom edge of the display in order to separately change the dual-rate values shown in inverse video for each of the two switch positions.0%0%0%RollPitch axTail rotDUAL––––––SEL–––––––––100%100%EXPOSEL3Normal111%0%0%0%RollPitch axTail rotDUAL––––––SEL–––––––––100%100%EXPOSEL3Normal88%At the same time, the Dual-Rate curve will be presented in the graph. A simultaneous tap on the  or  keys of the right touch pad (CLEAR) will reset a changed entry fi eld value displayed in inverse video back to "100 %".Caution:For safety reasons, Dual Rate value settings should not be less than 20 %.Some examples of Dual Rate values:Servo travelServo travelServo travelStick deflection Stick deflection Stick deflectionDual Rate = 100% Dual Rate = 50% Dual Rate = 20%
126 Detail program description - Dual Rate / Expo | Helicopters0%0%0%RollPitch axTail rotDUAL–––SEL–––––––––100%100%100%EXPOSELNormal3Select the right-hand column at the lower edge of the display marked with SEL and activate the value fi eld with a brief tap on the center SET key of the right touch pad, the selection keys on the left or right touch pad can now be used to alter the Expo value shown in the highlighted fi eld, separately for each of the two switch positions.Now, for example, you have the opportunity to fl y with a linear curve characteristic with the switch in one direction, and to pre-set a value other than 0 % in the other switching direction:+50%0%0%RollPitch axTail rotDUAL–––SEL–––––––––100%100%100%EXPOSELNormal3At the same time, the Expo curve will be presented in the graph. A simultaneous tap on the  or  keys of the right touch pad (CLEAR) will reset a changed entry fi eld value displayed in inverse video back to "0 %".Some examples of Expo values:Servo travelServo travelServo travelStick deflection Stick deflection Stick deflectionExpo = +100% Expo = +50% Expo = –100%In each of these examples, the Dual Rate value equals 100 %.Combining Dual Rate and ExpoIf you have entered values for both the Dual Rate and the Expo function, the effect from on function is superimposed on the other, as shown in these examples:Servo travelServo travelServo travelStick deflection Stick deflection Stick deflectionExpo = +100%, DR = 125% Expo = +100%, DR = 50% Expo = –100%, DR = 50%Asymmetric setting of Dual Rate and ExpoTo make an asymmetric setting, i.e. a Dual Rate or Expo setting dependent on the direction of the respective joystick, fi rst access the »Control switch« menu and assign one of the C1 … C4 control switches – "C3" for example – to the desired transmitter control, e.g. control 3 for the pitch function. Do not change the switching point for the joystick's neutral position (0 %). Now return to the "Dual Rate / Expo" menu and select the corresponding control function ("Pitch ax" in this example). Now, with a brief tap on the center SET key of the right touch pad, activate the switch assignment and change to the expanded switches then use the selection keys to move on to the previously defi ned "C3" control switch.0%0%0%RollPitch axTail rotDUAL–––––––––SEL–––––––––100%100%100%EXPOSELMoünschten Schalterto die EIN Position(erw. Schalter: SET)NormalControl/Logic/fix switchC2 C4 C5 C6C7 C8 FX FXi L1 L2C1 C3A brief tap on the center SET key of the right touch pad will confi rm the assignment of this switch.0%0%0%RollPitch axTail rotDUAL––––––SEL–––––––––100%100%100%EXPOSELG3NormalNow use one of the selection keys to move into the right column then move the pitch-axis joystick to the appropriate end-point in order to enter a separate Dual Rate value for each direction, e.g. for "Pitch-axis up" … 0%0%0%RollPitch axTail rotDUAL––––––SEL–––––––––100%77%100%EXPOSELG3Normaland "Pitch-axis down":
127Detail program description - Dual Rate / Expo | Helicopters0%0%0%RollNickTailDUAL––––––SEL–––––––––100%111%100%EXPOSELC3NormalThe vertical dashed line shows the current pitch axis joystick position. Set the Expo values as necessary in the same manner.
128 Detail program description - Channel 1 curve | Winged models Channel 1 curveControl characteristics for throttle/spoiler joystickUsing the selection keys of the left or right touch pad, scroll to the »Channel 1 curve« menu option in the Multi-function menu: Model selectServo adjustmentStick modeControl adjust Dual Rate / ExpoChannel 1 curve Switch displayCopy / EraseSuppress codes Suppress models Base setup modelModel typeOpen this menu option with a tap on the center SET key of the right touch pad.Channel 1 C U R V ECurveoff PointOutputInput 0%0%?+–100O U T P U T0%Since the carburetor response or the effect of the airbrakes or spoilers is often non-linear, you can make compensatory adjustments to these in this menu. The menu therefore enables you to change the control characteristics of the throttle / airbrake joystick, regardless of whether this control function affects the servo connected to control channel 1 directly or affects multiple servos via various mixers.If fl ight phases have been specifi ed in the »Phase settings« and »Phase assignment« menus (see pages 142 and 148) this option can be adapted on a fl ight-phase basis. The given fl ight phase name, e.g. «normal», will be shown at the bottom left of the screen.The control curve can be defi ned by up to 8 points (termed "reference points" below) placed anywhere along the path of joystick travel. While the on-screen graph considerably simplifi es the process of setting and adjusting the reference points, we recommend that you set fewer reference points to begin with.In the basic software set-up, 2 reference points – namely the end-points at the bottom end of joystick travel ("L", low = -100 % travel) and the top end of joystick travel ("H", high = +100 % travel) – defi ne a linear characteristic curve.First, switch to your chosen fl ight phase, if necessary. Setting reference pointsBy moving the transmitter control (throttle/airbrake joystick), you can reposition the vertical line in the graph between the two end-points "L" and "H". The current joystick position is also displayed in numerical form on the "Input" line (-100 % to +100 %). The point at which this line crosses the curve is termed the "Output", and can be varied at the reference points within the range -125 % to +125 %. The control signal altered in this way will then affect all subsequent mixer and coupling functions. In the example above, the joystick is at 0 % of control travel and also generates an output signal of 0 %, since the characteristic curve is linear.Up to 6 additional reference points can be set between the two end-points "L" and "H", although the distance between neighboring reference points must not be less than approx. 25 %.Move the joystick. If a question mark can be seen in the "Point" frame, then the next reference point can be set with a tap on the center SET key of the right touch pad. Simultaneously, the "?" is replaced by a number and the value fi eld to the right of the reference point number will be shown in inverse video.Channel 1 C U R V ECurveoff PointOutputInput +50%+50%2+–100O U T P U T1+50%Normal2The order in which you generate the (maximum) 6 reference points between the end-points "L" and "H" is irrelevant, since the reference points are continuously renumbered automatically from left to right as they are entered. Erasing reference pointsTo delete one of the reference points (1 to max. 6), use the joystick to move the vertical line into the vicinity of the reference point in question. As soon as the reference point number and its corresponding value on the "Point" line are displayed in inverse video, see fi gure above, these can be erased with a simultaneous tap on the  or  keys of the right touch pad (CLEAR). Complete the operation with a brief tap on the center key ESC of the left touch pad. Changing reference point valuesMove the joystick into the range of the reference point that is to be changed: "L" (low), 1 … 6 or "H" (high). The number and current curve value of this point are displayed. The reference point value displayed in inverse video can be changed in a range of -125 % to +125 % without infl uencing the neighboring reference points.
129Detail program description - Channel 1 curve | Winged modelsExample:Channel 1 C U R V ECurveoff PointOutputInput +50%–75%2+–100O U T P U T1–75%Normal2In this sample screen image, reference point "2" has been set to -75 %.Note:If the joystick does not coincide with the exact reference point, please note that the percentage value on the "Output" line always relates to the current joystick position. Trim point function Alternatively, jumping through active reference points, in ascending or descending order, can be done with the  selection keys of the left touch pad. Note that "active" reference points are those which have already been set. When a jump is made from one to another, the point value fi eld for the jump's destination reference point in the screen's Point line will be displayed in inverse video and its position in the graph will be marked with the point's number (L, 1 … max. 6 and H) in inverse video and a small triangle. The selection keys on the right touch pad can then be used to change the reference point jumped to as described above, entirely independently of the control position.Channel 1 C U R V ECurveoff PointOutputInput +50%–75%1+–100O U T P U T0% 2NormalTrim point1One touch on the center ESC key of the left touch pad terminates this trim point function. Trim offset function When a value fi eld is active, i.e. in inverse video, it is not only possible, as previously described, to jump to and change a reference point already set with the  selection keys of the left touch pad but also an existing curve can be vertically repositioned with the  keys of the left touch pad within a range of ±25%.Channel 1 C U R V ECurveoff PointOutputInput +50%–50%2+–100O U T P U T–50%1NormalTrim offset2Channel 1 C U R V ECurveoff PointOutputInput +50%–100%2+–100O U T P U T–100%1NormalTrim offset2A tap on the center ESC key of the left touch pad will also terminate this function. Trim x-axis function This function is activated by tapping the left () or right () selection key of the right touch pad with an active (i.e. inverse video) value fi eld. You can then use the selection keys on the right touch pad to reposition the active point horizontally or vertically as you wish.Channel 1 C U R V ECurveoff PointOutputInput +50%–83%2+–100O U T P U T–100%1NormalTrim X-axis2Notes:If the point is repositioned horizontally further • away from the current control position than approx. ±25 %, a "?" sign will reappear in the line Point. This question mark does not refer to the repositioned point, however: instead, it signifi es that a further point can be set at the current control position.Please note that the percentage value on the • "Output" line always relates to the current joystick position and not to the position of the point. Smoothing the Channel 1 curveIn the example below, sample reference points have been set: reference point 1 to 0 %,reference point 2 to +25 % andreference point 3 to -75 %as described in the last section.Channel 1 C U R V ECurveoff PointOutputInput –50%0%1+–100O U T P U T0%23Normal1This "jagged" curve profi le can be smoothed automatically simply by pressing a button.
130 Detail program description - Channel 1 curve | Winged modelsDo this – from a situation as illustrated – with a brief tap on the  selection key of the left touch pad. This will cause a switchover from "(Curve) off" to "(Curve) on" (or vice versa).Channel 1 C U R V ECurveon PointOutputInput –50%0%1+–100O U T P U T0%Normal231Note:The curves shown here are for demonstration purposes only and are not at all representative of real throttle or airbrake curves. A specifi c application example can be found in the programming examples on page 274.
131Detail program description - Channel 1 curve | Helicopters Channel 1 curveControl characteristics for throttle/collective pitch stickUsing the selection keys of the left or right touch pad, scroll to the »Channel 1 curve« menu option in the Multi-function menu: Model selectServo adjustment Stick modeControl adjust Dual Rate / ExpoChannel 1 curve Switch displayCopy / EraseSuppress codes Suppress models Base setup modelHelicopter typeOpen this menu option with a tap on the center SET key of the right touch pad.Channel 1 C U R V ECurveoff PointOutputInput 0%0%?+–100O U T P U T0%Since the carburetor response or the effect of collective pitch is often non-linear, you can make compensatory adjustments to these in this menu. The menu therefore enables modifi cation of the control characteristics of the motor/collective pitch joystick, regardless of whether this control function affects the servo connected to control channel 1 directly or affects multiple servos via various mixers.If fl ight phases have been specifi ed in the »Phase settings« and »Phase assignment« menus (see pages 142 and 148) this option can be adapted on a fl ight-phase basis. The given fl ight phase name, e.g. «normal», will be shown at the bottom left of the screen.The control curve can be defi ned by up to 8 points (termed "reference points" below) placed anywhere along the path of joystick travel. While the on-screen graph considerably simplifi es the process of setting and adjusting the reference points, we recommend that you set fewer reference points to begin with.Please note that the curve characteristic you set here acts as the input signal for specifi c mixers in the »Helicopter mixer« menu, page 176.»Heli-Mixer« C1  C1  Tail rotorC-1-curve PitchThrPitch-stickIn the basic software set-up, 2 reference points–namely the end-points at the bottom end of joystick travel ("L", low = -100 % travel) and the top end of joystick travel ("H", high = +100 % travel)–defi ne a linear characteristic curve.First, switch to your chosen fl ight phase, if necessary. Setting reference pointsBy moving the transmitter control (motor/collective pitch stick), you can reposition the vertical line in the graph between the two end-points "L" and "H". The current joystick position is also displayed in numerical form on the "Input" line (-100 % to +100 %). The point at which this line crosses the curve is termed the "Output", and can be varied at the reference points within the range -125 % to +125 %. The control signal altered in this way will then affect all subsequent mixer and coupling functions. In the example above, the joystick is at 0 % of control travel and also generates an output signal of 0 %, since the characteristic curve is linear.Up to 6 additional reference points can be set between the two end-points "L" and "H", although the distance between neighboring reference points must not be less than approx. 25 %. Move the joystick. If a question mark can be seen in the "Point" frame, then the next reference point can be set with a tap on the center SET key of the right touch pad. Simultaneously, the "?" is replaced by a number and the value fi eld to the right of the reference point number will be shown in inverse video.Channel 1 C U R V ECurveoff PointOutputInput +50%+50%2+–100O U T P U T1+50%Normal2The order in which you generate the (maximum) 8 reference points between the end-points "L" and "H" is irrelevant, since the reference points are continuously renumbered automatically from left to right as they are entered. Erasing reference pointsTo delete one of the reference points (1 to max. 6), use the joystick to move the vertical line into the vicinity of the reference point in question. As soon as the reference point number and its associated value is shown on the "Point" line (see screen image above), following activation of the value fi eld on the "Point" line now in inverse video with a simultaneous tap on the or  keys of the right touch pad (CLEAR) it can be erased. Complete the operation with a brief tap on the center key ESC of the left touch pad. Changing reference point valuesMove the joystick into the range of the reference point that is to be changed: "L" (low), 1 … 6 or "H" (high). The number and current curve value of this point are displayed. Activate the value fi eld with a brief tap on the center SET key of the right touch pad. The point value fi eld is now highlighted and can be set within
132 Detail program description - Channel 1 curve | Helicoptersthe range -125 % to +125 %, and without infl uencing the neighboring reference points.Example:Channel 1 C U R V ECurveoff PointOutputInput +50%–75%2+–100O U T P U T1–75%Normal2In this sample screen image, reference point "2" has been set to -75 %.Note:If the joystick does not coincide with the exact reference point, please note that the percentage value on the "Output" line always relates to the current joystick position. Trim point function Alternatively, jumping through set reference points can be done with the  selection keys of the left touch pad in either ascending or descending order, whereby the number of the jump's destination reference point in the graph will be marked with the point's number, 1 … max. 6, in inverse video. The selection keys on the right touch pad can then be used to change the reference point jumped to as described above, entirely independently of the control position.Channel 1 C U R V ECurveoff PointOutputInput +50%–75%1+–100O U T P U T0% 2NormalTrim point1One touch on the center ESC key of the left touch pad terminates this trim point function. Trim offset function When a value fi eld is active, i.e. in inverse video, it is not only possible, as previously described, to jump to and change a reference point already set with the  selection keys of the left touch pad but also an existing curve can be vertically repositioned with the  keys of the left touch pad within a range of ±25%.Channel 1 C U R V ECurveoff PointOutputInput +50%–50%2+–100O U T P U T–50%1NormalTrim offset2Channel 1 C U R V ECurveoff PointOutputInput +50%–100%2+–100O U T P U T–100%1NormalTrim offset2A tap on the center ESC key of the left touch pad will also terminate this function. Trim x-axis function This function is activated by tapping the left () or right () selection key of the right touch pad with an active (i.e. inverse video) value fi eld. You can then use the selection keys on the right touch pad to reposition the active point horizontally or vertically as you wish.Channel 1 C U R V ECurveoff PointOutputInput +50%–83%2+–100O U T P U T–100%1NormalTrim X-axis2Notes:If the point is repositioned horizontally further • away from the current control position than approx. ±25 %, a "?" sign will reappear in the line Point. This question mark does not refer to the repositioned point, however: instead, it signifi es that a further point can be set at the current control position.Please note that the percentage value on the • "Output" line always relates to the current joystick position and not to the position of the point. Smoothing the Channel 1 curveIn the example below, sample reference points have been set: reference point 1 to 0 %,reference point 2 to +25 % andreference point 3 to -75 %as described in the last section.Channel 1 C U R V ECurveoff PointOutputInput –50%0%1+–100O U T P U T0%23Normal1This "jagged" curve profi le can be smoothed automatically simply by pressing a button.
133Detail program description - Channel 1 curve | HelicoptersDo this – from a situation as illustrated – with a brief tap on the  selection key of the left touch pad. This will cause a switchover from "(Curve) off" to "(Curve) on" (or vice versa).Channel 1 C U R V ECurveon PointOutputInput –50%0%1+–100O U T P U T0%Normal231Note:The curves shown here are for demonstration purposes only and are not at all representative of real throttle curves. For real-world application examples, see the programming examples on pages 274 and 313.
134 Detail program description - Switch display Switch displayDisplaying switch positionsUse the selection keys on the left or right touch pad to scroll to the »Switch display« option in the multi-function menu: Model selectServo adjustmentStick modeControl adjust Dual Rate / ExpoChannel 1 curve Switch displayCopy / EraseSuppress codes Suppress models Base setup modelModel typeModel selectServo adjustment Stick modeControl adjust Dual Rate / ExpoChannel 1 curve Switch displayCopy / EraseSuppress codes Suppress models Base setup modelHelicopter typeOpen this menu option with a tap on the center SET key of the right touch pad.SwitchContrl1C1 C2 C3 C8234567891011 12 13 14 15 16switchC4 C5 C6 C7This feature is used to check the functions and give an overview of switches 1 … 16 and the programmable control switches C1… C8.If a switch is pressed, the switch number is revealed by one of the display items changing from an OFF to an ON symbol (or vice versa). To improve the legibility of this screen, a closed switch fi eld is also shown in inverse video (i.e. on a dark background).For control switches C1 … C8, activation of the corresponding transmitter control – which must have been previously assigned on the »Control switch« menu – will reveal the control switch number and direction.Note:Switch numbering 1 to 16 as shown here corresponds to the labeling of switch plug-in locations on the transmitter's circuit board. The numbering of the switches has no effect on the programming of the transmitter, however.
135Detail program description - Control switches Control switchesProgramming the control switchesUse the selection keys on the left or right touch pad to scroll to the »Control switch« option in the multi-function menu: Servo adjustment Stick modeControl adjust Dual Rate / ExpoChannel 1 curve Switch displaySuppress codes Suppress models Base setup model Model typeControl switch Logical switchServo adjustment Stick modeControl adjust Dual Rate / ExpoChannel 1 curve Switch DisplaySuppress codes Suppress models Base setup model Helicopter typeControl switch Logical switchOpen this menu option with a tap on the center SET key of the right touch pad.SEL0%0%0%C1C2C3–––C4CONTROL SWITCHGeb. 1Geb. 10%STO–––––––––SELC1C2C3C4freefreefreefreeWith many functions, it makes sense not to trigger their actuation by using one of the normal switches, but to trigger them automatically by the specifi c, freely programmable position of a transmitter control or joystick.Typical applications:On/Off switching of an on-board glow plug in • conjunction with the carburetor setting and/or motor speed. (The glow plug heater switch for this will be controlled by a transmitter-side mixer.)Switching a stopwatch on or off to measure the • simple running time of electric motorsAutomated switch-off of a combi "aileron •  rudder" mixer when extending the airbrakes, e.g. so as to match the bank attitude of the model to the ground slope when landing on a ridge, without the direction of fl ight also being affected by the rudder (if the mixer were active).Lowering landing fl aps, adjusting elevator trim • and/or executing specifi c Dual Rate, Exponential and Differential switchings when coming in to land, as soon as the throttle joystick is moved beyond the switching point. If required, a control switch can be overridden using a separately assigned switch in the 5th column.The mc-16 HoTT program is equipped with a total of eight so-called control switches ("C1" to "C8").Accordingly, anywhere where switches can be assigned you have the option not only of using the 16 possible transmitter switches, but also of choosing and assigning one of the "C1" … "C8" control switches from the list of expanded switches – as described in the section "Assigning transmitter controls, switches and control switches" on page 56.Furthermore, combining a control switch with an additional switch (as described later) also permits more complex switching permutations.Basic procedure:If no transmitter control is assigned, the 1. corresponding input fi eld of the column labeled SEL (second column from the left) will be empty.Use the selection keys of the left or right touch 2. pad to select the line for the desired control switch (1 to 8).Briefl y tap the center 3. SET key of the right touch pad.Move your selected transmitter control.4. The associated transmitter control number appears in the input fi eld of the column above the left switch icon.Use the selection keys on the left or right touch pad 5. to move to the right into the column labeled STO.Move the transmitter control to the desired switching 6. point then briefl y tap on the center SET key of the right touch pad to save the switching point.Complete the remaining settings such as 7. switching direction, etc.Exit from the menu with a tap on the center 8. ESC key of the left touch pad. Assigning a transmitter control to a control switchUsing the selection keys on the left or right touch pad, select your chosen line (1 to 8). Following a fi nal tap on the center SET key of the right touch pad to activate the control assignment, the message shown below will appear in the display:SEL0%0%0%C1C2C3–––C4CONTROL SWITCHGeb. 10%STO–––––––––SELC1C2C3C4freifreefreefrei Move desiredcontrol adj.For example, the right-side proportional slider is now to be assigned to control switch "C1", the default throttle limiter for a helicopter model memory. So just move this control in any direction. As soon as this is detected, the control name appears on the display:
136 Detail program description - Control switchesSEL0%0%0%C1C2C3–––C4CONTROL SWITCHLever1free0%STO–––––––––SELC1C2C3C4freefreeResetting a control switch back to "free"To reset a control switch back to "free", make sure the display is as below …SEL0%0%0%C1C2C3–––C4CONTROL SWITCHLever1free0%STO–––––––––SELC1C2C3C4freefreeMove desiredcontrol adj.… then, with a brief simultaneous tap on the  or  keys of the right touch pad (CLEAR), the entry for a control will be erased. Defi ning the switching pointUsing the  selection key of the left or right touch pad to move the marker frame into the column labeled STO (store).Move the selected transmitter control to the position at which the switching point, i.e. the switch between OFF/ON, should trigger and briefl y tap the center SET key of the right touch pad. The current position is displayed, for example "+85 %":SEL0%0%0%C1C2C3–––C4CONTROL SWITCHLever1free+85%STO–––––––––SELC1C2C3C4freefreeThe switching point can be altered at any time with another tap on the center SET key of the right touch pad.Note:Do not, however, set a switching point at a transmitter control's travel end-point, since this makes reliable switching impossible. If a 2-way or 3-way switch is used to operate a control switch, the switch point should be programmed in advance with one of the transmitter's proportional controls.First, assign the corresponding proportional control in the 2nd column and set the switching point in such a way that will ensure the subsequent confi guration for the 2-way or 3-way switch will reliably exceed this value. If you do not, the switching function will be unreliable, since the control switch triggers only if a value unambiguously fails to meet or exceeds the value set! To complete the procedure, cancel the transmitter control assignment then assign the 2-way or 3-way switch. Setting the switching directionThe switching direction of the control switch is changed as required in the 4th column. Use the  selection key of the left or right touch pad to move the marker frame into the column labeled SEL (select). Following a brief tap on the center SET key of the right touch pad, the switch direction can by changed back-and-forth between "normal" and "reversed" with the selection keys of the left or right touch pad.SEL0%0%0%C1C2C3–––C4CONTROL SWITCHLever1free+85%STO–––––––––SELC1C2C3C4freefreeSEL0%0%0%C1C2C3–––C4CONTROL SWITCHLever1free+85%STO–––––––––SELC1C2C3C4freefreeA simultaneous tap on the  or  keys of the right touch pad (CLEAR) will reset the switch direction back to "=>".The current switch position of the control switch is displayed in the leftmost column by the switch icon next to the number of the control switch.Notes:In this example control switch"C1" is open as long • as transmitter control "Lever 1" (the throttle limiter for a helicopter) is less than +85 % of control travel. It closes once the switching point is exceeded, i.e. by a value over +85 % and up to the upper limit.In the above example with the switching direction • reversed, control switch "C1" remains closed while the transmitter control is at less than +85 % of full travel. As soon as the switching point is exceeded, in this example a value between +85 % and the upper travel end-point , "C3" will open.If a control switch – e.g. "C1" – has multiple • assignments, you should bear in mind that the switching direction set here applies to all C3 switches.
137Detail program description - Control switchesThe switch state can also be inverted by reversing • the control in the »Control adjust« menu. Combining a control switch with a switchThe control switch can be overridden by a further switch, so that e.g. in certain fl ight situations the function to be triggered can be activated independently of the control position and thus the position of the control switch.Change to the value fi eld in the 5th column, the column above the rightmost switch symbol. In the simplest case, select one of the switches mounted in the two switch panels, as described in the section "Assigning transmitter controls, switches and control switches" on page 56. The number of this switch, e.g. "10", appears on the display in the next-to-the last column at the right, together with a switch icon indicating the switch's current state.While this switch is open, the "C1" control switch is active, i.e. it triggers at the switching point; if the switch is closed, the control switch now remains permanently closed as well, independently of the control position and switching direction:SEL0%0%0%C1C2C3–––C4CONTROL SWITCHLever1free+85%STO––––––10SELC1C2C3C4freefreeCombining two control switchesFor more complex applications, however, it can prove necessary to override this control switch with a second control switch.Example:Control switch "C1" will now be assigned to control function 3 (= control 3) instead of its previous assignment "Lever1". The switching point is at its center point, i.e. at 0 %. The switch chosen in the next-to-the-last right column is "C2" from the list of expanded switches. This "C2" control switch will now be allocated in its own line to the middle proportional slider "Slide2", whose switch-point is +50 % liege:SEL+50%0%0%C1C2C3–––C4CONTROL SWITCHCnt. 1Slide20%STO––––––C2SELC1C2C3C4freefreeThe switching directions indicated in the fourth column from the left will now show control switch "C2" as being closed as long as joystick (control 3) and/or "Slide 2" are located on the other side of their switch-points.This diversity of switching options certainly offers you enough scope for specialized applications to suit any type of model..
138 Detail program description - Logical switches Logical switchesProgramming logical switchesUse the selection keys on the left or right touch pad to scroll to the »Control switch« option in the multi-function menu: Servo adjustment Stick modeControl adjust Dual Rate / ExpoChannel 1 curve Switch displaySuppress codes Suppress models Base setup model Model typeControl switch Logical switchServo adjustment Stick modeControl adjust Dual Rate / ExpoChannel 1 curve Switch DisplaySuppress codes Suppress models Base setup model Helicopter typeControl switch Logical switchOpen this menu option with a tap on the center SET key of the right touch pad.ANDANDANDL1L2L3–––L4LOGICAL SWITCHESAND–––––––––SELL1L2L3L4––––––––––––These functions permit two switches, control switches and/or logical switches or any combination of these to be combined with one another to create logical "AND" and "OR" functionality. A total of 8 logical switches, "L1 … L8" can be programmed.The result of such a logical switch function – shown in the display's rightmost column – can be used as another switch function. Allocation of a switch to a logical function is done in the familiar manner in the columns labeled by the two switch symbols, as described in the section "Assigning transmitter controls, switches and control switches" on page56. That is, by moving the respective switch from OFF to ON or, after a tap on the center SET key of the right touch pad, by selecting one of the expanded switches with the selection keys.UNDUNDANDL1L2L3–––L4LOGICAL SWITCHESUND–––––––––SELL1L2L3L4––––––––––––Move desired switchto ON position(ext. switch: ENTER)UNDUNDUNDL1L2L3–––L4LOGICAL SWITCHESUND–––––––––SELG1G2G3L4––––––––––––Mowünschten Schalterto die EIN Position(erw. Schalter: SET)Control/Logic/fix switchC2 C4 C5 C6C7 C8 FX FXi L1 L2C1 C3Potential applications for this:Multiple functions, which are normally independent • of one another, are to be put into a defi ned state by way of an »Emergency switch«.The establishment of dependencies for initiating a • switch-on warning, see »Basic settings, model« menu."AND" / "OR"Once a given value fi eld has been activated in the column labeled SEL, the "AND" and "OR" logic operator can be selected with the selection keys."AND" function: The logical switch is only closed when both input switches are closed."OR" function: The logical switch is closed when at least one of the input switches is closed.Note:The difference between AND and OR logic switches is made clear by the settings and input states of the display fi gure below.ORANDANDL1L2L3–––L4LOGICAL SWITCHESANDL2I4I2SELL1L2IL3L4–––L131"L3" is only closed when both the "L1" and "L2" switches are closed. This means that both switches, 1 and 2, must be closed and, at the same time, either 3 or 4.In order to make these logical switches usable, they can be specifi ed in those menus which use switches by calling them up via the additional "expanded switches" selection menu.Move desired switchto ON position(ext. switch: ENTER)A brief tap on the center SET key of the right touch pad will afford access to the expanded switches.M wünschten Schalterto die EIN Position(erw. Schalter: SET)Control/Logic/fix switchC2 C4 C5 C6C7 C8 FX FXi L1 L2C3C1Now use the selection keys to pick the desired control switch "C1 … C8", fi xed switch "FX" or logical switch "L1 … L8" or the respected inverted switch "C1i … C8i", "FXi" or "L1i … L8i", for example, "L3i":
139Detail program description - Logical switchesMoewünschten Schalterto die EIN Position(erw. Schalter: SET)Control/Logic/fix switchC8i L2i L4iL5i L6i L7i L1 L2C7i L1iL8iL3iA brief tap on the center SET key of the right touch pad will adopt the selected switch into the menu.Model timeBatt. timeTop :Centr:Stop watchFlight timeTimer–––12:34h1:23h0:000:000s0sL3IL3IAlarmTimerRemark about inverted switches:Selection of an inverted switch for a switch assignment, e.g "L1i" instead of "L1", simply specifi es the opposite switch direction (state), i.e. non-inverted usage results in a certain switch activating a particular function when it is in its switched-on state but inverted usage results in a certain switch activating a particular function when it is in its switched-off state. Such applications arise when, for example, one and the same switch is to switch one function on but, at the same time, it is to switch a second function off, and vice versa. Logical switches permit other, quite complex, switching options to be created.
140 How is a fl ight phase programmed? How is a fl ight phase programmed?The concept of fl ight phase programmingGeneral information on fl ight phase programmingDuring a fl ight, you will often want to apply different settings – e.g. fl ap or trim settings for a fi xed-wing aircraft or collective pitch and throttle servo settings for a helicopter – at particular times in the fl ight (e.g. take-off, approach, hover, auto-rotate, etc.). With mc-16 HoTT, you can access such presets automatically using switches or control switches.Flight phases are also of great utility during fl ight testing. You can confi gure various set-ups and then switch between them during the fl ight: this enables you to identify the most appropriate program set-up for your model quickly and easily.The basic programming procedure is a three-stage processFirst, you have to set up the different fl ight phases, 1. i.e. you assign names to phases 1 … max. 8. Each name is then shown in all phase-specifi c menus and also on the basic display. To avoid abrupt transitions when switching between the various phases, you can also program a period of time during which a "soft" transition to the next phase takes place.For fi xed-wing aircraft programs, these settings are made in the »Phase settings« menu. The programming of helicopters begins with either the »Basic settings, model« menu, if you wish to set up autorotation or, otherwise, with the »Phase settings« menu.In the second stage, you use the »2. Phase assignment« menu to set up the required "phase switches".Once these are set, you can then move to the 3. fl ight phase-dependent menus (see the tables below) to start programming the settings for the individual fl ight phases.List of fl ight phase-relevant menus for fi xed-wing programs:Menu Page»Control adjust« 108»Dual Rate / Expo« 120»Channel 1 curve« 128»Phase settings« 142»Phase assignment« 148»Phase trim« 150»Non-delayed channels« 151»Flight phase timers« 156»Wing mixers« 160»MIX active/phase« 204»Trim memory« 224List of fl ight phase-relevant menus for helicopter programs:Menu Page»Control adjust« 112»Dual Rate / Expo« 124»Channel 1 curve« 131»Phase settings« 146»Phase assignment« 148»Non-delayed channels« 151»Flight phase timers« 156»Helicopter mixer« 176»MIX active/phase« 204»Trim memory« 226All other menus are model-specifi c and thus cannot be programmed separately for each fl ight phase. Accordingly, changes you make in all other menus apply uniformly to all fl ight phases for that specifi c model. In some cases it may be desirable to use the »Suppress codes« menu (see page 74) to remove non-alterable menus from the multi-function list while programming fl ight phases. Two examples of fl ight phase programming can be found in the text beginning on page 288.
141How is a fl ight phase programmed?
142 Detail program description - Phase settings | Winged models Phase settings Setting up fl ight phasesSetting up fl ight phasesWhen you set up fl ight phases for fi xed-wing aircraft models, you start with this menu. You assign individual phases a name and also assign a period of time for a (soft) transition into each phase. Note that – depending on your model and your settings – switch times much longer than the default 0.1 s have proven useful. You can also set up several phases with names and transition times even if you don't currently have a use for them, since the decision as to which of the "occupied" phases you activate is made only on the »Phase assignment« menu (page 148) when setting "phase switches".Whether or not one of the phases 1 … 8 currently has an assigned switch and the state of the switch can be seen in the "status" column at the far right.Symbol Meaning– No switch assigned+ Phase can be accessed via switchIndicates the phase currently activeNote:The "Copy fl ight phase" option on the »Copy / Erase« menu is a useful aid when programming the various fl ight phases. First, you need to determine the parameters for a specifi c fl ight phase; these are then copied to the next fl ight phase, where they can then be modifi ed as appropriate."Name" columnBriefl y tap on the center SET key of the right touch pad then assign the needed phases (phase 1 up to maximum of 8 phases) by picking their names from the selection list with the selection keys of the left or right touch pad. In addition to this standard pool of names, the »General basic settings« menu, page 261, permits up to 10 names of personal preference to be defi ned.Use the selection keys of the left or right touch pad to scroll to the »Phase settings« menu option in the multi-function menu: Servo adjustment Stick modeControl adjust Dual Rate / ExpoChannel 1 curve Switch displayBase setup model Model typeControl switch Logical switchPhase settings Phase assignmentWithin one model memory, the mc-16 HoTT lets you program up to 8 discrete groups of settings for various conditions met during the fl ight. The grouped settings are typically termed "fl ight phases" and are programmed in the corresponding menus.Depending on the setting "Throttle min. forward/back" or "None" in the "Motor on C1" line of the »Model type« menu, calling up the »Phase settings« menu option will cause the transmitter's display to look like one of the two variants shown below …Motor on C1 "none"• Phase 1Phase 2Phase 3Phase 4Phase 50.1s0.1s0.1s0.1s0.1sName Fl.ph.Tim Sw. time––––Motor on C1 "Throttle min front/rear"• Phase 1Phase 2Phase 3Phase 4Phase 5Name Timer Sw. timeMotoryes 0.1syes 0.1syes 0.1syes 0.1syes 0.1s––––The order in which phases 1 to max. 8 are assigned is entirely irrelevant and you can leave gaps as you wish. Nonetheless, you should always start with "Phase 1", the "Normal phase", which is always active if …… no phase switch is set in the »• Phase assignment« menu or ifno phase has been assigned to specifi c • combinations of switches.The defi nition of the phase name "Normal" could therefore be a useful one to adopt for "Phase 1". The names themselves have absolutely no technical signifi cance for programming; their only purpose is to help you to identify which phase is active at any time and are thus displayed in all fl ight phase-dependent menus and also on the transmitter's basic display.Column "Fl.ph.Tim" or "Timer"In addition to the standard timers on the basic screen display, other timers are also available whose settings are confi gured in the »Flight phase timers« menu, page 156.Clk 1, Clk 2, Clk 3, Lap, Time1, Time2The fl ight phase timers "Clk 1 … 3" plus "Time1" and "Time2" run only in the fl ight phase to which they have been assigned in this menu. During other fl ight phases they are stopped (and hidden) and the assigned stop/start switch then has no effect.The lap counter, once started, continues to run through changes of phase, however, although it can be stopped during any fl ight phase via the center ESC key of the left touch pad.While you can obviously record lap times using "Lap" and a switch, the two timers "Time1" and "Time2" have the following meaning:Time 1 This timer will only measure time during which the switch or control switch assigned in the "Lap time/Tim tab" line of the »Flight phase timers« menu, page 156, is "closed". The frequency at which the switch is activated is shown on the
143Detail program description - Phase settings | Winged modelsbasic display. This counter fi eld is highlighted as soon as the switch for the "Time1" timer is "opened", i.e. the timer is stopped:#01 0:00hStop watchFlight timK780:00.04.1V0:00.000000:00hMVGraubeleH-J SandbrunnerNormalLap 00 0.0sRX VOLT:4.9V When necessary, the selection keys can be used to access and read the sequence of switching times.Application:Measurement of e.g. motor switch-on times, if the same switch also actuates the motor.Time 2 This timer stores both the "off" and the "on" periods for the associated switch, i.e. every switch actuation in either direction will cause a record to be written for the timer, the timer will be reset then starts incrementing by "1" again as time passes. Each time count can be suspended with the center ESC key of the right touch pad, without actuating the switch itself. Activating the switch, in turn, increments the counter by 1 and restarts the "Time 2" timer. In order to read out the time memory with the selection keys, the "Time 2" timer must fi rst be suspended by using the ESC key of the right touch pad.Application:In addition to the motor runtimes, for example, the unpowered glide times between these could also be recorded.A simultaneous tap on the  or  keys of the right touch pad (CLEAR) will reset suspended timers shown in the basic display."Motor" columnNote:This column is only available if "forward/back" is present in the "Motor on C1" line of the »Model type« menu. Phase 1Phase 2Phase 3Phase 4Phase 5Name Timer Sw. timeMotor0.1syes 0.1syes 0.1syes 0.1syes 0.1s––––NormalLaunchDist.yes"yes" The motor connected to receiver output 1 will be controlled by the C1 joystick (throttle/brake stick). The brake system to be set up on the »Wing mixers« menu is deactivated:BRAKE SETTINGSNormaloffThe motor connected to receiver output 1 is decoupled from the C1 joystick (throttle/brake stick) and is held in its OFF position – as specifi ed by the setting "Throttle min. forward / back" – automatically. The brake system to be set up in the »Wing mixers« menu is activated and is actuated by the C1 joystick.Elevator curveBRAKE SETTINGSNormalCrowAILE0%WK20%WK0%Diff.- reductNote:The settings available depend on the number of control surface servos selected on the line "Ailerons/Camber-changing fl aps in the »Model type« menu."Sw. time" columnWhen you switch between fl ight phases, it is advisable to use this column to program a switch time for a "soft" transition INTO (!) the respective phase. Accordingly, there is also an option for specifying a different time for the switchover from any phase to, for example, Phase 3 than for a switchover to Phase 1.Use the  selection key of the left or right touch pad to move the marker frame to the right beyond the column labeled "Timer" and, if applicable, also the column labeled "Motor".Phase 1Phase 2Phase 3Phase 4Phase 5Name Timer Sw. timeMotor0.1syes 0.1syes 0.1syes 0.1syes 0.1s––––NormalLaunchDist.yesFollowing a brief tap on the center SET key of the right touch pad, the switchover time value in the fi eld displayed in inverse video can be changed within a range of 0 and 9.9 s.
144 Detail program description - Phase settings | Winged modelsExample:Phase 1Phase 2Phase 3Phase 4Phase 5Name Timer Sw. timeMotor0.1syes 0.1syes 1.1syes 0.1syes 0.1s––––NormalLaunchDist.yesThe switchover time from any other phase to Phase 1 «normal» will take 2.2 s. The time for a switchover from, for example, Phase 1 to Phase 3, is set to 1.1 s and the time for a switchover from Phase 1 or 3 to Phase 2 "Launch" is 1.5 s.Such asymmetric transition times can be useful when, e.g. switching between extremely different fl ight phases, such as between aerobatics and normal fl ight.A simultaneous tap on the  or  keys of the right touch pad (CLEAR) will reset the time in the currently active value fi eld back to 0.1.Note:The "switch time" set here applies uniformly to all settings that are specifi c to fl ight phases, and thus to all mixers activated in the »Wing mixers« menu, see page 160. Accordingly, the transition between fl ight phase-specifi c mixers does not occur abruptly. However, if individual servos are to be switched without a delay then these can be defi ned accordingly in the »Non-delayed chan« menu (see page 151).
145For your notes
146 Detail program description - Phase settings | HelicoptersUse the selection keys of the left or right touch pad to scroll to the »Phase settings« menu option in the multi-function menu:Servo adjustment Stick modeControl adjust Dual Rate / ExpoChannel 1 curve Switch displayBase setup model Helicopter typeControl switch Logical switchPhase settings Phase assignmentOpen this menu option with a tap on the center SET key of the right touch pad.Phase 1Phase 2Phase 3Phase 40.1s0.1s0.1s0.1s0.1sName Fl.ph.Tim. Sw.time––––Autorot AutorotWithin one model memory, the mc-16 HoTT lets you program up to 7 discrete groups of settings for various conditions met during the fl ight. These are in addition to the auto-rotation fl ight phase that can be set up in the »Basic settings, model« menu. The grouped settings are typically termed "fl ight phases" and are programmed in appropriate menus.Setting up fl ight phasesWhen you set up fl ight phases for helicopter models, you start with this menu. You assign individual phases a name and also assign a period of time for a (soft) transition into each phase. Note that – depending on your model and your settings – switch times much longer than the default 0.1 s have proven useful. You can also set up several phases with names and transition times even if you don't currently have a use for them, since the decision as to which of the Phase settingsSetting up fl ight phases"occupied" phases you activate is made only on the »Phase assignment« menu (page 148) when setting "phase switches".The "Status" column, second from the left, shows which one of the phases 1 … 7, including the autorotation phase this is 8, has already been assigned to a switch, plus the current status of that switch:Symbol Meaning– No switch assigned+ Phase can be accessed via switchIndicates the phase currently activeNote:The "Copy fl ight phase" option on the »Copy / Erase« menu is a useful aid when programming the various fl ight phases. First, you need to determine the parameters for a specifi c fl ight phase; these are then copied to the next fl ight phase, where they can then be modifi ed as appropriate."Name" columnThe fi rst line, and thus the fi rst fl ight phase, is reserved for autorotation fl ight, see »Basic settings, model« menu. Accordingly, the predefi ned name cannot be changed.Use the selection keys to move to the line "Phase 1". Briefl y tap on the center SET key of the right touch pad then assign the needed phase (phase 1 up to maximum of 7 phases) by picking the respective name from the selection list with the selection keys of the left or right touch pad. In addition to this standard pool of names, the »General basic settings« menu, page 261, permits up to 10 names of personal preference to be defi ned.The order in which phases 1 to max. 7 are assigned is entirely irrelevant and you can leave gaps as you wish. Nonetheless, you should always start with "Phase 1", the "Normal phase", which is always active if …… no phase switch is set in the »• Phase assignment« menu or ifno phase has been assigned to specifi c • combinations of switches.The defi nition of the phase name "Normal" could therefore be a useful one to adopt for "Phase 1". The names themselves have absolutely no technical signifi cance for programming; their only purpose is to help you to identify which phase is active at any time and are thus displayed in all fl ight phase-dependent menus and also on the transmitter's basic display."ph. Tim." columnIn addition to the standard timers on the basic screen display, other timers are also available whose settings are confi gured in the »Flight phase timers« menu, page 156.Clk 1, Clk 2, Clk 3, Lap, Time1, Time2The fl ight phase timers "Clk 1 … 3" plus "Time1" and "Time2" run only in the fl ight phase to which they have been assigned in this menu. During other fl ight phases they are stopped (and hidden) and the assigned stop/start switch then has no effect.The lap counter, once started, continues to run through changes of phase, however, although it can be stopped during any fl ight phase via the center ESC key of the left touch pad.While you can obviously record lap times using "Lap" and a switch, the two timers "Time1" and "Time2" have the following meaning:Time1 This timer will only measure time during which the switch or control switch assigned in the "Lap time/Tim tab" line of the »Flight phase timers« menu, page 156, is "closed". The frequency at which the switch is activated is shown on the basic display. This counter fi eld is highlighted as soon as the switch for the "Time1" timer is "opened", i.e. the timer is stopped:
147Detail program description - Phase settings | Helicopters#02 0:00hStop watchFlight timK780:00.04.1V0:00.000000:00hMVStarletH-J SandbrunnerNormalLap 00 0.0sRX VOLT:4.9V When necessary, the selection keys can be used to access and read the sequence of switching times.Application:Measurement of (e.g.) fl ight phases with increased motor speed, if the same switch is used to actuate fl ight phase switching.Time2 This timer stores both the "off" and the "on" periods for the associated switch, i.e. every switch actuation in either direction will cause a record to be written for the timer, the timer will be reset then starts incrementing by "1" again as time passes. Each time count can be suspended with the center ESC key of the right touch pad, without actuating the switch itself. Activating the switch, in turn, increments the counter by 1 and restarts the "Time2" timer. In order to read out the time memory with the selection keys, the "Time2" timer must fi rst be suspended by using the ESC key of the right touch pad.A simultaneous tap on the  or  keys of the right touch pad (CLEAR) will reset suspended timers shown in the basic display."Sw. time" columnWhen you switch between fl ight phases, it is advisable to use this column to program a switch time for a "soft" transition INTO (!) the respective phase. Accordingly, there is also an option for specifying a different time for the switchover from any phase to, for example, Phase 3 than for a switchover to Phase 1.However, for reasons of safety, transition into the autorotation fl ight phase should ALWAYS be set to switch without any time delay. The arrow "->" in the column labeled "Sw.time" at the end of the "Autorot" line indicates that a delay can be set when transitioning FROM (!) autorotation INTO (!) another phase.Use the  selection key of the left or right touch pad to move the marker frame to the right beyond the "Sw.time" column.Phase 1Phase 2Phase 3Phase 40.1s0.1s0.1s0.1s0.1sName Fl.ph.Tim. Sw.time––––Autorot AutorotFollowing a brief tap on the center SET key of the right touch pad, the switchover time value in the fi eld displayed in inverse video can be changed within a range of 0 and 9.9 s. Example:Phase 1Phase 2Phase 3Phase 45.5s3.0s2.0s4.0s0.1sName Fl.ph.Tim. Sw.time++––Autorot AutorotNormalHoverSpeedA delay of 5.5 s applies when switching FROM auto-rotation into any other phase. A delay of 0.0 s always applies when switching TO auto-rotation.The switchover time from any other phase to Phase 1 «normal» will take 3.0 s. When switching from e.g. Phase 1 to Phase 3, the switch time is set to 4.0 s.Such asymmetric transition times can be useful when, e.g. switching between extremely different fl ight phases, such as between aerobatics and normal fl ight.A simultaneous tap on the  or  keys of the right touch pad (CLEAR) will reset the time in the currently active value fi eld back to 0.1.Note:The "switch time" set here applies uniformly to all settings that are specifi c to fl ight phases, and thus to all mixers activated in the »Wing mixers« menu, see page 160. Accordingly, the transition between fl ight phase-specifi c mixers does not occur abruptly. If you want individual servos to be switched without a delay, however, defi ne these accordingly in the »Non-delayed channels« menu (see page 151).
148 Detail program description - Phase assignment Phase assignmentSetting up fl ight phasesUse the selection keys of the left or right touch pad to scroll to the »Phase assignment« menu option in the multi-function menu: Servo adjustment Stick modeControl adjust Dual Rate / ExpoChannel 1 curve Switch displayBase setup model Model typeControl switch Logical switchPhase settings Phase assignmentServo adjustment Stick modeControl adjust Dual Rate / ExpoChannel 1 curve Switch displayBase setup model Helicopter typeControl switch Logical switchPhase settings Phase assignmentOpen this menu option with a tap on the center SET key of the right touch pad.PHASEASSIGNMENTpriorC1 NormalcombiABDEFNote:A phase name appears to the right of the phase number at the bottom right of the display only if you have assigned the name beforehand on the »Phase settings« menu.In the »Phase settings« menu, described above separately for fi xed-wing and helicopter models, you will have set up names for your phases. On this menu – which is identical for both model types – you must now specify the switches or switch combinations that you want to use to trigger each phase. One exception for helicopter menu: one of the two auto-rotation switches must be set on the menu »Basic settings, model«.Please note the following priorities:If • no fl ight phase switches nor these names have been assigned in this menu, the model is in fl ight phase "1". Accordingly, by the time you start programming fl ight phases, you should therefore have already given this fl ight phase the phase name "Normal".Independent of the phases with allocated switch • settings made in this menu, the autorotation phase (only present for the "Helicopter" model type and to be assigned a switch in the »Basic settings, model« menu) always (!) takes precedence. Accordingly, as soon as the auto-rotation switch in question is activated, the following warning appears:PHASEASSIGNMENTpriorC1 NormalKombinationABDEFAutorotPhase switch "A" is given priority over all • subsequent switch positions, from "B" to "F"Phase switch "B" is given priority over all • subsequent switch positions, from "C" to "F"3-way switches should • always be assigned from the middle position.Therefore use switch "A" and/or switch "B" only if you wish to change from any other fl ight phase – apart from the helicopter's autorotation phase – directly into the phase that is assigned to this switch.Programming fl ight phase switchesOnce you have confi gured your desired switch position, "A" to "F", using the selection keys on the left or right touch pad, a switch (whether a "normal" switch or an expanded switch) is then assigned as described in the section "Assigning transmitter controls, switches and control switches" (page 56).The order in which assignment is made is irrelevant: you must ensure only that you assign what are, for you, the "correct" switches. (In the helicopter program, for example, you should also take care to ensure you do not use this menu to re-assign any auto-rotation switch already assigned on the »Basic settings, model« menu.)Example: 4 fl ight phases with phase priorityPHASEASSIGNMENTpriorC1 NormalcombiABDEF267Assigning fl ight phases to switch positionsNow that names have been assigned to the fl ight phases (1 … max. 8) in the »Phase settings« menu and also programmed switches in this menu, but … at the bottom right of the display screen, you only see <1 Normal > – regardless of the positions the switches are in!?Use the selection keys on the left or right touch pad to move the marker frame down and to the right and then briefl y tap the center SET key of the right touch pad:
149Detail program description - Phase assignmentPHASEASSIGNMENTpriorC1NormalcombiABDEF267Now close one (or more, as required) of the switches that you have assigned, and assign one of the fl ight phase names from the list you selected beforehand on the »Phase settings« menu to this switch position or combination. Here, for example, we assign the "Launch" phase to the closed ("I") priority switch "A" …PHASEASSIGNMENTpriorC2 LaunchcombiABDEF2I 6 7… if, for example, we wish to switch to this phase regardless of the "C" … "F" switch positions, because the same switch activates an electric motor, etc.Use the same approach to set the other switches or combinations of switches.Theoretically – for the situation where all three are closed – you could use the three single switches shown in the example to defi ne an additional fi fth fl ight phase on the »Phase settings« menu. However, since this example assumes just four fl ight phases, you can leave the default phase name as «1 Normal» for this switch position.Leave this menu in the familiar way, with a tap on the center ESC key of the left touch pad.Tips:If you have named more phases than you • currently have switches defi ned for then this is not really problematic. You can repeat and change your switch assignment as you wish at any point in time. And you can also name additional phases at any time and then assign switches to them.When assigning switches, check whether the • switches are already otherwise assigned to ensure that you avoid duplicate assignments.Important notice:Before a phase switch is assigned, the model settings confi gured are now to be found in the fl ight phase «1 Normal», i.e. all fl ight phase-dependent menus are reset to the standard confi gurations for all other fl ight phases.To avoid having to start from scratch in every fl ight phase, you can copy over these standard settings by using the command "Copy fl ight phase" on the "Copy / Erase" menu to replace them with fl ight data obtained from the «Normal» fl ight phase. You then need only to make further fl ight phase-specifi c changes to the settings.
150 Detail program description - Phase trim | Winged models Phase trimFlap settings specifi c to fl ight phasesUse the selection keys of the left or right touch pad to scroll to the »Phase trim« menu option in the multi-function menu: Servo adjustment Stick modeControl adjust Dual Rate / ExpoChannel 1 curve Switch displayControl switch Logical switchPhase settings Phase assignmentPhase trim Non-delayed chanOpen this menu option with a tap on the center SET key of the right touch pad.Normal 0%ELEVDepending on the settings made on the "Aileron/camber fl aps" line of the »Model type« menu, page 94, and in the »Phase settings« menu, page 142, this menu offers at least one control function for ELEV …Normal 0%ELEVNormal… and, with the maximum of 4 for ELEV, AI, Al2, FL and FL2 a total of fi ve control functions for fl ight-phase-specifi c trim settings. The setting of the fl ight phase switches, to be defi ned beforehand in the »Phase assignment« menu, determines the line that is chosen. An asterisk marks the fl ight phase currently active. At the same time, the name of the respective fl ight phase is also shown at the bottom left of the screen. You can enter settings only for the currently active fl ight phase, e.g.:Normal 0%ELEVNormal0%0%0%AI FL FL2LaunchThermalDist.0% 0%0%0%0% 0%0%0%0% 0%0%0%0%AI20%0%0%In the column labeled "ELEV" a phase-specifi c elevator trim setting can be stored.Important notice:Settings made in this column have an immediate effect on elevator trim and, accordingly, the trim setting display. In turn, the elevator trim control affects the values of this column either "globally" or "phase-specifi cally", depending on the "global/phase" setting made on the "Elev" line of the »Stick mode« menu. Columns "Al", "Al2", "Fl", "Fl2" The values in these columns (max. 4) are identical to those in the "Fl.pos" (fl ap position) line on the "Multi-fl ap menu" within the »Wing mixers« menu. For this reason, any changes made always affect the other menu directly – and vice versa.After selecting the appropriate column with the selection keys of the left or right touch pad and a brief tap on the center SET key of the right touch pad, these values can be entered, independent of one another, with the selection keys within a range of ±150 %. A simultaneous tap on the  or  keys of the right touch pad (CLEAR) will reset a changed value in the currently active value fi eld back to 0 %.
151Detail program description - Non-delayed channels Non-delayed channelsChannel-dependent delays to switchingUse the selection keys of the left or right touch pad to scroll to the »Phase trim« menu option in the multi-function menu: Servo adjustment Stick modeControl adjust Dual Rate / ExpoChannel 1 curve Switch displayControl switch Logical switchPhase settings Phase assignmentPhase trim Non-delayed chanServo adjustment Stick modeControl adjust Dual Rate / ExpoChannel 1 curve Switch displayControl switch Logical switchPhase settings Phase assignmentNon-delayed chan Timers (general)Open this menu option with a tap on the center SET key of the right touch pad.NONDELAYED CHANNELSnon-delayednormal1234567 8 9 10111213141516On the »Phase settings« menu, you will have set the necessary switch times for fl ight phase transitions.In this menu, you can now deactivate the transition delay set previously, per fl ight phase and for individual control channels – e.g. for the motor channel for electric models or heading-lock systems for helicopter gyros, etc.Switch over to the corresponding fl ight phase. This is shown at the bottom left of the display.Use the selection keys of the left or right touch pad to move the "" onto the corresponding channel then briefl y tap the center SET key of the right touch pad.The switch icon changes from "normal" to "non-delay" and vice versa.NONDELAYED CHANNELSnon-delayednormal1234567 8 9 10111213141516Normal
152 Detail program description - Timers (general) Timers (general)Timers on the basic displayThe default transmitter display shows a total of three timers. These are: the transmitter operating time on the left of the display, plus a "Top" and a "Centr" timer on the right of the display:#01 0:00hStop watchFlight timK780:00.04.1V0:00.000000:00hMVGraubeleH-J SandbrunnerNormalRunde 00RX VOLT:4.9VAnother, fl ight-phase specifi c timer can also be confi gured with settings in the two menus »Flight phase timers«, page 156, and »Phase settings«, pages 142 and 146. This optional fl ight phase timer – such as the lap time timer – appears underneath the "Centr" (fl ight time) timer:#01 0:00hStop watchFlight timK780:00.04.1V0:00.000000:00hMVGraubeleH-J SandbrunnerNormalLap 00 0.0sRX VOLT:4.9VTo confi gure the "Top" and/or "Centr" timer, use the selection keys on the left or right touch pad to access the menu option »Timers (general)« in the Multi-function menu: Control adjust Dual Rate / ExpoChannel 1 curve Switch displayControl switch Logical switchPhase settings Phase assignmentPhase trim Non-delayed chanTimers (general) Fl. phase timersServo adjustment Stick modeControl adjust Dual Rate / ExpoChannel 1 curve Switch displayControl switch Logical switchPhase settings Phase assignmentNon-delayed chan Timers (general)Open this menu option with a tap on the center SET key of the right touch pad.Model timeBatt. timeTop :Stop watchCentr:Flight timTimer–––12:34h1:23h0:000:000s0s––––––CLR" Model time"This timer shows the currently registered total access time to the currently active model memory location. If necessary, this automatic time acquisition can also be infl uenced by assigning an on/off switch to this "Model time" timer in the rightmost column labeled with the switch symbol. This timer can then be switched on and off as desired. This switch is assigned (and erased again as required) as described in the section "Assigning transmitter controls, switches and control switches" on page 56.A simultaneous tap on the  or  keys of the right touch pad (CLEAR) will reset the time back to "0:00 h"." Batt. time"This operating hours timer records the transmitter's total switch-on time since the last time the battery was charged, thus monitoring the transmitter battery. A switch cannot be assigned to this function.This timer is automatically reset to "0:00 h" when the transmitter detects that the voltage of the battery is signifi cantly higher than the last time it was switched on, e.g. as a result of a charge process or the installation of a replacement battery.A simultaneous tap on the  or  keys of the right touch pad (CLEAR) will also reset this time back to "0:00 h". "Top" and "Centr"These two timers are located at the top right of the basic display (see the screen image immediately to the left) and can be assigned a different name; their function and mode of operation varies according to the name you give them. Independently of the name each is given, the "Top" and "Centr" timer can be programmed to run any length of time forwards or backwards – see further below.Use the selection keys of the left or right touch pad to select the line for the "Top" or "Centr" timer. Model timeBatt. timeTimer–––12:34h1:23h0:000:000s0s––––––AlarmTimerTop : Stop watchCentr: Flight timNow use the selection keys of the left or right touch pad to select your desired timer and complete your selection with another tap on the center SET key of the right touch pad: "Stop watch" or "Motor(run)time"Both of these two timer variants can be started and stopped using any of the available switches.The timer defi ned as "Stopwatch" or "Motor runtime" sums the "ON" times continually, so that once your aircraft has landed, you can read off the sum of all switch "ON" times since the timer was last reset.
153Detail program description - Timers (general) "Flight tim"This timer is especially for measuring fl ight time: it can be started with an assigned switch and stopped (once the switch has been re-opened) on the basic display with a tap on the center ESC key of the left touch pad. Once in a stopped state, it can be reset to its starting value with a simultaneous tap on the  or  keys of the right touch pad at the same time (CLEAR). If you wish to assign a control switch, you must fi rst defi ne the switch on the»Control switch« menu and specify the switching point along the travel of the transmitter control. As an example, the timer can then be started by "opening the throttle" or by opening the throttle limiter for helicopter models.Note:The combination of the fl ight time timer and stopwatch means that you can glance at the display at any time and see how long you have been fl ying since the timers were started, plus the total motor runtime within this particular period of fl ight time. "Time frame"The time frame timer is intended primarily for use by competition pilots, who are frequently given a timeframe within which they must complete certain tasks. The timer is started in precisely the same way as the fl ight time timer. To stop the timer, fi rst ensure the timer switch is at its OFF position. Then touch and hold the  or  selection keys then touch the center ESC key. Switch assignmentUse the  selection key of the left or right touch pad to move the marker frame next to the triangle as shown in the screen image shown below to the rightmost column of the relevant line:Model timeBatt. timeTimer–––12:34h1:23h0:000:000s0s––––––AlarmTimerTop : Stop watchCentr: Flight timHere, you assign a switch as described in the section "Assigning transmitter controls, switches and control switches" (page 56).Typical application:The "stop watch" and "fl ight timer" are both to be started simultaneously using the C1 stick as soon as a user-defi ned switching point is exceeded.For this purpose, defi ne a control switch, e.g. "C1", in the »Control switch« menu, page 135. To complete the procedure, you select this from the expanded switches (see the section "Assigning transmitter controls, switches and control switches" on page 56) and assign it to both these lines:Model timeBatt. timeTimer–––12:34h1:23h0:000:000s0sAlarmTimerG1G1Top : Stop watchCentr: Flight timThe stopwatch will now stop when the stick is below the switching point and resume running above the switching point. The same is not true for the fl ight time timer, however, which also starts the fi rst time the switching point is exceeded. It can be stopped (with a tap on the center ESC key of the left touch pad) only once the stopwatch is stopped; it can then be reset to its starting value with a simultaneous tap on the  or  keys of the right touch pad (CLEAR). Switchover between "forward" and "backward"Timer runs forwards (stopwatch function)Following switch assignment, if the stopwatch shown on the basic display is started with the initial value of "0:00", then it will run forwards for max. 180 min and 59 s and then restart from 0:00.Timer runs backwards (countdown function)In the – left – minutes fi eld, select a start time between 0 and 180 min …Model timeBatt. timeTimer–––12:34h1:23h180:000:000s0s––––––AlarmTimerTop : Stop watchCentr: Flight tim… and in the – right – seconds fi eld, select a start time between 0 and 59 s (or any combination of these):Model timeBatt. timeTimer–––12:34h1:23h180:590:000s0s––––––AlarmTimerTop : Stop watchCentr: Flight timProcedureSelect the desired input fi eld with the 1.  selection keys of the left or right touch pad.Now tap on 2. SET in the center of the right touch pad.Make a time selection in the inverse video minutes 3. or seconds fi eld with the selection keys of the right touch pad.
154 Detail program description - Timers (general)Complete the entry with a tap on the center 4. SET key.A simultaneous tap on the 5.  or  keys of the right touch pad (CLEAR) will reset any setting made back to "0" or "00".Following a switch back to the basic display (by 6. tapping the center ESC key of the left touch pad as many times as required), make sure the stopwatch is stopped then simultaneously tap on the  or  keys of the right touch pad (CLEAR) to switchover the stopwatch to the "timer" function. Look at the top right in the following fi gure.#01 0:00hStop watchFlight timK7810:01.04.1V0:00.000000:00hMVGraubeleH-J SandbrunnerNormalRunde 00RX VOLT:4.9VAfter the assigned switch is activated, the stopwatch starts at the initial value set and runs backward ("countdown clock function"). Once the timer reaches zero it does not stop, but continues to run to enable you to read off the time elapsed after it reached 0:00. To make this absolutely clear, the timer is shown highlighted. "Alarm" timerThe "Alarm" column is accessed by moving the marker frame to the right with the  selection key of the left or right touch pad until it is over the column labeled "Alarm". In the "Alarm" column a time between 5 and 90 seconds (in 5-second increments) can be defi ned. This is the amount of time the timer is to count down before issuing an acoustic signal. This eliminates the need to repeatedly check the display continually during the fl ight.Model timeBatt. timeTimer–––12:34h1:23h180:590:0090s0s––––––AlarmTimerTop : Stop watchCentr: Flight timA simultaneous tap on the  or  keys of the right touch pad (CLEAR) will reset any settings made back to "0 s".Audible signal sequence30 s before zero: Triple beepSingle beep every two seconds 20 s before zero: Double beepSingle beep every two seconds 10 s before zero: Single beepSingle beep every second 5 s before zero: every second a single beep at a higher frequency zero: longer beep signal and changeover of display presentation to inverse video Resetting suspended timersA simultaneous tap on the  or  keys of the right touch pad (CLEAR) will reset timers which have already been suspended.Notes:Timers that are running backwards are shown on • the basic display with a fl ashing colon (:) between the minutes and the seconds fi elds.A typical application, "Timer activation via the C1 • joystick", can be found on page 284.An interim timer function change becomes • active after timer/s have been suspended and subsequently reset by a simultaneous tap on the  or  keys of the right touch pad (CLEAR).Remember that the timer switches also remain • active during programming. A simultaneous tap on the •  or  keys of the right touch pad (CLEAR) will reset the previously stopped timer to its programmed initial value, refer to sections "Alarm" and "Timer".
155For your notes
156 Detail program description - Fl. phase timers Fl. phase timersSelecting and settingA description of how timers are assigned to a fl ight phase has already been provided in the text for the »Phase settings« menu, page 142 and 146. The same section has also described the properties of "Time1" and "Time2". This section now proceeds to describe "Timer 1, 2 and 3" and the "lap counter/time table" timer variants.The additional, fl ight phase-specifi c timer selected is displayed on the basic display underneath the "center" timer, as shown below:#01 0:00hStop watchFlight timK780:00.04.1V0:00.000000:00hMVGraubeleH-J SandbrunnerNormalTimer 100 0:00.0RX VOLT:4.9VOn this menu … Control adjust Dual Rate / ExpoChannel 1 curve Switch displayControl switch Logical switchPhase settings Phase assignmentPhase trim Non-delayed chanTimers (general) Fl. phase timersControl adjust Dual Rate / ExpoChannel 1 curve Switch displayControl switch Logical switchPhase settings Phase assignmentNon-delayed chan Timers (general)Fl. phase timers Helicopter mixer … you can now program "Clks 1 … 3" as stopwatches (i.e. timers that run forward) or as countdown/alarm timers (i.e. timers that run backwards). You can assign any switch to these timers, and the same is true of the "lap counter/timetable" timer:Timer 1Timer 2Timer 3Lap time/Tim tab–––0:000:000:00Lap display0s0s0s––––––––––––AlarmTimerThe fl ight phase timers "Timer 1 … 3" and the "Time1"/"Time2" timers (described in the »Phase settings« section, pp. 142 and 146) run only in the fl ight phase to which they have been assigned. They are also shown as appropriate on the basic display. During other fl ight phases they are stopped (and hidden) and the assigned stop/start switch then has no effect.The lap counter, once started, continues to run through changes of phase (as discussed further below), however, although it can be stopped during any fl ight phase via the center ESC key of the left touch pad. Clks 1, 2 and 3These timers are started and stopped via a switch or control switch. To do so, fi rst use the selection keys to select the appropriate column via the switch icon at the bottom right. Then set the switch that you want by briefl y tapping the center SET key of the right touch pad, as described in the section "Assigning transmitter controls, switches and control switches" (p. 56). Here, too, a control switch offers you the option of activating the timer via one of the joysticks or proportional controls. The switching point along the transmitter control travel is set on the »Control switch« menu (page 135).Remember that the timer switches also remain active in programming mode. Switching between "forwards" and "backwards" Stopwatch mode (timer runs forwards) In this mode, the timer starts at the initial value "0:00" (min:sec) when you operate the assigned switch. If it reaches the maximum time of 180 min. and 59 s, it will re-start at "0:00"."Countdown" (timer runs backwards)Following the activation of the corresponding value fi elds (by tapping the center SET key of the right touch pad), if a time in minutes (maximum 180 min) and/or a time in seconds (maximum 59 s, right fi eld) is set, then the timers will run backwards from this initial value following the activation of the assigned switch (see section "Assigning transmitter controls, switches and control switches" on page 56), i.e. a "countdown" function will apply. Once the timer reaches zero it does not stop, however, but continues to run (highlighted) so you can read off the time elapsed after reaching zero.Note:Timers that are running backwards are shown on the basic display with a fl ashing colon (:) between the minutes and the seconds fi elds.A simultaneous tap on the or  keys of the right touch pad (CLEAR) will reset entry values in the currently active fi eld back to zero. "Alarm" timer Timer 1Timer 2Timer 3Lap time/Tim tab–––0:000:000:00Lap display0s0s0s––––––––––––AlarmTimer
157Detail program description - Fl. phase timersThe input fi eld in the "Alarm" column is activated with a tap on the center SET key of the right touch pad. In this fi eld, use the selection keys on the left or right touch pad to defi ne a time between 5 and 90 seconds (in 5-second increments) before zero is reached: at this point an audible signal will be emitted, which eliminates the need for you to check the screen continually during the fl ight. Audible signal sequence30 s before zero: Triple beep Single beep every two seconds 20 s before zero: Double beep Single beep every two seconds 10 s before zero: Single beepSingle beep every second 5 s before zero: every second a single beep at a higher frequency zero: longer beep signal and changeover of display presentation to inverse videoA simultaneous tap on the  or  keys of the right touch pad (CLEAR) will reset entry values entered in the currently active fi eld to "0 s".Note:If timer functionality has been changed at any point, then the new changes to settings are made active only after the timer(s) have been stopped on the basic display then making a simultaneous tap on the  or  keys of the right touch pad (CLEAR) to reset them.Like the two standard timers positioned above it, this third, phase-specifi c timer is reset to its starting value with a simultaneous tap on the  or  keys of the right touch pad (CLEAR). It is stopped in all fl ight phases at the same time, even if it has not been stopped separately in the other fl ight phases. Lap counter/timetableTimer 1Timer 2Timer 3Lap time/Tim tab–––0:000:000:00Lap display0s0s0s––––––––––––AlarmTimerOn the "Lap time/tim tab" line, assign a switch only as described in the section "Assigning transmitter controls, switches and control switches" (page 56). Preferably, make use of one of the two momentary switches which are included as standard equipment in the switch panels. The lap count is incremented each time by one lap while simultaneously (and automatically) the lap time elapsed during this lap is stopped (and recorded). This momentary switch simultaneously starts the stopwatch for the next lap. As the timer is triggered, the lap or switch impulse counter is shown highlighted.#01 0:00hStop watchFlight timK780:00.04.1V0:00.000000:00hMVGraubeleH-J SandbrunnerNormalLap 11 2:34.5RX VOLT:4.9V"Time1" and "Time2" operate in the same manner; for more details please read the section on the »Phase settings« menu option.Up to 99 lap times can be recorded and accessed, each with a maximum duration of 99 minutes and 59.9 seconds.To stop the timer in question, tap the center ESC key of the left touch pad on the basic display after the fl ight is over. The lap or switch impulse counter is now shown in "normal" mode:#01 0:00hStop watchFlight timK780:00.04.1V0:00.000000:00hMVGraubeleH-J SandbrunnerNormalLap 12 1:23.4RX VOLT:4.9VA simultaneously tap on the  or  keys of the right touch pad at the same time (CLEAR) will reset the counter to "00" and deletes the stored times. However, the timers must have been stopped before this.Notes:If you have selected a normal switch to operate • the lap counter, take care to ensure that this switch is set to "OFF" before touching the center ESC key of the left touch pad.If you should forget to switch off the lap counter in • a phase which is now not currently active, simply touch the center ESC key of the left touch pad.To swap between the basic display and the "Lap Display" …01020304SEL01:23.402:34.503:45.605 SEL04:56.705:67.80708091000:00.000:00.000:00.0111200:00.000:00.000:00.006 06:78.91314151600:00.000:00.000:00.0171800:00.000:00.000:00.0 1/6… go to the line …
158 Detail program description - Fl. phase timers Lap DisplayTimer 1Timer 2Timer 3Lap time/Tim tab–––0:000:000:00Lap display0s0s0s––––––––––––AlarmTimer… and use the switch assigned. You assign this switch as described in the section "Assigning transmitter controls, switches and control switches" (page 56).
159What is a mixer??rexim a si tahW Basic functionalityWith many models, a mix of the model's functions is often desirable, i.e. coupling aileron to rudder or coupling two servos together, in cases where rudder control surfaces with the same functionality are to be controlled together using a single servo. In all cases, the signal fl ow at the "output" of the control function on the transmitter control-side "branches" – , this also means: "downstream" of transmitter control options such as e.g. »Dual Rate / Expo«, »Control adjust«, »Channel 1 curve« etc. – in order for the signal to have its predefi ned effect on the "input" of another control channel and thus on another receiver output.Example: V-tail mixer334Servo 4,8 VC 577Best.-Nr. 4101Servo 4,8 VC 577Best.-Nr. 41014V-tail mixerControl function inputsControl channels(receiver outputs)Elevator stickRudder stickRight rudder / elevatorLeft rudder / elevatorRudderElevatorElevatorRudderRudderElevatorThe mc-16 HoTT transmitter software contains a large number of pre-programmed coupling functions as standard, which are designed to mix together two (or more) control channels. Accordingly, the mixer named in the example just above can be activated in the "Tail" line of the »Model type« menu by selecting "V-tail".In addition, for each model memory in the fi xed-wing and helicopter programs , the software makes available a total of eight freely programmable linear mixers, four freely programmable curve mixers and four dual mixers.Also be sure to read the general remarks about "free mixers" in this manual, beginning on page 192.
160 Detail program description - Wing mixers»Mix only channel« (see page 205) and use it for another purpose with the help of a "free mixer" (see page 193).If "2AIL" is set in the »• Model type« menu, page 94, then fl ight-phase dependent fl ap functionality can be achieved with appropriate offset settings for input 5 in the »Control adjust« menu, page 108.For almost any menu option, you have the option • of checking your settings by switching to the servo display screen, which is accessed with a simultaneous tap on the  selection keys of the left touch pad. Caution:With aileron actuation the bars of the »Servo display« move in the same manner and in the opposite manner with camber changing fl ap actuation.Note that if two fl ap servos have been selected, • any transmitter control assigned to input 7 will be decoupled in the software in order to avoid errors in operating the fl aps. The same applies to input 10 and the selection "2AIL 4FL".A range of options are available for positioning • fl aps. You can …a) … simply accept one position per fl ight phase, by setting only the corresponding trim values. b) … vary the fl aps positioned by a) with a transmitter control assigned to "Input 6" in the »Control adjust« menu, (page 108), and if desired by also selecting fl ight-phase dependency "PH" in the "Type" column. The selected transmitter control directly controls the two fl ap servos located on receiver outputs 6 and 7 and, as required, also the two FL2 servos connected to outputs 9 and 10 – assuming that corresponding fl aps have been specifi ed on the "Aileron/camber fl aps" line in the »Model type« menu. This transmitter control indirectly »Phase assignment«, page 148 menus, and these fl ight phases have been given names, the fl ight phase names will appear along the bottom display edge, e.g. «Normal».Aileron differentialBrake settings0%Aileron 0%WING MIXERSElevator aileron 0%0%––––––rudder2345NormalAll options can then also be programmed specifi c to a fl ight phase.Comments:In the »• Model type« menu, (page 94), control of the brake fl ap mixer can be reprogrammed from control input 1 to 7, 8 or 9 and a corresponding offset point can be set.Braking with raised ailerons and, if present, • lowered fl aps (crow system) can be implemented by making appropriate settings on the "Crow" line of the "Brake settings" sub-menu.If you would like to alternate between the C1 stick • controlling an electric drive system and a butterfl y system, then you can use the options in the "Motor" column on the »Phase settings« menu – refer to the example on page 279.You can also use the opportunity to set switch • times for a "soft" transition from fl ight phase to fl ight phase on the »Phase settings« menu (see page 142).If your model features multiple wing fl aps and a • "crow / butterfl y system" (see below), but without additional airbrakes, then you can separate output 1 (usually freed up by the above system) from control function input 1 (throttle/brake stick) on the Wing mixersCalibrating the wing fl ap systemWithin the menu tree of the menu …Channel 1 curve Switch displayControl switch Logical switchPhase settings Phase assignmentPhase trim Non-delayed chanTimers (general) Fl. phase timersWing mixers Free mixers… the sub-menus and options available depend entirely on the number of aileron and fl ap servos set up on the »Model type« menu, page 94 … Tail typeMotor on C1NormalNoneAileron/camber flaps 2AILM O D E L T Y PEBrake Offset Input 1+100%SEL… which means that the only settings listed are the ones that can actually be confi gured. The resulting menu structure gains not only in clarity but also prevents potential programming errors.For example, if "2AIL" has been preset, display of the »Wing mixers« menu would appear (without camber fl aps) as shown below:Aileron differentialBrake settings0%Aileron 0%WING MIXERSElevator aileron 0%0%––––––rudder2345If various fl ight phases are envisioned in the settings of the »Phase settings«, page 142, and
161Detail program description - Wing mixerscontrols the fl ap position of the ailerons via the percentage value entered in the "Ail" (and "Ail2") column on the "FLAP" line of the multi-fl ap menu. However, in order to improve control sensitivity for fl ap settings, travel should be reduced to about 25 % in "Input 6" line of the »Control adjust« menu.c) … alternatively, you can also leave the default entry of "0 %" in the "AILE" (and "AIL2") column on the "FLAP" line of the multi-fl ap menu, and use the »Control adjust« menu to assign both input 6 and input 5 to the same transmitter control. You can then set the degree to which both fl ap pairs are affected, optionally making this fl ight phase-dependent by selecting "PH" in the "Type" column, with the respective travel adjustment.Basic programming procedureSelect the desired line with the 1.  selection keys of the left or right touch pad.Depending on the line selected, the bottom line of the display will either show the "Next page" icon () or a switch icon.Depending on the line selected, you will either 2. switch to the next page – on which you carry out the same procedure as below – or the desired value fi eld is activated by tapping the center SET key of the right touch pad.Use the selection keys to set the mixer ratio or 3. degree of differential.To confi gure symmetrical mixer values, move the transmitter control or joystick to its center position, so that the marker frame surrounds both value fi elds. To confi gure asymmetric values, move the transmitter control/joystick to the corresponding side.Negative and positive parameter values are possible, in order to be able to adjust the respective function to the direction of servo any mixers on the "Brake settings" sub-menu. Otherwise, the mixer travel is expanded back to 100 % automatically.All other mixers in the »Wing mixers« menu have their neutral point with the control at its center, i.e. they have no effect at this control position. The value set is mixed in at full travel.Mixer functionsThe individual options in the »Wing mixers« menu are discussed below, separately for single-, dual- and multi-fl ap models. Before we start, a number of remarks on the differentials for ailerons and fl aps: Aileron differentialAileron differentialBrake settings0%Aileron 0%WING MIXERSElevator aileron 0%0%––––––rudder2345NormalFl-Pos.Diff.Ail-trAINormal AILE+100%WK2FLAP0%0% 0%+100%0%+100%0%+100%0%0%0%0%+100% 0% 0%0%FL +100%0% +100%For aerodynamic reasons, the drag generated on an aileron oriented downwards is greater than that generated by the same aileron when it is oriented upwards by the same amount. One effect of this unequal distribution of drag produces is a yawing motion around the vertical axis and, accordingly, a "turning away" from the intended direction of fl ight, which is why this undesirable side effect is also rotation or fl ap orientation.A simultaneous tap on the 4.  or  keys of the right touch pad (CLEAR) will reset the entry value in the given active (inverse video) fi eld back to its default value.Complete the entry with a tap on the center 5. ESC key of the left touch pad or the center SET key of the right touch pad. Assigning switchesWing mixers "Aileron 2  4 rudder" and "Flaps 6  3 elevator" can be made optionally on/off switchable by way of a switch or expanded switch. Accordingly, when the respective line is selected, the familiar switch symbol ( ) will appear on the lower edge of the screen. Switching delaysThe delay time or switch time confi gured on the »Phase settings« menu, page 142, for the respective fl ight phase also affects all wing mixers and thus avoids abrupt changes to fl ap confi gurations when switching between the fl ight phases. Mixer neutral points (Offset)For all mixers on the "Brake settings" sub-menu, the "brake offset" to be set on the »Model type« menu is to be confi gured to the transmitter control position at which the airbrakes are retracted.Accordingly, in the "Brake offset" line of the »Model type« menu, see page 94, specify Input 1, 7, 8 or 9 and the offset to accommodate personal piloting habits. When selecting "input 1", please note also that you may need to specify your desired "Throttle min" position "forward/back" before establishing the offset point in the "Motor at C1" line.Note:If the offset is not set right at the end of the transmitter travel, the rest of the travel is a "dead zone", i.e. the transmitter control does not infl uence
162 Detail program description - Wing mixersused today offers considerable benefi ts.The degree of differential can be changed at any time, for example, and, in extreme circumstances, the downward defl ection of an aileron, in what is termed a "split" position, can be suppressed entirely. This approach not only reduces or even suppresses "adverse yaw", but can, in certain circumstances, even generate a positive yaw: in such cases, an aileron command will generate a yaw about the vertical axis in the direction of the turn. For large glider models in particular, this approach lets such aircraft fl y "clean" turns using just the ailerons, which is not otherwise possible unaided.The adjustment range of -100 % to +100 % makes it possible to set a differential appropriate for each side, regardless of the direction of rotation of the aileron servos. While "0 %" corresponds to a normal linkage, i.e. no differential, "-100 %" or "+100 %" represents the "split" function. For aerobatic fl ying, low absolute values are required to ensure the model rotates exactly along its longitudinal axis when an aileron command is given. Values near to the center (-50 % or +50 %) are typical for facilitating turns in thermals. The split setting (-100 %, +100 %) is popular with slope fl iers, where ailerons alone are often used for turning the model.A simultaneous tap on the  or  keys of the right touch pad (CLEAR) will reset a changed value in a given active (inverse video) fi eld back to 0 %.Note:Negative values are not usually necessary if channels are assigned properly. Diff. (Differentiation)WK-Pos.Diff.QR-Tr.QRNormal QR+100%WK2WK+100%0% 0%+100%0%+100%0%+100%0%0%0%0%+100% 0% 0%0%WK +100%0% +100%0%The "AI" (topmost) line in the Multi-fl ap menu can be used to set the extent to which the fl aps act as ailerons and follow the aileron joystick.; this value is entered as a percentage. The fl aps differential – to be set on the line "Diff." (two lines below) – works in a similar way to the aileron differential, i.e. where an aileron command acts on the fl aps, the respective defl ection downwards can be reduced.The adjustment range of -100 % to +100 % makes it possible to set a differential appropriate for each side, regardless of the direction of rotation of the servos. A value of 0 % is equal to normal linkage, i.e. the servo travel downwards is the same as the travel upwards. A value of -100 % to +100 % means that travel downwards will be reduced to zero for aileron commands affecting the fl aps ("split" mode). A simultaneous tap on the  or  keys of the right touch pad (CLEAR) will reset a changed value in a given active (inverse video) fi eld back to 0 %.Note:Negative values are not usually necessary if channels are assigned properly.termed "adverse yaw". This effect is naturally greater on the comparably long aerofoils possessed by model gliders, compared to e.g. powered aircraft models, which generally have relatively short moment arms. For the former, it must normally be compensated for by making a simultaneous rudder defl ection in the opposite direction. However, this rudder defl ection also generates drag and therefore further degrades fl ight characteristics. If, on the other hand, a differential is applied to the aileron orientations, by giving the aileron oriented downwards a smaller defl ection than the aileron oriented upwards, the (undesirable) adverse yaw can be reduced – and possibly entirely negated. However, the basic precondition for this is that each aileron must have its own servo present, which can therefore also be embedded straight into the aerofoils. In addition, the shorter linkage paths produce an additional benefi t: reproducible aileron confi gurations that also exhibit less "play".0% (normal)50% (differential)100% (Split)Unlike mechanical solutions, which not only commonly need to be designed and built in when constructing the model but also produce a slightly increased "play" in the control system for strong differentials, the transmitter-based differential typically
163Detail program description - Wing mixers Model type: "1AIL"If you have entered "1AIL" for the "Aileron/camber fl aps" line on the »Model type« menu (page 94), then the "Wing mixers menu" on your transmitter will match the following screen image:Brake settingsAileron 0%WING MIXERS–––rudder24NormalFrom the fi rst line on this display screen, you can switch to the sub-menu with a brief tap on the center SET key of the right touch pad …Brake settingsNote:The "Brake settings" menu is switched "off" if: "Motor on C1 forward / back" in the »Model type« menu (page 94) AND the "Motor" column of the »Phase settings« menu, (page 142) are set to "yes" for the currently active fl ight phase. Switch the fl ight phase if required:Elevat. curveBRAKE SETTINGSNormalSince you cannot set up a butterfl y or aileron differential in a model with only a single aileron servo, this menu offers no further confi guration options with the exception of a "pointer" to the "Elevat curve" sub-menu. Therefore, move ahead from here with another Typically, this mixer is set so that the rudder is defl ected to the same side as the upward-oriented aileron, and you will fi nd that setting a value of around 50 % is usually highly appropriate. Settings are always made symmetrically relative to the neutral point of the aileron joystick. A simultaneous tap on the  or  keys of the right touch pad (CLEAR) will reset a changed value in a given active (inverse video) fi eld back to 0 %.tap on the center SET key of the right touch pad:BrakeCurveoff PointOutputInput –100%0%L+–100O U T P U T0%ElevatorNormalIf required, i.e. if you have the feeling that you will need to set pitch trim compensation when the airbrakes are extended, you can program an appropriate automatic mixer affecting the elevator at this point.For detailed instructions on setting a curve mixer, please refer to the »Channel 1 curve« menu option text beginning page 128.Aileron 2  4 rudderBrake settingsAileron 0%WING MIXERS–––rudder24NormalHere, you can set the degree to which the rudder follows commands acting on ailerons. This is used in particular in connection with aileron differential to suppress adverse yaw and thus make it easier to fl y "clean" curves. You can of course still issue separate commands to the rudder. The adjustment range of ± 150 % lets you set the direction of defl ection as appropriate. Optionally, this mixer can be activated and deactivated with of the switches or a control switch that is not self-restoring so the model can be controlled with only the ailerons or rudder if desired.
164 Detail program description - Wing mixersTo confi gure the setting, fi rst position the brake control in the brake position at full travel (i.e. its end-point). Then, briefl y tap the center SET key of the right touch pad and enter a suitable value using the selection keys on the left or right touch pad. To ensure a suffi ciently strong braking effect, note that you should try to lower the fl ap as low as is mechanically possible.From the second line on this display screen, you can switch to the sub-menu "Elevat curve" by briefl y tapping the center SET key of the right touch pad:BrakeCurveoff PointOutputInput –100%0%L+–100O U T P U T0%ElevatorNormalIf required, i.e. if you have the feeling that you will need to set pitch trim compensation when the airbrakes are extended, you can program an appropriate automatic mixer affecting the elevator at this point.For detailed instructions on setting a curve mixer, please refer to the »Channel 1 curve« menu option text beginning page 128.Aileron 2  4 rudderBrake settingsAileron 0%WING MIXERSElevator flaps 0%0%––––––rudder2346NormalFlaps elevator 0%0% –––63Here, you can set the degree to which the rudder follows commands acting on ailerons. This is used in particular in connection with aileron differential to suppress adverse yaw and thus make it easier to fl y "clean" curves. You can of course still issue separate commands to the rudder. The adjustment range of ± 150 % lets you set the direction of defl ection as appropriate. Optionally, this mixer can be activated and deactivated with of the switches or a control switch that is not self-restoring so the model can be controlled with only the ailerons or rudder if desired. Typically, this mixer is set so that the rudder is defl ected to the same side as the upward-oriented aileron, and you will fi nd that setting a value of around 50 % is usually highly appropriate.Settings are always made symmetrically relative to the neutral point of the aileron joystick.A simultaneous tap on the  or  keys of the right touch pad (CLEAR) will reset a changed value in a given active (inverse video) fi eld back to 0 %.Elevator 3  6 fl apsBrake settingsAileron 0%WING MIXERSElevator flaps 0%0%––––––rudder2346NormalFlaps elevator 0%0% –––63To provide support for the elevator for tight turns and aerobatics, this mixer can be used to make the fl ap function follow controls sent to the elevator. The mixer direction chosen must ensure that the fl aps are defl ected downwards when the elevator is oriented upwards and vice versa for a downward-oriented elevator – i.e. in opposite directions. This mixer can be made optionally on/off switchable with one of the switches or a control switch that is not self-restoring.To confi gure symmetrical mixer values, move Model type: "1AIL 1FL"If you have entered "1AIL 1FL" for the "Aileron/camber fl aps" line on the »Model type« menu (page 94), then the "Wing mixers menu" on your transmitter will match the following screen image:Brake settingsAileron 0%WING MIXERSElevator flaps 0%0%––––––rudder2346NormalFlaps elevator 0%0% –––63From the fi rst line on this display screen, you can switch to the sub-menu with a brief tap on the center SET key of the right touch pad …Brake settingsNote:The "Brake settings" menu is switched "off" if: "Motor on C1 forward / back" in the »Model type« menu (page 94) AND the "Motor" column of the »Phase settings« menu, (page 142) are set to "yes" for the currently active fl ight phase. Switch the fl ight phase if required:Elevat. curveBRAKE SETTINGSNormalCrowQR0%WK20%FLAP0%Appropriate to the model type selected, you can now enter a suitable value in the "Crow" line to lower the fl ap when you activate the brake control – which is typically the C1 joystick.
165Detail program description - Wing mixersthe elevator joystick to its center position, so that the marker frame surrounds both value fi elds. To confi gure asymmetric values, move the joystick to the corresponding side.Values in the range -150 % to +150 % are possible, so as to adjust the function to the direction of servo rotation or direction of fl ap defl ection.A simultaneous tap on the  or  keys of the right touch pad (CLEAR) will reset a changed value in a given active (inverse video) fi eld back to 0 %.The "typical" values confi gured for this mixer are single-digit or low two-digit values.Flaps 6  3 elevatorBrake settingsAileron 0%WING MIXERSElevator flaps 0%0%––––––rudder2346NormalFlaps elevator 0%0% –––63This mixer is used to set elevator (pitch-trim) compensation when a fl ap command is given. This typically enables you to adjust the model's airspeed automatically when fl aps are lowered.If you have used the »Control adjust«, page 108, to assign Input 6 to a transmitter control or switch then this also affects this mixer.Depending on the position of the fl ap control, either a symmetrical or asymmetric setting within the range ±150 % is possible.A simultaneous tap on the  or  keys of the right touch pad (CLEAR) will reset a changed value in a given active (inverse video) fi eld back to 0 %.If required, the mixer can be switched on or off by assigning a switch in the right column.The values confi gured for this mixer are typically in the single-digit range. Model type: "2AIL"If you have entered "2AIL" for the "Aileron/camber fl aps" line on the »Model type« menu (page 94), then the "Wing mixers menu" on your transmitter will match the following screen image:Aileron differentialBrake settings0%Aileron 0%WING MIXERSElevator aileron 0%0%––––––rudder2345NormalFrom the fi rst line on this display screen, you can switch to the sub-menu with a brief tap on the center SET key of the right touch pad …Brake settingsNote:The "Brake settings" menu is switched "off" if: "Motor on C1 forward / back" in the »Model type« menu (page 94) AND the "Motor" column of the »Phase settings« menu, (page 142) are set to "yes" for the currently active fl ight phase. Switch the fl ight phase if required:Elevator curveBRAKE SETTINGSNormalCrowAILE0%WK20%WK0%Diff.- reductDepending on the model type selected, setting options will now be available in the "Crow" and "Diff(erential)reduct(ion)" lines for the column labeled "AILE". These options should be utilized by …… putting the transmitter control for "Brake" • (refer to the »Model type« menu description on page 94) – typically the C1 joystick – in its limit position in the brake direction. Switch to the "Crow" line, briefl y tap on the center SET key of the right touch pad and use the selection keys on the left or right touch pad to set a value that moves the aileron upwards as far as possible to brake the model or, if you are using airbrakes as the main braking system, the aileron should be set to elevate only minimally to provide an extra braking effect.Note:To reliably prevent the servos mechanically striking their end-stops – which draws a heavy current – you can set an appropriate limit value in the column labeled "– limit +" in the »Servo adjustment« menu, page 102.… then fi nally, moving to the "Diff. reduct" line, set a • % value there which is greater than or equal to that value set (or to be set) in the "Aileron differential" line of the display screen "before" this one.In this way, you can suppress the aileron differential when braking, thus ensuring that you can count on suffi cient aileron response despite your ailerons being defl ected upwards.From the lowest line, "Elevator curve", you can switch to setting the "Elevator curve" mixer by briefl y tapping the center SET key of the right touch pad:
166 Detail program description - Wing mixersBrakeCurveoff PointOutputInput –100%0%L+–100O U T P U T0%ElevatorNormalIf required, i.e. if you have the feeling that you will need to set pitch trim compensation when the airbrakes are extended, you can program an appropriate automatic mixer affecting the elevator at this point.For detailed instructions on setting a curve mixer, please refer to the »Channel 1 curve« menu option text beginning page 128.Aileron differentialAileron differentialBrake settings0%Aileron 0%WING MIXERSElevator aileron 0%0%––––––rudder2345NormalThe adjustment range of ±100 % makes it possible to set the correct direction of differential, regardless of the direction of rotation of the aileron servos. While "0 %" corresponds to a normal linkage, i.e. no transmitter-side differential, "-100 %" or "+100 %" represents the "split" function.For aerobatic fl ying, low absolute values are required to ensure the model rotates exactly along its longitudinal axis when an aileron command is given. Values near to the center (-50 % or +50 %) are typical for facilitating turns in thermals. The split setting (-100 %, +100 %) is popular with slope fl iers, where ailerons alone are often used for turning the model.0% (normal)50% (differential)100% (Split)A simultaneous tap on the  or  keys of the right touch pad (CLEAR) will reset a changed value in an active (inverse video) fi eld back to 0 %.Note:Negative values are not usually necessary if channels are assigned properly.Aileron 2  4 rudderAileron differentialBrake settings0%Aileron 0%WING MIXERSElevator aileron 0%0%––––––rudder2345NormalHere, you can set the degree to which the rudder follows commands acting on ailerons. This is used in particular in connection with aileron differential to suppress adverse yaw and thus make it easier to fl y "clean" curves. You can of course still issue separate commands to the rudder. The adjustment range of ± 150 % lets you set the direction of defl ection as appropriate. Optionally, this mixer can be activated and deactivated with of the switches or a control switch that is not self-restoring so the model can be controlled with only the ailerons or rudder if desired. Typically, this mixer is set so that the rudder is defl ected to the same side as the upward-oriented aileron, and you will fi nd that setting a value of around 50 % is usually highly appropriate.Settings are always made symmetrically relative to the neutral point of the aileron joystick.A simultaneous tap on the  or  keys of the right touch pad (CLEAR) will reset a changed value in a given active (inverse video) fi eld back to 0 %.Elevator 3  5 aileronAileron differentialBrake settings0%Aileron 0%WING MIXERSElevator aileron 0%0%––––––rudder2345NormalTo provide support for the elevator for tight turns and aerobatics, this mixer can be used to make the aileron function follow controls sent to the elevator. The mixer direction chosen must ensure that the fl aps are defl ected downwards when the elevator is oriented upwards and vice versa for a downward-oriented elevator – i.e. in opposite directions. This mixer can be made optionally on/off switchable with one of the switches or a control switch that is not self-restoring.To confi gure symmetrical mixer values, move the elevator joystick to its center position, so that the marker frame surrounds both value fi elds. To confi gure asymmetric values, move the transmitter control to the corresponding side.
167Detail program description - Wing mixersValues in the range -150 % to +150 % are possible, so as to adjust the function to the direction of servo rotation or direction of aileron defl ection.A simultaneous tap on the  or  keys of the right touch pad (CLEAR) will reset a changed value in a given active (inverse video) fi eld back to 0 %.The "usual" values for this mixer are in the low two-digit range. Model type: "2/4AIL 1/2/4FL"If you have entered "2AIL 1FL" for the "Aileron/camber fl aps" line on the »Model type« menu (page 94), then the "Wing mixers menu" on your transmitter will match the following screen image:Aileron differentialBrake settings0%Aileron 0%WING MIXERSFlaps elevator 0%0%––––––rudder2643NormalMulti-flap menuIf, on the other hand, "2/4AIL 1/2/4FL" has been entered for the "Aileron/camber fl aps" line of the »Model type« menu, page 94, then the "Wing mixers menu" on the transmitter should correspond to the fi gure below:Brake settingsAileron 0%WING MIXERSFlaps elevator 0%0%––––––rudder2643NormalMulti-flap menuRegardless of the combination of aileron and fl ap servos you choose, all of the parameters available can be adjusted separately for each fl ight phase.Note:For almost any menu option, you have the option of checking your settings by switching to the servo display screen, which is accessed with a simultaneous tap on the  selection keys of the left touch pad. If you do, note however that the vertical lines on the »Servo display« move in the same direction for ailerons and in the opposite direction for fl aps.Before we address the details of this menu we would like to provide a brief explanation of the different display modes for the multi-flap menu:Model type: "2 AIL 1 FL"If servos have been connected to the receiver as described on page 61 and selected accordingly in the »Model type« menu, page 94, then the abbreviations "AILE" and "FLAP" refer to the following fl aps:AIleft FL FL AIrightSince the options available on the wing mixer menu and its sub-menus vary according to the number of fl ap servos specifi ed on the »Model type« menu, page 94, the list contains only those set-up options available for the given model.Therefore, with a preset to "2AIL 1FL", the options for setting aileron functions to fl aps will be suppressed, as will all setting options throughout the (right-side) column labeled "FL2".Fl.posAILEFL0%NormalHR WKWK2FLAP+100%0% 0%+100%+100%+100%0%0%0%0%0%0%In addition, the settings for "Aile(ron) diff(erential)" are not found on the "multi-fl ap menu", as with "2AIL 2/4FL", but one level higher in the "Wing mixers" menu, see the screenshot at top left.
168 Detail program description - Wing mixersModel type: "2AIL 2FL"If servos have been connected to the receiver as described on page 61 and selected accordingly in the »Model type« menu, page 94, then the abbreviations "AILE" and "FLAP" refer to the following fl aps:AIleft FLleft FLright AIrightSince the options available on the wing mixer menu and its sub-menus vary according to the number of fl ap servos specifi ed on the »Model type« menu, page 94, the list contains only those set-up options available for the given model.Therefore, with a preset to "2AIL 2FL", all options for setting options for a second set of fl ap pairs will be suppressed throughout the (right-side) column labeled "FL2".Fl.posDiff.Ail-trAlNormal AILE+100%WK2FLAP0%0% 0%+100%0%+100%0%+100%0%0%0%0%+100% 0% 0%0%FLEl Fl+100%+100%+100%+100%0%0%0%0%0%0% 0%0%Model type: "2AIL 4FL"If servos have been connected to the receiver as described on page 61 and selected accordingly in the »Model type« menu, page 94, then the abbreviations "AILE", "FLAP" and "FL2" refer to the following fl aps:AIleftFLleftFL2leftFL2rightFLrightAIrightSince the options available on the wing mixer menu and its sub-menus vary according to the number of fl ap servos specifi ed on the »Model type« menu, page 94, the list contains only those set-up options available for the given model.Fl.posDiff.Ail-trAINormal AILE+100%FL2FLAP0%0% 0%+100%0%+100%0%+100%0%0%0%0%+100% 0% 0%0%FLEl Fl+100%+100%+100%+100%0%0%0%0%0%0% 0%0%Model type: "4AIL 2FL"If servos have been connected to the receiver as described on page 61 and selected accordingly in the »Model type« menu, page 94 , then the abbreviations "AILE", "AILE2" and "FL" refer to the following fl aps:AIleftAI2leftFLleftFLrightAI2rightAIrightSince the options available on the wing mixer menu and its sub-menus vary according to the number of fl ap servos specifi ed on the »Model type« menu, page 94, the list contains only those set-up options available for the given model.Therefore, with a preset to "4AIL 2FL", all options for setting options for the fi rst and second set of aileron pairs as well as those for the fl ap pair will be displayed throughout.FL.posDiff.Ail-tr.AlNormal AILE+100%FLAILE20%+100% 0%+100%0%+100%0%+100%0%0%0%0%+100% +100% 0%0%FLEl Fl+100%+100%0%0%0%0%0%0%0%0% 0%0%Model type: "4AIL 4FL"If servos have been connected to the receiver as described on page 61 and selected accordingly in the »Model type« menu, page 94 , then the abbreviations "AILE", "AILE2", "FLAP" and "FL2" refer to the following fl aps:AIleftAI2leftFLleftFL2leftFL2rightFLrightAI2rightAIrightSince the "4AIL 4FL" selection represents the maximum possible number of wing servos, in addition to the columns labeled "AILE" and "AILE2" there will now also be columns available labeled "FLAP" and "FL2.
169Detail program description - Wing mixersFl.posDiff.Ail-trAINormal AILE+100%FL20 0%+100+100%+100+100%+100+100%0% 0%0%0%0%0%0%+100% 0% 0%0%FLAILE2 FLAP+100%+100%0%0%El Fl 0 0%+100+100%+100+100%+100+100%Delta/fl ying wing type models with more than two wing fl apsIf the "ELEVON" tail type (for a delta-wing or fl ying wing model) has been selected and number of wing fl aps in the "Aileron/camber fl aps" line of the »Model type« menu conforms to that menu's description, then activation of the elevator joystick will normally result in as little movement for both ailerons as for the inside fl aps (FL) and, if present, (FL2). The reason for this is the default mixer ratio of 0 % for all wing fl aps set for the "ELFL" mixer found in the "Multi-fl ap" menu:Fl.posDiff.Ail-trAlNormal AILE+100%FLAP0%0% 0%+100%0%+100%0%+100%0%0%0%0%+100% 0% 0%0%FLEl Fl+100%+100%+100%+100%0%0%0%0%0%0% 0%0%Accordingly, you must fi rst specify your desired elevator control on the "EL  FL" line. Take care to ensure that up/down activation occurs in the right sequence.Note:The "Brake settings" sub-menu (see next double page) is also suitable for setting up the butterfl y (crow) function with delta and fl ying wing models. In fi ne-tuning the defl ection of the fl ap pairs AIL, FL and (if present) FL2, however, ensure that the moments created by one pair of fl aps compensate the moments created by the other pair of fl aps in each case. For example: the "up" effect of ailerons when defl ected up should be compensated by a "down" effect from fl aps when they are lowered. Multi-fl ap menuAI (Aileron  camber fl aps)(suppressed by "2AIL 1FL")Fl.posDiff.Ail-trAlNormal AILE+100%FL2FLAP0%0% 0%+100%0%+100%0%+100%0%0%0%0%+100% 0% 0%0%FL +100%+100%0%0%0%0%The "AI" line can be used to make fl ight-phase dependent settings for the percentage of aileron action to result for the camber fl ap pair "FLAP" and, if present, also "FL2" when aileron control is exercised. (In the "AILE" column it is also possible to adjust the defl ection of the aileron pair, if required.) Normally, however, the fl aps should follow the ailerons with less of a defl ection, i. e. the mixer ratio should be smaller than 100 %. The adjustment range of -150 % to +150 % means the direction of defl ection can be adjusted, depending on the direction of rotation of the servos, to suit the ailerons.A simultaneous tap on the  or  keys of the right touch pad (CLEAR) will reset the given active (inverse video) fi eld to its default value shown in the fi gure.
170 Detail program description - Wing mixersAiI-tr. (aileron trim)(suppressed by "2AIL 1FL")Fl.posDiff.Ail-trAlNormal AILE+100%FL2FLAP0%0% 0%+100%0%+100%0%+100%0%0%0%0%+100% 0% 0%0%FL +100%+100%0%0%0%0%In this line, you specify the percentage rate with which aileron trim is to affect "AILE", "FLAP" and – if present – "FLAP2".The available range of values is -150 % to +150 %, relative to the adjustment range of the trim wheel.A simultaneous tap on the  or  keys of the right touch pad (CLEAR) will reset the given active (inverse video) fi eld to its default value shown in the fi gure.Diff. (Differential for aileron function)(With "2AIL 1FL", at one level higher in the »Wing mixers« menu, see fi gure on the previous double page.)Fl.posDiff.Ail-trAlNormal AILE+100%FL2FLAP0%0% 0%+100%0%+100%0%+100%0%0%+100% 0% 0%0%FL +100%+100%0%0%0%0%On this line, you set the aileron differential, plus the differential for the FLAP and FLAP2 wing fl aps – if the latter are being activated as ailerons.0% (normal)50% (differential)100% (split)AI FL FL2 FL2 FL AIIf you are unsure about the meaning of differential travel, please read the appropriate explanation at the start of this section on page 161.The setting range of -100 % to +150 % permits correct differentiation direction adjustment regardless of the direction of rotation of aileron and fl ap servos.A simultaneous tap on the  or  keys of the right touch pad (CLEAR) will reset the given active (inverse video) fi eld to its default value shown in the fi gure.Fl.pos (fl ap position)Fl.posDiff.Ail-trAlNormal AILE+100%FL2FLAP0%0% 0%+100%0%+100%0%+100%0%0%+100% 0% 0%0%FL +100%+100%0%0%0%0%Here, you set the fl ight phase-specifi c wing fl ap positions for all of the fl aps present on the model in question. In this way, you can specify the fl ap positions that apply to each fl ight phase. The adjustment range of -100 % to +100 % makes it possible to set the correct direction of travel regardless of the direction of rotation of the aileron and fl ap servos.A simultaneous tap on the  or  keys of the right touch pad (CLEAR) will reset the given active (inverse video) fi eld to its default value shown in the fi gures.FL (effect of fl aps)This line specifi es the percentage of effect produced on aileron and fl aps by the settings (if applicable, also fl ight-phase dependent settings) made for Input 6 in the »Control adjust« menu, page 108.Fl.posDiff.Ail-trAlNormal AILE+100%FL2FLAP0%0% 0%+100%0%+100%0%+100%0%0%+100% 0% 0%0%FL +100%+100%0%0%0%0%For each fl ap pair, you can defi ne either a symmetrical or an asymmetric effect. Position the transmitter control accordingly – either centrally or to the relevant side.If each travel adjustment is left at +100 % on the »Control adjust« menu, page 108, then values between 5 % and 20 % should generally be suffi cient here.A simultaneous tap on the  or  keys of the right touch pad (CLEAR) will reset the given active (inverse video) fi eld to its default value shown in the fi gures. Note:By default, NO transmitter control is assigned to input 6 on the »Control adjust« menu. However, you can
171Detail program description - Wing mixersassign a transmitter control or switch to this input at any time – also in a fl ight phase-dependent way – thus enabling different fl ap settings within a fl ight phase; see also example 2 on page 292.El  Fl (elevator  fl ap) To provide support for the elevator for tight turns and aerobatics, this mixer can be used to make the fl ap function follow controls sent to the elevator. The mixer direction chosen must ensure that the fl aps are defl ected downwards when the elevator is oriented upwards and vice versa for a downward-oriented elevator – i.e. in opposite directions.For each fl ap pair, you can defi ne either a symmetrical or an asymmetric effect. Position the transmitter control accordingly – either centrally or to the relevant side. Values in the range -150 % to +150 % are possible:Fl.posDiff.Ail-trNormal AILE FL2FLAP0%+100%0%+100%0%+100%0%0%+100% 0% 0%0%FL +100%+100%0%0%0%0%El Fl +100%+100%0%0%0%0%A simultaneous tap on the  or  keys of the right touch pad (CLEAR) will reset the given active (inverse video) fi eld to its default value shown in the fi gures. The "usual" values for this mixer are in the low two-digit range.If a switch is assigned in the next line, "El  FL" then the effect produced on fl aps can be switched on and off with the elevator. Important general notice:Do not let control surfaces and servos strike their mechanical end-stops when large defl ections are set! This is especially relevant in relation to the functions "AI", "FL" and possibly "FL2". Use the "- limit +" option (travel limit) available in the "Servo adjustments" menu (page 102), as required.El  Fl offset (elevator) Fl.posDiff.Ail-trNormal AILE FL2FLAP0%+100%0%+100%0%+100%0%0%+100% 0% 0%0%FL +100%+100%0%0%0%0%El Fl +100%+100%0%0%0%0%A value entered into the "El"  Fl" line offers support to the elevator during tight curves and aerobatics. This "El"  Fl offset" line determines the offset value introductory point where this percentage of effect on fl aps is to take place for elevator action. • With an offset value of 0%, fl aps will be affected by elevator action beginning with the neutral position of the elevator joystick by the percentage set in the "El"  Fl".• With an offset value other than 0 %, fl aps will be affected by movement of the elevator joystick, in either the "up" or "down" direction, only after reaching the preset offset point.To set this offset point, put the elevator joystick at the offset point to be set (in either of the two possible directions). A brief tap on the center SET key of the right touch pad will store this position.Tap on the center SET key of the right touch pad with the elevator joystick in its centered position to set the offset value back to 0 % again. If a switch is assigned in column "Switch", the effect produced on fl aps can be switched on and off with the elevator. Brake settingsNotes:The "Brake settings" menu is switched "off" if: • "Motor on C1 forward / back" in the »Model type« menu (page 94) AND the "Motor" column of the »Phase settings« menu, (page 142) are set to "yes" for the currently active fl ight phase. Switch the fl ight phase if required:The "brake mixers" described below can also – • and should also – be confi gured to be specifi c to individual fl ight phases. CrowElevat. curveBRAKE SETTINGSNormalCrowAILE0%WK20%FLAP0%Diff. reductFL20% 0%0%The "Crow" mixer function is actuated by control function 1, 7, 8 or 9, depending on the input assigned on the "Brake Offset" line in the »Model type« menu (see page 94).Tail typeMotor on C1NormalNoneAileron/camber flaps 2AIL2FLM O D E L T Y PEBrake Offset +100%SELInput 1
172 Detail program description - Wing mixersNote:The Offset, i.e. the activation direction, is also set in the »Model type« menu, pager 94. This offset should be set to about +90 % of stick travel (if the C1 joystick is used, this is generally located at the forward position of the stick). To extend the fl aps, the stick must therefore be moved back towards the pilot. The remaining joystick travel of around 10 % then has no effect, although it is not "lost", since the control travel is automatically expanded back to 100 %.Use the select fi elds of the columns labeled "AILE", "FLAP", "FL" and, if present, "FL2" to specify the extent and the direction that corresponding fl ap pairs are to follow when the airbrake control (control function 1, 7, 8 or 9) is operated. If the model has no airbrakes, leave the corresponding receiver output free or set it in the »Mix only channel« menu to "MIXonly" to be able to use it elsewhere.Values in the range -150 % to +150 % are possible.A simultaneous tap on the  or  keys of the right touch pad (CLEAR) will reset the given active (inverse video) fi eld to its default value shown in the fi gure. "AILE" column• When braking the model as it comes in to land, neither of the two aileron fl aps should ever be defl ected more than half of the possible travel upwards, to ensure that enough travel is available to control the model along its longitudinal axis (aileron function).AIFLFL2FL2FLAI"FLAP" (and "FLAP2") column• As the model is braked on the landing approach, both pairs of fl aps can be set to defl ect by different amounts, e.g.:AIFLFL2FL2FLAIAIFLFL2FL2FLAICombining AILE and FLAP for "Crow"• AIFLFL2FL2FLAIThough the airbrake mixers are set as described above, there is a special fl ap constellation, called "crow position" or "butterfl y", that can also be set. This airbrake setting causes both ailerons move moderately upward while the fl aps move downward as far as possible. Another mixer – see below, under the section "Elevat. curve" – is then used to trim the elevator such that the fl ight speed does not change signifi cantly in comparison to the normal fl ight position. Otherwise, there is a danger that the model loses too much speed and then, after the braking system is retracted (e.g. to extend a landing approach that was too short, for example), pancakes or even stalls.A tip for "seeing" the effect of brakes:lift the fl aps and look over and under the surface from the front. The larger the surface projected by the lifted fl ap, the greater the braking effect achieved.Tips for activating airbrakes:When, in addition to aileron and camber fl ap • servos, there is also a built-in servo for actuating wing airbrakes, it can be most simply connected to that receiver output – if free – whose input has been selected for the brake function, i.e. either on 1, 7, 8 or 9. If this is not possible then, as an alternative, use a free mixer to connect the selected brake control channel with the airbrake servo.To activate two airbrake servos, the best approach • is to leave one servo on output 1 and to connect the second servo to a free output of your choice – for example, output 9. You then also assign this output to transmitter control 1 (as standard) on the »Control adjust« menu, page 108, see fi gure.0% +100%I9I10I11I12Typ SEL+100%0.0 0.0– travel + –time+0% +100%+100%0.0 0.00% +100%+100%0.0 0.00% +100%+100%0.0 0.0GLGLGLCn1 ---frfrfr---------offsetGLNormalAs you do, leave the settings for offset, travel, etc. at their default values. Also leave the default "GL" value in the column labeled "TYP" so that the second airbrake, like the fi rst, operates in the same way across all fl ight phases.
173Detail program description - Wing mixersAIFLFLAIServo 1Servo 9You can assure yourself that this works as stated by accessing the »Servo display« menu, accessible from almost any menu level with a brief simultaneous tap on the  keys on the left touch pad (see page 262):1357911131500000000+100000+100000246810121416If this relatively simply variant should prove impossible for whichever reasons, then the alternative is a solution with two free mixers – and potentially involving the »Mix only channel« menu, page 205.In either case, however, the airbrake travels must then be fi ne-tuned on the »Servo adjustment« menu, page 102.Diff. reductElevat. curveBRAKE SETTINGSNormalCrowAILE0%WK20%FLAP0%Diff. reductFL20% 0%0%Earlier, we discussed the problems with the butterfl y (crow) confi guration. Namely: that with the use of aileron differential, the aileron effect can be strongly (negatively) affected by the aileron elevation. This is fi rstly because further defl ection of the one aileron upwards is (almost) no longer possible and secondly because the downward-defl ected aileron – depending on the elevation and degree of differential confi gured – is often unable to achieve even its "normal" position.To be able to restore the effect of the aileron altered in this way as far as possible, you should ensure that you make use of the automated "Differential reduction" feature. This feature continuously reduces the degree of aileron differential as the airbrake system is extended. The feature is confi gurable and can even be set to suppress differential entirely. A value of 0 % means that the "aileron differential" set at the transmitter remains fully in force. An entry that equals the % value set for aileron differential means the differential is fully eliminated once the butterfl y function is at maximum travel, i.e. with fl aps fully extended. Setting a reduction value greater than the aileron differential confi gured will eliminate the latter even before the full travel of the airbrake joystick.Values can be set in the range 0 to 150 %.A simultaneous tap on the  or  keys of the right touch pad (CLEAR) will reset a changed value in a given active (inverse video) fi eld back to 0 %. Elevat. curve (Brake  Elevator)Elevat. curveBRAKE SETTINGSNormalCrowAILE0%WK20%FLAP0%Diff. reductFL20% 0%0%If the airbrake control – to be set to 1, 7, 8 or 9 on the "Brake Offset" line of the »Model type« menu, page 95 – is used to extend the fl aps as described previously for the "Brake settings" menu, this will often have a negative effect on the aircraft model's airspeed. This mixer can be used to compensate this type of effect by applying a corrective value to the elevator. A brief tap on the center SET key of the right touch pad will switch to the display screen shown below:BrakeCurveoff PointOutputInput –100%0%L+–100O U T P U T0%ElevatorNormalSetting notices for "Elevat. curve" (Brake  Elevator)The offset set in the »Model type« menu, page 94, affects this mixer.The vertical line on the display that indicates the position of the airbrake control only moves from the edge of the graph when the confi gured offset is exceeded. In doing so, airbrake control travel is automatically expanded back to 100 %, as described in the »Model type« menu.Accordingly, the mixer's neutral point always lies on the left edge, independently of the offset confi gured.Now adjust the elevator curve in the direction of the opposite end-point in accordance with requirements. Note that this method for setting the 5-point curve mixer follows the same principles that are applicable to the curve mixers, already described on page 128 in the context of the »Channel 1 curve« menu.
174 Detail program description - Wing mixersA simultaneous tap on the  or  keys of the right touch pad (CLEAR) will reset a changed value in a given active (inverse video) fi eld back to 0 %.Aileron 2  4 rudderBrake settingsAileron 0%WING MIXERS–––rudder24NormalMulti-flap menuFlaps elevator 0%0% –––63Here, you can set the degree to which the rudder follows commands acting on ailerons. This is used in particular in connection with aileron differential to suppress adverse yaw and thus make it easier to fl y "clean" curves. You can of course still issue separate commands to the rudder. The mixer direction is typically chosen to ensure that the rudder moves in the direction of the aileron that is defl ected upwards.Settings are always made symmetrically relative to the neutral point of the aileron joystick.The adjustment range of ± 150 % lets you set the direction of defl ection as appropriate. Optionally, this mixer can be activated and deactivated with of the switches or a control switch that is not self-restoring so the model can be controlled with only the ailerons or rudder if desired. A simultaneous tap on the  or  keys of the right touch pad (CLEAR) will reset a changed value in an active (inverse video) fi eld back to 0 %.A value of around 50 % is generally an excellent starting point.Flaps 6  3 elevatorBrake settingsAileron 0%WING MIXERS–––rudder24NormalMulti-flap menuFlaps elevator 0%0% –––63When setting camber-changing fl aps, one side-effect can be to generate moments causing movement around the transverse axis. Equally, however, it may also be desirable that e.g. your aircraft model opts for a more pacey fl ight style with the fl aps slightly raised. This mixer can be used to achieve both results.With this mixer, the extension of the fl aps – depending on the value confi gured – automatically ensures the elevator position follows suit. Symmetrical or asymmetrical settings relative to the neutral point of the fl ap control are possible.If required, the mixer can be switched on or off by assigning a switch in the right column.Values can be set in the range 150 to 150 %. The "typical" values confi gured for this mixer are single-digit or low two-digit values.A simultaneous tap on the  or  keys of the right touch pad (CLEAR) will reset a changed value in a given active (inverse video) fi eld back to 0 %.Note:If a transmitter control or switch has been assigned in the »Control adjust« menu, as described under "FL" on page 171, then that setting will also have an effect on this mixer. BrakeCurveoff PointOutputInput +100%–25%H+–100O U T P U T–25%ElevatorNormalThe selected setting should certainly be tried out in suffi cient altitude and, if necessary, readjusted. When doing this, be sure to pay attention that the model does not slow down too much while the brake system is extended! Otherwise, you run the risk that, after the braking system is retracted, e.g. to extend a landing approach that was too short, for example, your model pancakes or even stalls.Aileron differential(Only for "2AIL 1FL". For the "2AIL 2/4 FL" selection, this is included on the Multi-fl ap menu, see page170.)Aileron differentialBrake settings0%Aileron 0%WING MIXERS–––rudder24NormalMulti-flap menuOn this line you can set the aileron differential for the two aileron servos.If you are unsure about the meaning of differential travel, please read the appropriate explanation at the start of this section on page 161.The setting range of -100 % to +150 % permits correct differentiation direction adjustment regardless of the direction of rotation of aileron and fl ap servos.
175For your notes
176 Detail program description - Helicopter mixer Helicopter mixerFlight phase-specifi c setting of collective pitch, throttle and tail rotorIn this menu …Control adjust Dual Rate / ExpoChannel 1 curve Switch displayControl switch Logical switchesPhase settings Phase assignmentNon-delayed chan Timers (general)Fl. phase timers Helicopter mixer… all of the fl ight phase-specifi c helicopter mixers are described, with the exception of the mixers for auto-rotation fl ight (discussed from page 190 onward.) These mixers are used for the basic set-up of a model helicopter.For fl ight phase programming, see the menus:»• Basic settings, model«, page 84»• Phase settings«, page 146»• Phase assignment«, page 148When the switch for a specifi c fl ight phase is actuated, then the name of the given fl ight phase, e.g. «Normal», will be displayed at the lower left edge of the display screen:Channel 1Channel 1PitchGasHeckrotorTail rot. 0%Roll 0%GasRollGasHeckrotorNickNickGasHeckrotorSwashplate rotationSwashplate limiter0%0%0%0°OffGyro suppression 0%Gyro offset 0%NormalIn each of these fl ight phases – with the exception of the auto-rotation phase – the typical helicopter mixing and coupling functions shown in the screen-shot above are available for setting up the model helicopter. These functions are described in the fi rst part of this comprehensive chapter.General information on mixers, (see also pages 159 and 192)An arrow "" indicates a mixer. A mixer "branches off" the signal fl ow of a control function at a particular point, in order to use this fl ow to cause a predetermined effect on a further control channel and, ultimately, the receiver output. "Pitch ax  Tail rot" mixer means, for example, that when the pitch-axis joystick is actuated, the tail rotor servo must also react within the scope of its setting.Basic programming procedure:Select the mixer by using the selection keys of the 1. left or right touch pad.Depending on the mixer involved, the bottom display line will show either SEL or the  (indicating a change to a second page is necessary).A brief tap on the center 2. SET key of the right touch pad will permit direct settings for linear mixer ratios. Use the selection keys to set the mixer ratio.Otherwise you will need to switch to the second screen page where you can set up the appropriate curve mixer.A simultaneous tap on the  or  keys of the right touch pad (CLEAR) will reset a changed value in a given active (inverse video) fi eld back to 0 %.Another tap on the center 3. SET key of the right touch pad will complete the entry.A tap on the center 4. ESC key of the left touch pad will cause a return to the previous display page.Description of helicopter mixersTo set collective pitch curves as well as the two mixers, "Channel 1  Throttle" and "Channel 1  Tail rotor", there are curve mixers available in all fl ight phases. Accordingly, these mixers also permit the programming of non-linear mixing ratios along the path of joystick travel, if required. Switch to the display screen for curve settings with a brief tap on the center SET key of the right touch pad, see description below.The curve is set up basically in the same way as the Channel 1 curve for helicopters, but we will describe it again here in detail using pitch confi guration as an example, to save you having to leaf through the manual.In the remaining lines, fi rst activate the value fi eld and then use the selection keys of the left or right touch pad to set a mixer value in the value fi eld (inverse video).The settings available are rounded off with the "Swashplate limiter" option: This option can be set to restrict maximum defl ection of the swashplate servo in the sense of a limiter. Together, these settings confi gure the basic set-up of the helicopter model. In the "Autorotation" fl ight phase as described on page 190, however, the mixers "Channel 1  Throttle" and "Channel 1  Tail rot" are not needed and therefore switched to a confi gurable default value.Changed parameters can be reset to their respective default values at any time with a simultaneous tap on the  or  keys of the right touch pad (CLEAR). Pitch (Pitch curve (Channel 1  Pitch))If necessary, use the  selection keys of the left or right touch pad to move to the "Pitch" line then tap briefl y on the center SET key of the right touch pad.
177Detail program description - Helicopter mixerPitchCurveoff PointOutputInput –50%–50%?+–100O U T P U T0%NormalUnlike the »Channel 1 curve« menu, this display is only associated with the control curve of pitch servos, whereas the the "Channel 1 curve" affects all servos controlled by the throttle/pitch joystick.Note that the output signal of the "Channel 1 curve" option thus functions as an input signal for the collective pitch curve programmed here: In the graph, the vertical line is synchronized with the throttle/collective pitch stick and therefore follows the current Channel 1 curve characteristic.The control curve can be defi ned (separately per fl ight phase) by up to 8 points, termed "reference points", placed at any point along the joystick travel.Initially, however, fewer reference points are adequate for setting up the collective pitch curve. We recommend beginning with three reference points to start with. These three points, namely the two end-points "Pitch low (L)" (= -100 % control travel) and "Pitch high (H)" (= +100 % control travel) plus a point at the center of control travel still to be set, defi ne an initially linear profi le for the pitch curve.Programming detailsFirst, switch to your chosen fl ight phase, e.g. «Normal».The throttle/collective pitch stick is used to move the vertical line in the graph between the two end-points "Point L" (minimum pitch at -100 %) and "Point H" (maximum pitch at +100 % control travel): at the same time, the current joystick position is shown numerically on the "Input" line (-100 % to +100 %). The point at which the vertical line crosses the curve is termed the "Output", and can be varied at the maximum of 8 reference points within the range -125 % to +125 %. A control signal modifi ed in this way affects only the collective pitch servos. In the example to the left, the joystick is at exactly 0 % of control travel and also generates an output signal of 0 %, since the characteristic curve is linear.Up to six additional reference points can be set between the two end-points "L" and "H", although the distance between neighboring reference points must not be less than approx. 25 %.Setting reference pointsMove the joystick. If the display shows a framed question mark, then you can set the next reference point with a tap on the center SET key of the right touch pad. Simultaneously, the "?" is replaced by its number and the value fi eld to the right of the reference point number is highlighted:PitchCurveoff PointOutputInput 0%0%1+–100O U T P U T0%Normal1The order in which up to six reference points are generated between the end-points "L" and "H" is irrelevant since these reference points are continuously renumbered automatically from left to right as they are entered.Confi guring reference pointsTo confi gure a point, use the joystick to move the vertical line onto the point you wish to change. The number and current curve value of this point are displayed on the left side of the display, on the "Point" line. Briefl y tap the center SET key of the right touch pad. Use the selection keys on the right touch pad to change the current curve value shown in the highlighted fi eld. The possible range is -125 % to +125 % and changes do not affect neighboring reference points. PitchCurveoff PointOutputInput 0%+75%1+–100O U T P U T+75%Normal1In this sample screen image, reference point "1" has been set to +75 %. If you wish, however, other points can also be set. At -50 %, for example …PitchCurveoff PointOutputInput –50%–12%1+–100O U T P U T–12%Normal21… and/or a further point at +50 %:
178 Detail program description - Helicopter mixerPitchCurveoff PointOutputInput +50%+88%3+–100O U T P U T2+88%Normal13To do so, use the joystick to move to the corresponding area. As soon as a "?" appears in the marker frame on the "Point" line, the respective point can be set by touching the selection keys of the right touch pad. Just as with other points, this can be set … PitchCurveoff PointOutputInput +50%0%3+–100O U T P U T20%Normal13… or, reset again with a simultaneous tap on the  or  selection keys of the right touch pad (CLEAR). The "L" and "H" points, on the other hand, CANNOT be deleted. Trim point functionAlternatively, a jump up or down to reference points already set, L, 1 … max. 6 and H, can be accomplished by using the  selection keys on the left touch pad. The selection keys on the right touch pad can then be used to change the reference point jumped to as described above, entirely independently of the control position.PitchCurveoff PointOutputInput –50%–25%1+–100O U T P U T+50%NormalTrim point 1In this simple example, the pitch joystick – represented by the vertical line – is halfway between "Pitch minimum" and the midpoint of control travel (input = -50 %). However, "Point 1" will be relocated to control center at a point value of +50 %, resulting in a momentary output value of -25 %.One touch on the center ESC key of the left touch pad terminates this trim point function.Trim offset functionWhen a value fi eld is active, i.e. in inverse video, it is not only possible, as previously described, to jump up or down to reference points already set with the  selection keys of the left touch pad and to make a change with the selection keys of the right touch pad, but also an existing curve can be vertically repositioned within a range of ±25 % through use of the  keys on the left touch pad. Starting with a point value for "Point 1" at 0 %, the control curves in both of the following fi gures have been vertically shifted within the ±25 % range by the trim offset function:PitchCurveoff PointOutputInput 0%–25%1+–100O U T P U T–25%NormalTrim offset1PitchCurveoff PointOutputgInput 0%+25%1+–100O U T P U T+25%NormalTrim offset1A tap on the center ESC key of the left touch pad will also terminate this function.Trim x-axis functionThis function is activated by tapping the left () or right () selection key of the right touch pad with an active (i.e. inverse video) value fi eld. You can then use the selection keys on the right touch pad to reposition the active point horizontally or vertically as you wish. In the fi gure below, "Point 1" which was just shifted to +50 % with the trim point function, will now be shifted to the left:PitchCurveoff PointOutputInput 0%+67%?+–100O U T P U T+50%NormalTrim X-axis 1Notes:If the point is repositioned horizontally further • away from the current control position than approx. ±25 %, a "?" sign will reappear in the line Point. This question mark does not refer to the repositioned point, however: instead, it signifi es that a further point can be set at the current control position.
179Detail program description - Helicopter mixerPlease note that the percentage value on the • "Output" line always relates to the current joystick position and not to the position of the point.Smoothing the collective pitch curveIn the example below, sample reference points have been set …reference point 1 to +50 %,reference point 2 to +75 % andreference point 3 to -50 %… as described in the last section.PitchCurveoff PointOutputInput +50%–50%3+–100O U T P U T2–50%Normal13This "jagged" curve profi le can be smoothed automatically simply by pressing a button. Do this – from a situation as illustrated – with a brief tap on the  selection key of the left touch pad. This will cause a switchover from "(Curve) off" to "(Curve) on" (or vice versa).PitchCurveon PointOutputInput +50%–50%3+–100O U T P U T2–50%Normal13Notes:If the joystick does not coincide with the exact • reference point, please note that the percentage value on the "Output" line always relates to the current joystick position.The fi gures on these pages show control curves • created only for the purpose of illustration. Please note, therefore, that the curve characteristics displayed do not in any way represent real-life collective pitch curves. A specifi c application example can be found in the programming examples on page 312.The following three graphs show typical 3-point pitch curves for various fl ight phases, such as hovering, aerobatics and 3D fl ight.The vertical bar depicts the current joystick position. Please note that trim values greater than +100 % and less than -100 % cannot be presented in the display.Sample collective pitch curves for various fl ight phases:OutputOutputOutputControl travel Control travel Control travelAerobatics 3DHoverNotice about marker keys:If marker keys have been set in the »Basic settings, model« menu, page 91, touching a key while in this graph will set a dashed vertical line to show the position of the C1 joystick at the time the key was pressed.PitchCurveoff PointOutputInput 0%0%?+–100O U T P U T10%NormalMove the C1 joystick (continuous line) to the marker line in order to read out the input and output values.If the marker line, for example, indicates momentary hovering fl ight and this is to be put exactly in control center then it is only necessary to transfer the "output" value of the marker line, in this example, shift control center to reference point "1".Erasing reference pointsTo delete one of the reference points (1 to max. 6), use the joystick to move the vertical line into the vicinity of the reference point in question. As soon as the reference point number and its associated value is shown on the "Point" line (see screen image above), following activation of the value fi eld on the "Point" line now in inverse video with a simultaneous tap on the or  keys of the right touch pad (CLEAR) it can be erased. Complete the operation with a brief tap on the center key ESC of the left touch pad. Channel 1  Throttle (Throttle curve)Channel 1Curveoff PointOutputInput +25%+25%?+–100O U T P U T+50%ThrottleNormalUnlike the »Channel 1 curve« menu, this display is only associated with the control curve of the throttle servo, whereas the the "Channel 1 curve" affects all servos controlled by the throttle/pitch joystick.Note that the output signal of the "Channel 1 curve" menu thus functions as an input signal for the throttle curve programmed here: In the graph, the vertical line is synchronized with the throttle/collective pitch stick and therefore follows the current Channel 1 curve characteristic.The throttle curve can also be defi ned (separately
180 Detail program description - Helicopter mixerper fl ight phase) by up to 8 points, termed "reference points", placed at any point along the joystick travel.The reference points are defi ned, adjusted and erased in the usual way, as explained in the previous section on the collective pitch curve. Start by defi ning the throttle curve with three points, namely the points "L" and "H" at the extremes, plus the Point "1" still to be set in the control center in order to match the motor power curve to the collective pitch curve.Helicopter with carburetor or electric drive system with speed CONTROLLERThis setting relates only to the control curve of the throttle servo or the speed controller.Setting the throttle curve to suit a helicopter equipped with a speed controller is discussed in the following section.As with the confi guration of the collective pitch curve (see previous page), the throttle curve can also be defi ned by up to 8 points.In each case, set the control curve so that • when the throttle/collective pitch stick is in its end position, the carburetor is fully open or the controller of an electrically-powered helicopter is set to maximum (except for auto-rotation fl ight, see page 190).For the hover point, which is normally at the • control center, the carburetor setting or power control for the speed controller must be matched to the collective pitch curve so that the correct system rotational speed is obtained. At the minimum position of the throttle/collective • pitch stick, the throttle curve must fi rst be confi gured so that a glow motor runs at a speed considerably higher than idle speed and the clutch is fi rmly engaged.Starting and stopping of the motor – whether combustion or electric drive – always takes place within the given fl ight phase as a consequence of the throttle limiter and the "Thr. CutOff" option (see below).This makes it unnecessary to program the two fl ight phases that may be familiar to you from using other remote control systems – namely "with idle-up" and "without idle-up", and with the associated "waste" of a fl ight phase for this purpose – since the mc-16 HoTT program offers a much more fl exible approach to fi ne-tuning and optimizing increases to system rotational speed below the hover point than the "idle-up" approach taken by older mc remote control systems.Ensure that the throttle limiter is closed before starting a motor with carburetor, i.e. so that the carburetor can be adjusted within the idle range only with trim. Ensure that you follow the safety instructions on page 189 at all times. If the throttle is set too high when switching on the transmitter, you will receive audible and visible warnings!#02 0:00hStoppuhrFlugzeitK780:00.04.1V0:00.0000000:00hMVStarlet Thr toohigh!H-J SandbrunnerNormalThe following three graphs show (typical) 3-point throttle curves for various fl ight phases, such as hovering aerobatics and 3D fl ight.Sample throttle curves for various fl ight phases:+100% +100% +100%-100%-100%-100%OutputOutputOutput234 51234 51234 51Control travel Control travel Control travelHover Aerobatics 3DNotes on using the "throttle limit" function:The throttle limit function should be used in any • case (»Control adjust« menu, page 117). At the rear limit of the default transmitter control, the right-side throttle limit proportional rotary slider, the throttle servo is completely decoupled from the throttle curve, the motor is at idle and will respond only to C1 trim. This option permits the motor to be started in any fl ight phase and to shut the motor off with the "Thr. CutOff" option.
181Detail program description - Helicopter mixerOnce the motor has started, push the throttle limiter s l o wly in the direction of the opposite end-point to put actuation of the throttle servo fully under the control of the throttle/collective pitch joystick once again. In order to prevent the throttle servo from being restricted by the throttle limiter in the full throttle direction, set control travel on the plus-side of the column labeled "travel" to +125 % in the "Tl16" line of the »Control adjust« menu. Leave the default value of "GL" in the "Type" column alone, however, to confi gure this setting globally for all fl ight phases.For a more fi nely-tuned control travel curve for the throttle limit control, you can also use the "Expo throttle limiter" (page 100). This gives you the option of defi ning the idle setting at the throttle limit control's center position, as readily determined both visually and audibly.Set the throttle limiter to its center position and adjust the "EXPO thro lim." value as far as is needed until the motor is idling smoothly with the throttle limit control set at its center point. In this position, the motor will then start without any problems. To switch off, turn or push the throttle limit control – that is, without C1 cutoff trim – to its rearmost end-point. As you do, ensure that the affected servo cannot hit an end-stop mechanically.The throttle restriction set by the throttle limiter is made visible as a horizontal bar in the diagram:Channel 1Curveoff PointOutputInput +50%+50%?+–100O U T P U T+50%ThrottleNormalThe output signal for the throttle servo can never be higher than that set by the horizontal bar. In this example, about a maximum of +25 %.Since electric drive systems have no need for an • idle setting, the basic confi guration of settings for an electrically-powered helicopter merely involves making sure that the control range of the throttle limiter is both higher and lower than the adjustment range of the speed controller (usually -100 % to +100 %) by a safe margin. If necessary, therefore, adjust the "travel" setting of the throttle limiter as appropriate on the "Tl16" line of the »Control adjust« menu. Leave the default value of "GL" in the "Type" column alone, however, to confi gure this setting globally for all fl ight phases. Fine-tuning of the throttle curve itself, however, must take place in fl ight – as with a glow-powered helicopter.If you wish to record the fl ight time of a (glow-• powered) helicopter, you can assign a control switch to the throttle limit slider, and then use this to switch a timer on and off; see page 135.For auto-rotation fl ight, an automatic switch-over is made from this mixer to a confi gurable default value; see page 190. Helicopter with speed CONTROLLERUnlike speed controllers, which merely adjust output level in a manner similar to a carburetor, a speed regulator keeps speed in the system it monitors constant by regulating its output autonomously. In the case of combustion motor powered helicopters, the regulator therefore controls the throttle servo itself as appropriate or, for an electric helicopter, the motor's speed controller. Therefore, speed regulators do not need a traditional throttle curve but rather only a speed setting. A deviation from the preset speed will therefore only take place if the level of output required exceeds the maximum level available.Usually, receiver output 8 is reserved for connecting a speed regulator; refer to the receiver layout on page 65. However, if this connection is used there will be no throttle limit function because the throttle limit function can only be implemented via the "Channel 1  Throttle" mixer which is on the – then unused – output 6.To make the comfort and safety features of a throttle limiter available, a speed regulator should be connected to receiver output 6 (contrary to the general connection notices) and only requires appropriate adaptation to the throttle curve so it can take over the task of the "conventional" transmitter control. Since in this case the "throttle curve" only regulates the target speed of the motor controller and this target motor speed should typically remain constant over the entire collective pitch adjustment range, the "Channel 1 Throttle" mixer must be used to set a horizontal line – i.e. every (pitch) input value will result in the same ("throttle") output value – whose "height" is defi ned by the target motor speed. First, therefore, the reference points "1" to "6" – if present and set – are erased. Following this, the reference points "L" (input = -100 %) and "H" (input = +100 %) are then each set to the same value, for example:
182 Detail program description - Helicopter mixerChannel 1 Curveoff PointOutputInput 0%+66%L+–100O U T P U T+66%ThrottleNormalThe value to be set depends both on the speed controller used and on the target motor speed that is desired, and can, of course, be varied according to the fl ight phase.For auto-rotation fl ight, an automatic switch-over is made from this mixer to a confi gurable default value; see page 190. Channel 1Curveoff PointOutputInput +100%+30%H+–100O U T P U T+30%Tail rot.NormalStarting with values of -30 % for point "L" and +30 % for point "H", the mixer is to be confi gured in such a way that the helicopter, even during prolonged vertically ascending or descending fl ights, does not deviate from the yaw axis as a result of the main rotor's altered torque while hovering. For hovered fl ight, trim should only be affected by way of the (digital) tail rotor trim wheel. For a reliable torque compensation setting, it is essential that the collective pitch and throttle curves have been set up correctly, i.e. that the rotor speed remains constant over the collective pitch's full adjustment range.This third curve mixer applies only to the control curve of the tail rotor servo when the throttle/collective pitch stick is moved, whereas the "Channel 1 curve" (see page 131) acts on all servos that are affected by the throttle/collective pitch stick. Note that the output signal of the "Channel 1 curve" option also functions as an input signal for the tail rotor curve programmed here: In the graph, the vertical line is synchronized with the throttle/collective pitch stick and follows the current Channel 1 curve characteristic from the »Channel 1 curve« menu.In the auto-rotation fl ight phase this mixer is automatically switched off. Channel 1  Tail rot. (static torque compensation)Channel 1Curveoff PointOutputInput 0%0%+–100O U T P U T0%Tail rot.?NormalThe default approach here is to preset a torque compensation curve with a linear mixer ratio of a uniform 0 %, as is required for a gyro sensor working in "heading lock mode" – see the screen image above. Important notice:In this context, ensure that you comply with the instructions on adjusting your gyro: if not, you risk making adjustments that render your helicopter impossible to fl y.If, on the other hand, you use your gyro sensor in the "normal" operating mode, or if it only has what is termed "normal mode", then confi gure the mixer as follows:As with the confi guration of the collective pitch curve (see page 176), the control curve of the tail rotor can also be defi ned by up to 6 points. If required, therefore, you can modify the mixer at any time and preset both symmetrical and asymmetric mixer ratios both above and below the hover point. Before you do, however, ensure you have entered the correct direction of rotation for the main rotor on the »Helicopter type« menu.
183Detail program description - Helicopter mixer Tail rotor  throttleChannel 1Channel 1PitchThrottleTail rot.Tail rot. 0%Roll 0%ThrottleThrottleSELNormalWhile the tail rotor normally compensates for the effect of main rotor torque on the fuselage, it is also used to control the helicopter around the vertical axis. Increasing tail rotor thrust requires a corresponding adjustment to motor power, however, to avoid a fall-off in system rotational speed.This mixer sets the extent to which the throttle follows the tail rotor. The throttle will follow on one side only, to the side on which the tail rotor thrust is increased. The setting range is therefore 0 to +100 %. The direction depends on the main rotor's direction of rotation (left or right), and this must fi rst be set correctly on the »Helicopter type« menu. For left-hand rotation systems, the throttle follows the tail rotor when the tail rotor joystick is moved to the left, and vice versa for right-hand rotation systems.A simultaneous tap on the  or  keys of the right touch pad (CLEAR) will reset a changed value in an active (inverse video) fi eld back to 0 %.In the auto-rotation fl ight phase this mixer is automatically switched off.Set-up notes:To set the mixer value accurately you should either fi rst fl y several high-speed pirouettes against the direction of main rotor rotation or, if a strong wind is blowing, hover at right angles to the wind with a suffi ciently large tail rotor defl ection. Set the mixer value so that there is no fall-off in system rotational speed.Increasing pitch is not the only change that requires a corresponding torque compensation via the tail rotor: major cyclic control movements also require this, e.g. if the swashplate is tilted in any direction. Here, too, the mc-16 HoTT program lets you confi gure settings for both types of tilt movement (roll and pitch-axis) separately.For advanced aerobatics in particular, which involve very large control defl ections in the pitch-axis controls, e.g. the "Bo-turn" (vertical pull-up followed by tipping over around the pitch-axis) and tight loops, the uncompensated torque present in these fl ights causes the model to turn to a greater or lesser degree around the yaw axis. This spoils the appearance of the maneuver.These two mixers permit static torque compensation to be activated by the swashplate tilting in any direction. The mixers work by always increasing tail rotor thrust, starting from the center point of the roll and pitch-axis sticks, i.e. they always generate a tail rotor defl ection in the same direction regardless of the direction of the command.The mixer value can be varied within the range 0 to +100 %.The mixer direction is determined automatically by your defi nition of the direction of main rotor rotation on the »Helicopter type« menu, page 98.In the auto-rotation fl ight phase this mixer is automatically switched off. Gyro suppressionRoll 0%ThrottleSELRoll Tail rot.Nick Throttle0%0%Nick Tail rot. 0%Gyro suppression 0%Normal Roll  Throttle and Pitch axis  ThrottleChannel 1 Tail rot.Tail rot. 0%Roll 0%ThrottleThrottleSELRoll Tail rot.Nick Throttle0%0%NormalIncreasing collective pitch is not the only change that requires the throttle to follow suit: major cyclic control movements also require this, i.e. if the swashplate is tilted in any direction. The mc-16 HoTT program lets you adjust the degree of throttle follow separately for roll and pitch-axis controls.This offers particular advantages in aerobatic fl ying, e.g. when fl ying a roll: here, with moderate collective pitch values and the carburetor only about half-open, cyclic control travels are nonetheless executed that require much higher performance from the motor.The mixer value can be varied within the range 0 to +100 %. The correct mixer direction is automatically taken into account.A simultaneous tap on the  or  keys of the right touch pad (CLEAR) will reset a changed value in an active (inverse video) fi eld back to 0 %.In the auto-rotation fl ight phase this mixer is automatically switched off. Roll  Tail rot. and Pitch axis  Tail rot.Tail rot. 0%Roll 0%ThrottleThrottleSELRoll Tail rot.Nick Throttle0%0%Nick Tail rot. 0%Normal
184 Detail program description - Helicopter mixerImportant: in normal situations, this function should not be used if your model is fi tted with a modern gyro system. In this context, ensure that you comply with the instructions on adjusting your gyro: if not, you risk making adjustments that render your helicopter impossible to fl y. This menu has nonetheless been retained in order to cater to a full range of requirements and fl ying habits.With this option, the effect of the gyro sensor ("gyro") can be varied according to the tail rotor joystick position; this assumes the use of a gyro system whose gyro gain can be controlled from the transmitter via an auxiliary channel. This channel will be channel 7 for Graupner remote control systems. The gyro suppression function reduces gyro gain in a linear progression as the pilot increases the tail rotor defl ection. Without gyro suppression – i.e. when set to 0 % – the gyro effect is constant, regardless of the joystick position.With a transmitter control assigned on the "Gyr7" line on the »Control adjust« menu (page 116), e.g. one of the proportional sliders mounted in the middle console; as applicable, also made fl ight-phase dependent and/or with infi nitely variable gyro effect between minimum and maximum. In this case, gyro gain is maximum at full defl ection of the slider, and zero at the opposite end-point.Of course, the software lets you limit the gyro gain range on both sides by altering the transmitter control travel.Depending on the transmitter control's position, the gyro gain at full travel on the tail rotor joystick is:"current control positionminusgyro suppression value".Accordingly, if the transmitter control is at the neutral point, and gyro suppression is set to 100 %, the gyro gain is reduced to zero as the tail rotor if the assigned transmitter control is moved to the +50 % position (as shown here); and only at >150 % suppression is gain reduced to zero with the slider at this position, well before full tail rotor defl ection.Exemple:+50 %Í Gyro gain ÎleftStick deflection tail rotorcentre rightRange of transmittercontrol 7Linear gyro suppression with reduced control • travel, e.g. -50 % to +80 % of full travel. Gyro gain is infi nitely variable within these transmitter control limits. Here too, for purposes of illustration, we plot gyro gain values in relation to tail rotor defl ection for various parameter values of gyro suppression.Exemple:+80 %Í Gyro gain ÎleftStick deflection tail rotorcentre rightRange oftransmittercontrol 7Adjusting the gyro sensorTo achieve the maximum possible level of stabilization for the helicopter with the gyro along the defl ection increases. For values between 100 % and the maximum value of 199 %, the gyro can be fully suppressed – depending on the transmitter control position – well before full defl ection of the tail rotor; see the diagram on the next page.For the Graupner/JR gyro NEJ-120 BB, order no. 3277, both the upper and the lower values are set via rotary controls: control 1 sets the minimum gyro gain at the bottom position of the slider; control 2 sets the maximum gain at the top end-point of the slider; the transition between these two values occurs roughly in the middle of the slider travel. In contrast, the PIEZO 900, PIEZO 2000 and PIEZO 3000 gyro systems feature proportional, infi nitely variable adjustment of gyro gain; see below for typical diagrams.As an example, the option to confi gure fl ight phase-specifi c – and static – gyro gain gives you the opportunity to exploit maximum stabilization for normal, slow fl ying, but to reduce gyro gain for fast circuits and aerobatics.Samples of various gyro settings and confi guration notesLinear gyro suppression: 0 % to 199 %. • With the tail rotor joystick in the center position, the resulting gyro effect is set using the selected transmitter control. Using a proportional rotary control or slider, the effect is infi nitely variable between zero ("min") and maximum ("max"), provided transmitter control travel is not restricted. With full tail rotor defl ection, the effective gyro gain is as follows:"current control positionminusgyro suppression value".This means that at 0 % gyro suppression, gyro gain is constant for tail rotor joystick movement; at 50 % suppression, gyro gain is reduced to half
185Detail program description - Helicopter mixervertical axis, observe the following:The controls should have as little friction and • "play" as possible.There should be no "spring" in the control linkage.• Use a strong and comparably fast servo. • When the gyro sensor detects a model rotation, the faster its response – a corresponding corrective change to tail rotor thrust – takes effect, the further the gyro gain adjuster can be moved without causing the tail of the model to start oscillating, and the better the model's stability about its vertical axis. If the response is slower, there is a risk that the model's tail will start to oscillate even at low gyro gain settings. Here, further reductions to gyro gain will need to be made to eliminate the oscillation.If the model is fl ying forward at high speed or hovering in a powerful headwind, the net result of the stabilizing effect of the vertical fi n combined with the gyro may also lead to an overreaction that once again manifests itself through tail oscillation. To achieve optimum gyro stabilization under all conditions, you can make use of the option to adjust gyro gain from the transmitter using a transmitter control assigned to input "7", in connection with gyro suppression and/or the two settings on the Gyro NEJ-120 BB. Further notes on gyros with confi gurable multilevel gyro gain (e.g. NEJ-120 BB)Since you cannot specify the gyro gain from the transmitter proportionally via the transmitter control, the gyro's own control 1 must be used to set the (weaker) gyro gain (e.g. for aerobatics) and control 2 the stronger gyro gain (e.g. for hovered fl ight). Even though a proportional control is used for control function 7, only a switch-over between these two values takes place and the setting is therefore not proportional. You should therefore advance control 2 to the point where the model is on the brink of oscillating when hovering in calm conditions, and advance control 1 to SELRoll Tail rot.Nick Throttle0%0%Nick Tail rot. 0%Gyro suppression 0%Gyro offset 0%NormalBased on these fl ight-phase specifi c (offset) settings, gyro gain can also be infi nitely varied by a transmitter control assigned in the "Gyr7" line of the »Control adjust« menu, page 116. Swashplate rotationSELNick Throttle 0%0%Nick Tail rot.0%Gyro suppression0%Swashplate rotation 0°Gyro offsetNormalSome rotor head control systems make it necessary to incline the swashplate in a different direction from the intended inclination of the rotor plane when a cyclic control command is given. If your model features a four-bladed main rotor, for example, you may need to use this menu to set up a software-driven 45° rotation of the control linkage to the right, so that the pushrods from the swashplate to the rotor head can be set exactly vertical, ensuring that the blade control system works correctly, without unwanted differential effects. This eliminates the need to make mechanical changes to the control linkages. Negative angles equate to a virtual rotation of the rotor head to the left; positive angles a virtual rotation to the right.the point where the model does not oscillate with its tail even when fl ying at maximum speed into a strong headwind. Depending on the state of the weather and the fl ight program planned, you can also switch over the gyro gain from the transmitter – also with gyro suppression dependent on tail rotor defl ection if required. Gyro offsetImportant notice:The value of this option is identical to the offset value set in the "Gyr7" line of the »Control adjust« menu, page 116. For this reason, any changes made always affect the other menu directly – and vice versa.Most of the latest gyro systems not only feature infi nitely variable proportional gyro gain setting, but also offer a choice of two separate types of gain mode on the transmitter. If the gyro in use has at least one of these features then this alternative offset setting provides an opportunity to preset both "normal" gyro gain as well as, as appropriate, to specify a "heading-lock mode" whereby, even within this pre-selection, gyro gain can be reduced by a particular gain type for normal, slow fl ight with maximum fl ight stabilization, fast circuit fl ights and aerobatics. To proceed as described above, use fl ight phase switching to enter different settings on the "Gyro offset" line. Values between -125 % and +125 % are possible:
186 Detail program description - Helicopter mixer Swashplate limiterSEL0%Nick Tail rot.0%Gyro suppression0%Swashplate rotation 0°Swashplate limiter offGyro offsetNormalThis function works like a circular mechanical surround acting upon the stick which controls the swashplate, restricting the normally square stick travel to a circular range. In fact, if the helicopter is set up in such a way that the defl ections for roll and/or pitch-axis exploit the maximum travel mechanically possible, e.g. for 3D helicopters, then the total tilt applied to the swashplate if full roll and pitch-axis commands are applied simultaneously will be considerably greater (141 % in numerical terms). The swashplate mechanism may then strike its end-stops and, in the worst case, the ball-links could even be disengaged.The mc-16 HoTT transmitter contains a confi gurable software function for limiting the total swashplate travel, i.e. it restricts the tilt angle of the swashplate from 100 % (the travel is limited to the value obtainable either with roll or pitch-axis alone) to 149 % (no effective limit). In addition, the function can be set to "Off" and hence completely deactivated. The swash limiter can also be confi gured per model and per fl ight phase. This software solution is therefore much more fl exible than a physical circular surround attached to the stick unit: the latter can, in any case, only be used if the roll and pitch-axis functions are controlled by a common stick unit.The adjacent sketch illustrates the effect for a 100 % setting. the cross-hatched area of travel is curtailed and appears as a "dead zone".If this function is used, "Dual Rate" should be set to 100 % and Dual Rate values above 100 % should also not be used. If not, and you set a swashplate limit of 100 %, for example, then swashplate movement will be restricted even if roll and pitch-axis commands are given separately.Setting range: 100 … 149 % and "off".
187Detail program description - Helicopter mixer Fine-tuning the throttle and collective pitch curvePractical approachAlthough the throttle and collective pitch control systems are based on separate servos, they are always operated together by the throttle/pitch joystick (except during autorotation fl ight). This coupling is performed by the helicopter program automatically. In the mc-16 HoTT program, the trim wheel of control function 1 acts principally only on the throttle servo. However, in the »Stick mode« menu (see page 106) a decision can be made if this should be used for idle trimming as part of the throttle limit function, or for idle trimming during the auto-rotation phase ("throttle AR").The process of fi ne-tuning throttle and collective pitch, i.e. setting the motor power curve to match the collective blade pitch setting, is the most important aspect of setting up a model helicopter. The mc-16 HoTT software provides for independent confi guration of the throttle, collective pitch and torque compensation curves, in addition to the C1 control curve (»Channel 1 curve« menu, page 131). While these curves can be modeled using up to six points, fewer points are generally suffi cient. We recommend starting with three-point curves to begin with. This involves setting individual values for the center point and other (optional) reference points, and for the two end-points ("L", "low", and "H", "high") of the throttle/collective pitch stick: together, these defi ne the control curves. Before setting the throttle and collective pitch function, the rods of all servos should be mechanically pre-adjusted correctly according to the set-up instructions for the given helicopter.Note:The hover point should normally be set to the center position of the throttle / collective pitch stick. In special cases, e.g. for "3D" fl ight, deviating hover points can also be programmed. For example, one point for normal fl ight attitude above the center and one point for inverted fl ight attitude below the center. Idle setting and throttle curveNote:Since electric drive systems have no need for an idle setting, motor idling does not need to be calibrated. Fine-tuning of the throttle and collective pitch curve(s), however, must take place as for glow-powered helicopters.The idle setting, whose detailed description begins on page 117, always takes place with the throttle limiter closed – normally with the trim wheel of the C1 function and only in special cases is the throttle limiter itself also utilized (as standard, the CTRL 6 proportional rotary control). The programming of a corresponding value for the "L" point of the throttle curve acts to set the descent speed of the motor, without infl uencing the hover confi guration.Here, for example, fl ight phase programming can be used to set different throttle curves. This increased system rotational speed below the hover point proves to be useful in certain circumstances, e. g. for fast, steep landing approaches with greatly reduced collective pitch, and for aerobatics.The fi gure depicts a curve with a slightly changeable throttle setting below the hover point at the control center. +100%-100%OUTPUT234 51Control travelDifferent throttle curves are programmed to be fl ight-phase dependent in order to achieve the given optimal adaptation to hovering fl ight as well as aerobatics:Low system rotational speed with smooth, gentle • control response and low noise when hoveringHigher rotor speed for aerobatics with motor power • set close to the maximum. In this case, the throttle curve must also be adjusted in the hover range. Basic set-up procedureEven though pitch and throttle curves can be set electronically over a wide range with the mc-16 HoTT transmitter, all linkage in the model should already be mechanically pre-adjusted correctly according to the instructions for the given helicopter. Experienced helicopter pilots will be glad to help with this basic set-up.The carburetor linkage must be set so that the throttle is just past the fully open setting with collective pitch set to maximum or, for electric helicopters, with the speed controller set to full. When the throttle limiter is closed, however, it must be possible to just close off the carburetor using the C1 trim wheel (rapid throttle setting of the "digital trim", see page 58 ), without the servo mechanically striking its end-stop. For electric helicopters, it must be possible to cut the electric motor's speed controller safely with the throttle limiter closed.Take great care when confi guring these settings, by adjusting the control linkage as required and/or altering the linkage point on the servo or carburetor lever. Only then should the throttle servo's fi ne-tuning be electronically optimized.Caution:Inform yourself thoroughly about the dangers and safety precautions applicable to handling motors and helicopters before starting the motor for the fi rst time!With this basic set-up complete, the motor should be started in accordance with the motor operating instructions: idling can then be confi gured using the trim wheel of the throttle/collective pitch stick. The preset idle position will be displayed on the transmitter's basic display by a horizontal bar next to the C1 trim wheel position indicator. Refer to the description of digital trim on page 58 of this manual.
188 Detail program description - Helicopter mixerthe collective pitch stick to its end-point. Compared to the hover confi guration, motor speed should remain unchanged. If motor speed falls off in the climb, even with the drive system working at full power and therefore no further power increase is possible, then reduce maximum blade pitch angle at full defl ection of the collective pitch stick, i.e. the value of point "H". Conversely, the attack angle should be increased if motor speed is to increase while climbing. Therefore, on the "Pitch" graph page, put the vertical line on Point "H" by moving the pitch joystick then change this point's value appropriately with the  selection keys of the right touch pad. This diagram shows only the changes when setting the maximum collective pitch value.+100%-100%OUTPUT234 51Control travelHoverpointThen bring the model back to hover, which should, in turn, be achieved with the C1 stick at its center point. If the hover fl ight point is now achieved only by moving the pitch joystick away from its center point toward "higher" values then this deviation should be compensated by increasing the hover-fl ight pitch value – i.e. for point "1" – a little until the model once again hovers with the joystick at its center point. Conversely, if the model hovers below the mid-point, correct this by reducing the angle of attack appropriately.It may also be necessary to correct the carburetor opening for the hover point (point "1") with "C1  throttle".The model should lift off the ground with the collective pitch stick roughly at its center point and hover roughly at the expected rotational speed. If this is not the case, proceed as follows:1. The model does not lift off until the collective pitch stick is above the center point.a) Rotational speed is too low Remedy: On the graph page for "Channel 1  Throttle" increase the value for point "1".+100%-100%OUTPUT234 51Control travelHoverpointb) Rotational speed is too high Remedy: Increase the blade angle of attack pitch by increasing the value of point "1" on the "Pitch" graph page.+100%-100%OUTPUT234 51Control travelHoverpoint2. The model lifts off before the center point is reached.a) Rotational speed is too high Remedy: Decrease the carburetor opening by reducing the value of point "1" on the graph page for "Channel 1  Throttle".+100%-100%OUTPUT234 51Control travelHoverpointb) Rotational speed is too low Remedy: Decrease the blade angle of attack pitch by reducing the value of point "1" on the graph page for "Pitch".+100%-100%OUTPUT234 51Control travelHoverpointImportant:These settings must be reconfi gured until the model hovers at the correct rotational speed with the throttle/collective pitch stick at its center point. The confi guration of all other model parameters depends on these settings being made correctly! Standard set-upStandard set-up is completed on the basis of the basic set-up described above, whereby the model hovers in normal fl ight at the correct rotational speed with the throttle/collective pitch stick set to its center point: This means a set-up with which the model is capable of both hovering and fl ying circuits in all phases while maintaining a constant rotational speed. Climb settingsThe combination of throttle hover setting, collective pitch setting for the hover and the maximum collective pitch setting (point "H") now permits, in a simple manner, a means of attaining a constant rotational speed from hovering right through to maximum climb.First, perform a prolonged, vertical climb by moving
189Detail program description - Helicopter mixerTherefore, after the motor is started, system rotational speed should be increased s l o wly by way of the throttle limiter. If a switch has been assigned to the throttle limiter, always ensure the »Control adjust«" menu (page 112) is used to program a time constant of about 5 seconds to run up system rotational speed (opening the throttle limiter). Do not, however, program a delay for closing the throttle limiter. Leave the default value of "GL" in the "Type" column alone, however, to confi gure this setting globally for all fl ight phases.be a visual and an acoustic warning if the carburetor is open too wide when the transmitter is switched on. Otherwise, if the carburetor or speed controller is open too far when the motor starts, there is a danger that the motor will run up to speed immediately after starting, and the centrifugal clutch will engage immediately.Accordingly,always hold the rotor headfi rmly when starting.Nevertheless, if the motor is accidentally started with the carburetor too wide open, the golden rule is this:Don't panic!Hold the rotor head securely!Don't let go! Instead, close the throttle limiter immediately, even if this risks damaging the drive system (in the worst case scenario).YOU must ensurethe helicopter never movesin an uncontrolled manner. The costs of repairing a clutch, a gearbox or even the motor itself are negligible in comparison to the injuries and damage that an uncontrolled model helicopter can cause if it is allowed to thrash about with spinning rotor blades.Always make sure no other personis present in thehelicopter's hazard area.The switchover from idle to a fl ight setting with increased system rotational speed must not take place abruptly. This will cause the rotor to accelerate very quickly, resulting in premature wear to the clutch and gear train. Since the main rotor blades are generally mounted on a freewheeling unit, they will be unable to keep pace with such rapid acceleration; they will respond by swinging far out of their normal position and may even cause a boom strike.This diagram shows only the change to the hover point, i. e. collective pitch minimum and maximum are both left at -100 % or +100 %.+100%-100%OUTPUT234 51Control travelModify these settings until they really result in a constant rotational speed over the full control range between hovering and climbing fl ight. Descent settingThe descent setting should now be confi gured by placing the model in a steady descent from forward fl ight at a considerable altitude by fully reducing collective pitch; adjust the collective pitch minimum value (point "L") so that the model descends at an angle of 60° … 70 °. Therefore, on the "Pitch" graph page, put the vertical line on Point "L" by moving the pitch joystick then change this point's value appropriately with the selection keys of the right touch pad.This diagram shows only the changes when setting the minimum collective pitch value.+100%-100%OUTPUT234 51Control travelHoverpointOnce the model can fl y this maneuver properly, set the value for "Throttle min" – the value for point "L" on the graph page for "C1  throttle" – so that the rotational speed neither increases nor decreases. This completes the set-up procedure for throttle and collective pitch. Some important closing remarksBefore starting the motor, ensure that the throttle limiter is fully closed: this ensures that the carburetor now responds only to the C1 trim wheel. There will
190 Detail program description - Helicopter mixer / Auto-rotation settings Helicopter mixers Auto-rotation settingAuto-rotation permits both full-size and model helicopters to land safely in a crisis, e. g. if the motor should fail. Moreover, if the tail rotor should fail, cutting the motor and landing using auto-rotation is also the only possible way to avoid a high-speed, uncontrollable rotation around the vertical axis and a resulting catastrophic crash – which is why a switchover TO the auto-rotation phase takes place immediately.When the switchover to the auto-rotation phase is made, the Helicopter mixer menu screen changes as follows:Pitch–90%Tail rot. offset AR 0%Thr. position ARGyro suppressionSwashplate rotationSwashplate limiter0%0°AUSGyro offset 0%AutorotDuring auto-rotation fl ight, the main rotor is no longer driven by the motor but only by its own momentum and the the airfl ow through the rotor plane during descent. Since the energy stored by a rotor kept spinning in this way is rapidly consumed if the helicopter fl ares, pilots must not only have experience in handling helicopter models but must also consider carefully how the relevant functions should be confi gured.The advanced pilot should therefore practice auto-rotation landings at regular intervals. Not only to be able to demonstrate mastery of the maneuver at competitions, but also to ensure the pilot can can land the helicopter undamaged from a great height if the motor should fail. For this purpose, the program provides a range of adjustment options designed to help the pilot fl y a motorized model in its unpowered state. Note that the auto-rotation settings comprise a complete seventh fl ight phase, which provides access to all the fl ight phase- specifi c confi guration options, and to trims, collective pitch curve settings, etc., in particular. The following functions have special features not present in the powered fl ight phases:Pitch (Collective pitch curve (C1  Pitch))In powered fl ight, the maximum blade pitch angle is limited by available motor power. In auto-rotation, however, it is limited only by the point at which airfl ow ceases over the main rotor blades. Greater maximum collective pitch must therefore be set to ensure suffi cient thrust when fl aring the helicopter even as rotational speed is falling off. To do so, briefl y tap the center SET key of the right touch pad to switch to the "Pitch" graph page and then use the joystick to move the vertical line to point "H". Start by setting a value that is about 10 to 20 % greater than your "normal" maximum value for collective pitch. Initially, however, do NOT set a value that is considerably greater than for normal fl ight, since, if this is done, the behavior of the collective pitch controls may then be very unfamiliar following the switchover. Indeed, there is a danger that the pilot will oversteer during the fl are and the model will balloon: this will case the rotor speed to collapse at a considerable altitude and the model will then crash to the ground. The value can always be readjusted later after fl ying some test auto-rotations.The minimum value for collective pitch can differ from that set for normal fl ight. This depends on the pilot's usual style for normal fl ight. For auto-rotation, however, always set a suffi ciently generous minimum value for collective pitch at point "L" to ensure the model can be brought out of forward fl ight at moderate speed into a descent at an angle of around 60 … 70 degrees when collective pitch is reduced to a minimum. If, like most helicopter pilots, you have used this kind of setting for normal fl ight anyway, then this value can simply be transferred.If, however, you normally let your model "fall" at a shallower angle, then you should increase the value at point "L", and vice versa.Approach angle for various wind conditionsApproach anglein moderate windno wind45°60°75°in strong windAs a rule, the collective pitch stick itself is not positioned right at the bottom of its travel for auto-rotation. Instead, it is typically between the hover position and the bottom end-point. This offers the pilot an option for further adjustment, e. g. via pitch inclination through pitch-axis controls.The approach can be shortened by pulling back slightly on the pitch-axis joystick and gently reducing pitch or by extending the approach by pushing forward on the pitch-axis joystick and carefully increasing pitch.Throttle setting AR Although pilots will be expected to cut the glow motor completely during competitions, This is rather inconvenient during training sessions because the motor must be restarted after every practice auto-rotation landing.Therefore, for training sessions, set this line's value such that a combustion motor is held at a safe idle without the clutch engaging during the auto-rotation phase; electric drive systems should be set safely to "Off". Note:The "Motor Stop" option in the »Base setup model« menu offers an alternative "Emergency STOP"
191Detail program description - Helicopter mixer / Auto-rotation settingsfunction.Tail rotor ARIn normal fl ight, the tail rotor is set so that it compensates for motor torque while the model is hovering. It therefore generates some a certain amount of thrust even in its normal position. The level of thrust is then varied by the tail rotor control system, and also by the various mixers which provide all manner of torque compensation, while the tail rotor trim is also used to compensate for varying weather conditions, fl uctuations in system rotational speed and other infl uences.For auto-rotation, however, the main rotor is not driven by the motor, but by the "windmill" principle. Since this, in turn, does not generate any torque for which the tail rotor must compensate, all corresponding mixers are switched off automatically.Since the absence of torque in auto-rotation also means the above-mentioned thrust is superfl uous, however, a different tail rotor confi guration is also required:Cut the motor and place the helicopter on the ground in a level attitude. With the transmitter and receiving system switched on, select the fl ight phase "Auto-rotation" and then fold the tail rotor blades down. Now change the value on the "Tail rotor" line until the tail rotor blade angle of attack is zero degrees. Viewed from the tail, the tail rotor blades should be parallel to one another. Depending on the friction and running resistance of the gearbox, the fuselage may still yaw slightly, however. This relatively slight torque must then be corrected if necessary by adjusting the tail rotor blade pitch angle. This value will always be a fi gure between zero degrees and a pitch angle opposed to the pitch angle in normal fl ight.
192 General notes on freely programmable mixersThe previous pages have described a wealth of ready-to-use built-in coupling functions, in the context of the two menus »Wing mixers« and »Helicopter mixers«. The fundamental signifi cance of mixers and the principle by which they work are described on page 159. The following section provides information about the so-called "free mixers". In addition to the pre-programmed mixers mentioned above, the mc-16 HoTT also offers a number of freely programmable mixers in every model memory location, whose inputs, outputs and mixer ratios can be defi ned to meet one's own requirements. These include: 8 linear mixers, numbered 1 through 8• 4 curve mixers, numbered 9 through 12• These 12 mixers are certainly adequate for most applications and are certainly suffi cient when the potential of the pre-programmed coupling functions are utilized. In the »Mix active/phase« menu (see page 204), each of these 12 mixers can be activated or deactivated separately for each fl ight phase.For the "free mixers", the signal present at any control function (1 to 16) can be assigned as the input signal or,for a so-called "switch channel" (see further below), the signal from any switch can be utilized. The signal that is present at the control channel and passed to the mixer input is always infl uenced by its own transmitter control and by any control characteristic that may have been set, e. g. those specifi ed by the »Dual Rate / Expo«, »Channel 1 curve« and »Control adjust« menus. The mixer output acts on a control channel (1 to – depending on receiver type – a maximum of 16) that can also be assigned freely. Before this channel routes the signal to the servo, it can only still be infl uenced by the »Servo adjustments« menu, i.e. by the the servo reverse, neutral point offset, servo travel and servo travel limit functions, and possibly by »Tx. output swap«.One control function can be used for any number of mix inputs simultaneously: if, for example, several mixers are to be switched to act in parallel. Conversely, it is possible for any number of mixers to affect one and the same control channel. Particularly in the latter case, however, it is very important to ensure that the servo concerned does not strike its mechanical end-stops when several mixer signals accumulate excessively. For safety's sake, it may therefore be necessary to set an appropriate travel limit in the »Servo adjustments« menu.For more complex applications, mixers can be switched in sequence. In this case, it is not the (transmitter) signal at the "output" of a control function which forms the input signal of the "series-wired" mixer, but the (mixed) signal "further back" at the "input" of a control channel. The following description of the free mixers includes several examples of this type.In the software, one "free mixer" is always initially activated. Optionally the mixer can also be assigned to an ON/OFF switch. Since there are so many functions to which switches can be assigned, be careful to avoid (undesired) multiple assignments to a single switch.The two key mixer parameters are: … the • mixer ratio, which defi nes the extent to which the input signal acts on the output of the control channel connected to the mixer output. The mixer ratio for linear mixers can be set as symmetrical or asymmetric. Curve mixers can also be confi gured with up to 8 points to suit one's own application and even implement extremely non-linear curves.… • the neutral point of a mixer, which is also referred to as the "offset". The offset is that specifi c point along the movement of a transmitter control (joystick, proportional control or switch) at which the mixer no longer infl uences the control channel connected to its output. Normally, the neutral point is the center point of the transmitter control. However, the offset can also be set at any other point along the control travel. Since there are no restrictions on the design of the curve mixers, setting a mixer neutral point only makes sense for the 8 linear mixers.Switch channel "S" as a mixer inputOccasionally, however, only a constant control signal is required at the mixer output, e.g. for a slightly increased "up-elevator" trim when the aero-tow release is closed – fully independently of its normal trim setting.In this case a switch is assigned both to the aero-tow release and the mixer; it is then used not only to open and close the release, but also to pass the desired trim signal to the elevator via the mixer ratio. To identify this special arrangement, this mixer input control function in the program is designated "S" for "Switch channel". In addition, if the corresponding "target channel" should now no longer be infl uenced by its "normal" transmitter control, isolate the latter from the function input of the affected control channel by way of the »MIX-only channel« menu (page 205). Here too, for clarifi cation of this there is an example of the function provided in the following menu description. General notes on freely programmable mixers
193Detail program description - Free mixersUsing the selection keys on the left or right touch pad, page to the menu option …Channel 1 curve Switch displayControl switch Logical switchPhase settings Phase assignmentPhase trim Non-delayed chanTimers (general) Fl. phase timersWing mixers Free mixersChannel 1 curve Switch displayControl switch Logical switchPhase settings Phase assignmentNon-delayed chan Timers (general)Fl. phase timers Helicopter mixerFree mixers MIX aktiv / Phase… on the multi-function menu. Briefl y tap the center SET key of the right touch pad to open this menu option.Regardless of the model type selected, each of the 80 model memory locations offers eight linear mixers (LinearMIX 1 …8) …??LinearMIX 1Mitte??––––from – Begr. +????––––????––––????––––????––––LinearMIX 2LinearMIX 3LinearMIX 4LinearMIX 5… and 4 curve mixers (CurveMIX 9 … 12), which also offer non-linear control characteristics:??LinearMIX 8Mitte??––––from – Begr. +????––––????––––????––––????––––CurveMIX 9CurveMIX10CurveMIX11CurveMIX12In addition, the »MIX active/phase« menu (page 204) permits the independent activation and deactivation of only particular mixers for specifi c fl ight phases. On the "Free mixers" menu, the blocked mixers are then suppressed in the corresponding fl ight phase. If you are hunting for a mixer that is not shown, you should therefore switch to the appropriate fl ight phase!In this fi rst section, however, we will concentrate on how to program the fi rst screen page of the "free mixers". We will then move on to the method of programming mixer ratios, both for linear mixers and curve mixers, as found on the second screen page of this menu.Basic programming procedureSelect the mixer you want by using the 1.  selection keys on the left or right touch pad.Tap the center 2. SET key of the right touch pad. The input fi eld on the line marked "fr" at the lower edge of the screen is now shown highlighted.Use the selection keys on the right touch pad to 3. select the "fr" mixer input.Tap the center 4. SET key of the right touch pad; using the  selection key of the left or right touch pad, switch to the column marked "to" at the lower edge of the screen then tap the center SET key of the right touch pad once again. The input fi eld "to" is shown highlighted.Use the selection keys on the right touch pad to 5. select the "to" mixer output.Tap the center 6. SET key of the right touch pad. Optionally use the selection key of the left or right touch pad to switch to the column marked "ty" at the lower edge of the screen in order to include the trim of the respective joystick in the mixer input signal ("Tr" for trim or "P" for phase) and/or to add series switching for mixers …… and/or use the  selection key of the left or right touch pad to change the column marked with the switch icon on the lower edge of the screen. To do this, tap the center SET key of the right touch pad once again and assign a switch as described in the section "Assigning transmitter controls, switches and control switches" (page 56).Using the 7.  selection key of the left or right touch pad, switch to the column "Settings" then tap the center SET key of the right touch pad. Defi ne the mixer ratios on the second screen 8. page.Return to the fi rst page by using the center 9. ESC key of the left touch pad. " fr"After selecting a mixer line and a subsequent tap on the center SET key of the right touch pad, select one of the control functions, 1 … 16 or S, for the value fi eld now in inverse video with the selection keys of the right touch.For the sake of clarity, control functions 1 … 4 are marked as follows when setting wing mixers:C1 Throttle/airbrake stickAI Aileron stickEL Elevator stickRU Rudder stick… and, for the helicopter program: Free mixersFreely-programmable linear and curve mixers
194 Detail program description - Free mixers Mixer switchesIn the sample screen image shown above, switches "4" and "2" have been assigned to linear mixers 1 and 4 and to mixer 2 of the control switch "G4".The switch symbol to the right of the switch number shows the current switch state.Any mixers not assigned to a switch, as indicated by an empty cell for the column marked by the switch icon on the screen's bottom line, are fundamentally active!A switch must be assigned to LinearMIX 4 if you wish to switch between two fi xed mixer values (still to be set) that correspond to the two end-points of a (proportional) transmitter control. Accordingly, the "switch channel" mixer cannot also be switched "on" or "off" as with the other mixers.If you intend to assign a control switch (G1 … G4) as a switch, then please note that you must defi ne this appropriately BEFOREHAND in the »Control switch« menu. If you do not, you will assign an undefi ned control switch and therefore one that functions as a fi xed switch. " Ty" Including the trimFor control functions 1 … 4, you can also allow trimming of the digital trim wheel for the given joystick effect the mixer's input. In this case, briefl y tap the center SET key of the right touch pad then use the selection keys to select "Tr" in the inverse video fi eld:ELLinearMIX 1type 6from – Begr. +ELC1 8 3ELS ????––––LinearMIX 2LinearMIX 3LinearMIX 4LinearMIX 5to Adjust 4C42Troffoffoff1 Throttle/collective pitch stick2 Roll stick3 Pitch-axis stick4 Tail rotor stickNote:If you select any of the control functions 5 … 16 for fi xed-wing models or 5, 7 … 16 for helicopter models, do not forget to assign a transmitter control for each of these in the »Control adjust« menu! "S" as switch channelSelecting "S" (switch channel) in the fr column has the effect of passing a constant input signal to the mixer input, e.g. in order to add a little more "up-elevator" trim when the aero-tow release is closed, as mentioned on the previous page.After assigning a control function or the "S" switch channel in the "fr" column, the following is also displayed … " to "… on the lower edge of the screen. Use this column's input fi eld to specify the destination of the mixer, i.e. assign mixer output, to one of the control channels. At the same time, additional fi elds will appear in the bottom line of the screen:ELLinearMIX 1type 6from – Begr. +ELC1 8 3ELS ????––––LinearMIX 2LinearMIX 3LinearMIX 4LinearMIX 5to Adjust 4C42offoffoffIn this example, four mixers have already been defi ned. The second mixer is already familiar in principle as "Elevat curve" from the "Brake settings" sub-menu of the »Wing mixers« menu and the third is familiar from the line "Tail" ("2ELSv3+8") of the »Model type« menu. As a general rule, however, you should fi rst make use of the pre-programmed mixers. However, if you need asymmetric mixer ratios, want to program non-linear curves or need to offset the mixer neutral point, then you should set or leave the pre-programmed mixers at "0 %" and replace these with free mixers. Erasing mixersTo erase a previously-defi ned mixer, select the appropriate line with the  selection keys on the left or right touch pad , switch to the "fr" column, if necessary, with the  selection keys then briefl y tap the center SET button on the right touch pad:ELLinearMIX 1type 6from – Begr. +ELC1 8 3ELS ????––––LinearMIX 2LinearMIX 3LinearMIX 4LinearMIX 5to Adjust 4C42offoffoffThe fi eld in the " fr " column for the mixer you want to delete will now be shown in inverse video: tap both  selection keys or  on the right touch pad at the same time (CLEAR):ELLinearMIX 1type 6from – Begr. +ELC1 ?? ??ELS ????––––LinearMIX 2LinearMIX 3LinearMIX 4LinearMIX 5to Adjust 4C42offoffoff––––
195Detail program description - Free mixersExample:Two mixers (MIX 6  7 and 7  8):a) WITHOUT series switching:6 67Servo 4,8 VC 577Best.-Nr. 4101Servo 4,8 VC 577Best.-Nr. 410178Servo 4,8 VC 577Best.-Nr. 4101MIX 1MIX 2b) The same mixers WITH series switching:6 67Servo 4,8 VC 577Best.-Nr. 41 01Servo 4,8 VC 577Best.-Nr. 410178Servo 4,8 VC 577Best.-Nr. 4101MIX 1MIX 2In this highly simplifi ed example, if mixer 2 is switched in series, then it does not "take over" solely the transmitter signal of control function 7 – as shown under a) – but, instead, the entire (mixed) signal present at the servo side of control channel 7, as shown under b). It then directs this in accordance with its confi gured mixer ratio forwards to control channel 8. In this case, the effect of transmitter control "6" extends as far as output "8". This kind of serial linkage can be extended as far as you wish. For example, another mixer "8  12" can be used to route the control signal from "6" as far as output "12", taking into consideration the associated mixer ratios. Of course, even with an active serial link, each separate mixer can still be controlled via the transmitter control assigned to the mixer input. Fixed-wing and helicopter mixers also work in the same way, when set up to switch "in sequence". Including phase trimIf you wish to apply the FLAP channel ("6") or FLAP2 channel ("9") trim values stored in the »Phase trim«" menu – fl ight phase dependent – then fi rst tap the center SET key of the right touch pad and use its selection keys to select "P":11LinearMIX 1type 6from – Begr. +????????????––––LinearMIX 2LinearMIX 3LinearMIX 4LinearMIX 5to AdjustTr––––––––????––––PDepending on the mixer value confi gured, a mixer can, as shown in the example above, route the signal from a fl ap control present (e.g.) on input 6 to control channel 11, while also applying the FLAP trim value set on the »Phase trim« menu (page 150) for the respective fl ight phase. Other special features of free mixers Mixer input = mixer outputIf you set up a mixer whose input is the same as its output, e.g. "C1  C1", you can achieve some very special effects in conjunction with the option of switching a free mixer on and off in any way you like. A typical application of this can be found at the end of this section, as Example 2 on page 202.Tip:If you separate a control function, e.g. "9", from control channel 9" using the »MIX-only channel« menu (see page 205), then servo response is defi ned only by the mixer ratio (yet to be specifi ed) The effect of the C1 trim wheel on mixer output will depend on the function assigned in the »Model type« menu (page 94), in the "Motor on C1" column for fi xed-wing models …Trim Effect on mixer outputNone linear over full trim wheel travelForward Only effective if C1 stick is forwardBack Only effective if C1 stick is back… or on the "Pitch" line of the »Stick mode« menu for helicopter models:Trim Effect on mixer outputAR(Thr-AR)linear over full trim wheel travelTL(throttle limit)only effective at minimum position of the assigned throttle limit control (the right side proportional rotary control as standard) Switching mixers in seriesAs already explained on page 192, you can also switch mixers in series: Where mixers are switched in "sequence", the "input signal" of a control channel already on its way to the servo "branches off" and is directed to a further channel. In the "ty" column, select the right angle bracket " " or "Tr ", if the trim should also act simultaneously on the mixer input: 7LinearMIX 1type 6from – Begr. +87????????????––––LinearMIX 2LinearMIX 3LinearMIX 4LinearMIX 5to AdjustTr––––––––
196 Detail program description - Free mixersN.N.*  7 servo pair 6 + 7 responds with an aileron functionN.N.*  9 servo pair 9 + 10 responds with a fl ap functionN.N.*  10 servo pair 9 + 10 responds with an aileron functionN.N.*  11 servo pair 11 + 12 responds with a fl ap functionN.N.*  12 servo pair 11 + 12 responds with an aileron functionModel helicopters:• With helicopter mixers, collective pitch control may be provided by up to 4 servos connected to receiver outputs 1, 2, 3 and 5, depending on helicopter type. The software links these together to control collective pitch, roll and pitch-axis.Other than within the »Helicopter mixers« menu, it is not advisable to mix a free mixer into these channels because this can lead to very complex interactions. One of the few exceptions is "Collective pitch trim using a separate transmitter control" – see example 3 on page202.Important notices:With serial links in particular, remember that • that the travels of the individual mixers are cumulative if multiple stick commands are made simultaneously: there is a risk that the servo(s) may strike a mechanical end-stop. If necessary, reduce "servo travel" to avoid this; alternatively, set "Travel limit" on the "Servo adjustments" menu and/or reduce mixer values.Take advantage of the ever-present option • to switch over to the transmitter's »Servo display«" menu (see page 262). This menu is reached from almost any menu with a of the mixer programmed on the same channel. Thus, with linear mixers LinearMIX 1 … 8 or curve mixers CurveMIX 9 … 12, 8-point control curves can be defi ned for any transmitter control in a manner analogous to that described in the »Channel 1 curve« menu and these can also be used in fl ight phase switching if needed. This method of "linking" is not only also switchable but can even be subject to a delay by assigning an appropriate delay in the "– time +" column of the »Control adjust« menu. Mixer output affecting default software coupling of aileron, camber-changing fl ap or collective pitch servosBefore we start specifying the mixer ratio, we must fi rst give some thought to what happens if we permit a mixer to affect the default software coupling of aileron, camber-changing fl ap or collective pitch servos:Fixed-wing models:• Depending on the number of wing servos available on the "Aile/fl aps" line of the »Model type« menu, control channels 2 and 5 are connected via special mixers for the "aileron" function, 6 and 7 for the "fl ap" function, outputs 9 and 10 (if present) for the FLAP2 servos and 11 and 12 for AI2 servos.If mixer outputs are programmed to affect these kinds of couplings, then their effect on the respective fl ap pair derived from the "receiving" control channel must be accounted for:Mixer EffectN.N.*  2 servo pair 2 + 5 responds with an aileron functionN.N.*  5 servo pair 2 + 5 responds with a fl ap functionN.N.*  6 servo pair 6 + 7 responds with a fl ap functionbrief, simultaneous tap on the  keys of the left touch pad. This menu gives you the opportunity to check the effects of all of your settings on a single screen. Mixer ratios and mixer neutral pointNow that we have explained the wide-ranging nature of the mixer functions, the following section describes how to program linear and non-linear mixer curves. For each of the 12 available mixers, the mixer curves are programmed on a second page of the screen display. Use the selection keys  on the left or right touch pad to select the desired mixer line. If necessary, use the touch pad's selection keys to move to the right column (= ) then briefl y tap the center SET key of the right touch pad to access the graph page. LinearMIX 1 … 8: Setting linear mixer valuesAs a practical example, we will now defi ne a linear mixer curve to resolve the following problem:For a motorized aircraft model, the two servos connected to receiver outputs 6 and 7 – defi ned on the "Aile/fl aps" line of the »Model type« menu as "… 2FL" – are to be used for actuating landing fl aps. That is; when a transmitter control is moved, they must defl ect downwards only. This requires a simultaneous elevator trim, however.First allocate, for example, input 6 to the leftmost slider control SR1 located in the middle of the console by making settings in the »Control adjust« menu. A transmitter control on input 6, – as shown in the above table – will control the two servos connected to receiver outputs 6 and 7 by default as fl aps. Leave the default value of "GL" in the "Type" column alone, however, to confi gure this setting globally for all fl ight phases – as is the case for the free mixer.* N.N. = Nomen Nominandum (the name to be stated)
197Detail program description - Free mixers»Control adjust« menu0% +100%I5I6I7I8Typ SEL+100%0.0 0.0– travel + –time+0% +100%+100%0.0 0.00% +100%+100%0.0 0.00% +100%+100%0.0 0.0GLGLGLS11 ---frfrfr---------offsetGLNormalNote:Note that if two fl ap servos have been selected, any transmitter control assigned to input 7 will be decoupled in the software in order to avoid errors in operating the fl aps. However, in the interests of safety, you should make a habit of leaving all inputs not currently required to "free", or of resetting these back to "free"!Start by moving this transmitter control to its forward limit and adjust the landing fl aps so that they are retracted or closed in this position. If you now move the dial to the rear, the fl aps should move downward; if not the direction of servo rotation must be adapted.We now turn our attention to the fi rst mixer shown in the screen image on page 194 ("6  EL"), to which switch 4 was assigned:ELLinearMIX 1type 6from – Begr. +ELC1 8 3ELS ????––––LinearMIX 2LinearMIX 3LinearMIX 4LinearMIX 5to Adjust 4C42offoffoffBriefl y tap the center SET key of the right touch pad to open the second screen page:Linear MIX 1 EL 6offIf this screen appears, the mixer has not yet been activated in combination with the assigned toggle switch – "4", in this example. If so, operate the switch:6Mix input0%Offset0%ELLinear MIX 10%SYM ASY SETSTOThe continuous vertical line represents the current position of the transmitter control linked to input 6. (However, it is not visible in the above graphic because it is at the left edge since slider control SR1, in this example assigned to input 6 (see previous page), is at its forward limit.) The dotted vertical line in the middle of the diagram indicates the position of the mixer neutral point – see under "Offset", below. The solid horizontal line shows the mixer ratio, which currently has the value zero over the entire stick travel; accordingly, the elevator will not yet follow the movement of the fl aps.First, the … Offset (mixer neutral point)… should be defi ned. Switch over to STO for this by using the  selection key of the left or right touch pad:6Mix input0%Offset0%ELLinear MIX 10%SYM ASY SETSTOThe dotted vertical line in the middle of the diagram indicates the position of the mixer neutral point ("Offset"), i.e. the specifi c point along the control travel at which the mixer does NOT infl uence the control channel connected to its output. The default position for this point is at the control center.However, since in our example the fl aps should be closed or retracted with the slider control at its forward limit and therefore the elevator should not be further infl uenced in this position, the mixer neutral point must be relocated to precisely this point. To do so, push the slider control used (in this example, slider control SR1) to its forward limit if you have not already done so, then briefl y tap the center SET key of the right touch pad. The dotted vertical line moves across to this point, the new mixer neutral point, which by defi nition always retains the "initial" value of zero. However, to better illustrate our example, we now wish to set this "Offset" value to only -75 %.6Mix input0%Offset–75%ELLinear MIX 10%SYM ASY SETSTO
198 Detail program description - Free mixersNotes:By selecting • SET with the  selection key of the left or right touch pad followed by a tap on the center SET key of the right touch pad …6Mix input0%OffsetELLinear MIX 10%SYM ASY SETSTO–75%… the offset value can be set manually or adjusted in 1 % increments with the selection keys on the left or right touch pad.By selecting • SET …6Mix input0%OffsetELLinear MIX 10%SYM ASY STO–75%SET… – see previous fi gure – set the mixer's neutral • point automatically back to control center with a simultaneous tap on both the  or  selection keys of the right touch pad (CLEAR). Symmetrical mixer ratiosThe next task is to defi ne the mixer values above and below the mixer neutral point – starting from its current position. If necessary, use selection keys  on the left or right touch pad to select the SYM fi eld in order to establish a mixer value which is symmetric to the offset point just set. Following a brief tap on the center SET key of the right touch pad, set both SYM fi elds (now in inverse video) via the selection keys of the right touch pad to values between -150 % and +150 %. Note that the mixer value set always refers to the input signal of the respective transmitter control (control signal)! Negative mixer values reverse the direction of the mixer.A simultaneous tap on the  or  selection keys of the right touch pad (CLEAR) will erase the mixer ratio in the inverse video fi eld.The "optimum" value in our example will certainly need fl ight-testing.6Mix input OffsetELLinear MIX 1SYM ASY STO–75%SET–20% –20%Earlier, we set the mixer neutral point at -75 % of control travel: as a result, the elevator ("EL") will exhibit a (slight) down-elevator effect even at the neutral point of the landing fl aps and this is naturally undesirable. Accordingly, you should reposition the mixer neutral point to -100 % of control travel, as described earlier.6Mix input+20%OffsetELLinear MIX 1+20%SYM ASY SETSTO–100%If the offset, now -100 %, is reset to 0 % of control travel by using selection key  on the left or right touch pad to select the SET fi eld then tapping either the selection key combination  or  on the right touch pad (CLEAR), the following screen will appear:6Mix input+20%OffsetELLinear MIX 1+20%SYM ASY STO0%SET Asymmetric mixer ratiosIn many cases, however, we require different mixer values on each side of the mixer neutral point. Do this by fi rst resetting the offset of the mixer used in the example, "6  EL" again to 0 %,if necessary, refer to the fi gure above. Now select the ASY fi eld with the selection key  on the left or right touch pad then tap the center SET key of the right touch pad. If slider control SR1, assigned to input 6 in this example, is now moved in each corresponding direction, the mixer ratios for each of the two control directions, i.e. left and right of the established offset point, can be adjusted with the selection keys of the right touch pad:
199Detail program description - Free mixers6Mix input OffsetELLinear MIX 1SYM ASY STO0%SET–55% –20%Note:If you are using a type "S  N.N.*" switch channel mixer you will need to actuate the assigned switch. The vertical line then jumps between the left and right side. Setting curve mixers 9 … 12These four curve mixers allow the defi nition of extremely non-linear mixer curves by placing up to six freely positionable points between the two endpoints "L" (low = -100 % control travel) and "H" (high = +100 % control travel) along the control travel.If you have already read the »Channel 1 curve« menu description or about programming 8-point curves in the »Helicopter mixers« menu, you can safely skip the following description.Programming detailsThe control curve is defi ned by up to 8 points, known as "reference points". In the default software confi guration, 2 reference points are already defi ned, namely only the two end-points, "L" and "H"; see the next screen image.The following section applies to "any" mixer to which we wish to assign a non-linear curve characteristic.The examples shown in the following section are merely illustrative, however, and they do not represent real-life mixer curves. Setting reference pointsWhen you move the transmitter control assigned to the mixer input – here control function 8 – a vertical line in the graph follows the movement between the two end-points. The current control position is also shown numerically on the "Input" line. The point at which this line intersects with the curve in question is named the "Output" and can be varied between -125 % and +125 % by setting reference points; see further below. This control signal acts on the mixer output.In the above example, the transmitter control is on input 8 at -50 % of control travel. The output signal continue to show 0 %, however, since no value has yet been entered.Up to six additional reference points can be set between the two end-points "L" and "H", although the distance between neighboring reference points must not be less than approx. 25 %.Curve MIX 9Curveoff PointOutputInput –50%0%?+–100O U T P U T0%810When you now briefl y tap the center SET key of the right touch pad, the "?" is replaced by a point number and the value fi eld to the right is activated, i.e. presented in inverse video:Curve MIX 9Curveoff PointOutputInput –50%0%1+–100O U T P U T0%8101Using the selection keys on the right touch pad you can now change the point value within a range of ±125 %, e.g.::Curve MIX 9Curveoff PointOutputInput –50%+50%1+–100O U T P U T+50%8101Note:If the joystick does not coincide with the exact reference point, please note that the percentage value on the "Output" line always relates to the current joystick position.Continue in this way to set other reference points. Note that the order in which you generate the (maximum) four reference points between end-points "L" and "H" is irrelevant, since the reference points are continuously renumbered automatically from left to right as they are entered. Erasing reference pointsTo erase one of the reference points between "L" and "H", use the transmitter control in question to move the vertical line onto or into the vicinity of the reference point in question. The reference point number and associated reference point value * N.N. = Nomen Nominandum (the name to be stated)
200 Detail program description - Free mixersare shown on the "Point" line. The value fi eld is highlighted, see screen image above. Now tap the two selection keys  or  on the right touch pad at the same time (CLEAR). The selected reference point is erased, and the numbering of the remaining reference points is updated as required. Briefl y tap the center ESC key of the left touch pad to complete the procedure.Note that the reference points "L" and "H" cannot be erased. Changing reference point valuesTo change reference point values, use the associated transmitter control to move the vertical line onto the point you wish to change: "L", 1 … 6 or "H". The number and current curve value of this point are displayed. After activating the value fi eld on the "Point" line by briefl y tapping the center SET key, use the selection keys on the right touch pad to change the current curve value shown in the highlighted fi eld. The possible range is -125 % to +125 % and changes do not affect neighboring reference points. Briefl y tap the center ESC key of the left touch pad to complete the procedure.Note:If the joystick does not coincide with the exact reference point, please note that the percentage value on the "Output" line always relates to the current joystick position. Trim point functionAlternatively, a jump up or down to reference points already set, L, 1 … max. 6 and H, can be accomplished by using the  selection keys on the left touch pad. The selection keys on the right touch pad can then be used to change the reference point jumped to as described above, entirely independently of the control position. Curveoff PointOutputInput –50%–25%1+–100O U T P U T+50%NormalTrim pointCurve MIX 98101In this simple example, slider control SD1 – represented by the vertical line – is halfway between the forward limit and the midpoint of control travel (input = -50 %). However, "Point 1" will be relocated to control center at a point value of +50 %, resulting in a momentary output value of -25 %.One touch on the center ESC key of the left touch pad will terminate this trim point function. Trim offset functionWhen a value fi eld is active, i.e. in inverse video, it is not only possible, as previously described, to jump up or down to reference points already set with the  selection keys of the left touch pad and to make a change with the selection keys of the right touch pad, but also an existing curve can be vertically repositioned within a range of ±25 % through use of the  keys on the left touch pad. Starting with a point value for "Point 1" at 0 %, the control curves in both of the following fi gures have been vertically shifted within the ±25 % range by the trim offset function:Curveoff PointOutputInput 0%–25%1+–100O U T P U T–25%NormalTrim offsetCurve MIX 98101Curveoff PointOutputInput 0%+25%1+–100O U T P U T+25%NormalTrim offsetCurve MIX 98101You can also exit this function by tapping the center ESC key of the left touch pad. Trim x-axis functionThis function is activated by tapping the left () or right () selection key of the right touch pad with an active (i.e. inverse video) value fi eld. You can then use the selection keys on the right touch pad to reposition the active point horizontally or vertically as you wish. In the fi gure below, "Point 1" which was just shifted to +50 % with the trim point function, will now be shifted to the left:Curveoff PointOutputInput 0%+67%?+–100O U T P U T+50%NormalTrim X-axisCurve MIX 98101Notes:If the point is repositioned horizontally further • away from the current control position than approx. ±25 %, a "?" sign will reappear in the line Point. This question mark does not refer to the repositioned point, however: instead, it signifi es that a further point can be set at the current control position.
201Detail program description - Free mixersPlease note that the percentage value on the • "Output" line always relates to the current joystick position and not to the position of the point. Smoothing the curveCurve MIX 9CurvePointOutputInput +50%–75%3+–100O U T P U T2–75%8101off 3This "angular" curve profi le created in the example can be smoothed automatically simply by pressing a button. Do this – from a situation as illustrated – with a brief tap on the  selection key of the left touch pad. This will result in a switchover from "(Curve) off" to "(Curve) on" (or vice versa):Curve MIX 9CurvePointOutputInput +50%–75%3+–100O U T P U T–75%810on213Note:The curves shown here are for demonstration purposes only and are not at all representative of real mixer curves. For real-world application examples, see the programming examples on pages 274 and 313. Examples:To open and close an aero-tow, a switch, e.g. SW 1. 2, has already been assigned to control channel 8 in the »Control adjust« menu:0% +100%I5I6I7I8Typ+100%0.0 0.0– travel + –time+0% +100%+100%0.0 0.00% +100%+100%0.0 0.00% +100%+100%0.0 0.0GLGLGLfrfrfr---------OffsetGL---Normal2Subsequent aero-tow fl ying has proven that you always have to fl y with the up-elevator held slightly in during the tow. The solution will be to set up a mixer that applies slight up-elevator trim to the elevator servo connected to receiver output 3 when the aero-tow release is closed. The screen-shot will be familiar from page 194: here, the fourth linear mixer has been set up for this function, with the switch channel "S" as mixer input: Move the selected switch to the OFF position and then switch … ELLinearMIX 1type 6from – Begr. +ELC1 8 3ELS ????––––LinearMIX 2LinearMIX 3LinearMIX 4LinearMIX 5to Adjust 4C42offoffoff… to the mixer confi guration page. Here select STO under "Offset" then tap the center SET key of the right touch pad briefl y … depending on the selected travel setting in the »Control adjust« menu and the switch setting, the offset value will jump to +X % or -X %, for example:SMix input0%OffsetELLinear MIX 40%SYM ASY STO–100%SETNow change left to SYM under "Mixer ratio" then tap briefl y on the center SET key of the right touch pad. The value fi elds are now highlighted. After you have moved the selected switch to the mixer ON position, use the selection keys on the right touch pad to set the required symmetrical mixer ratio, for example:SMix input OffsetELLinear MIX 4SYM ASY STO–100%SET+10% +10% 2. If a multi- fl ap wing featuring a "crow or butterfl y system" with (additional) airbrakes is intended, and this brake system is to be tested with and without airbrakes, then simply set channel 1 to "MIX-only" …MIX ONLY CHANNELMIXonlynormal12345678910111213141516… and follow this by programming a free mixer "C1  C1" to restore control over the airbrakes
202 Detail program description - Free mixersvia servo 1. If you also assign a switch to this mixer, then you will be able to switch this mixer on and off as you please. 3. The fi nal example applies to model helicopters:In the helicopter program, if you wish affect pitch trim with a proportional control, e.g. one of the slider controls in the middle of the console, then assign one of these controls to this function in the »Control adjust« menu; for example the "I9" input. (However, leave the default value of "GL" in the "Type" column as it is so this confi guration, analogous to the free mixer yet to be programmed, will be applicable globally for all fl ight phases.) Finally, simply defi ne a LinearMIX "9  1" with a symmetric mixer ratio of, for example, 25 %. Due to the internal coupling, this transmitter control then acts equally on all of the model's collective pitch servos without affecting the throttle servo. 9Mix input Offset1Linear MIX 5SYM ASY STO0%SET+25% +25%Decouple the assigned transmitter control from control channel 9 in the »MIX-only channel« menu to ensure that any servo connected to receiver output 9 can no longer be operated by this transmitter control; see also page 205.
203For your notes
204 Detail program description - MIX active/phase MIX active/phaseSelecting mixers for fl ight phasesUsing the selection keys on the left or right touch pad, page to the menu option …Control switch Logical switchPhase settings Phase assignmentPhase trim Non-delayed chanTimers (general) Fl. phase timersWing mixers Free mixersMIX active/phase MIX only channelChannel 1 curve Switch displayControl switch Logical switchPhase settings Phase assignmentNon-delayed chan Timers (general)Fl. phase timers Helicopter mixerFree mixers MIX active/phase… on the multi-function menu. Briefl y tap the center SET key of the right touch pad to open this menu option.LinearMIX 1LinearMIX 2LinearMIX 36ELC1 ELLinearMIX 43 8SELyesSELyesyesyesMIX ACTIVE IN PHASEThe "free mixers" on the previous menu can be enabled and disabled for specifi c fl ight phases. You therefore have complete freedom in assigning specifi c mixers only to specifi c fl ight phases.Switch to your chosen fl ight phase and use the selection keys to page through this menu. The mixers on the »Free mixers« menu are displayed in the center column.Following the activation of the value fi eld by briefl y tapping the center SET key of the right touch pad, if the respective mixer is set to "no" by using the selection keys on the left or right touch pad, then this mixer is deactivated in the fl ight phase shown at the bottom of the display and, simultaneously, removed from the »Free mixers« menu list:LinearMIX 1LinearMIX 2LinearMIX 36ELC1 ELLinearMIX 43 8SELyesSELyesyesMIX ACTIVE IN PHASEnoIf a mixer is "lost" in the »Free mixers« menu …ELLinearMIX 1type 6from – Begr. +ELC1ELS ????––––LinearMIX 2LinearMIX 4LinearMIX 5LinearMIX 6to Adjust 4C47offoffoff????––––… then you should either switch through the fl ight phases until it appears again … or, alternatively, switch to this menu and temporarily reactivate the mixer you are looking for:ELLinearMIX 1type 6from – Begr. +ELC1 8 3ELS ????––––LinearMIX 2LinearMIX 3LinearMIX 4LinearMIX 5to Adjust 4C47offoffoff
205Detail program description - MIX-only channel MIX-only channelSeparating control functions from control channels for all fl ight phasesUsing the selection keys on the left or right touch pad, page to the menu option …Control switch Logical switchPhase settings Phase assignmentPhase trim Non-delayed chanTimers (general) Fl. phase timersWing mixers Free mixersMIX active/phase MIX only channelControl switch Logical switchPhase settings Phase assignmentNon-delayed chan Timers (general)Fl. phase timers Helicopter mixerFree mixers MIX active/phaseMIX-only channel Dual mixer… on the multi-function menu. Briefl y tap the center SET key of the right touch pad to open this menu option.MIX ONLY CHANNELMIXonlynormal1234567 8 9 10111213141516This menu can be used to interrupt the normal signal fl ow between the input side control function and the output side control channel, therefore the "classic" control-to-servo connection is actually separated.Use the potential offered by this fl ight phase independent menu, particularly to keep one of the control channels "free" in all fl ight phases from assignment to a transmitter control or switch for specifi c fl ight phases in the »Control adjust« menu.Conversely of course, such a joystick, transmitter control or switch "robbed" of its servo can still be used freely as a control in other way – indeed even in fl ight phase dependence – , refer to the programming examples at the end of this section.A joystick, transmitter control or switch robbed of its servo by setting the channel to "MIX only" will then namely affect mixer inputs only …… and the servo connected to a channel set to "MIX only" is then also only accessible from the mixers programmed to its control channel, i.e. "(with) MIX(ers) only".Accordingly, for any channel set to "MIX only", you can utilize both its control function and its control channel entirely independently of one another for any special functions you need; see the examples at the end of this section.Use the selection keys on the left or right touch pad to select the desired channel from 1 to 16 () then briefl y tap the center SET key of the right touch pad, to switch at will between "normal" ( ) and "MIX only" () modes: MIX ONLY CHANNELMIXonlynormal1234567 8 9 10111213141516Examples:For model glider aircraft without airbrakes, the • butterfl y function (page 172) is generally used as a landing aid. Just as with "normal" airbrakes, this is generally controlled using the C1 stick. While the (airbrakes) servo typically connected to channel 1 is then generally absent as a rule, receiver output 1 is still not "free", since the control signal of the brake stick is still present at this location.Its control signal – which in this specifi c case is not desired – can be decoupled from control channel "1" to thus "free up" this channel from the C1 joystick signal by setting channel 1 to "MIX only" in the »MIX-only channel« menu. This makes it possible to use control channel "1", together with receiver connection "1", at any time for other purposes, via freely-programmable mixers – e.g. to connect up a speed controller.If your model has built-in airbrakes, however, and • you would like to perhaps test the performance of a butterfl y system with and without airbrakes, simply set channel 1 to "MIX only" and program a free mixer "C1  C1", so as to restore your ability to control the airbrakes via servo 1. If you also assign a switch to this mixer, then you will be able to switch this mixer on and off as you please.
206 Detail program description - Dual mixers Dual mixersSame-sense/opposite-sense mixing of two control channelsUsing the selection keys on the left or right touch pad, page to the menu option …Phase settings Phase assignmentPhase trim Non-delayed chanTimers (general) Fl. phase timersWing mixers Free mixersMIX active/phase MIX-only channelDual mixer Fail-safe adjustControl switch Logical switchPhase settings Phase assignmentNon-delayed chan Timers (general)Fl. phase timers Helicopter mixerFree mixers MIX active/phaseMIX-only channel Dual mixer… on the multi-function menu. Briefl y tap the center SET key of the right touch pad to open this menu option.Diff.DUAL MIXERMixer 1Mixer 2?? ??Mixer 3Mixer 4?? ???? ???? ??0%0%0%0%The four fl ight phase independent dual mixers couple a V-tail mixer in a similar manner …334Servo 4,8 VC 577Best.-Nr. 4101Servo 4,8 VC 577Best.-Nr. 41014V-tail mixerControl function inputsControl channels(receiver outputs)Elevator stickRudder stickRight rudder / elevatorLeft rudder / elevatorRudderElevatorElevatorRudderRudderElevator… a same-sense " " and an opposite-sense " " control function, although they permit any channel to be used and offer differential travel for the opposing function.Important notice:Since the same and opposite sense infl uences of the given input on the two servos or rudder fl aps – coupled to one another by the dual mixer – are determined by, among other things, their installation situation and the direction of rotation specifi ed in the »Servo adjustment« menu, the symbols " " and " " are to be perceived more as synonyms rather than as consistently appropriate defi nitions! Accordingly, if wing fl aps are defl ected in the wrong direction, simply swap the two inputs or use the "servo reverse" option in the »Servo adjustment« menu; see page 102. In the software, the V-tail mixer already mentioned is supplemented by other "dual mixers" for realization of the two aileron servos on receiver outputs 2 and 5 and for the fl ap pairs on outputs 6 and 7, possibly also 9 and 10. These are activated via the aileron stick and the transmitter control that has been assigned to input "6" on the »Control adjust« menu.In the same way, the four freely-programmable dual mixers on this menu can be used to couple two further control functions, a feature that would otherwise only be possible with time-consuming programming of free mixers.Here, we will use a "V-tail with rudder differential" as our example to explain the programming of a dual mixer (see also the examples on page 286):Diff.DUAL MIXERMixer 1Mixer 2EL RUMixer 3Mixer 4?? ???? ???? ??+25%0%0%0%Depending on activation, both servos move in the sense of elevators or rudder fl aps. The differentiation, according to dual mixer confi guration, is only effective for rudder activation. In this case, both corresponding trim wheels are effective. No additional free mixers are required for this arrangement. When using this mixer, however, the tail type MUST be entered as "normal" on the "Model type" menu.Tip:All settings can be checked directly in the »Servo display« menu, which can be accessed from almost any other menu by simultaneously tapping the  keys on the left touch pad.Example:Model with two rudders, with differential travel and outward movement (e.g. swept-back fl ying wing):
207Detail program description - Dual mixersDiff.DUAL MIXERMixer 1Mixer 2 8 RUMixer 3Mixer 4?? ???? ???? ??+75%0%0%0%When a rudder command is given, the second servo connected to output 8 follows suit. (With this type of programming, differential travel can be confi gured for the rudders.) In this case, too, trim from the rudder stick affects both servos. If the rudders are also required to defl ect outwards when the airbrakes are activated, then you should assign the C1 stick (transmitter control 1) to input 8 on the »Control adjust«" menu. Afterwards, change to the "Offset" column then modify the offset value until both rudders are again in their neutral positions. It may be necessary to "play" a bit with the offset and travel adjustments.
208 Detail program description - Swashplate mixer and Fail-safeUsing the selection keys on the left or right touch pad, page to the menu option …Phase settings Phase assignmentNon-delayed chan Timers (general)Fl. phase timers Helicopter mixerFree Mixers MIX active/phaseMIX-only channel Dual mixerSwashplate mixer Fail-safe adjust… on the multi-function menu. Briefl y tap the center SET key of the right touch pad to open this menu option:SWASH MIXERPitchRollPitch ax.+61%+61%+61%SELNote:If "1 servo" is selected on the "Swashplate" line of the »Helicopter type«" menu, this option is not shown on the multi-function menu.The number of servos installed in your helicopter for pitch control was established in the Swashplate line of the »Helicopter type« menu, see page 98. This information is used to automatically couple together the functions for roll, pitch-axis and collective pitch, so that you do not need to defi ne any other mixers yourself.For helicopter models with only a single collective pitch servo, this "Swashplate mixer" menu option is of course superfl uous because the software controls a total of three swashplate servos for pitch, nick and roll independently of one another, i.e. without a mixer. In Swashplate mixerCollective pitch, roll, pitch-axis mixerthis scenario, this menu option is therefore no longer available to you from the multi-function menu. With all other swashplate linkages employing 2 … 4 pitch servos, mixer ratios and mixer directions are set up by default as shown above. The default is +61 % in each case but the value can be varied from -100 % to +100 % if required by briefl y tapping the center SET key of the right touch pad and its selection keys. Simultaneously tapping both  or  selection keys on the right touch pad (CLEAR) will reset the mixer ration in inverse video again to the +61 % default value. If the swashplate control system (collective pitch, roll and pitch-axis) does not respond to the joysticks properly, you should alter the mixer directions ("+" or "-") before trying to correct the directions of servo rotation.Note:Ensure that changed mixer values do not result in the servos mechanically striking their end-stops.Using the selection keys on the left or right touch pad, page to the menu option …Phase settings Phase assignmentPhase trim Non-delayed chanTimers (general) Fl. phase timersWing mixers Free mixersMIX active/phase MIX-only channelDual mixer Fail-safe adjustPhase settings Phase assignmentNon-delayed chan Timers (general)Fl. phase timers Helicopter mixerFree Mixers MIX active/phaseMIX-only channel Dual mixerSwashplate mixer Fail-safe adjust… on the multi-function menu. Briefl y tap the center SET key of the right touch pad to open this menu option:FAIL SAFEPoshold1234567 8 9 10111213141516DELAY : 0.25s STOThe higher level of operating safety exhibited by the HoTT system when compared to traditional PPM technology results from the fact that the microprocessor built into the HoTT receiver not only exclusively processes the signals of "its" transmitter, but can also clean up "dirty" control signals that it receives. Only when these signals become too error-prone or garbled due to outside interference does the processor automatically replace the disrupted signals Fail-safeFault condition setpoints
209Detail program description - Swashplate mixer and Fail-safewith the last received correct signal, temporarily stored in the receiver. This feature is confi gured by the settings as described below. This feature also suppresses brief interference caused by e.g. local drops in fi eld strength, which otherwise result in the familiar "glitches". In this case, the red LED lights up on the receiver.If you have selected a PCM transmission mode for the active model memory but have not yet carried out the fail-safe programming, you will see a warning message on the screen when you switch on the transmitter:Fail Safe setup t.b.d.Programming procedureThe "Fail Safe" function determines the behavior of the receiver if communication between the transmitter and the receiver is disrupted. Receiver outputs 1 … 16 can optionally …preserve the current position ("hold"):1. if communication is disrupted, all servos programmed to "hold" mode remain at the positions judged to be the last valid positions by the receiver until the receiver picks up another valid control signal, ormove to a freely selectable position ("Pos") if 2. interference should occur, following the expiry of the "time delay". Use selection keys  on the left or right touch pad to select the desired servo connection 1 bis 16 () then briefl y tap the center SET key of the right touch pad to freely switch between "hold" ( ) and "Pos" mode ( ):FAIL SAFEPoshold12345678910111213141516DELAY : 0.25s STOFollowing this, use the selection keys  on the left or right touch pad to select the "DELAY" option shown at the bottom of the display …FAIL SAFEPoshold1234567 8 9 10111213141516DELAY : 0.25s STO… and then briefl y tap the center SET key of the right touch pad. Now use the touch pad's selection keys to make your choice from the four possible time delays (0.25 s, 0.5 s, 0.75 s and 1 s) offered.A simultaneous tap on the  or  selection keys of the right touch pad (CLEAR) will reset the inverse video fi eld to its default value 0.25 s.Afterwards, select the STO fi eld at the bottom right of the display with the  selection keys on the left or right touch pad. Now put the servos which have been switched into position mode into their desired positions SIMULTANEOUSLY with the respective operating elements.Briefl y tap the center SET key of the right touch pad to store these positions as the fail-safe setting for the receiver, so that it can revert back to them if interference is experienced. Successful storage of the positions is confi rmed briefl y on the screen:FAIL SAFEPoshold1234567 8 9 10111213141516DELAY : 0.25s STOPosition storedAttention:Please note that decisive fail-safe settings are • stored in the receiver! Therefore, following a change of receivers, these fail-safe settings should be renewed and in the previous receiver they should be erased, if necessary per Reset, see page 46.Ensure you make use of this safety net by • at least programming the following for a fail-safe incident: for glow-powered models, set the motor throttle position to idle; for electric models, set the motor function to stop, or "Hold" for helicopter models. If interference should occur, the model is then less likely to fl y off on its own and cause damage to property or even personal injury. Consider asking an experienced pilot for advice.
210 Detail program description - Teacher/pupil Teacher/pupil Connecting two transmitters for trainer mode with a trainer leadThe mc-16 HoTT transmitter is equipped standard – as viewed from the front, under the left front fl ap – with a DSC socket. This is not only usable for connecting fl ight simulators – as described on page 22 – but also to integrate the transmitter into a cable-coupled teacher/pupil system. To accommodate the settings necessary for this, scroll with the selection keys on the left or right touch pad to the »Teacher/pupil« menu option in the Multifunction menu: Phase trim Non-delayed chanTimers (general) Fl. phase timersWing mixers Free mixersMIX active/phase MIX-only channelDual mixer Fail-safe adjustTeacher / pupil Tx. output swapNon-delayed chan Timers (general)Fl. phase timers Helicopter mixerFree mixers MIX active/phaseMIX-only channel Dual mixerSwashplate mixer Fail-safe adjustTeacher / pupil Tx. output swapBriefl y tap the center SET key of the right touch pad to open this menu option:TRAINER /studentPT2345BIND:SW: –––1n/a678910 11 12Note:The screen image shown above shows the menu in its initial state: No transmitter controls have been released by the pupil ( ) and no switch is assigned("SW: ---" bottom left in the screen image).When assigning control functions, the usual conventions must be observed:Channel Function1 Motor throttle/collective pitch2 Aileron/roll3 Elevator/pitch-axis4 Rudder/tail rotorTeacher-pupil settingsUp to twelve function inputs (see "Term defi nitions" on page 54) of the teacher transmitter "T" can be individually or in any combination transferred to the pupil transmitter "P".The lower display line, designated with "T", therefore indicates the function inputs with which control functions 1 … 4 (joystick functions for fi xed-wing and helicopter models) are permanently connected as well as inputs 5 … 12, which can be freely assigned in the »Control adjust« menu. Note:Just which controls are assigned to any inputs turned over to the pupil is basically of no consequence. However, their assignment in the »Control adjust« menu is possible only when the trainer mode connection is inactive.Use the  selection keys of the left or right touch pad to select the function inputs 1 through 12 for transfer to the pupil() then briefl y tap center SET key of the right touch pad for each switch to be switched between "T(eacher)"( ) and "P(upil)" ( ):TRAINER /studentPT2345BIND:SW: –––1n/a678910 11 12To be able to carry out the transfer, you must then assign a trainer mode switch on the left of the display. Do this by placing the marker just to the right of the "P"at the bottom left of the screen display by using the selection keys of the left or right touch pad then assign a switch as described in the section "Assigning transmitter controls, switches and control switches" on page 56. Preferably you should utilize one of the two standard momentary switches on the switchboard to allow a return of control to the teacher transmitter at any time.TRAINER /TeacherPT2345BIND:SW: –––1n/a678910 11 12–No pupil signalSince at this early stage of programming a trainer system it is unlikely that an operational pupil transmitter is connected to the teacher transmitter, the transmitter responds immediately to the switches closed during the switch assignment process with appropriate visual and audible warning notices. You should therefore re-open the switch you have just assigned:
211Detail program description - Teacher/pupilTRAINER /TeacherPT2345BIND:SW:1n/a678910 11 129Note:The switch assignment just described also determines the transmitter used to issue the teacher and pupil functions, respectively. For this reason, a pupil transmitter must NEVER be assigned a switch on this menu. The header line therefore also switches from "Teacher / Pupil" to "Teacher / Teach" once a switch has been assigned.The model to be controlled by the pupil must be programmed completely – i.e. with all its functions including trims and any mixer functions – in one of the model memories of the mc-16 HoTT teacher transmitter. The HoTT receiver of the model in question must also be "bound" to the teacher transmitter, since the latter ultimately controls the model, even in pupil mode.ALWAYS ENSURE YOU SWITCH ON THE mc-16 HoTT teacher transmitter FIRST BEFORE PLUGGING THE CONNECTION CABLE INTO THIS UNIT. Otherwise the RF module will not be activated.The mc-16 HoTT teacher transmitter can be connected to any suitable pupil transmitter, even transmitters using the "traditional" 35/40 MHz range. This means, for example, that a mc-16 HoTT teacher transmitter can indeed also be connected to a mc-24 pupil transmitter. However, if the pupil-side connection is NOT made via a two-pole DSC socket but rather via a three-pole trainer socket (for example, out of the Graupner product line), then the basic prerequisite for a correct connection to a pupil transmitter which is completely independent of the type of modulation used in the teacher transmitter must ALWAYS be set to modulation type PPM (10, 16, 18 or 24) in the pupil transmitter. Pupil transmitter set-upThe model to be controlled by the pupil must be programmed completely, i.e. with all its functions including trims and any mixer functions, in one of the model memories of the teacher transmitter and, if applicable, the HoTT receiver of the model in question must also be "bound" to the teacher transmitter. In principle, a mc-16 HoTT pupil transmitter can also be connected to a teacher transmitter operating on the "traditional" 35/40 MHz bands. This is possible because the PPM signal required by the teacher transmitter is available in the (pupil) transmitter's DSC socket.Almost any transmitter with at least four control functions from previous and current Graupner series can be used as a pupil transmitter. More detailed information can be found in the RC main catalog and on the www.graupner.de website.If required, the pupil transmitter should be fi tted with the connection module for pupil transmitters. This is to be connected to the transmitter board in accordance with the supplied installation instructions. Information on the pupil modules required in each case can be found in the Graupner RC main catalog and on the www.graupner.de website.The connection to the teacher transmitter is made using the appropriate lead; see the following double page.The control functions of the pupil transmitter MUST act directly on the control channels, i.e. the receiver outputs, without intermediary mixers. If you are using an "mc" or "mx" series transmitter, it is best to activate a free model memory with the required model type ("Fixed-wing" or "Heli"). Assign the model name "Pupil" and set up the stick mode (mode 1 … 4) and "Throttle min. forward/back" to suit the pupil's preferences. All other settings are left at their default values, however. If you have selected the "Helicopter" model type, you must also set the throttle/ collective pitch direction and idle trim on the pupil transmitter. All other settings, including mixer and coupling functions, are confi gured exclusively on the teacher transmitter, which in turn transmits them to the model.If the pupil transmitter is a mx-16 HoTT or mc-16 HoTT series model then it may also be necessary to adapt the type of modulation in the "DSC output" line of the »Base setup model« menu in order to accommodate the number of control channels to be transmitted. For example, the signal packet for modulation type "PPM10" contains only control channels 1 … 5 but not channel 6. However, if this channel is to be used by the pupil then a modulation type must be selected in which it is included.For transmitters of type "D" and "FM" it is necessary to check servo operating directions and their control correlations. It may be necessary to reconnect cables appropriately. All mixers must also be switched off or set to "zero".When assigning control functions, the usual conventions must be observed:Channel Function1 Motor throttle/collective pitch2 Aileron/roll3 Elevator/pitch-axis4 Rudder/tail rotorIf other control functions are to be transferred to the pupil transmitter in addition to the functions of the two
212 Detail program description - Teacher/pupildual axis sticks (1 … 4), access the »Control adjust« menu in the pupil transmitter and assign those inputs which correspond to enabled function inputs 5 … 12 as shown in the »Teacher/pupil« menu of the teacher transmitter. Afterwards, assign the operating elements appropriately.Important:If you should forget to assign a transmitter • control on the pupil side, then the affected servo or servos will remain in the center position when the transfer is made to the pupil transmitter.The pupil transmitter must always be operated • in PPM mode, regardless of the RF connection type used between the teacher transmitter and the model.If the transmitter is connected using a DSC • socket on the pupil side, ALWAYS leave the pupil transmitter's On/Off switch in the "OFF" position: this is the only way to guarantee that no RF signal is sent from the pupil transmitter's transmitter module, even after the DSC lead has been plugged in.Trainer mode operationsBoth transmitters are connected to one another using a suitable lead (see summary on next page): The plug marked "M" (master) must be inserted into the socket on the teacher transmitter, and the plug marked "S" (student) into the pupil transmitter's socket. (Note that not all leads may have such "M" and "S" labeling.) Important notices:Check that the model aircraft is operational • and check that all functions issue the correct commands BEFORE setting up trainer mode.The ends of the trainer lead, usually marked • as either "S" or "M", terminate in a three-pole TRS jack. Do not insert these jacks into a DSC system socket, as it is not suitable for this application. The DSC socket is exclusively designed for cables with 2-pole TRS jacks.Checking functionalityActivate the assigned trainer mode switch:The trainer mode system is working properly if the • display now changes from " L" to " S".However, if the • WARNING LED at the right, next to the transmitter's On/Off switch, blinks and an acoustic signal sounds off at the same time, then the connection between pupil and teacher transmitters is faulty. The basic display also displays the following warning notice …No pupil signal… and the left side of the screen display for the »Teacher/pupil« menu will change to show "-Pupil". In this case, all control functions are retained by the teacher transmitter automatically, regardless of switch position: this ensures the model is always under control.Possible faults:Pupil transmitter not ready• Interface in pupil transmitter not correctly • connected in place of the RF moduleCables connected wrongly: see right for cable • connectionsPupil transmitter not switched over to PPM (10, • 16, 18, 24) modeOther possible faults:Teacher transmitter not properly "bound" to HoTT • receiver in training modelTrainer cables4179.1 for trainer operation between any two Graupner transmitters equipped with DSC sockets – distinguished by a two-pole TRS jack at both ends.3290.7 trainer cable for connecting a teacher transmitter with DSC socket (e.g. mc-16HoTT) or a transmitter retrofi tted with an optional DSC module, order no. 3290.24) to a Graupner pupil transmitter with an opto-electronic system pupil socket – identifi able by the mark "S" on the side of the three-pole TRS jack.3290.8 trainer cable for connecting a pupil transmitter with DSC socket (e.g. mc-16HoTT) or a transmitter retrofi tted with an optional DSC module, order no. 3290.24) to a Graupner teacher transmitter with an opto-electronic system teacher socket – identifi able by the mark "M" on the side of the three-pole TRS jack.Further details about the cables and modules mentioned in this section for teacher and pupil transmitters can be found in the respective transmitter handbook, in the Graupner RC main catalog or in Internet at www.graupner.de.
213Detail program description - Teacher/pupil Trainer mode with the mc-16 HoTT transmitterDue to the continuous improvements made to the product range, please consult our website at www.graupner.de for the latest informationTeacher transmitterwith DSC socketTeacher transmitter with teacher module, order no. 3290.2, 3290.19, 3290.22Teacher/pupil cable, order no. 3290.8MPupil transmitter mc-16 HoTT mx-12 HoTT, mx-16 HoTT, mx-20 HoTT and mc-16 HoTTmc-19 through mc-24, mx-22(iFS), mx-24sPupil transmitterwith DSC socketPupil transmitter with pupil module, order no. 3290.3, 3290.10, 3290.33D 14, FM 414, FM 4014, FM 6014, mc-10 … mc-24, mx-22(iFS), mx-24sSTeacher transmitter mc-16 HoTTmx-12 HoTT, mx-16 HoTT, mx-20 HoTT and mc-16 HoTTNote:The lists present the possible transmitters/transmitter combinations at the time of going to press.Teacher/pupil cable, order no. 4179.1Teacher/pupil cable, order no. 3290.7Teacher/pupil cable, order no. 4179.1
214 Detail program description - Teacher/pupil Wireless HoTT systemWireless operation of the mc-16 HoTT trainer mode system is also possible. To do so, the teacher transmitter must be "connected" to a pupil transmitter as described below. Prior to this, however, the training model's receiver must be bound to the PUPIL transmitter. This confi guration is possible between transmitters which have the "BIND:" option in the »Teacher/pupil« menu.Preparing for training modeTeacher transmitterThe training model must be programmed completely, i.e. with all of its functions including trims and any mixer functions, in one model memory of the HoTT teacher transmitter. The model to be used for training must therefore be under the complete control of the teacher transmitter. The fi nal step in preparation, however, is to bind the training model to the pupil transmitter. For a detailed description of the binding process, please consult pages 77 and 85. Pupil transmitterIf you are using an "mc" or "mx" series transmitter, it is best to activate a free model memory with the required model type ("Fixed-wing" or "Heli"). Assign the model name "Pupil" and set up the stick mode (mode 1 … 4) and "Throttle (or collective pitch) min. forward/back" to suit the pupil's preferences. All other options are left at their default values. All other settings, including all mixer and coupling functions, are confi gured exclusively on the teacher transmitter, which in turn transmits them to the model.When assigning control functions, the usual conventions must be observed:Channel Function1 Motor throttle/collective pitch2 Aileron/roll3 Elevator/pitch-axis4 Rudder/tail rotorIf other control functions are to be transferred to the pupil transmitter in addition to the functions of the two dual axis sticks (1 … 4), access the »Control adjust« menu in the pupil transmitter and assign those inputs which correspond to enabled function or transmitter control inputs 5 … 12 as shown in the »Teacher/pupil« menu of the teacher transmitter. Afterwards, assign the operating elements appropriately. Important:If you should forget to assign a transmitter control on the pupil side, then the affected servo or servos will remain in the center position when the transfer is made to the pupil transmitter.Preparing the teacher and pupil transmittersOnce you have bound the training model to the pupil transmitter, now switch on the teacher transmitter. On both transmitters, use the selection keys on the left or right touch pad, page to the »Teacher/pupil« menu option on the multi-function menu:Phase trim Non-delayed chanTimers (general) Fl. phase timersWing mixers Free mixersMIX active/phase MIX-only channelDual mixer Fail-safe adjustTeacher / pupil Tx. output swapNon-delayed chan Timers (general)Fl. phase timers Helicopter mixerFree mixers MIX active/phaseMIX-only channel Dual mixerSwashplate mixer Fail-safe adjustTeacher / pupil Tx. output swapBriefl y tap the center SET key of the right touch pad to open this menu option:TRAINER /studentPT2345BIND:SW: –––1n/a678910 11 12Note:The screen image shown above shows the menu in its initial state: No transmitter controls have been released to the pupil ( ) and no switch has been assigned("SW: ---" bottom left in the screen image).Pupil transmitterUse the selection keys on the left or right touch pad to move the marker frame to the "BIND" input fi eld. If there is a switch shown at the right of "S:" then this must fi rst be erased, see screen image:TRAINER /studentPT2345BIND:SW:1n/a678910 11 12–––
215Detail program description - Teacher/pupilTeacher transmitterUp to twelve function inputs (see "Term defi nitions" on page 54) of the teacher transmitter "T" can be individually or in any combination transferred to the pupil transmitter "P". The lower display line, designated with "T", therefore indicates the function inputs with which control functions 1 … 4 (joystick functions for fi xed-wing and helicopter models) are permanently connected as well as inputs 5 … 12, which can be freely assigned in the »Control adjust« menu. Note:Just which controls are assigned to any inputs turned over to the pupil is basically of no consequence. However, their assignment in the »Control adjust« menu is possible only when the trainer mode connection is inactive.Use the  selection keys of the left or right touch pad to select the function inputs 1 through 12 for transfer to the pupil () then briefl y tap center SET key of the right touch pad for each switch to be switched between "T(eacher)"( ) and "P(upil)" ( ):TRAINER /studentPT2345BIND:SW: –––1n/a678910 11 12To be able to carry out the transfer, you must now assign a trainer mode switch. Do this by placing the marker frame just to the right of the "P" at the bottom left of the screen display by using the selection keys of the left or right touch pad then assign a switch as described in the section "Assigning transmitter controls, switches and control switches" on page 56.Preferably you should utilize one of the two standard momentary switches on the switchboard to allow a return of control to the teacher transmitter at any time:TRAINER /TeacherPT2345BIND:SW: –––1n/a678910 11 12–No pupil signalSince at this stage of programming the wireless trainer system no connection yet exists to a pupil transmitter, the transmitter responds immediately to the switches closed during the switch assignment process with appropriate visual and audible warning notices. You should therefore re-open the switch you have just assigned:TRAINER /TeacherPT2345BIND:SW:1n/a678910 11 129Note:The switch assignment just described also determines the transmitter used to issue the teacher and pupil functions, respectively. For this reason, a pupil transmitter must NEVER be assigned a switch on this menu. The header line therefore also switches from "Teacher / Pupil" to "Teacher / Teach" once a switch has been assigned.Using the selection keys on the left or right touch pad, now move the marker frame to the right, to "BIND: n/a":TRAINER /TeacherPT2345BIND:SW:1n/a678910 11 129Binding the pupil transmitter to the teacher transmitterNote:The distance between the two transmitters should not be too great during the binding process. If necessary, change the positions of the transmitters and initiate the binding process again.Initiate the "BINDING" process from the pupil transmitter by tapping the center SET key of the right touch pad …TRAINER /studentPT2345BIND:SW:1Binding678910 11 12–––… and repeat this immediately on the teacher transmitter:TRAINER /TeacherPT2345BIND:SW:1Binding678910 11 129
216 Detail program description - Teacher/pupilAs soon as this process is complete, both screens will show "ON" instead of the fl ashing "BINDING":TRAINER /studentPT2345BIND:SW:1on678910 11 12–––TRAINER /TeacherPT2345BIND:SW:1on678910 11 129You can return to the basic display on both screens and start the training session after carefully checking all of the relevant functions. If neither transmitter or only one transmitter displays "ON", this means the binding process has failed: try changing the positions of both transmitters and then repeat the entire procedure.Important notice:Check that the model aircraft is operational and check that all functions issue the correct commands BEFORE setting up trainer mode.During the …Training session… the teacher and pupil can maintain a variable distance from one another. The "reach of signal" (max. 50 m) should not be exceeded under any circumstances, however, no one else should be standing between the teacher and the pupil since these persons could reduce the connection range of the return channel used by the two transmitters. In this operating mode, the basic display of the teacher transmitter is as shown below …#01 0:24hStop watchFlight timK780:00.03.9V0:00.000001:23hPVRFC–TeacherGraubele… and the pupil transmitter's display will look something like this:#01 0:24hStop watchFlight timK780:00.03.7V0:00.000004:32hRFC–studentSchülerIf, however, the connection between the teacher and pupil transmitters should be lost during the training session, then the teacher transmitter will automatically assume control of the model.If the trainer mode switch is in the "Pupil" position when connectivity is lost, the Warning LED on the teacher transmitter will blink and audible warning signals will also be sounded for as long as the signal is lost. The basic display also displays the following warning notice:No pupil signalHowever, if only the character string "HF –" blinks on the transmitter's basic display accompanied by the audible warning signals, the pupil signal has been lost but the trainer mode switch is set to the "Teacher" position.In both cases, your fi rst step should be to reduce the distance between the two transmitters. If this does not help, then you should land immediately and establish the cause.If both transmitters are operational and the receiver system is switched off, then the teacher transmitter's basic display will show the icons instead of the "familiar" . The antenna icon will also fl ash and an audible warning signal will sound twice per second.Resuming trainer modeIf you switch off one or both transmitters during the session – for whatever reason – then the basic display of the transmitter(s) shows the following question after being switched back on:ACTTRAINERWireless LinkINHIf "INH" (set) is confi rmed by tapping the center SET key of the right touch pad or, alternatively, by waiting for approx. two seconds until the message disappears. then you will reset the transmitter in question back to its "normal" operating mode. You will then have to re-establish a connection between the teacher and pupil transmitters.If, on the other hand, the selection keys on the left or right touch pad are used to select "ACT" …
217Detail program description - Teacher/pupilPlease selectTrainer link?INHACT… and this selection is confi rmed by tapping the center SET key of the right touch pad, then the existing teacher connection is restored. The same approach is used if the transmitter is confi gured as a pupil transmitter.
218 Detail program description - Tx. output swapUsing the selection keys on the left or right touch pad, page to the menu option »Tx. output swap« Tx. output swap on the multi-function menu: Phase trim Non-delayed chanTimers (general) Fl. phase timersWing mixers Free mixersMIX active/phase MIX-only channelDual mixer Fail-safe adjustTeacher / pupil Tx. output swapNon-delayed chan Timers (general)Fl. phase timers Helicopter mixerFree mixers MIX active/phaseMIX-only channel Dual mixerSwashplate mixer Fail-safe adjustTeacher / pupil Tx. output swapBriefl y tap the center SET key of the right touch pad to open this menu option.Tx. output swapTo achieve maximum fl exibility regarding receiver socket assignment, the mc-16 HoTT program offers you the option of swapping servo outputs 1 to 16 as you please.This option lets you distribute the transmitter's 16 "control channels" to any of the transmitter outputs 1 … 16. If you do, you must remember that the »Servo display« screen – accessible from almost any menu option by simultaneously tapping the  and  keys on the left touch pad – refers exclusively to the "control channels" as preset by the receiver socket assignment: it therefore does NOT take any output swaps into account. Tx. output swapSwapping the outputs on the transmitterServoServoServoServo12341234OutputOutputOutputOutputTRANSFER OUTPUTSELUse the  selection keys on the left or right touch pad to select the channel/output combination to be changed then briefl y tap the center SET key of the right touch pad. You can now use the right selection keys to assign your selected (control) channel to the desired output, confi rming this with the SET key … ServoServoServoServo62341234OutputOutputOutputOutputTRANSFER OUTPUTSEL… or, by tapping the  or  selection keys on the right touch pad at the same time (CLEAR), you can restore the original assignment. Any subsequent changes, such as servo travel adjustments, Dual Rate / Expo, mixers etc., must always be performed in accordance with the original receiver socket assignment!Example:In the mc-16 HoTT helicopter program, the outputs for a collective pitch servo and the throttle servo are swapped around, compared to some older GRAUPNER/JR mc units. The throttle servo now occupies transmitter output "6" and the collective pitch servo output "1". Perhaps, however, you wish to retain the previous confi guration? In this case, you will swap over channels 1 and 6 as appropriate, so that (control) channel 6 is located on output 1 and vice versa – as shown above:Note:"Channel Mapping" (channel assignment) is the receiver-side channel correlation function integrated into the mc-16 HoTT transmitter's telemetry menu. With channel mapping, the transmitter's control channels (16 maximum) can be freely distributed to multiple receivers or receiver outputs having the same control function, for example to operate two servo controls per aileron surface instead of just being able to control one servo, etc. To keep controls manageable, however, we strongly recommend using only one of the options at a time.
219For your notes
220 Detail program description - Profi -trim | Winged models Profi -trim Flaps and aileron trimmingThe mc-16 HoTT transmitter has an integrated software function for direct trimming of all fl aps and ailerons. Using the selection keys on the left or right touch pad, page to the »Profi -trim« menu option in the multi-function menu …Timers (general) Fl. phase timersWing mixers Free MixerMIX active/phase MIX-only channelDual mixer Fail-safe adjustTeacher / pupil Tx. output swapProfi trim Trim memory… then open this menu option with a brief tap on the center SET key of the right touch pad.PRO TRIMAIAI FLFLTrim off off off offctl sw freeon/off –––SET SET SET SETfree free freeTo set the desired option, move the marker frame onto the desired line or column with the selection keys of the left or right touch pad then briefl y tap the center SET key of the right touch pad. Select the desired entry in the fi eld now displayed in inverse video with the selection keys on the left or right touch pad or move the desired transmitter control. Conclude the procedure with a tap on the ESC key.Programming is done in three steps.First of all, in the "Trim" line it will be established just which fl ap pair is to be trimmed as "AI" and/or "FL". The "Control" line specifi es the control channel over which the given trim function is to be performed and, fi nally, a switch is defi ned in the "ON/OFF" line by which this profi -trim function can be switched on or off globally.TrimNotes:Please note that, depending on the number of • aileron and fl ap servos specifi ed in the »Model type« menu (page 95), some settings cannot be used. For example, with only 1 aileron and/or 1 fl ap servo there is no aileron fl ap activation possible, and the opposite is also true. Since this is the case, a number of settings in various columns remain ineffective.Pay attention to potential double-assignments • when making trim control choices.The trim functions which can be activated (ON) or deactivated (OFF) on the fi rst line of this menu, either individually or in any combination, make pre-fl ight corrections to aileron and fl ap settings quick and easy, without the complexity of having to call up individual setting options. Individually, these are functions for …Trim of the • aileron function for aileron ("AI") Trim of the • fl ap function for aileron ("AI") Trim of the • aileron function for fl aps ("FL") Trim of the • fl ap function for fl aps ("FL") Tap on the  or  selection keys of the right touch pad at the same time (CLEAR) to reset the value of the fi eld displayed in inverse video back to "OFF".Note:Regardless of a switch's ON/OFF setting (see further below), the reset of a value fi eld in the "Trim" line has the effect an immediate return of the affected trim function to its original reference point.
221Detail program description - Profi -trim | Winged modelsControlPRO TRIMAIAI FLFLTrim act act off offctl sw freeon/off –––SET SET SET SETfree free freeThe second line of this menu is for selecting transmitter control assignments which appear advantageous from the many controls available on the transmitter. To assign a transmitter control, use the selection keys to navigate to the desired column then tap briefl y on the center SET key of the right touch pad …:PRO TRIMQRAI FLWKTrim actN AUS AUS offctl sw Lever1on/off –––SET SET SET SETfree free freeMove desiredcontrol adj.… and move the desired transmitter control:PRO TRIMAIAI FLFLTrim act act off offctl sw Tvr1on/off –––SET SET SET SETTvr2 free freeThe mid-point position of enabled proportional controls corresponds to the programmed fl ap setting.The trim range for a given transmitter control is about ±25 %. However, these "trim" controls are only effective when, as described in section "ON/OFF" further below, has been assigned to a profi -trim switch and switched on.With trims switched on, make a test fl ight to determine the optimal setting then open the ON/OFF switch to secure the setting against inadvertent maladjustment. Now as long as the ON/OFF switch remains open or is erased, the located trim values will retain their settings. An active transmitter control assignment can be erased with a simultaneous tap on the  or  selection keys of the right touch pad (CLEAR).Note:Trim values retain their settings until the next closure of the ON/OFF switch, even then when the trim functions in the "Control" line have been temporally reset to "free". ON/OFFThe "ON/OFF" line is used to assign a switch which permits the profi -trim function to be switched on/off globally. This assignment is done in the manner described in the section "Assigning transmitter controls, switches and control switches" on page 56.In this context, pay attention to the following dependencies:Only when the ON/OFF switch in the "Trim" line is • set to "ON" will the trim functions assigned to trim controls in the "Transm. controls" line be able to affect trim within a range of ±25 %. As soon as the ON/OFF switch is opened or • erased, the current trim positions will be stored and the selected trim controls become ineffective. A tap, at the same time, on the  or  selection keys of the right touch pad (CLEAR) when a switch assignment is active will reset a fi eld's value back to "---":PRO TRIMAIAI FLFLTrim act act off offctl sw Tvr1on/off –––SET SET SET SETTvr2 free free
222 Detail program description - Profi -trim | Helicopters Profi trimPitch, throttle, tail-rotor, and C1 curve trimmingThe mc-16 HoTT transmitter's software has an integrated function for additional trimming of 8-point curves; in Heli programs »Channel 1 curve« page 131, and »Helicopter mixer« page 176. These are intended for "Pitch" curves "Channel 1  Throttle" and "Channel 1  Tail. rot.".This feature, named »Profi trimm« because of its functional similarity to the Profi -Trim module for the mc-24 but only available on that transmitter as a retrofi t option. Select this feature from the multi-function menu with the selection keys of the left or right touch pad … Fl. phase timers Helicopter mixerFree mixer MIX active/phaseMIX-only channel Dual mixerSwashplate mixer Fail-safe adjustTeacher / pupil Tx. output swapProfi trim Trim memory… then open this menu option with a brief tap on the center SET key of the right touch pad.Mixer Point PhasefreefreefreefreeNoneNoneNoneNoneL1111LLL"Trim control" columnNote:Pay attention to potential double-assignments when making trim control choices.This menu's fi rst line is for assigning those transmitter controls (from the many available on the transmitter) which appear most advantageous for this purpose. To assign a transmitter control, use the selection keys to navigate to the desired line then tap briefl y on the center SET key of the right touch pad …Mixer Point PhasefreefreefreefreeNonekeinerkeinerNoneL1111LLLMove desiredcontrol adj.… then move the desired transmitter control:Mixer Point PhaseSlide1freefreefreeNoneNoneNoneNoneL1111LLLErase trim controlSelect the transmitter control assignment in the appropriate line as already described, e.g.:Mixer Point PhaseSlide1freefreefreeNonekeinerkeinerNoneL1111LLLMove desiredcontrol adj.A tap, at the same time, on the  or  selection keys of the right touch pad (CLEAR) will now reset the fi eld's value back to "free"."Mixer" columnThere are a total of four value fi elds in this column. For each of these fi elds a helicopter mixer can be selected, individually or in any combination, from a list.To do this, use the selection keys on the left or right touch pad to change to the desired value fi eld. Then briefl y tap the center SET key of the right touch pad …Mixer Point PhaseSlide1freefreefreeNoneNoneNoneL1111NoneLLL… and select the desired mixer with the selection keys of the left or right touch pad:Mixer Point PhaseSlide1freefreefreeNoneNoneNoneL1111PitchLLLAnother tap on the center SET key of the right touch pad or the ESC key of the left touch pad will conclude the entry. This procedure is the same for the other menus.A tap, at the same time, on the  or  selection keys of the right touch pad (CLEAR) will reset a fi eld displayed in inverse video back to "None".
223Detail program description - Profi -trim | Helicopters"Point" columnThe lines of the column "Mixer" were used to select one or mixers. Now, in the "Point" column, the reference points to be trimmed will be set. To do this, use the selection keys on the left or right touch pad to move to the desired value fi eld. Then briefl y tap the center SET key of the right touch pad …Mixer Point PhaseSlide1freefreefreeNoneNoneNoneL1111PitchLLLIf a undefi ned point is selected – in the basic version, only points "L" and "H" are set – the respective regulator will remain ineffective.The point offset (in a maximum range of about ±12 %) for the selected mixer will simultaneously be displayed in the curve diagrams of the »Helicopter mixer« menu so that the offset can also be checked visually.PhaseThe rightmost column is used, if desired, to determine which programmed fl ight phase the given regulator is to be active. The number preceding fl ight phase names, in the example "1" (Normal)", are based on the phase numbers as found in the »Phase assignment« menu on page 148:Mixer Point PhaseSlide1freefreefreeNoneNoneNoneL1111PitchLLLHowever, the current position of the regulator will be – contrary to the corresponding fi xed-wing program – set to a new zero point when …by a change of fl ight phase, individual or all trim • controls become active orthe given trim control is erased or• meanwhile the function assigned in the "Mixer" • column is to be changed.In all of these cases, the current regulator position will be stored and automatically overridden, i.e. adopted into the curve characteristic, by the pre-programmed curve points specifi ed by the »Channel 1 curve« and »Helicopter mixer« menus. In this manner it is possible to simultaneously optimize up to four arbitrary curve points during the fl ight.The memory storage option described here is, for example, useful during the fi rst test fl ights of a new model as this permits the "fl own" fl ight corrections to be immediately recorded in the program.However, in order to have a clearly defi ned reference point prior to the fi rst time a store is done, it is important to put all regulators into their middle positions. But always be careful that, after repeated stores, servo travel is not too severely restricted on one side. Check and correct the control linkage if necessary.Sometimes, despite an optimal basic setting for the model, it becomes necessary to temporarily change reference points, for example, when the weather has changed and the motor requires a short-term correction or even when the muffl er gets a leak unexpectedly, etc. Of course, in all of these cases, the corrected settings should not be stored via the Profi trim option. Storage can be prevented by ensuring that the regulator is in its middle position before activation or deactivation.Note:Yet another point, independent of this, can be regulated via the "Trim function" through use of the selection keys. This is described in detail along with the programming of 8-point curves in section »Channel 1 curve« on page 131.
224 Detail program description - Trim memory | Winged models Trim memory Storing the current trim positionUse the selection keys on the left or right touch pad to scroll to the menu option »Trim memory« menu option in the multi-function menu: Timers (general) Fl. phase timersWing mixers Free MixerMIX active/phase MIX-only channelDual mixer Fail-safe adjustTeacher / pupil Tx. output swapProfi trim Trim memoryBriefl y tap the center SET key of the right touch pad to open this menu option:TRIM MEMORYAileronElevator0%0%Channel 1 0%RudderTrim Pos.0%0%0%0%0%SETThis menu permits selective storage of the given current position for the four digital trim controls in order to return them afterward to their visual middle points. This makes the last stored trim positions in the respective middle positions of trim wheels for control functions 1 … 4 available again following a model memory location change or after long fl ight pauses.This memory store process is effective on a fl ight-phase specifi c basis for the currently active model memory location and is not to be stored globally. Therefore, as soon as fl ight phases have been defi ned in the »Phase settings« and »Phase assignment menus, the given active fl ight phase will be displayed on the screen's bottom line. For example:TRIM MEMORYAileronElevator0%0%Channel 1 0%RudderTrim Pos.0%0%0%0%0%SETNormalStoring trim positionsThe model has been fl ight tested and trimmed during the test fl ights. Current trim positions are now displayed in the column "Trim Pos." located approximately in the middle of the display. (The trim range is about ±30 % of total control travel.) The right column displays trim memory content, currently fi lled uniformly with 0 % because values have not yet been stored. Therefore, the display appears as follows:TRIM MEMORYAileronElevator+5%+3%Channel 1 0%RudderTrim Pos.-7%0%0%0%0%SETNormalNow use the selection keys on the left or right touch pad to move to the line where a trim value is to be written into trim memory, e.g. the elevator trim value:TRIM MEMORYAileronElevator+5%+3%Channel 1 0%RudderTrim Pos.-7%0%0%0%0%SETNormalNow, with a brief tap on the center SET key of the right touch pad, activate the SET column's selected value fi eld. The message "Please press trim"TRIM MEMORYAileronElevator+5%+3%Channel 1 0%RudderTrim Pos.–7%0%0%0%SETNormal0%Pleasepress trimwill then appear briefl y in the display.TRIM MEMORYAileronElevator+5%+3%Channel 1 0%RudderTrim Pos.–7%0%0%0%SETNormal0%Now briefl y press the trim wheel for the elevator's joystick to accept the trim value.TRIM MEMORYAileronElevator+5%0%Channel 1 0%RudderTrim Pos.–7%0%0%0%SETNormal+3%Another brief tap on the center SET key of the right touch pad or the center ESC key of the left touch pad will fi nish the procedure.Now, if desired, change the fl ight phase and repeat the procedure. Perform the same procedure for the other control functions, as necessary.
225Detail program description - Trim memory | Winged modelsErasing stored trim positionsUse the selection keys on the left or right touch pad to move to the line where a trim value is to be erased from trim memory, e.g.:TRIM MEMORYAileronElevator+5%0%Channel 1 0%RudderTrim Pos.–7%0%0%0%SETNormal+3%Now briefl y tap on the center SET key of the right touch pad to activate the value fi eld.TRIM MEMORYAileronElevator+5%+3%Channel 1 0%RudderTrim Pos.–7%0%0%0%SETNormal+3%Pleasepress trimAs previously described, the message "Please press trim" will appear briefl y. After his message has disappeared, simultaneously tap on the  or  selection keys of the right touch pad (CLEAR) to reset the value fi eld again back to "0 %".However, if you do not erase a trim memory before storing a new value, the new value will be added to the stored value. Although this an "elegant" way to effectively offset servo throw beyond the normal trim range of about ±30 %, do keep in mind that excessive offsets for servo travel can lead to anomalies including one-sided restriction. It is then prudent to check control linkages and make corrections as necessary.
226 Detail program description - Trim memory | HelicoptersUse the selection keys on the left or right touch pad to scroll to the menu option »Trim memory« menu option in the multi-function menu: Fl. phase timers Helicopter mixerFree mixer MIX active/phaseMIX-only channel Dual mixerSwashplate mixer Fail-safe adjustTeacher / pupil Tx. output swapProfi trim Trim memoryBriefl y tap the center SET key of the right touch pad to open this menu option:TRIM MEMORYRollPitch ax.0%0%Pitch/thr 0%Tail rot.Trim Pos.0%0%0%0%0%SETThis menu permits selective storage of the given current position for the four digital trim controls in order to return them afterward to their visual middle points. This makes the last stored trim positions in the respective middle positions of trim wheels for control functions 1 … 4 available again following a model memory location change or after long fl ight pauses.This memory store process is effective on a fl ight-phase specifi c basis for the currently active model memory location and is not to be stored globally. Therefore, as soon as fl ight phases have been defi ned in the »Phase settings« and »Phase assignment menus, the given active fl ight phase will be displayed on the screen's bottom line. For example:TRIM MEMORYRollRoll ax.0%0%Pitch/thr 0%Tail rot.Trim Pos.0%0%0%0%0%SETNormalStoring trim positionsThe model has been fl ight tested and trimmed during the test fl ights. Current trim positions are now displayed in the column "Trim Pos." located approximately in the middle of the display. (The trim range is about ±30 % of total control travel.) The right column displays trim memory content, currently fi lled uniformly with 0 % because values have not yet been stored. Therefore, the display appears as follows:TRIM MEMORYRollRoll ax.+5%+3%Pitch/thr 0%Tail rot.Trim Pos.-7%0%0%0%0%SETNormalNow use the selection keys on the left or right touch pad to move to the line whose trim value is to be written into trim memory, e.g. the pitch-axis trim value:TRIM MEMORYRollRoll ax.+5%+3%Pitch/thr 0%Tail rot.Trim Pos.-7%0%0%0%0%SETNormalNow, with a brief tap on the center SET key of the right touch pad, activate the SET column's selected value fi eld. The message "Please press trim"TRIM MEMORY+5%+3%0%Trim Pos.–7%0%0%0%SETNormal0%Pleasepress trimRollRoll ax.Pitch/thrTail rot.will then appear briefl y in the display.TRIM MEMORYRollRoll ax.+5%+3%Pitch/thr 0%Tail rot.Trim Pos.-7%0%0%0%0%SETNormalNow briefl y press the trim wheel for the elevator's joystick to accept the trim value. Trim memoryStoring the current trim position
227Detail program description - Trim memory | HelicoptersTRIM MEMORYRollRoll ax.+5%0%Pitch/thr 0%Tail rot.Trim Pos.-7%0%0%+3%0%SETNormalAnother brief tap on the center SET key of the right touch pad or the center ESC key of the left touch pad will fi nish the procedure.Now, if desired, change the fl ight phase and repeat the procedure. Perform the same procedure for the other control functions, as necessary.Erasing stored trim positionsUse the selection keys on the left or right touch pad to move to the line where a trim value is to be erased from trim memory, e.g.:TRIM MEMORYRollRoll ax.+5%0%Pitch/thr 0%Tail rot.Trim Pos.-7%0%0%+3%0%SETNormalNow briefl y tap on the center SET key of the right touch pad to activate the value fi eld.TRIM MEMORYAileronElevator+5%+3%Channel 1 0%RudderTrim Pos.–7%0%0%0%SETNormal+3%Pleasepress trimAs previously described, the message "Please press trim" will appear briefl y. After his message has disappeared, simultaneously tap on the  or  selection keys of the right touch pad (CLEAR) to reset the value fi eld again back to "0 %".However, if you do not erase a trim memory before storing a new value, the new value will be added to the stored value. Although this an "elegant" way to effectively offset servo throw beyond the normal trim range of about ±30 %, do keep in mind that excessive offsets for servo travel can lead to anomalies including one-sided restriction. It is then prudent to check control linkages and make corrections as necessary.
228 Detail program description - Telemetry TelemetryRead-in and settings for telemetry dataThe receiver's settings, as well as optional telemetry sensor settings, can be called up and programmed in real-time by way of the »Telemetry« menu. Communication with the transmitter is accomplished over the return channel built into the HoTT receiver.As many as four sensors can be attached, if necessary via V or Y adapter cables, to receivers with current fi rmware of types: GR-12S HoTT (order no. 33505), GR-12 HoTT (order no. 33506), GR-16 (order no. 33508), GR-24 HoTT (order no. 33512) and GR-32 DUAL (order no. 33516).The update capability of these and future receivers, which can be performed by the user, will keep the respective »Telemetry« menu up to date with the latest version and ensure enhancement with future functions or languages.Note:After registering your product at https://www.graupner.de/de/service/produktregistrierung you are automatically informed of new updates. Important notices:This manual is based on the functions available at • the time of printing.As already indicated in the section "Binding • multiple receivers" on page 77 and 85, multiple receivers per model can be bound into the system as necessary. However, only the receiver selected in the line "TELEMETRY RCV" of the "Telemetry" menu is able to establish a telemetry connection to the transmitter! However, that also means the inverse, that only this receiver can be addressed through the Telemetry menu! If necessary, therefore, the selection must be changed before settings can be made on a specifi c receiver:TELEMETRYSETTING & DATAVIEWSENSOR SELECTRF STATUS VIEWVOICE TRIGGERTELEMETRY RCV BIND. 1When adjusting the settings of the remote • control, make absolutely sure that the transmitter antenna is always far enough away from the receiver antennae! To be on the safe side, keep them at least one meter apart. Otherwise there is a risk of a faulty connection to the return channel and malfunctions will result.Since the telemetric data between transmitter • and receiver is only exchanged after the fourth data package, the data transmission requires a certain amount of time for technical reasons, so the reaction to the operating keys and changes to settings take place with a delay. Therefore, the delay is not due to an error.Programming on the model or on sensors may • only take place if the model is on the ground. Only carry out the settings with the motor switched off and the battery disconnected! Otherwise, undesired programming cannot be ruled out.For example, a servo test initiated accidentally could cause the model to crash and cause personal injury and/or property damage. Observe the safety instructions on pages 4 … 7 of this manual and the respective separate manuals.All settings (such as fail-safe, servo direction • reversal, servo travel, mixer and curve settings, etc.) made through the »Telemetry« menu are stored only in the receiver and therefore are adopted along with it if it is implemented as a receiver in another model. Therefore, to be on the safe side, re-initialize your HoTT receiver if you want to use the receiver in a different model; see "Reset" on page 46.Only program the servo direction reversal, • servo travel, mixer and curve settings through the mc-16-specifi c standard menus »Servo adjustment« page 102, »Dual Rate / Expo« page 120 or page 124, »Channel 1 curve« page 128 or 131, and so on. Otherwise, the settings superimpose one another, which can lead to complexity or even problems in the later operation.The channel assignment function, called "Channel • mapping", integrated into the »Telemetry« menu of the mc-16 HoTT transmitter can also freely distribute control functions over multiple receivers or even distribute a single control function over multiple receiver outputs, such as two servos per aileron instead of only one individual servo, etc. We also recommend exercising extreme during the programming.
229Detail program description - TelemetryTelemetryThe menus gathered under the heading »Telemetry« can be called up from the mc-16 HoTT transmitter's basic display with a tap of about one second duration on the center ESC key of the left touch pad. The same menus can, like other transmitter menus, also be opened in the multifunction menu with a tap on the center SET key of the right touch pad:Wing mixers Free mixersMIX active/phase MIX-only channelDual mixer Fail-safe adjustTeacher / pupil Tx. output swapProfi trim Trim memoryTelemetry Channel sequenceFree mixers MIX active/phaseMIX-only channel Dual mixerSwashplate mixer Fail-safe adjustTeacher / pupil Tx. output swapProfi trim Trim memoryTelemetry Channel sequence Basic operationOperating the »Telemetry« menu is essentially the same as for the remaining mc-16 HoTT transmitter menus. The few differences are described in the following:The  selection keys of the left or right touch pad can be used to switch between individual pages of the Telemetry menu. Corresponding directional indicators can be found at top right of each display page in the form of angled brackets ( ), refer to the fi gures below. If only one angled bracket is visible, you are on either the fi rst or last respective page. In this case, changing pages is only possible in the indicated direction.Menu lines in which parameters can be changed are identifi ed with the aforementioned angled bracket ( ). The " " pointer will jump a line forward or back with a tap on the  selection keys of the left or right touch pad. Lines to which a jump cannot be made are unalterable.In order to change a parameter, briefl y touch the center SET key of the right touch pad (the parameter will be displayed in inverse video), change the value within the permissible adjustment range via the selection keys of the right touch pad and adopt the value with another tap on the SET key. A brief tap on the center ESC key of the left 4-way pad will cause a return to the starting position again.Now use the  selection keys of the left or right touch pad to pick the desired sub-menu. However, if the message …OKCAN NOTRECEIVEDATA… appears instead of the desired sub-menu after touching the center SET key of the right touch pad then no connection has been established with a receiver. Therefore, switch on your receiver system or, if applicable reconnect the addressed receiver as described on page 77 or 85 or activate it as described under "Important Notices" on the previous page.On the fi rst display page of the sub-menu overwritten with … RX DATAVIEW…TELEMETRYSETTING & DATAVIEWSENSOR SELECTRF STATUS VIEWVOICE TRIGGERTELEMETRY RCV BIND. 1… no settings can be made. This page is only provided for information:TELEMETRYSETTING & DATAVIEWSENSOR SELECTRF STATUS VIEWVOICE TRIGGERTELEMETRY RCV BIND. 1RX DATAVIEWS–STR100% R–TEM.+28°CL PACK TIME 00010msecR-VOLT :05.0VL.R-VOLT:04.5VS–QUA100%S–dBM–030dBMSENSOR1 :00.0V 00°CSENSOR2 :00.0V 00°CValue ExplanationS-QUA signal quality in %S-dBm Reception power in dBmS-STR signal strength in %R-TEM. Receiver temperature in °CL PACK TIMEIndicates the time in ms in which the longest data package is lost during the transmission from the transmitter to the receiverR-VOLT Current operating voltage of the receiver in volts SETTINGS/DISPLAYS
230 Detail program description - TelemetryL.R-VOLT Lowest operating voltage of the receiver since it was last turned on, in voltsSENSOR1 Indicates values of optional telemetric sensor 1, in volts and °CSENSOR2 Indicates values of optional telemetric sensor 2, in volts and °CSignal quality (S-QUA)The signal quality (S-QUA) is sent "live" over the receiver's return channel to the transmitter and indicates the signal strength in %. Reception power (S-dbm)Reception power (S-dbm) is indicated with negative values, which means a value of zero is the maximum value (= best reception) and the lower the values are, the poorer the reception power! The range test before operation, among other things, is important for this.Note:With negative numbers the evaluation of a number is reversed: The higher the number following the minus symbol, the lower the value is. Therefore, a reception power of -80 dBm, for example , is poorer than one of -70 dBm.Perform the range test as described on page 80 and 88 before each fl ight and, in doing so, simulate all servo movements which also take place during the fl ight. The range must be at least 50 m on the ground with the range test activated. At this distance, the value shown under "S-dBm" in the "RX DATAVIEW" display may not be greater than -80 dBm in order to guarantee safe operation. The model should never be operated with a lower value (e.g. -85 dBm). Check the installation of the receiver system and the position of the antenna.The reception power should not drop below -90 dBm during operation. Otherwise, reduce the distance of the model. Normally, however, the acoustic range warning (peep tone interval 1 s) is triggered before this value is reached in order to guarantee safe operation.Signal strength (S-STR)The signal strength (S-STR) is displayed in %. In general, an acoustic range warning (peep tone interval 1 s) is issued as soon as the receiver signal becomes too week in the return channel. However, since the transmitter has a signifi cantly higher transmission power than the receiver, the model can still be safely operated. For the sake of safety, the distance to the model should be reduced until the warning tone goes silent again.Receiver temperature (R-TEM.)Make sure the receiver remains within the permissible temperature range during all fl ight conditions (ideally between -10 and 55 °C).The receiver temperature limit, at which a warning is issued, can be adjusted in the sub-menu »RX SERVO TEST« under "ALARM TEMP+" (50 … 80 °C and "ALARM TEMP-" (-20 … +10 °C). When the value is under-run or over-run, an acoustic signal sounds (continuous peep tone) and "TEMP.E" will appear at the top right of all "RX" receiver sub-menus. Additionally, the parameter "R-TEM" will be displayed in inverse video on the »RX DATAVIEW« display page.Data packages (L PACK TIME)Indicates the longest time span in ms in which data packages are lost in the transmission from the transmitter to the receiver. In practice, that is the longest time span in which the remove control system has entered into fail-safe mode.Receiver operating voltage (R-VOLT)Always check the operating voltage of the receiver. Never operate or even start your model if the operating voltage is too low.The receiver low voltage warning can be adjusted between 3.0 and 6.0 volts in "ALARM VOLT" of the »RX SERVO TEST« sub-menu. If this range is under-run, an acoustic signal is sounded (repetitive double peep tone (long/short)) and "VOLT.E" will appear at the top right of all »RX …« receiver sub-menus.| In addition, the parameter "R-VOLT" will be displayed in inverse video in the »RX DATAVIEW« sub-menu.The current receiver battery voltage is also displayed in the default display, see page 28.Minimum receiver operating voltage (L.R-VOLT)"L.R-VOLT" indicates the minimum operating voltage of the receiver since the last time it was switched on.If this voltage should deviate signifi cantly from the current "R-VOLT" operating voltage, the receiver battery may be too heavily encumbered by the servos. The consequence is voltage drops. In this case, use a more powerful voltage supply in order to achieve maximum operational safety.Sensor 1 + 2Indicates the values of optional telemetric sensors 1and 2, if present, in volts and °C. A description of these sensors can be found in the appendix. RX SERVOTELEMETRYSETTING & DATAVIEWSENSOR SELECTRF STATUS VIEWVOICE TRIGGERTELEMETRI RCV BIND. 1RX SERVOREVERSE : OFFCENTER : 1500μsecTRIM : –000μsecLIMIT– : 150%OUTPUT CH: 01LIMIT+ : 150%PERIOD : 20msecIt is very important that you read the notices on page 228 before doing any programming on this display
231Detail program description - Telemetrypage.Value Explanation Possible settingsOUTPUT CHChannel selection 1 … depending on receiverREVERSE Servo reversal OFF / ONCENTER Servo center in µs if active (inverse), dependent on control positionTRIM Trim position in µs deviating from the CENTER position-120 … +120 µsLIMIT– Travel limit on the "–" side of servo travel in % servo travel30 … 150 %LIMIT+ Travel limit on the "+" side of servo travel in % servo travel30 … 150 %PERIOD Cycle time in ms 10 or 20 msOUTPUT CH (channel selection)If applicable, select the line "OUTPUT CH" with the selection keys. Touch the SET key of the right touch pad. The value fi eld is shown highlighted. Now set the desired channel (e.g. 01) with the selection keys on the right touch pad. The following parameters are always based on the channel set here.Reverse (servo reversal)Set the rotational direction of the servo connected to the selected servo channel: ON / OFFCENTER (servo center)The active value fi eld (inverse video) in the "CENTER" line shows the current impulse time in µs for the control channel selected in the "OUTPUT CH" line. The displayed value depends on the current position of the control infl uencing this control channel and, if applicable, the position of its trimming.A channel impulse time of 1500 µs corresponds to the standard center position and thus the conventional servo center.In order to change this value, select the "CENTER" line then touch the SET key. Now move the respective transmitter control, joystick and/or trim wheel to the desired position and store the current control's position with another tap on the SET key. This position is saved as the new neutral position.TRIM (trim position)In the "TRIM" line" you can carry out the fi ne adjustment of the neutral position of a servo connected to the control channel selected in the "OUTPUT CH" line using the selection keys of the right touch pad in 1 µs increments. The value in the "CENTER" line can be adjusted by the TRIM value set here in a range of ± 120 µs. Factory setting: 0 µs.LIMIT–/+ (side dependent travel limit -/+)This option is provided for the adjustment of a side-dependent limit (limiting) of the servo travel (rudder throw) of the servo connected to the control channel selected in the "OUTPUT CH" line. The settings for both directions are separate but both are in a range of 30 … 150 %.Factory setting: 150 % each. PERIOD (cycle time)In this line you determine the time interval of the individual channel impulse. This setting is adopted for all control channels.With the use of only digital servos, a cycle time of 10 ms can be set.. In mixed operation or with use of only analog servos, 20 ms should absolutely be set, because the latter can otherwise be "over-strained" and react with "shaking" or "quivering" as a result. RX FAIL SAFETELEMETRYSETTING & DATAVIEWSENSOR SELECTRF STATUS VIEWVOICE TRIGGERTELEMETRI RCV BIND. 1RX FAIL SAFEINPUT CH: 01MODE : HOLDF.S.POS. : 1500μsecDELAY : 0.75secOUTPUT CH: 01FAIL SAFE ALL: NOPOSITION : 1500μsecThe description of this menus necessitates a few words of warning in advance:"Do nothing" is the absolute worst thing to be done in this regard. "HOLD" is prescribed in the base setup model of the HoTT receiver.In the event of a failure, in the best case scenario the model fl ies straight ahead for an indefi nite amount of time and then hopefully "lands" somewhere without causing signifi cant damage! However, if something like this happens in the wrong place at the wrong time, the model may become uncontrollable and "tear" across the fl ight fi eld completely out of control, putting the pilot and spectators at risk.Therefore, it would obviously be benefi cial to program the the function "Motor off" at the very least, in order to prevent such risks. If necessary, seek the advice of an experienced pilot in order to fi ne a "logical" setting for your model.And then another brief notice regarding the three possible versions of the mc-16 HoTT transmitter for the setting of Fail Safe:The easiest, and recommended, way to fail-safe settings is the use of the »Fail Safe« menu, which can be reached from the multifunction menu, see page 208.Similarly, in order to achieve the same result somewhat more laboriously, the "FAIL SAFE ALL" option described on the following pages is also available.
232 Detail program description - TelemetryIn addition, there are the relatively elaborate methods of the of the individual adjustment using the options "MODE", "F.S.Pos." and "DELAY". The description of these variants begins with the "MODE" option further below.Value Explanation Possible settingsOUTPUT CHOutput channel (servo connection of the receiver)1 … depending on receiverINPUT CH Input channel (channel coming from the transmitter)1 … 16 %MODE Fail-Safe mode HOLDFAIL SAFEOFFF.S.POS. Fail-safe position 1000 … 2000 µsDELAY Reaction time (delay)0.25, 0.50, 0.75 and 1.00 sFAIL SAFE ALLSave of the Fail-safePositions of all control channelsNO / SAVEPOSITION Display of the saved Fail-safe positionBetween approx 1000 and 2000 µsOUTPUT CH (servo connection)In this line you select the respective OUTPUT CH (servo connection of the receiver) to be set.INPUT CH (selection of the input channel)As already mentioned on page 228, the 16 control functions of the mc-16 HoTT transmitter can be arbitrarily distributed to multiple receivers, if necessary, or even assigned to multiple receiver outputs with the same control function. For example, this might be used in order to be able to control two servers for each aileron fl ap or an oversize rudder with linked servos instead of an individual servo. Distribution to multiple HoTT receivers, in turn, offers the advantage of not having to use a long servo cable, e.g. for large models. In this case, bear in mind that only the receiver selected in the line "TEL.EMPF." through the »Telemetry« menu can be addressed!The 16 control channels (INPUT CH) of the mc-16 HoTT can be appropriately managed through so-called " Channel Mapping" (channel assignment) whereby a different control channel is assigned to the servo connection selected in the OUTPUT CH line for the receiver in the INPUT CH line. BUT CAUTION: If, for example, "2AIL" is specifi ed in the transmitter on the "Aileron/camber fl aps" line of the »Base setup, model« menu then control function 2 (Aileron) will already be assigned in the transmitter to control channels 2 and 5 for distribution to the left and right ailerons. The receiver's corresponding INPUT CH, which must also be mapped, would be the channels 02 and 05 in this case; see the following example.Examples:You would like to control each aileron of a large • model with two or more servos. You would like to control each aileron of a large • model with two or more servos. Assign one of the two standard aileron control channels 2 or 5 as INPUT CH to the corresponding OUTPUT CH (servo connections) depending on the left or right bearing surface. You would like to control the rudder of a large • model with two or more servos. Assign the same INPUT CH (control channel) to the corresponding OUTPUT CH (servo connections). In this case, this is the standard rudder channel 4.MODEThe settings of the options "MODE", "F.S.Pos." and "DELAY" determine the behavior of the receiver in the event of a failure in the transmission from transmitter to receiver.The setting programmed under "MODE" is always based on the channel set in the OUTPUT CH line.The factory setting for all servos is "HOLD".For each selected OUTPUT CH (servo connection of the receiver) you can choose between:FAI(L) SAFE• With this selection, in the event of a failure the corresponding servo moves to the position shown in the "POSITION" line for the remainder of the failure until the "Delay time" set in the "DELAY" line has lapsed.HOLD• With a setting of "HOLD", in the event of a failure the servo maintains the last correctly received servo position for the duration of the failure.OFF• With a setting of "OFF", in the event of a failure the receiver discontinues the retransmission of (temporarily stored) control impulses for the respective servo output for the duration of the failure. In other words, the receiver switches the impulse line "off".BUT CAUTION: Analog servos and even some digital servos no longer put up any resistance against the previous control pressure during the failure of the control impulse and are more or less pushed out of their position as a result.F.S.POS. (Fail-safe position)For each OUTPUT CH (receiver servo connection), set the position the given servo should assume in "FAI(L) SAFE" mode, i.e. in the event of a failure, via
233Detail program description - Telemetrythe "F.S.POS." line. This is done by fi rst activating the value fi eld (inverse representation) with a tap on the SET key of the right touch pad then using the selection keys of the right touch pad to choose the servo position. The adjustment takes place in 10-µs increments.Factory setting: 1500 µs (servo center).Important notice:The function "F.S.POS." has an additional meaning in all three modes, "OFF", "HOLD" and "FAI(L) SAFE" in the event that the receiver is switched on, but (still) does not receive a valid signal. The servo immediately travels to the fail-safe position predefi ned in the "Position" line. In doing so, the landing gear, for example, is is prevented from retracting of the receiver is accidentally switched on while the transmitter is switched off. In normal model mode, on the other hand, the corresponding servo behaves in accordance with the set "MODE" in the event of a failure.DELAY (fail-safe reaction time or delay)Here you adjust the delay time after which the servos should move to their predetermined positions in the event of a signal interruption. This setting is adopted for all channels and only pertains to the servos programmed to the "FAIL SAFE" mode. Factory setting: 0.75 s.FAIL SAFE ALL (global fail-safe setting)This sub-menu allows servo fail-safe positions to be established at the "push of a button" in a similar manner to that described on page 208 for the »Fail Safe« menu.Switch to the "FAIL SAFE ALL" line and activate the value fi eld by touching the center SET key of the right touch pad. "NO" will be displayed in inverse video. Then adjust the parameter to "SAVE" with one of the selection keys of the right touch pad. Now, using the operating elements of the transmitter, move all servos to the desired fail-safe position you assigned or want to assign in the line "MODE" "FAI(L) SAFE". The current position of the control for the channel which was just set is shown in the bottom "Position" line:TELEMETRYSETTING & DATAVIEWSENSOR SELECTRF STATUS VIEWVOICE TRIGGERTELEMETRI RCV BIND. 1RX FAIL SAFEINPUT CH: 01MODE : FAI-SAFEF.S.POS. : 1670μsecDELAY : 0.75secOUTPUT CH: 01POSITION : 1670μsecFAIL SAFE ALL: SAVEAfter a tap on the center SET key of the right touch pad, the display will change again, from "SAVE" to "NO". The saved the positions of all servos affected by this measure and adopted them in parallel to the line "F.S.Pos." and the display then immediately shows the following for the current OUTPUT CH (servo connection):TELEMETRYSETTING & DATAVIEWSENSOR SELECTRF STATUS VIEWVOICE TRIGGERTELEMETRI RCV BIND. 1RX FAIL SAFEINPUT CH: 01MODE : FAI-SAFEF.S.POS. : 1670μsecDELAY : 0.75secOUTPUT CH: 01POSITION : 1670μsecFAIL SAFE ALL: NOSwitch off the transmitter and check the fail-safe positions based on the servo throws. "Fail Safe" in combination with "Channel Mapping"In order to ensure that the mapped servos – that is to say servos which are controlled from a common control channel (INPUT CH) – react the same way even in the event of a failure, the corresponding settings of the INPUT CH determine the behavior of the mapped servos!!! Therefore, the servo connections 6, 7 and 8 of a receiver are mapped with one another, whereby the OUTPUT CH (servo connections) 06, 07 and 08 are assigned as INPUT CH of the same respective control channel "04" …TELEMETRYSETTING & DATAVIEWSENSOR SELECTRF STATUS VIEWVOICE TRIGGERTELEMETRI RCV BIND. 1RX FAIL SAFEINPUT CH: 04MODE : FAI-SAFEF.S.POS. : 1670μsecDELAY : 0.75secOUTPUT CH: 06POSITION : 1670μsecFAIL SAFE ALL: NOTELEMETRYSETTING & DATAVIEWSENSOR SELECTRF STATUS VIEWVOICE TRIGGERTELEMETRI RCV BIND. 1RX FAIL SAFEINPUT CH: 04MODE : FAI-SAFEF.S.POS. : 1230μsecDELAY : 0.75secOUTPUT CH: 07POSITION : 1670μsecFAIL SAFE ALL: NOTELEMETRYSETTING & DATAVIEWSENSOR SELECTRF STATUS VIEWVOICE TRIGGERTELEMETRI RCV BIND. 1RX FAIL SAFEINPUT CH: 04MODE : FAI-SAFEF.S.POS. : 1770μsecDELAY : 0.75secOUTPUT CH: 08POSITION : 1670μsecFAIL SAFE ALL: NO… the INPUT CH 04 determines the fail-safe behavior of these three servos connected to the control channel 4 completely independently of the individual settings of the respective OUTPUT CH:
234 Detail program description - TelemetryTELEMETRYSETTING & DATAVIEWSENSOR SELECTRF STATUS VIEWVOICE TRIGGERTELEMETRI RCV BIND. 1RX FAIL SAFEINPUT CH: 04MODE : FAI-SAFEF.S.POS. : 1500μsecDELAY : 0.75secOUTPUT CH: 04POSITION : 1670μsecFAIL SAFE ALL: NOThis is also the case, for example, if this is mapped with INPUT CH 01:TELEMETRYSETTING & DATAVIEWSENSOR SELECTRF STATUS VIEWVOICE TRIGGERTELEMETRI RCV BIND. 1RX FAIL SAFEINPUT CH: 01MODE : FAI-SAFEF.S.POS. : 1420μsecDELAY : 0.75secOUTPUT CH: 04POSITION : 1670μsecFAIL SAFE ALL: NOIn this case, the servo connection 04 would, in turn, react according to the fail-safe settings of CH 01.The reaction or delay time set in the "DELAY" line, on the other hand, always applies uniformly for all channels set to "FAI(L) SAFE". RX FREE MIXERTELEMETRYSETTING & DATAVIEWSENSOR SELECTRF STATUS VIEWVOICE TRIGGERTELEMETRI RCV BIND. 1RX FREE MIXERMASTER CH: 00SLAVE CH : 00S–TRAVEL–: 100S–TRAVEL+: 100MIXER : 1RX WING MIXERTAIL TYPE: NORMALValue Explanation Possible settingsMIXER Mixer selection 1 … 5MASTER CHSignal source or source channel0, 1 … depending on receiverValue Explanation Possible settingsSLAVE CH Target channel 0, 1 … depending on receiverS-TRAVEL– Admix negative 0 … 100 %S-TRAVEL+ Admix positive 0 … 100 %RX WING MIXER TAIL TYPEtail type NORMAL,V-TAIL (V-LW)ELEVON(vertical/horizontal mixer for delta and fl ying wing)MIXERUp to three mixers can be programmed simultaneously. Use "MIXER" to switch between mixers 1 … 5.The following settings in this display always for just the mixer selected in the "MIXER" line.Important notice:If you have already programmed mixer functions in the »Wing mixer« or »Free mixer«" Free mixer " menus, make absolutely sure that these mixers do not overlap with those in the menu "RX FREE MIXER"!MASTER CH ("from")According to the same principles described in the section "Free mixer" on page 192, the signal applied at the MASTER CH (signal source or source channel) is mixed to a variable extent to the SLAVE CH (target channel). Select "00" if no mixer should be set.SLAVE CH ("to")The signal of the MASTER CH (source channel) is mixed proportionally to the SLAVE CH (target channel). The mix ratio will be determined by the percentages entered in the lines "TRAVEL–" and "TRAVEL +".Select "00" if no mixer should be set.TRAVEL–/+ (proportion of the admix in %)With the settings of these two lines the percentage of the admix is specifi ed in relation to the MASTER signal separately for each direction.RX WING MIXER TAIL TYPE (tail unit type)The following model types are also available in the "Tail" line of the »Model type« menu, on page 94 and should, preferentially, be preset there. In this case, always leave the TAIL TYPE set to NORMAL.However, if you would prefer to use the mixer integrated in the receiver, you can select the already pre-adjusted mixer functions for the corresponding model type:NORMAL• This setting corresponds to the classic aircraft type with rear tail unit and separate rudder and elevator. No mixer function is necessary for this model type.V-TAIL (V-tail unit)• With this model type the elevator and rudder control functions are connected, so that each of the two tail unit fl aps – each controlled with a separate servo – assume both the elevator and rudder function. The servos are normally connected to the receiver as follows:OUTPUT CH 3: Left V-tail servoOUTPUT CH 4: Right V-tail servoIf the servo's direction of rotation is incorrect, please observe the notices on page 62.ELEVON (delta/fl ying wing models)• The servos connect at the outputs 2 and 3 assume the aileron and elevator function. The servos are normally connected to the receiver as follows:OUTPUT CH 2: Left horizontal/vertical
235Detail program description - TelemetryOUTPUT CH 3: Right horizontal/verticalIf the servo's direction of rotation is incorrect, please observe the notices on page 62. RX CURVE (EXPO)TELEMETRYSETTING & DATAVIEWSENSOR SELECTRF STATUS VIEWVOICE TRIGGERTELEMETRI RCV BIND. 1RX CURVE TYPE : BCURVE1 CH : 02 TYPE : BCURVE2 CH : 03 TYPE : BCURVE3 CH : 04Value Explanation Possible settingsCURVE1, 2 or 3 CHChannel assignment of the respective curve setting 1 … depending on receiverTYPE Curve type A, B, Csee fi gureExpo = +100%–100% +100%0–100% +100%0Expo = –100%TYPE A–100% +100%0–100% +100%0linear–100% +100%0–100% +100%0TYPE BTYPE CDR = 125% DR = 70%Servo travelControl travelServo travelControl travelServo travelControl travelNormally a non-linear control function, if applicable, is used for the aileron (channel 2), elevator (channel 3) and rudder (channel 4). These channel defaults also correspond to the factory settings. BUT CAUTION: This assignment only applies when, on the transmitter side, neither "2HRSv3+8" is specifi ed in the "Tail type" line nor is "2AIL" or 2AIL 2FL" specifi ed in the "Aileron/camber fl aps" line of the »Base settings« menu. Otherwise, assignments will have already been made in the transmitter for control function 3 (elevator), which will then be split between control channels 3 & 8, or control function 2 (aileron), which will then be split between control channels 2 & 5 for the left and right ailerons. The corresponding control channels (INPUT CH) in the receiver would in both cases be channels 03 & 08 or 02 & 05.Therefore if, for example, "2AIL" has been specifi ed on the transmitter side and the intent here is to utilize the RX CURVE option instead of the mc-16 HoTT transmitter's individually adjustable »Dual Rate / Expo« menu (see page 120 or 124), then two curves must be set:TELEMETRYSETTING & DATAVIEWSENSOR SELECTRF STATUS VIEWVOICE TRIGGERTELEMETRI RCV BIND. 1RX CURVE TYPE : BCURVE1 CH : 02 TYPE : BCURVE2 CH : 05 TYPE : BCURVE3 CH : 04Otherwise, the left and right ailerons have different control characteristics.With the RX CURVE function you can manage the control characteristics for up to three servos:CURVE 1, 2 or 3 CH• Select the desired control channel (INPUT CH) of the fi rst servo.The following setting in TYPE only pertains to the channel selected here.TYPESelect the servo curve:A: EXPO = -100 % and DUAL RATE = 125 % The servo reacts strongly to movements of the joystick around the neutral position. As the rudder throw increases, the curve becomes fl atter.B: Linear setting. The servo follows the joystick movement linearly.C: EXPO = +100 % and DUAL RATE = 70 %The servo reacts weakly to the joystick movements around the neutral position. As the rudder throw increases, the curve becomes steeper.Note:The control characteristics programmed here also affect the mapped receiver outputs.5CH FUNCTION: "SERVO" or "SENSOR"TELEMETRYSETTING & DATAVIEWSENSOR SELECTRF STATUS VIEWVOICE TRIGGERTELEMETRI RCV BIND. 1RX CURVE TYPE : ACURVE1 CH : 02 TYPE : ACURVE2 CH : 03 TYPE : BCURVE3 CH : 045CH FUNCTION:SERVOSome receivers have a specifi c servo connection which has been made switchable rather than an independent telemetry connection. Thus, for example, on the GR-12 receiver included with the mx-12 HoTT set, order no. 33112, , servo connector 5 has an extra "T" mark and can be alternatively connected …Servo Sensor OR… not only via an order no. 7168.6Aadaper cable to upgrade the receiver but also connected to a telemetry sensor. However, in order for the receiver to correctly recognize the given connected device correctly, servo connection 5 (in this case) MUST be appropriately set
236 Detail program description - Telemetryfor either "SERVO" or "SENSOR".This switchover is accomplished by moving the  with the selection key of the left or right touch pad until the " " symbol is at the left margin of the bottom line then tapping on the center SET key of the right touch pad. TELEMETRYSETTING & DATAVIEWSENSOR SELECTRF STATUS VIEWVOICE TRIGGERTELEMETRI RCV BIND. 1RX CURVE TYPE : ACURVE1 CH : 02 TYPE : ACURVE2 CH : 03 TYPE : BCURVE3 CH : 045CH FUNCTION:SERVONow use one of the  selection keys on the right touch pad to select the alternative setting "SENSOR".TELEMETRYSETTING & DATAVIEWSENSOR SELECTRF STATUS VIEWVOICE TRIGGERTELEMETRI RCV BIND. 1RX CURVE TYPE : ACURVE1 CH : 02 TYPE : ACURVE2 CH : 03 TYPE : BCURVE3 CH : 045CH FUNCTION:SENSORAnother tap on the center SET key of the right touch pad will close the selection and, with appropriate repetitive taps on the center ESC key of the left touch pad, a return to the transmitter's basic display is accomplished. RX SERVO TESTTELEMETRYSETTING & DATAVIEWSENSOR SELECTRF STATUS VIEWVOICE TRIGGERTELEMETRI RCV BIND. 1RX SERVO TESTALL–MIN : 1000μsecALL–MAX : 2000μsecALARM VOLT : 3.8VTEST : STOPALARM TEMP–:–10°CALARM TEMP+: 70°CCH OUT TYPE:ONCEValue Explanation Possible settingsALL-MAX Servo travel on the "+" side for all servo outputs for the servo test1500 … 2000 µsALL-MIN Servo travel on the "-" side for all servo outputs for the servo test1500 … 1000 µsTEST Test procedure START / STOPALARM VOLTAlarm threshold of the receiver undervoltage warning3.0 … 6.0 Vfactory setting: 3.8 V ALARM TEMP+Alarm threshold for excessively high temperature of the receiver50 … 80 °CFactory setting: 70 °CALARM TEMP–Alarm threshold for excessively low temperature of the receiver-20 … +10 °CFactory setting: -10 °CCH OUTPUT TYPEChannel sequence ONCE, SAME, SUMI, SUMOALL-MAX (servo travel on the "+" side)In this line you set the maximum servo travel on the plus side of the control travel for the servo test.2000 µs corresponds to the full throw; 1500 µs corresponds to the neutral position.Make sure that the servos do not overrun mechanically during the test routine.ALL-MIN (servo travel on the "-" side)You adjust the maximum servo travel on the minus side of the control path for the servo test in this line.1000 µs corresponds to the full throw; 1500 µs corresponds to the neutral position.TESTYou start and stop the servo test integrated in the receivers in this line.A brief tap on the center SET key of the right touch pad will open the entry fi eld:TELEMETRYSETTING & DATAVIEWSENSOR SELECTRF STATUS VIEWVOICE TRIGGERTELEMETRI RCV BIND. 1RX SERVO TESTALL–MIN : 1000μsecALL–MAX : 2000μsecALARM VOLT : 3.8VALARM TEMP–:–10°CALARM TEMP+: 70°CCH OUT TYPE:ONCETEST : STOPNow, with one of the selection keys of the right touch pad, select START:TELEMETRYSETTING & DATAVIEWSENSOR SELECTRF STATUS VIEWVOICE TRIGGERTELEMETRI RCV BIND. 1RX SERVO TESTALL–MIN : 1000μsecALL–MAX : 2000μsecALARM VOLT : 3.8VALARM TEMP–:–10°CALARM TEMP+: 70°CCH OUT TYPE:ONCETEST : STARTA brief tap on the center SET key of the right touch pad will now start the test run. The input fi eld is
237Detail program description - Telemetryshown as "normal" again:TELEMETRYSETTING & DATAVIEWSENSOR SELECTRF STATUS VIEWVOICE TRIGGERTELEMETRI RCV BIND. 1RX SERVO TESTALL–MIN : 1000μsecALL–MAX : 2000μsecALARM VOLT : 3.8VALARM TEMP–:–10°CALARM TEMP+: 70°CCH OUT TYPE:ONCETEST : STARTTo stop the servo test, reactivate the entry fi eld as described above, select STOP and confi rm this selection with the SET key of the right touch pad.ALARM VOLT (receiver undervoltage warning)The receiver voltage is monitored through ALARM VOLT. The interval can be adjusted between 3.0 and 6.0 Volt. If the set alarm threshold is undercut, an acoustic signal is issued (interval peep tone long/short) and "VOLT.E" blinks in the top right of all »RX …« displays:TELEMETRYSETTING & DATAVIEWSENSOR SELECTRF STATUS VIEWVOICE TRIGGERTELEMETRI RCV BIND. 1RX SERVOREVERSE : OFFCENTER : 1500μsecTRIM : –000μsecTRAVEL– : 150%OUTPUT CH: 01TRAVEL+ : 150%PERIOD : 20msecVOLT.EThe parameter "R-VOLT" is also represented inversely in the »RX DATAVIEW« display:TELEMETRYSETTING & DATAVIEWSENSOR SELECTRF STATUS VIEWVOICE TRIGGERTELEMETRI RCV BIND. 1VOLT.ES–STR100% R–TEM.+28°CL PACK TIME 00010msecL.R-VOLT:03.5VS–QUA100%S–dBM–030dBMSENSOR1 :00.0V 00°CSENSOR2 :00.0V 00°CR-VOLT :03.7VRX DATAVIEW VOLT.EALARM TEMP +/- (recommended temperature monitoring)These two options monitor the receiver temperature. A lower threshold "ALARM TEMP-" (-20 … +10 °C) and an upper threshold "ALARM TEMP+" (50 … 80 °C) can be programmed. When these specifi cations are exceeded or undercut, an acoustic signal (continuous peep tone) sounds and "TEMP.E" appears in the top right of all receiver displays. In addition, the parameter "R-TEM" is shown inversely on the "»RX DATAVIEW«" display page.Make sure that your receiver remains within the permissible temperature range during all fl ight conditions (ideally between -10 and 55 °C).CH OUTPUT TYPE (connection type)Here you select how the receiver outputs are controlled. • ONCETELEMETRYSETTING & DATAVIEWSENSOR SELECTRF STATUS VIEWVOICE TRIGGERTELEMETRI RCV BIND. 1VOLT.ERX SERVO TESTALL–MIN : 1000μsecALL–MAX : 2000μsecALARM VOLT : 3.8VALARM TEMP–:–10°CALARM TEMP+: 70°CTEST : STARTCH OUT TYPE:ONCEThe servo connections of the receiver are controlled successively. This is recommended for analog servos. This setting automatically operates servos in a 20 ms cycle – or in a 30 ms cycle for a 12 channel receiver (order no. 33512) – , regardless of what is set or displayed in the "PERIOD" line of the »RX SERVO« screen! • SAMETELEMETRYSETTING & DATAVIEWSENSOR SELECTRF STATUS VIEWVOICE TRIGGERTELEMETRI RCV BIND. 1VOLT.ERX SERVO TESTALL–MIN : 1000μsecALL–MAX : 2000μsecALARM VOLT : 3.8VALARM TEMP–:–10°CALARM TEMP+: 70°CTEST : STARTCH OUT TYPE:SAMEThe servo connections of the receiver are controlled in parallel in blocks of four. This means channels 1 through 4, 5 through 8 and 9 through 12 each receive the control signals simultaneously.This is recommended for digital servos when multiple servos are used for one function (e.g. aileron), so that the servos can run absolutely synchronized.When only using digital servos, we recommend setting the "PERIOD" line of the »RX SERVO« to 10 ms in order to be able to utilize the fast reaction of digital servos. With the use of analog servos or in mixer mode, "20 ms" must be selected!With this setting, pay particular attention to the suffi cient dimensioning of the receiver current supply. Since up to four servos can always operate simultaneously, the requirement is higher. • SUMO (sum signal OUT)A HoTT receiver confi gured as SUMO permanently generates a so-called sum signal from the control signals of all of its control channels and provides this by default to the accompanying GR-32 DUAL receiver on servo connection 8.On receivers whose display shows "SUMO" at the top right, an additional two-digit number appears …
238 Detail program description - TelemetryTELEMETRYSETTING & DATAVIEWSENSOR SELECTRF STATUS VIEWVOICE TRIGGERTELEMETRI RCV BIND. 1VOLT.ERX SERVO TESTALL–MIN : 1000μsecALL–MAX : 2000μsecALARM VOLT : 3.8VALARM TEMP–:–10°CALARM TEMP+: 70°CTEST : STARTCH OUT TYPE:SUMO 12… after confi rmation of "SUMO" with a brief tap on the center SET key of the right touch pad, the active fi eld changes to the right for channel selection. With this selection you specify the highest of the transmitter channels contained in the SUMO signal:TELEMETRYSETTING & DATAVIEWSENSOR SELECTRF STATUS VIEWVOICE TRIGGERTELEMETRI RCV BIND. 1VOLT.ERX SERVO TESTALL–MIN : 1000μsecALL–MAX : 2000μsecALARM VOLT : 3.8VALARM TEMP–:–10°CALARM TEMP+: 70°CTEST : STARTCH OUT TYPE:SUMO 12Either confi rm the default with another tap on the center SET key of the right touch pad or use the selection keys to pick another channel between 04 and 16 and confi rm that with SET. Receiver outputs will be controlled successively in a 20 ms cycle (30 ms with the GR-32 DUAL receiver, order no. 33516), even if 10 ms is set in the "PERIOD" line of the the »RX SERVO« screen.Primarily intended for the "Satellite mode" of two HoTT receivers, as described below, the sum signal generated by the SUMO-designated receiver can also be used, for example, to control of Flybar systems (provided they have an appropriate input) or to control fl ight simulators via an adapter cable, order no. 33310 In … Satellite mode … two HoTT receivers are connected to one another through a three-wire connecting cable (order no. 33700.1 (300 mm) or 33700.2 (100 mm)) at receiver-type-specifi c servo connections. Type GR-16 and GR-32 DUAL receivers, for example, are to be connected with one another at servo output 8. More detailed information can be found on the Internet at www.graupner.de.This connection transmits all channels of the HoTT receiver confi gured as SUMO as well as those of the receivers designated as satellites continuously to the second HoTT receiver, which is to be programmed as … • SUMI (sum signal IN)… the designation for the main receiver. Therefore, the signal always goes toward SUMI:TELEMETRYSETTING & DATAVIEWSENSOR SELECTRF STATUS VIEWVOICE TRIGGERTELEMETRI RCV BIND. 1VOLT.ERX SERVO TESTALL–MIN : 1000μsecALL–MAX : 2000μsecALARM VOLT : 3.8VALARM TEMP–:–10°CALARM TEMP+: 70°CTEST : STARTCH OUT TYPE:SUMIThe receiver defi ned as SUMI, however, only uses the sum signal coming from SUMO in the event of a failure of receipt if at least one channel in SUMI is programmed to fail-safe. If the receiver programmed as the SUMO satellite receiver has a reception outage, the servos connected to this receiver assume the fail-safe positions which were programmed into the satellite receiver, completely independent of the main receiver.On the other hand, if two receivers have a reception outage simultaneously, the fail-safe settings in the current receiver software at the time this manual went to print (in principle, the SUMO's fail-safe settings) become effective. In the individual case, however, interactions cannot be ruled out, which is why we urgently recommend performing an appropriate test BEFORE commissioning a model.This receiver combination is recommended if, for example, one of the two receivers is installed in the model at an unfavorable position for receiving or as a result of nozzles, carbon fi ber material or the like, there is the danger that the receipt signal is weakened due to the fl ight position, so that interruptions of the range must be taken into account.Therefore, make sure to connect the most important control functions to the main receiver programmed as SUMI, so that, in the event of a failure, the model remains controllable when the SUMO satellite receiver no longer receives a signal.Telemetry data, such as the voltage of the on-board electricity supply, on the other hand, is only sent to the transmitter by the satellite receiver confi gured as SUMO. Therefore, telemetry sensors are to be connected to the satellite receiver (SUMO).Each receiver should be connected with its own supply line from the common voltage supply. With receivers with a high current load, it may even be benefi cial to connect them with two supply lines to the same current supply. On the other hand, if each of the two receiversshould be supplied from its own voltage source, the center cable must be removed from one of the two plugs of the satellite cable; see fi gure.rot123If you would like to carry out additional
239Detail program description - Telemetryprogramming, such as fail-safe settings, disconnect the three-pole satellite connection between the two receivers and switch on only the relevant receiver. It may be necessary to also change the connection sequence. Setting/displaying sensorsIf, in addition to a "receiver", at least one sensor is selected in the »Telemetry« menu's »SENSOR SELECT« sub-menu (described below) then its settings can be read in and changed on the previously described receiver screens. However, to actually gain access to this data, the selected sensor/s must be connected to the receiver system and this receiver system must have an active telemetry connection. If, as described in the next section, there is at least one sensor activated which has the support of current fi rmware, then it is possible to directly switch between individual modules. However, if sensors with older fi rmware are in use, it may be necessary to select "etc." instead of the direct sensor selection. In either case, tap the  or  selection key of the left touch pad … RECEIVERVARIOetc.… then use the same keys to select up or down for the desired module, for example:VARIOGPSReceiverIf the selected module, in this case a Vario module, is active then on the last receiver screen ("RX SERVO TEST"), at the top right there will also be an additional " " symbol pointing to the right. This symbol is located just to the right of the left-pointing "" symbol and is the visible indicator that additional display screens can be accessed.TELEMETRYSETTING & DATAVIEWSENSOR SELECTRF STATUS VIEWVOICE TRIGGERTELEMETRI RCV BIND. 1VOLT.ERX SERVO TESTALL–MIN : 1000μsecALL–MAX : 2000μsecALARM VOLT : 3.8VALARM TEMP–:–10°CALARM TEMP+: 70°CTEST : STARTCH OUT TYPE:ONCENow use one of the  selection keys on the left or right touch pad to switch to the selected sensor's displays and check or change its settings as described in the manual delivered with the sensor.
240 Detail program description - Telemetry SENSOR SELECTSelecting sensorsAfter selection of the desired menu line with the  selection keys of the left or right touch pad …TELEMETRYSETTING & DATAVIEWSENSOR SELECTRF STATUS VIEWVOICE TRIGGERTELEMETRY RCV BIND. 1VOLT.E… and a subsequent tap on the center SET key of the right touch pad, the selected sub-menu will open.SENSOR SELECTRECEIVERGENERAL MODULEVARIO MODULEELECTRIC AIR.MODGPSThis menu option can be used to determine which of the graphic displays described on page 36, as well as those described previously for sub-menu »SETTINGS/DISPLAYS«, can be selected and which remain hidden. Activate ( ) or deactivate ( ) the display of respective sensors by selecting the desired lines with the  selection keys of the left or right touch pad then tapping on the center SET key of the right touch pad, e.g.:SENSOR SELECTRECEIVERGENERAL MODULEVARIO MODULEELECTRIC AIR.MODGPS
241Detail program description - TelemetryAfter selection of the desired menu line with the  selection keys of the left or right touch pad …TELEMETRYSETTING & DATAVIEWSENSOR SELECTRF STATUS VIEWVOICE TRIGGERTELEMETRY RCV BIND. 1VOLT.E… and a subsequent tap on the center SET key of the right touch pad will open the selected sub-menu. This provides a visualization of the quality of the connection of transmitter and receiver:E100%SL 22P 10RL 414.8RSS 95%4.8RM 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D ETop row: Reception power of the channels 1 … 75 of the 2.4 GHz band in dBm coming from the receiver to the transmitter.Bottom row: Reception power of the channels 1 … 75 of the 2.4 GHz band in dBm coming from the transmitter to the receiver.Comments:Since reception power is measured and presented • in dBm, reception power is increasingly worse the higher the bar is and vice versa; refer also to "Reception power (S-dBm)" on page 230 about RF STATUS VIEWthis. The points above the bars mark the poorest • reception since switching on the transmitter or the last reset of the display with a simultaneous tap on the or  keys of the right touch pad (CLEAR).Additional fi gures are shown to the left of the graphic representation of the reception power. These mean:Value ExplanationE Signal quality in % of the signal received from the receiverS Signal quality in % of the signal received by the receiverSL Reception power in dBmP Number of lost data packages of the receiverRL Reception power in dBM of the signal received by the receiverRS Current operating voltage of the receiver in voltsRM Lowest receiver operating voltage since last startup, in volts
242 Detail program description - TelemetryAfter selection of the desired menu line with the  selection keys of the left or right touch pad …TELEMETRYSETTING & DATAVIEWSENSOR SELECTRF STATUS VIEWVOICE TRIGGERTELEMETRY RCV BIND. 1VOLT.Eand a subsequent tap on the center SET key of the right touch pad will open the selected sub-menu. REPEATVOICE TRIGGERREPEATTRIGTRANSMIT––––––VARIO –––1sec In order to be able to start the voice output through the headphone connection, at the very least the "REPEAT" line must be assigned to a switch. The takes place as described in the section "Switch and control switch assignments" on page 56:VOICE TRIGGERREPEATTRIGTRANSMIT––––––VARIO –––1SECMove desired switchto ON position(ext. switch: ENTER)VOICE TRIGGERREPEATTRIGTRANSMIT–––VARIO –––1sec 3With this switch you can have the last respective voice trigger repeated for the duration of the time set to the left of the switch, as long as the assigned switch is closed: TRIGWith a switch assigned to this line, preferably one of the two pushbuttons, switch the selected voice messages in rotation on to the next voice message for the below-described "TRANSMITTER", "RECEIVER" and "SENSOR" options, as described below. VOICE TRIGGERREPEATTRIGTRANSMITVARIO –––1sec 31 VARIOIf the "VARIO MODULE" line is activated ( ) in the »SENSOR SELECT« sub-menu, as described on page 240, a switch assigned to one of these lines can be used to call up vario-specifi c voice messages for the headset connection which are completely independent of other voice messages, i.e. voice messages triggered by altitude changes, such as the message "slowly ascend/descend".VOICE TRIGGERREPEATTRIGTRANSMITVARIO1sec 318 TRANSMITTERAfter selection of the desired menu line with the  selection keys of the left or right touch pad …VOICE TRIGGERREPEATTRIGTRANSMITVARIO1sec 318and a subsequent tap on the center SET key of the right touch pad will open the selected sub-menu.VOLT:MODELTIME:BATTERYTIME:TIMER(GE.)CENTER:TIMER(GE.)TOP:TIME:PHASE TIMER:Here, after selection of the desired line with the  selection keys of the left or right touch pad and a subsequent tap on the center SET key of the right touch pad, the selected voice message can be activated ( ) or deactivated ( ). VOICE TRIGGER
243Detail program description - TelemetryVOLT:MODELTIME:BATTERYTIME:TIMER(GE.)CENTER:TIMER(GE.)TOP:TIME:PHASE TIMER: RECEIVERAfter selection of the desired menu line with the  selection keys of the left or right touch pad …VOICE TRIGGERTRIGTRANSMITVARIO18RECEIVER… and a subsequent tap on the center SET key of the right touch pad will open the selected sub-menu:TEMP:STRENGHT:VOLT:FLUGZEITUHR:LOWVOLT:UHRZEIT:Here, after selection of the desired line with the  selection keys of the left or right touch pad and a subsequent tap on the center SET key of the right touch pad, the selected voice message can be activated ( ) or deactivated ( ). SENSORThis line only appears if a sensor was fi rst activated in the »SENSOR SELECT« sub-menu. For example, if the »VARIO« sensor is selected then the selections for the "VARIO" line will be opened …VOICE TRIGGERTRANSMITVARIO 8RECEIVERVARIOwhen a subsequent tap on the center SET key of the right touch pad calls up the sub-menu.ALT:MAXALT:MINALT:FLUGZEITUHR:VOLT MINIMUM:UHRZEIT:As described in the column at the left, these menus also allow every offered voice message to be activated ( ) or deactivated ( ) by selecting the desired line followed by a tap on the center SET key of the right touch pad.Note:The selection made here is completely independent of the "VARIO" voice triggers.
244 Detail program description - Channel sequencer Channel sequencerProgramming the motion sequences of up to 3 servosUse the selection keys on the left or right touch pad to scroll to the »Channel sequence« menu option in the multi-function menu: Wing mixers Free mixersMIX active/phase MIX-only channelDual mixer Fail-safe adjustTeacher / pupil Tx. output swapProfi trim Trim memoryTelemetry Channel sequenceFree mixers MIX active/phaseMIX-only channel Dual mixerSwashplate mixer Fail-safe adjustTeacher / pupil Tx. output swapProfi trim Trim memoryTelemetry Channel sequenceTap briefl y on the center SET key of the right touch pad to open this menu option:CHANNEL SEQUENCERChannelChannelINACTINACTSETChannelchannelINACT141516The »Channel sequence« menu option can be used to execute up to 9 exactly coordinated steps for up to three servos over a period of up to 30 seconds. Such a sequence can be triggered by a single switch and begin at an initial servo position which is freely adjustable. For example, this makes the opening of undercarriage doors, complete with subsequent extension of the retractable gear, just as simple to program as opening a wheel well with renewed closing of one undercarriage door once the landing gear has been lowered or to program the raising of a cockpit canopy with subsequent head turns and waving performed by the pilot. However, the prerequisite for all these actions is the "parsing" of the desired motion sequence into practical, individual steps.Programming procedureOn this menu option's fi rst display page, see fi gure below left, either accept the three preset channels, 14 … 16, or select an available channel, 5 … 16, for each line to form any other desired combination, e.g.:CHANNEL SEQUENCERChannelChannelINACTINACTSETChannelchannelINACT101112With a simultaneous tap on the  or  selection keys of the right touch pad (CLEAR), the given channel is reset back to 5, 6 or 7.The next step makes the control channels needed for the channel sequence available. This is done in the "SET" column by changing settings from "INACT" to "ACT" and thus making the individual channels "available" to the program for sequencing. Conversely, this also means that channels defi ned as "active" in the »Channel sequence« menu are not available for other purposes.CHANNEL SEQUENCERChannelChannelACTACTSETChannelchannelACT101112With a simultaneous tap on the  or  selection keys of the right touch pad (CLEAR), the given channel is reset back to "INACT".Once control channels and their activity statuses have been set, switch to the right column then tap on the center SET key of the right touch pad to reach the second page, the »Channel sequence« menu's choreography page. Since the call-up of the second page in this example was issued from the "Servo 12" line, this servo remains the object of focus after the page change.Channel sequencerTIMESTEP1011120POS–––0%The previous display page permitted the selection of participating servos and their incorporation into the sequence. This display page will now be used to establish the sequence of steps for participating servos, beginning with initial positions yet to be defi ned. The step number, from "0" to a maximum of "9", will be shown in the column labeled "STEP" near the bottom left of the display.Step 0: Setting initial positionKeep the focus of attention on "Servo 12" or change to any other of the three servos by using the  keys of the left touch pad, e.g. upward to "Servo 10".
245Detail program description - Channel sequencerChannel sequencerTIMESTEP11120POS–––0%10Use one of the  selection keys of the right touch pad, as necessary, to shift the marker frame to the right from the column "TIME" to the value fi eld above the column labeled "POS" then, after a tap on the center SET key of the right touch pad, alter this value within a range of ±100 % until the servo is in the desired initial position. For example:Channell sequencerTIMESTEP11120POS–––10+90%Repeat this procedure as necessary for the other two servos.With a simultaneous tap on the  or  selection keys of the right touch pad (CLEAR), the given position value will be reset back to"0 %".Step 1: fi rst eventNow that initial positions have been established, the fi rst step can be set. This is a matter of defi ning what is to be done, or not done, fi rst, following a certain span of time.Do this by fi rst using the  selection keys of the left touch pad to select one of the servos. Now tap the  key of the left touch pad. The step number, which was previously indicated by a "0" is now replaced by a "1" and the value "0.0s" will appear in the fi eld above "TIME".Channel sequencer TIMESTEP11121POS–––10+90%0.0sUse the selection keys of the right touch pad as necessary to shift the marker frame to the "TIME" column.Now briefl y tap on the center SET key of the right touch pad to set the activation time into the value fi eld for the "TIME" column, e.g. 1.5 s. The current position in time is represented in the graphic by the dotted vertical line. It will move to the right according to the time setting and, at the same time, the course of servo positions will be presented as dotted lines between time-point "0" and time-point "1".Channel sequencerTIMESTEP11121POS–––10+90%1.5sNow set the desired servo positions for the end of the fi rst time span (with the same procedure as already described for "Step 0") or leave one or more of these servos in the same position they were in for the previous step.A simultaneous tap on the  or  keys of the right touch pad (CLEAR) will reset the inverse video value displayed if the TIME fi eld back to "blank" and erase the current sequence, in this example only Step "1".Channel sequencerTIMESTEP11120POS–––10+90%0.0sStep 2 …Repeat the previously described procedure for every other step to be defi ned until the servos have reached their terminal positions.Switch assignmentIn conclusion, assign the sequence of events created to a switch (as described on page 56 in the section "Assigning transmitter controls, switches and control switches") with which the servos can be switched between their initial and terminal positions.Channel sequencerTIMESTEP11128POS100%0.0s 2As soon as this switch is closed, the servos' sequence of movements can be followed in the graphic. The servo curves will be shown in inverse video according to the preset time windows. All movements will sequence in reverse when the switch is opened again.Important notices:The sequence shown is only for demonstration • purposes and is not at all representative of a real sequence of servo movements.
246 Detail program description - Channel sequencerThe settings made in the "POS" value fi eld • replace the otherwise "conventional" transmitter control signal. Therefore it is necessary, before programming such a sequence, to check in the »Servo display« menu to make sure none of the channels planned for the sequence are actuated by any other transmitter operating element. If this were to be the case, it could lead to unpredictable excursions in the motion sequence. The settings made in the »• Servo adjustment« and »Tx. output swap« menus are not affected by settings in this menu.When preparing and creating a sequence, • be absolutely sure the servos do not collide mechanically. If necessary, use the "Travel limit" option in the »Servo adjustment« menu. Multi-channelChannel multiplier for special functionsThe mc-16 HoTT transmitter has an integrated multi-function channel built into the transmitter's software. This facility permits up to two control channels to be used for up to four or eight special functions Every available switch (including the so-called expansion switches, see page 56) or transmitter control can be assigned on the transmitter side.On the receiver side, the following modules are available as accessories, whereby at one time a maximum of two modules can be operated via the »Multi-channel« menu.NAUTIC-Expert, switching module, order no. 4159The NAUTIC-Expert switching module expands a servo's functionality to 16 switched functions. By appropriately wiring the connecting cable, loads can either be operated from a common power supply or also separately by multiple power sources.NAUTIC-Multi-Prop mini-decoder order no. 4142.NThe 1/4 C-NAUTIC-Multi-Prop mini-decoder expands a proportional function to four proportional functions.Light module order no. 2381A module for switching the light signals of rail, road and airborne vehicles with true authenticity.Sound switch for vehicle models order no. 2382.Fstart, stop and supplementary sounds as well as typical vehicle signalsSound switch for ship models order no. 2382.Sstart, stop and supplementary sounds as well as typical ship signalsFurther information can be found in Internet at www.graupner.de. Use the search mask by entering the respective order no. Alternatively, contact or visit your local dealer.Use the selection keys on the left or right touch pad to scroll to the menu option »Multichannel« menu option in the multi-function menu:
247Detail program description - Multi-channelMIX active/phase MIX-only channelDual mixer Fail-safe adjustTeacher / pupil Tx. output swapProfi trim Trim memoryTelemetry Channel sequenceMultichannel Ring limiterMIX-only channel Dual mixerSwashplate mixer Fail-safe adjustTeacher / pupil Tx. output swapProfi trim Trim memoryTelemetry Channel sequenceMultichannel Ring limiter… then open this menu option with a brief tap on the center SET key of the right touch pad. Here, in the second column from the left, each of the two multi-channel functions can be activated ("ACT") or deactivated ("INACT") as desired and in the third column the given function can be assigned to one of the transmitter channels, C5 through C8, in a list.MULTICHANNELMULTIC1MULTIC2INACTINACTC5C6SET SEL MULTIC 4CHMULTIC 4CHSELNote:When a changeover is made to the »Servo display« or if »Servo adjustment« is used to select the "-travel+" or "-lim +" columns for these previously set channels, their respective cells will fl ash to indicate that these channels have been activated in the »Multichannel« menu. The preset values of 100 % or 150 % should not be changed.Prior to channel selection, please observe the following notices:Switch to the 1. "SETTINGS/DISPLAYS" line of the »Telemetry« menu and tap on the center SET key of the right touch pad:on the "RX SERVO" page, select the "20 msec" • setting in the last line "PERIOD", see page 231.On the "RX SERVO TEST" display page, • select the "SAME" option for the last line "CH OUT TYPE", see page 238.The control channel used may not be used as an 2. input nor as an output channel for any mixer! For example, if C5 is selected, be sure that the "Aile/fl aps" line of the »Model type« menu is preset to "1AIL" or that the "Swashplate type" line of the »Helicopter type« menu is preset to "1 servo".The channel settings intended for NAUTIC control 3. channel purposes in the »Control adjust« and »Servo adjustment« menus are to be left as they are or reset back to their original settings. Do not assign any transmitter control or switch to the respective input either. Also be sure that the servo's direction of rotation is not reversed. Leave the servo middle at 0%.MULTICHANNELMULTIC1MULTIC2ACTACTC5C6SET SEL MULTIC 4CHMULTIC 4CHSELIn the next column to the right, make a separate channel count specifi cation for each of the two multi-channels; "MULTIC 4C." for the NAUTIC-Multi-Prop mini decoder, order no. 4142.N or "MULTIC 8C." for the NAUTIC-Expert switching module, order no. 4159.MULTICHANNELMULTIC1MULTIC2ACTACTC5C6SET SEL MULTIC 4CHSELMULTIC 8CHAfterward, use the right arrow symbol at the bottom line's right end to switch over to the second page of settings for the »Multichannel« menu:MULTICH 2–––SEL OffsetInput 1Input 2Input 3Input 4Input 5Input 6Input 7Input 8frfrfrfrfrfrfrfr–––––––––––––––––––––+100%+100%+100%+100%+100%+100%+100%+100%0%0%0%0%+100%+100%+100%+100%+100%+100%+100%+100%0%0%0%0%– travel +This menu page is now used for making individual settings for "MULTICH 1" and "MULTICH 2".Column 2, "Control"–––SEL OffsetInput 1Input 2Input 3Input 4frfrfr–––––––––+100%+100%+100%+100%+100%+100%+100%+100%0%0%0%0%– travel+frMULTICH 2Use the arrow keys to move to the column over SEL.
248 Detail program description - Multi-channeland then connected as necessary.)If a Nautic-Expert switching module (order no. 4159) is present, the assigned proportional control will function like a switch when it is put near its limit position.Column 3, "Switch"–––SEL OffsetInput 1Input 2Input 3Input 4frfrfr–––––––––+100%+100%+100%+100%+100%+100%+100%+100%0%0%0%0%– travel +frMULTICH 2This column is used to assign each of the inputs used, 1 through 8 (maximum), to any switch available on the transmitter. These assignments are done as described in the section "Assigning transmitter controls, switches and control switches" on page 56:Any controls which were previously assigned in the second column will be erased. In this case, instead of SEL, the switch symbol will be displayed at the bottom of the 2nd column such that now a second "normal" switch, or even a transmitter control switch, logical switch, … can be assigned as needed from the group of "expanded switches". In general it is suffi cient to assign a simple switch or transmitter control.–––OffsetInput 1Input 2Input 3Input 4frfrfr–––––––––+100%+100%+100%+100%+100%+100%+100%+100%0%0%0%0%– travel +3MULTICH 2Column 3, "Offset"–––OffsetInput 1Input 2Input 3Input 4frfrfr–––––––––+100%+100%+100%+100%+100%+100%+100%+100%0%0%0%0%– travel +3MULTICH 2The control center for the given control, i.e. its zero point, can be changed in this column. The adjustment range lies between -100 % and +100 %.Simultaneously tapping on the  or  keys of the right touch pad (CLEAR) will reset the value displayed in inverse video back to its "0 %" value.Leave the offset setting at 0 % while making switch assignments.Column 3, "–travel+"–––offsetINPUT 1INPUT 2INPUT 3INPUT 4frfrfr–––––––––+100%+100%+100%+100%+100%+100%+100%+100%0%0%0%0%– travel +3MULTICH 2Finally, transmitter control travel is set for both sides in the rightmost column "-travel+". The range for this lies between -100 % and +100 %. To accomplish this, push or turn the respective transmitter control in the given direction. This will set the "travel" for each given direction individually.If the assignment is for a switch, leave the setting at the default value of 100 %.After completing the activation of transmitter control assignment by tapping the center SET key of the right touch pad , the message shown below will appear in the display:–––SEL OffsetInput 1Input 2Input 3Input 4frfrfr–––––––––+100%+100%+100%+100%+100%+100%+100%+100%0%0%0%0%– travel +frMULTICH 2Move desiredcontrol adj.Alternatively, the center SET key of the right touch pad can be tapped for a second time while this message is on display:–––SEL OffsetInput 1Input 2Input 3Input 4frfrfr–––––––––+100%+100%+100%+100%+100%+100%+100%+100%0%0%0%0%– travel +frMULTICH 2Now the desired transmitter control can be selected with the selection keys on the left or right touch pad. If the selected control has an assignment, it can be disconnected from a transmitter control switching its fi eld to "fr".:transmitter control 1 … 4 (CH 1 …4)• slider control 1 … 3 in the middle of the console • (SR1 … 3)depressible, roller-shaped proportional speed • control (DG1 … 5)side proportional control control (SD1 and SD2)• (Function inputs "UV1" through "UV8", which are also in the selection list, can be selected at a later time
249Detail program description - Multi-channelNote:Due to technical reasons, servos connected to a 1/4 C NAUTIC Multi-Prop mini decoder may operate somewhat hesitatingly. This is not a fault.Connection notes for the Nautic-Expert switching module, order no. 4159As many as 16 switched functions can be controlled per switching module. Eight loads, like lamps, LEDs, etc. – but not electric motors – , with a load current of up to 0.7 A each can be connected directly. Two switch functions per connector socket are possible via the three conductor cable, order no. 3941.6 , see bottom right fi gure.Electric motors and loads drawing substantial current should be connected by other means, e.g. via switching modules. Ask your dealer about this.M6 (output: 5 ... 8)5 (output 5 ... 8)(Receiver power supply to the „B + -“ marked terminals)Best.-Nr. 4159Max. 8 x 0,7 ABatt. 3...30VNAUTIC - ExpertSchaltbaustein2 - 16 KEmpfänger1- H -21- G -21- F -21- E -21- D -21- C -21- A -21- B -2Best.-Nr. 4142.N 1/4 K NAUTICMulti-Prop-Mini-DecoderRXS 4S 3S 2S 1external power-supply 3 ... 30 V- ++-Current consumption of directly connected consumer units (but no electric motors) max. 0,7 A (total max. 8 x 0,7 A).Wiring for direct connection of two consumer units at one output3-pole cable with flat connector Order No. 3941.6 redbrownorangeconsumerunit max. 0,7 Aconsumerunitmax. 0,7 Aadditional modules e.g....Switching module high voltage SXH Order No. 3970Switching module multi function SXM Order No. 3971 Switching module high voltage SXH Order No. 3970Switchingmodule SXHSwitchingmodule SXMSwitching modulemulti function SXM Order No. 3971 SoundswitchOrder No. 2382Light module Order No. 23817 (output: 5 ... 8)8 (output: 5 ... 8)additional servos, speed controller, sail winch, ... also on this sideThe figure shows an example of the connectivity of the ' 2-16 C NAUTIC Expert Switch building block "," 1/4 K NAUTIC Multi-Prop Mini-Decoder "," light module "and" sound switch ". Two of these modules in parallel can be operated using the menu »Multi channel« on output 5 ... 8.Before first time operation of the NAUTIC modules make the above described settings.Connection example with the Graupner HoTT GR-16 receiver
250 Detail program description - Ring limiterRing LimiterControl of Voith Schneider propellers in model shipsScroll with the selection keys on the left or right touch pad to the menu option »Ring limiter« in the multi-function menu: MIX active/phase MIX-only channelDual mixer Fail-safe adjustTeacher / pupil Tx. output swapProfi trim Trim memoryTelemetry Channel sequenceMultichannel Ring limiterMIX-only channel Dual mixerSwashplate mixer Fail-safe adjustTeacher / pupil Tx. output swapProfi trim Trim memoryTelemetry Channel sequenceMultichannel Ring limiterTap briefl y on the center SET key of the right touch pad to open this menu option:RING LIMIT44911SET4Input3333XY41012XOutputYOFFOFFOFFThis »Ring limiter« is primarily intended for the control of up to three so-called Voith Schneider propellers in ship models. These are positioned beneath the ship where they are exposed to a free fl ow of water in all directions. The control of these drives and turning their vertically oriented propeller blades is done with two servos per Voith Schneider propulsion unit whereby, for mechanical reasons, the propellers of this type offered by Graupner under order nos. 2358 and 2358.BL have a maximum control travel limitation of 4 mm each. As long as the joysticks for forward/reverse and left/right are operated individually (see section "Column Input") this is no problem because travel for the two servos can be appropriately adjusted, both mechanically as well as in the »Servo adjustment« menu. However, this becomes problematic when, for example, one joystick is 100 % forward and, at the same time, the other joystick is pushed completely to the right to arithmetically produce a 141 % sum for the two servo travel vectors. The mechanical controls of the Voith Schneider propellers will collide with their limits; in best case only drawing an unnecessary amount of electric current, in worst case causing damage or even bursting the linkage..In order to avoid this problem, the mc-16 HoTT transmitter has a maximum of three "ring limiters" available in the "SET" column of this option's fi rst display page (see fi gure at left) that can be switched "ON" or "OFF" individually. In the fi rst line on the setting page for a given "ring limiter", its maximum travel can then be set for a range of between 25 and 125 %. The second line provides a setting for the size of limitation of overall defl ection between: 0 % circular limit ()100 % no limit ()(limitation is strictly a matter of the given joystick's mechanical stop)Important notice:When this function is used, leave the respective setting values in the »Dual Rate / Expo« and »Servo adjustment» menus at 0 and 100 % or reset them back to their default values.The adjacent sketch illustrates the effect for a 0 % setting. The cross-hatched area of travel is curtailed and appears as a "dead zone".Column, "Input"With the standard preset control mode 1, all three ring limiters are pre-assigned to inputs 3 (forward/reverse) and 4 (left/right) which are actuated by the left joystick. However, this pre-assignment can be replaced anytime by any other transmitter control combination. Use the selection keys on the left or right touch pad to move the marker frame to the desired value fi eld then briefl y tap the center SET key of the right touch pad:RING LIMIT4911SET4Input3333XY41012XOutputYOFFOFFOFF4Select the desired control channel (1 … 12) for the value fi eld now displayed in inverse video by using the  or  selection keys. However, do not forget that if a control channel in the range of 5 … 12 is selected, it must also be assigned to a control in the »Control adjust« menu, see page 108. Briefl y tap the center ESC of the left touch pad or the center SET key of the right touch pad to conclude your entry.In principle, the other inputs are to be handled in the same manner.A tap on the  or  keys of the right touch pad at the same time (CLEAR) will reset the active value fi eld back to its given default value.
251Detail program description - Ring limiterColumn, "Output"The three ring limiters are pre-assigned to receiver outputs 3/4, 9/10 and 11/12 by default, whereby the outputs in column "X" are for the forward/reverse function and the outputs in column "Y" are for the left/right function. However, this preset combination of receiver outputs can be replaced as necessary by any other combination at any time. This is essentially done in the same manner as described previously under "Input", for example:RING LIMIT49SET4Input3333XY4106XOutputYOFFOFFOFF47Note:Watch out for undesirable overlaps if you use one of the outputs within a mixer.Column, "SET"The SET column is used to determine just which of the ring limiters is to be "OFF" and which are to be "ON", i.e. active. Use the selection keys on the left or right touch pad to move the marker frame to the desired value fi eld in the SET column then briefl y tap the center SET key of the right touch pad:RING LIMIT49SET4Input3333XY4106XOutputYOFFOFF47OFFIn the value fi eld now displayed in inverse video, make a choice between the two options, "ON" and "OFF", with the  or  selection keys then conclude the entry with a brief tap on the center ESC key of the left touch pad or on the center SET key of the right touch pad.A tap on the  or  keys of the right touch pad at the same time (CLEAR) will reset the active value fi eld back to its "OFF" default value.Column  RING LIMIT49SET4Input3333XY4106XOutputYONON47ONFollowing a selection of one of the three lines with the selection keys, switch to the settings page for the selected ring limiter (1 … 3) with a brief tap on the center SET key of the right touch pad.0%Ring Limit 1max-X0%100% 100%CH 4VSP OUT X VSP OUT Y0% 0%CH 3If, however, the small diamond at the center of the circle in the fi gure above (which represents the current joystick position) is not visible …0%Ring Limit 1max-X0%100% 100%CH 4VSP OUT X VSP OUT Y0% 0%CH 3… then the respective ring limiter is still switched "OFF". In this case, switch back to the previous page with a brief tap on the center ESC key of the left touch pad then switch the respective ring limiter "ON" as previously described.Programming procedureThe two upper value fi elds – labeled at the bottom left of the display as "max-X" or "max-Y", depending on the position of the marker frame – are used to specify separate settings for each of the two control functions, "left/right" and "forward/reverse" within a range of 25 … 0%Ring Limit 1max-X0%100%CH 4VSP OUT X VSP OUT Y0% 0%25%CH 3… and 125 %:0%Ring Limit 1max-X0%100%CH 4VSP OUT X VSP OUT Y0% 0%125%CH 3
252 Detail program description - Ring limiterIn practice, the setting is made by changing the given value until the respective servos in the model just reach the point where they no longer move.A tap on the  or  keys of the right touch pad at the same time (CLEAR) will reset the changed value in the active value fi eld back to its "100 %" default value.In the next line down – labeled at the bottom left of the display as "<=>-X" or "<=>-Y", depending on the position of the marker frame – the setting values, in a range from 0 % and a maximum of 125 %, affect the form of limitation between "circular" and "rectangular", whereby a setting value here may never be greater than the value of the fi eld above it.Ring Limit 10%100%CH 4VSP OUT X VSP OUT Y0% 0%100%–X0%CH 3Ring Limit 10%100%CH 4VSP OUT X VSP OUT Y0% 0%100%–X100%CH 3A tap on the  or  keys of the right touch pad at the same time (CLEAR) will reset the changed value in the active value fi eld back to its "0 %" default value.When fi nished with these settings, switch back to the fi rst display page for this option then repeat this procedure, as applicable, for the lines of ring limiter 2 or 3.Final note:This option can, of course, also be used as necessary and applicable for fi xed-wing models.
253For your notes
254 Detail program description - MP3 player MP3 playerReplay program for MP3 fi les, such as music fi lesScroll with the selection keys on the left or right touch pad to the menu option »Ring limiter« in the multi-function menu: Dual mixer Fail-safe adjustTeacher / pupil Tx. output swapProfi trim Trim memoryTelemetry Channel sequenceMultichannel Ring limiterMp3 player Basic settingsSwashplate mixer Fail-safe adjustTeacher / pupil Tx. output swapgProfi trim Trim memeoryTelemetry Channel sequenceMultichannel Ring limiterMp3 player Basic settingsTap briefl y on the center SET key of the right touch pad to open this menu option:MP3-PLAYERVOLUME ALBUM00/00TRACK00/00No files 0kbpsESCA15If the message "No fi les" appears near the middle of the display when this menu option is called then the transmitter has been unable to fi nd any suitable MP3 fi les on the SD card. If this should happen, use a PC or laptop to check the content of the "MP3" directory on the SD card and copy suitable MP3 fi les into this directory if it is empty.Therefore, insert a SD card containing MP3 fi les in a directory named "MP3" and, after switching the transmitter on, open the »MP3-Player« menu option.MP3-PLAYERVOLUME ALBUM00/00TRACK00/000kbpsESCA15Briefl y tap the  key of the left touch pad to start replay of the fi rst MP3 fi le of album 1. The replay will start immediately, however, the display of data about the number of albums and titles as well as playing time for the current MP3 fi le – depending on the size of the MP3 fi le – will only appear after some delay.MP3-PLAYERVOLUME ALBUM01/04TRACK01/020kbpsESCA15The automatic replay of album 1 will continue to run until it is stopped with a tap on the  key of the left touch pad …MP3-PLAYERVOLUME ALBUM01/04TRACK01/026:54/12:21 128kbpsESCA15sing, sing.mp3 … or the the transmitter is switched off.During ongoing replay, the menu can be exited at any time and the transmitter can be used without restriction. The ongoing MP3 replay is visualized in the transmitter's basic display by virtue of a "MP3" display label shown at the left of the SD card symbol and an animated triangle beneath that display label.#01 0:00hStop watchFlight timK780:00.04.1V0:00.000000:00hMVRX VOLT:4.8VMP3Note:If voice output is activated it will be blended in with the playing MP3 fi le.VolumeMP3-PLAYERVOLUME ALBUM01/04TRACK01/026:54/12:21 128kbpsESCASing, sing, sing.mp3 15After a tap on the center SET key of the right touch pad to activate the value fi eld, the volume of replay can be regulated within a range of "0" (= mute) to "30" (very loud).AlbumUse the selection keys of the right touch pad to move to the value fi eld above "ALBUM" and briefl y tap the center SET key of the right touch pad:
255Detail program description - MP3 playerMP3-PLAYERVOLUME ALBUM TRACK01/026:54/12:21 128kbpsESCA15sing, sing.mp3 02/04Use the  selection keys of the right touch pad to select the desired album number (from 1 to a maximum of 10) in this value fi eld. Briefl y tap the center SET key of the right touch pad to confi rm the selection.Note:The number of albums is a consequence of the number of fi les present in subdirectories of the "MP3" directory on the SD card, not the sum of album names which may be stored in identically named meta-data fi elds of the MP3 fi le.TitleUse the selection keys of the right touch pad to move to the value fi eld above "TRACK" and briefl y tap the center SET key of the right touch pad:MP3-PLAYERVOLUME ALBUM TRACK0:00/2:34 128kbpsESCA15Track01.mp3 02/04 01/02Now select the desire title by using the  selection keys on the right touch pad. Briefl y tap the center SET key of the right touch pad to start this selection.MP3-PLAYERVOLUME ALBUM TRACK0:00/3:45 128kbpsESCA15Track01.mp3 01/23 02/23Notes:The title displayed will be the fi lename of the MP3 • fi le, not any identically named title which may be stored in the MP3 fi le as a meta-data fi eld.The number of the title per album is a consequence • of the number of MP3 fi les per directory.MP3 player operator fi eldMP3-PLAYERVOLUME ALBUM TRACK0:00/3:45 128kbpsESCA15Track01.mp3 01/23 02/23• Analogous to corresponding keys on a MP3 and other players, jump one title forward or back for each tap on one of the  selection keys of the left touch pad.• / Analogous to corresponding keys on a MP3 and other players, start and stop the MP3 player with a tap on the  selection keys of the left touch pad.A• / 1 / 1Switch between these three options with the  selection keys of the left touch pad.A Replay of the selected album will repeat in an endless loop until it is either stopped or the transmitter is switched off.1 Replay of the current title will repeat in an endless loop until it is either stopped or the transmitter is switched off.1 Replay will stop automatically at the end of play for the current title.ESC A tap on the center ESC key of the left touch pad will exit the menu option without stopping any replay that may be running.
256 Detail program description - Basic settingsUse the selection keys on the left or right touch pad to scroll to the »Basic settings« menu option in the multi-function menu: Dual mixer Fail-safe adjustTeacher / pupil Tx. output swapProfi trim Trim memoryTelemetry Channel sequenceMultichannel Ring limiterMp3 player Basic settingsSwashplate mixer Fail-safe adjustTeacher / pupil Tx. output swapgProfi trim Trim memeoryTelemetry Channel sequenceMultichannel Ring limiterMp3 player Basic settingsTap briefl y on the center SET key of the right touch pad to open this menu option:Battery typeBattery warningTouch SenseTop LCD ContrastLi-IoDisplay lightRegion23.60V0EUROunlim.GENERAL BASIC SETTINGSOwners name H-J SandbrunnerPre-set stick mode 1Pre-set DSC Output PPM10Pre-set Pitch min rearStick warning: unlim.Pre-set modulationOwn phase nameOwn phase nameHoTT210Bottom LCD Contrast 0Own phase name 1Voice volumeVario volumeTouch-beeps vol.7fr –––SEL SEL7fr –––7fr –––Power-on/off beep yesBasic settings are made in this menu. Transmitter-specifi c settings, such as volume regulation for acoustic signals and voice messages output via the built-in speaker or headset connector, the owner's name, country setting and even specifi cations for new model memories. The settings made in this menu on the lines …"Pre-set stick mode",• "Pre-set modulation",• "Pre-set DSC Output" and• "Pre-set Pitch min"• … therefore have no infl uence whatsoever on already existing model memories; instead, they are only defaults which are automatically adopted into newly initialized model memories and can be changed there individually at any time in the »Basic settings, model« and »Helicopter type« menus. A change to the "Pre-set" settings in value fi elds of this menu therefore only affects those model memories created new at a later time.Note:The settings in this menu are only specifi ed once in the entire transmitter. Therefore, after opening this menu in another model memory, the last valid settings always appear.Select the desired line with the  selection keys of the left or right touch pad then tap the center SET key of the right touch pad. The value in the fi eld now displayed in inverse video can be changed. After a change has been made, the entry can be concluded with another tap on the center SET key of the right touch pad or the center ESC key of the left touch pad. Voice volume / Vario volume / Touch-beeps vol.H-J SandbrunnerGENERAL BASIC SETTINGSOwners nameVoice volumeVario volumeTouch-beeps vol.7 fr –––7fr –––7fr –––SEL SELThese three lines can be used to individually set the volume of the three groups of acoustic signals and voice messages. This involves selection from among a total of three variants, whereby each of the variants offer two or three options for individually regulating volume even after leaving this menu. Basic settingsBasic transmitter settings
257Detail program description - Basic settingsPre-setting a valueUse the selection keys on the left or right touch pad to move the marker frame to the desired value fi eld in the column above the left SEL at the display's lower edge then briefl y tap the center SET key of the right touch pad. The desired volume for the selected group can be specifi ed in increments between 0 and 10 in the value fi eld now displayed in inverse video by using the selection keys of the left or right touch pad. Another tap on the center SET key of the right touch pad or the ESC key of the left touch pad will conclude the process.Following a simultaneous tap on the  or  keys of the right touch pad (CLEAR), the display will return to its "7" default value.via rotary controlUse the selection keys on the left or right touch pad to move the marker frame to the desired value fi eld in the column above the right SEL label at the display's lower edge then briefl y tap the center SET key of the right touch pad. The message shown below will then appear in the display:H-J SandbrunnerGENERAL BASIC SETTINGSOwners nameVoive volumeVario voluTouch-beeps vol.7 fr –––7fr –––7fr –––SEL SELMove desiredcontrol adj.Now turn the desired rotary control, for example, the right retractable knob DG2. Afterward, this knob can be used anytime to incrementally regulate volume for the selected group between 0 and 10.Following a simultaneous tap on the  or  keys of the right touch pad (CLEAR), the display will return to its "fr" default value.via three position switchUse the selection keys on the left or right touch pad to move the marker frame to the column above the switch symbol at the display's lower edge then briefl y tap the center SET key of the right touch pad. The message shown below will then appear in the display:H-J SandbrunnerGENERAL BASIC SETTINGSOwners nameVoice volume SpracheVario volumetöneTouch-beeps7 fr –––7fr –––7fr –––SEL SELMove desired switchto ON position(ext. switch: ENTER)Now, assign a switch as described on page 56 in the section "Assigning transmitter controls, switches and control switches". Ideally a self-neutralizing three position switch, e.g. like that offered by Graupner under order no. 33001.5. Afterward, this switch can be used anytime to incrementally regulate volume for the selected group between 0 and 10.Following a simultaneous tap on the  or  keys of the right touch pad (CLEAR), the display will return to its "---" default value. OwnerH-J SandbrunnerGENERAL BASIC SETTINGSOwners nameVoice volumeVario volumeTouch-beeps vol.7 fr –––7fr –––7fr –––SEL SELUp to 15 characters can be used to specify the owner's name. Change to the next screen page () with a brief tap on the center SET key of the right touch pad: !"#$%&’()Owners name@ACDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ[¥]^_?+,–./0123456789:;¢ÇüéâäàåçêëèïîìÄÅÉæÆôöòûùÖÜ`abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz{|}~H-J SandbSelect the desired characters with the selection keys of the left touch pad. With a brief tap on the  selection key of the right touch pad or its center SET key, move to the next position in which a character can be selected. A simultaneous tap on the  or  keys of the right touch pad (CLEAR) will place a space character at the current position.Positioning to any character position within the entry fi eld can be done with the  keys of the right touch pad.A brief tap on the center ESC key of the left touch pad will cause a return to the previous menu page. Pre-set stick modeAs a basic principle, there are four different ways to assign the four control functions, aileron, elevator, rudder and throttle or brake fl aps for winged models as well as rolling, pitching, tail rotor and throttle/pitch for helicopter models to the two joysticks. Just which of these options is chosen depends on the individual preferences of the individual model pilot.Use the  selection keys of the left or right touch pad to select the "Stick mode" line. The option fi eld will be framed.
258 Detail program description - Basic settingsH-J SandbrunnerGENERAL BASIC SETTINGSOwners nameVoice volumeVario volume 7fr –––7fr –––Pre-set stick mode 1H-J SandbrunnerSELTap on the SET key briefl y. The currently displayed stick mode will be displayed in inverse video. Now use the selection keys of the right touch pad to select the variant, from 1 to 4, you most frequently use. In the future this will be used for newly initialized model memories, but can be changed on an individual basis for up to 80 model memories.Following a simultaneous tap on the  or  keys of the right touch pad (CLEAR), the display will return to stick mode "1".With another tap on the SET key, the selection fi eld will be deactivated again to permit a change to another line. Winged model stick mode“MODE 2” (Throttle at left stick)“MODE 3” (Throttle at right stick) “MODE 4” (Throttle at left stick)“MODE 1” (Throttle at right stick)elev. downelev. upleft rudderright rudderfull throttleidleleft aileronright aileronfull throttleleft rudderright rudderidleelev. downelev. upleft aileronright aileronelev. downelev. upleft aileronright aileronMotor Vollgasidleleft rudderright rudderfull throttleidleleft aileronright aileronelev. downelev. upleft rudderright rudderHelicopter model stick mode“MODE 2” (Throttle at left stick)“MODE 3” (Throttle at right stick) “MODE 4” (Throttle at left stick)“MODE 1” (Throttle at right stick)pitch axistail rotorpitch axistail rotorthrottlerollrollthrottletail rotortail rotorthrottle throttlepitch axispitch axisrollrollpitch axispitch axisrollrollMotor/Pitchthrottletail rotortail rotorthrottlethrottlerollrollpitch axispitch axistail rotortail rotor Pre-set modulationStandard equipment for the mc-16 transmitter includes a HoTT transmitter module and, under the right front cover – as viewed from the front – a connector socket for an external RF module, see page 25. Additionally, a transmitter-internal iFS RF module can be installed and connected. On a model-specifi c basis, the transmitter can be set to use the modulation of any one of these three RF modules by appropriately selecting "HoTT", "EXT. PPM" or "INT. PPM" in the "Pre-set modulation" line of the »Basic settings, model« menu. The most frequently used variant should logically be selected for the "Pre-set modulation" line in the "General Basic Settings" menu. In the future this will be used for newly initialized model memories, but can be changed on an individual basis for up to 80 model memories.Briefl y tap the center SET key of the right touch pad:H-J SandbrunnerGENERAL BASIC SETTINGSOwners nameTouch-beeps vol. 7fr –––Pre-set stick mode 1H-J SandbrunnerPre-set modulation HoTTSELNow use the selection keys of the right touch pad to select the variant from among "HoTT", "EXT. PPM" and "INT. PPM".A simultaneous tap on the  or  keys of the right touch pad (CLEAR) will return the display back to modulation "HoTT".With a brief tap on the SET or ESC key, the selected fi eld is deactivated to permit a switch to another line. Pre-set DSC OutputIn the line with the same name in the »Basic settings, model« menu, a separate specifi cation can be made from among the available modulation types which is specifi c to each model memory and will then provided at the DSC socket. This choice primarily infl uences the maximum number of control channels which can be attached to the DSC (direct servo control) socket, and thus also available to a fl ight simulator or teacher/pupil system. By selecting "PPM10" this will be control channels 1 … 5, for "PPM16" channels 1 … 8, for "PPM18" channels 1 … 9 and for "PPM24" channels 1 … 12.SET SET SEL SETRcv Ch Map R16 R08 n/an/aRF transmit onRF range test 99sDSC Output PPM10BASIC SETTING,MODEL
259Detail program description - Basic settingsIn a manner similar to "Pre-set stick mode, in this »General basic settings« menu the selection made for the "Pre-set DSC Output" line will determine which of the four possible modulation types will be adopted as the default variant for a newly initialized model memory.If necessary, use the  selection keys of the left or right touch pad to switch to the "DSC Output" line then, with a brief tap on the center SET key of the right touch pad, activate the value window:H-J SandbrunnerGENERAL BASIC SETTINGSOwners namePre-set stick mode 1H-J SandbrunnerPre-set modulation HoTTSELPre-set DSC Output PPM10Now a choice can be made from among the four possible modulation types: "PPM10", "PPM16", "PPM18" and "PPM24", with the selection keys of the right touch pad. Another tap on the center SET key of the right touch pad will conclude the entry.A simultaneous tap on the  or  keys of the right touch pad (CLEAR) will reset this option back to "PPM10". Pre-set Pitch min (only relevant to helicopter models)In a manner similar to the previously described options "Stick mode" and "DSC Output", enter the preferred actuation direction for the throttle/pitch joystick on this line so the choice will already be present by default for model memories newly initialized in the future. The functionality of all other helicopter program options (to the extent they affect throttle and/or pitch) are dependent on this setting; in other words the throttle curve, idle trim, Channel 1  tail rotor mixer, etc.This means:"fwd.": minimum front pitch setting, the pitch joystick (C1) points away from the pilot."back": minimum rear pitch setting, the pitch joystick (C1) points towards the pilot.A simultaneous tap on the  or  keys of the right touch pad (CLEAR) will set this option to "rear".Note:The C1 joystick's control direction for "Throttle min front/rear" in the fi xed-wing program can be changed individually in the »Model type« menu. Contrast, upper display / lower displayIn assure optimal legibility of mc-16 HoTT displays under all weather and temperature conditions, their contrast settings can be adjusted separately. Contrast for the forward display, located between the switch panels, is adjusted by selecting the "Top LCD contrast" line with the selection keys of the left or right touch pad then briefl y tapping on the center SET key of the right touch pad.Pre-set DSC Output PPM10SELTop LCD contrast 0Bottom LCD contrast 0GENERAL BASIC SETTINGSPre-set Pitch min. rearNow display contrast can be adjusted in the value fi eld displayed in inverse video within a range of ±20 by using the selection keys of the right touch pad.RX–S QUA: 100%RX–S STR: 100%TX–dBm: 33dBmRX–dBm: 33dBmRX–VOLT:4.8 TMPL–PACK: 10msCH OUTPUT TYPE:ONCER-LOW V:4.6 +22°CRX–S QUA: 100%RX–S STR: 100%TX–dBm: 33dBmRX–dBm: 33dBmRX–VOLT:4.8 TMPL–PACK: 10msCH OUTPUT TYPE:ONCER-LOW V:4.6 +22°CContrast for the rear display, located between the touch pads, is adjusted by selecting the "Bottom LCD contrast" line with the selection keys of the left or right touch pad then briefl y tapping on the center SET key of the right touch pad.Pre-set DSC Output PPM10SELTop LCD contrast 0Bottom LCD contrast 0GENERAL BASIC SETTINGSPre-set Pitch min. rearNow display contrast can be adjusted in the value fi eld displayed in inverse video within a range of ±20 by using the selection keys of the right touch pad.#01 0:00hStop watchFlight timK780:00.04.1V0:00.000000:00hMVH-J SandbrunnerGraubeleRX VOLT:4.9V
260 Detail program description - Basic settings#01 0:00hStop watchFlight timK780:00.04.1V0:00.000000:00hMVH-J SandbrunnerGraubeleRX VOLT:4.9VSimultaneously tapping the  or  selection keys of the right touch pad (CLEAR) will reset the inverse video fi eld back to "0". Display lightThis line determines how long the transmitter display's backlight illumination is to remain on after switching the transmitter on or after the last activation of a transmitter operating element.Available options are "unlim(ited)", "30 s", "60 s", "120 s" and "off".A simultaneous tap on the  or  selection keys of the right touch pad (CLEAR) will reset the inverse video fi eld to "unlimited". Power on/off beepA power on/off beep for the transmitter can be switched on ("yes") and off ("no") in this line.A simultaneous tap on the  or  selection keys of the right touch pad (CLEAR) will switch this option shown in inverse video back to "yes". Battery typeSELBottom LCD contrast 0Battery type Li-IoDisplay light unlim.Power-on/off beep yesGENERAL BASIC SETTINGSThis line specifi es whether transmitter power is provided by a four-cell NiMH battery or a single-cell LiPo battery. As a consequence of this setting, the next line will offer a suitable voltage range for the "Battery warning" threshold.A simultaneous tap on the  or  selection keys of the right touch pad (CLEAR) will switch this option shown in inverse video back to "Lith.". Battery warning thresholdSELBattery type Li-IoDisplay light unlim.Power-on/off beep yesGENERAL BASIC SETTINGSBattery warning 3.60VYou can arbitrarily specify the warning threshold for the display …Batt. mustbe re-charged!!… – contingent on the battery type selection in the line above – in increments of 0.01 volt between 4.50 and 5.50 V (NimH battery) or 3.40 and 4.20 V (LiIo/LiPo battery). Make sure that you do not enter a value which is too low, so that you still have suffi cient time to safely land your model in the event of a battery warning.A simultaneous tap on the  or  selection keys of the right touch pad (CLEAR) will switch the fi eld shown in inverse video back to its factory setting, 4.70 V (NiMh) or 3.60 V (Lith.). Power-on warningSELBattery type Li-IoPower-on/off beep yesGENERAL BASIC SETTINGSBattery warning 3.60VStick warning unlim In this line you can determine how long the transmitter should wait after the last actuation of an operating element until the activation of an optical and acoustic power-on warning before the transmitter switches off automatically one minute later.The values "unlim(ited)", "30 s" and 1, 5, 10, 20, 30 and 60 minutes are optional selections.A simultaneous tap on the  or  selection keys of the right touch pad (CLEAR) will reset the inverse video fi eld to "unlimited".Note:To restart the transmitter after an automatic shut-off, fi rst push the transmitter's power switch to the right into its "OFF" position then, after about fi ve seconds, again into its "ON" position (toward the antenna). Touch SenseSELBattery type Li-IoGENERAL BASIC SETTINGSBattery warning 3.60VStick warning unlimTouch Sense 2In this line you can select the touch sensitivity of the touch pads in a range from 1 to 10. The lower this number is, the more sensitive the touch pad will be to taps and vice versa.
261Detail program description - Basic settingsA simultaneous tap on the  or  selection keys of the right touch pad (CLEAR) will reset the fi eld shown in inverse video back to "2". RegionSELGENERAL BASIC SETTINGSBattery warning 3.60VStick warning unlimTouch sense 2Region EUROThe region is needed for compliance with various regulations (FCC, ETSI, IC etc.). In France, for example, the operation of a remote control is only permitted within a limited frequency band. Therefore, region MUST be changed to "France" for the transmitter whenever it is operated in France. In no case may the Universal/EURO mode be used in France!A simultaneous tap on the  or  selection keys of the right touch pad (CLEAR) will reset the fi eld shown in inverse video back to "Euro". Own phase name 1 … 10GENERAL BASIC SETTINGSStick warning unlimTouch sense 2Region EUROOwn phase name 1Up to ten phase names can be freely specifi ed for one's own use. Each of these can be up to 7 characters long. The characters of the name are assembled by selecting them from a list. In addition to the standard names, these additional names will then also be available in all model memory locations.If possible, new phase name entries should begin with the "Own phase name 1" line.Change to the character table with a brief tap on the center SET key of the right touch pad: !"#$%&’()Own phase name@ACDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ[¥]^_?+,–./0123456789:;¢ÇüéâäàåçêëèïîìÄÅÉæÆôöòûùÖÜ`abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz{|}~ANow the desired characters can be selected with the selection keys of the left touch pad. With a brief tap on the  selection key of the right touch pad or its center SET key, move to the next position in which a character can be selected. A simultaneous tap on the  or  keys of the right touch pad (CLEAR) will place a space character at the current position.Positioning to any character position within the entry fi eld can be done with the  keys of the right touch pad.A return to the previous menu page is accomplished with a brief tap on the center ESC key of the left touch pad.
262 Detail program description - Servo display Servo displayDisplay of the servo positionUse the selection keys on the left or right touch pad to scroll to the menu option »Servo display« menu option in the multi-function menu: Teacher / pupil Tx. output swapProfi trim Trim memoryTelemetry Channel sequenceMultichannel Ring limiterMp3 player Basic settingsServo display Servo testBriefl y tap the center SET key of the right touch pad to open this menu option.135791113150000–100000–100000+100000246810121416However, the visual display of current servo positions can not only be opened by selecting this menu, but also – directly from the transmitter's base screen as well as nearly all other menu positions – with a simultaneous tap on the  keys of the left touch pad. A brief tap on the center ESC key of the left touch pad will cause a return to the respective point from which it was called. The current position of each servo is displayed in a bar diagram between -150 % and +150 % of normal travel with consideration for the control and servo settings, the dual-rate/expo functions, the interplay of all active linear and curve mixers, etc. 0 % corresponds precisely to the servo center position. This way, you can quickly check your settings without having to switch on the receiver. However, this does not absolve you from fi rst carefully testing all program steps, as well as on the model, prior to the fi rst operation of the model in order to eliminate errors!For winged models the display takes place according to the following scheme:Bar 1 = Throttle/brake servoBar 2 = Aileron or left aileronBar 3 = ElevatorBar 4 = RudderBar 5 = Right aileronBar 6 = Camber-changing fl ap (left) / free channelBar 7 = Right camber-changing fl ap / free channelBar 8 = Free channel / second elevator servoBar 9 = Free channel / Left FL2Bar 10 = Free channel / Right FL2Bar 11 = Free channel / Left AI2Bar 12 = Free channel / Right AI2Bar 13 = Free channelBar 14 = Free channelBar 15 = Free channelBar 16 = Free channel… and for helicopter models:Bar 1 = Pitch or roll (2) or pitch (2) servoBar 2 = Roll (1) servoBar 3 = Pitch (1) servoBar 4 = Tail servo (gyro)Bar 5 = Pitch (2) servo / free channelBar 6 = Throttle servo or speed controllerBar 7 = Gyro sensitivity / free channelBar 8 = Speed controller / free channelBar 9 = Free channelBar 10 = Free channelBar 11 = Free channelBar 12 = Free channelBar 13 = Free channelBar 14 = Free channelBar 15 = Free channelBar 16 = Free channelNotes:However, please note that the servo display is • only based on the original sequence of servos. This means that any swapping of outputs which may have been implemented, in either the »Transmitter output« menu or »Receiver output« menu, is not taken into account.Please also note that, by default, bar diagram • tracking is opposite to the left/right movements of a joystick.The number of channels shown in this menu • correspond to the 16 control channels available in the mc-16 HoTT transmitter. However, the number of actually usable channels depends on the receiver type as well as the number of servos connected to it and, therefore, may be considerably lower under certain circumstances.Use this display during the model programming, • because you can immediately check all settings on the transmitter. However, this does not absolve you from fi rst carefully testing all program steps, as well as on the model, prior to the fi rst operation of the model in order to eliminate errors!
263Detail program description - Servo test Servo testFunction test of Servo 1 … 16Use the selection keys on the left or right touch pad to scroll to the menu option »Servo test« menu option in the multi-function menu: Teacher / pupil Tx. output swapProfi trim Trim memoryTelemetry Channel sequenceMultichannel Ring limiterMp3 player Basic settingsServo display Servo testTap briefl y on the center SET key of the right touch pad to open this menu option:SERVOTESTactivoff1234567 8 9 10111213141516: 0.5sAny of the inputs 1 … 16 can be activated for the servo test by selecting with the selection keys of the left or right touch pad and then briefl y tapping the SET key of the right touch pad. As soon as you have set only one of the inputs 1 … 16 to "active", the following notice appears at the bottom of the display screen:SERVOTESTactivoff1234567 8 9 10111213141516: 0.5sCLR = act./deact.A simultaneous tap on the  or  selection keys of the right touch pad (CLEAR) would now start and stop, for example, a servo test of input "1" with a cycle time of 0.5 s.To change cycle time, select the loop symbol at the bottom right of the display with the selection keys of the left or right touch pad.SERVOTESTactivoff1234567 8 9 10111213141516: 0.5sCLR = act./deact.Once this value fi eld has been activated with a brief tap on the center SET key of the right touch pad …SERVOTESTactivoff1234567 8 9 10111213141516CLR = act./deact. : 0.5s… the motion cycle can be changed for the value fi eld shown in inverse video within a range of 0.5 s and 3.0 s in 0.5 s increments. Briefl y tap the center SET key of the right touch pad to close time selection.Important notice:The shut-off of the transmitter does not automatically end an active servo test. Therefore, always stop a servo test manually BEFORE SHUTTING OFF the transmitter, because the servo test is otherwise restarted after switching on the transmitter again.SERVOTESTactivoff1234567 8 9 10111213141516CLR = act./deact. : 2.5sThe "servo test" function, started with a simultaneous tap on the  or  selection keys of the right touch pad (CLEAR), automatically operates the servos as though the corresponding transmitter controls were being simultaneously and continuously moved back and forth between -100 % and +100 % during the preset time. All active mixing and coupling functions in the respective model memory, therefore, are effective and the servos move within the specifi ed servo paths and servo delimitations.As soon as the servo test has been started by a simultaneously tap on the  or  selection keys of the right touch pad (CLEAR) a window will open:SERVOTESTactivoff1234567 8 9 10111213141516CLR = act./deact. : 2.5sServo test act.Another tap simultaneously on the  or  selection keys of the right touch pad (CLEAR) will terminate the test.
264 Detail program description - Entry lockout Entry lockoutLocking the multifunction menuUse the selection keys of the left or right touch pad to scroll to menu option …Profi trim Trim memoryTelemetry Channel sequenceMultichannel Ring limiterMp3 player Basic settingsServo display Servo testCode lock Info display… in the multi-function menu. Tap briefl y on the center SET key of the right touch pad to open this menu option:CODE LOCKDesired (new) access code: (_ )SET321 3 4Access to the multifunction menu can be locked against unauthorized use by a four-digit secret code comprised of the numbers 1 to 4. This code lock is entered by way of the selection keys of the left touch pad according to the scheme shown in the display, for example :CODE LOCKDesired (new) access code: (123_)CLR321 3 4As soon as another tap of a left touch pad selection key occurs after the fourth number has been entered, the message shown below will appear in the display:CODE LOCKBitte Geheimzasccess code: (1234)CLR321 3 4Memorise access code carefullyA brief tap on the center ESC key of the left touch pad will confi rm the entered secret code and exit the menu.On the contrary, a brief tap on the center SET key of the right touch pad will confi rm the currently active CLR fi eld at the bottom right of the display and thus erase the entered digits.Make note of the secret code and keep it safe. Otherwise, the transmitter must be sent in to Graupner service for decoding.The lock becomes active the next time the transmitter is switched on. However, the control remains ready for operation. However, a call-up of the multi-function menu, and thus also a model change, can no longer be accomplished without entering the correct number combination.CODE LOCKDesired (new) access code: (_ )SET321 3 4A renewed attempt following an incorrect entry is only possible after the lapse of a time-out.CODE LOCKBitte Geheimzacccess code: (4321)CLR321 3 4Input errorTime lockDeletion of the secret codeIf the secret code is to be erased later on, tap twice on the center SET key of the right touch pad right after calling up this menu option.CODE LOCKDesired (new) access code: (1234)CLR321 3 4The fi rst activation of the center SET key of the right touch pad will erase the secret code (CLR):CODE LOCKDesired (new) access code: (_ )SET321 3 4and the second activation will confi rm the empty entry fi eld (SET). The message shown will appear in the display:
265Detail program description - Entry lockoutCODE LOCKBitte Geheimzaccess code: (_ )SET321 3 4Memorise access noneNow exit the menu with a brief tap on the ESC key of the left touch pad. Leaving the menu without input of a secret codeTo leave the menu opened out of curiosity or by accident when no other key has been touched. Therefore, the display appears as follows:CODE LOCKDesired (new) access code: (_ )SET321 3 4Tap once on the center SET key of the right touch pad. The following display appears:CODE LOCKBitte Geheimzaccess code: (_ )SET321 3 4Memorise access noneNow exit the menu with a brief tap on the ESC key of the left touch pad.Tip:If you generally want to dispense with a programming lock, that option should be removed from the multifunction menu by way of »Suppress menus«. This will prevent unauthorized persons from entering a secret code "on the sly".
266 Detail program description - Info display Info displayTransmitter ID, date, time and memory cardUse the selection keys of the left or right touch pad to scroll to menu option … Profi trim Trim memoryTelemetry Channel sequenceMultichannel Ring limiterMp3 player Basic settingsServo display Servo testCode lock Info display… in the multi-function list. A brief tap on the center SET key of the right touch pad will open this menu:RFIDFirmware VersiondatetimeSD-CARDavailable1.2341933MB99%ABCDEF122011/11/11(Fr )11:22:33s1943MBTransmitter-specifi c information is shown in this menu and – insofar as necessary and benefi cial – can also be changed.Select the appropriate line with the  selection keys of the left or right touch pad then briefl y tap on the center SET key of the right touch pad. The given default value in the value fi eld displayed in inverse video can now be changed – insofar possible and necessary – with the selection keys of the right touch pad followed by another tap on the center SET key to conclude the entry. RFIDRFIDFirmware VersiondatetimeSD-CARD1.234ABCDEF122011/11/11(Fr )11:22:33s1943MBThe RF identifi cation number of the transmitter is shown in this line. It is transmitter-specifi c, is only issued once per transmitter and cannot be changed. During the connection process, this is sent to the receiver, among other things, so that it is always capable of identifying the radio signals of "its" transmitter. Firmware VersionRFIDFirmware VersiondatetimeSD-CARD1.234ABCDEF122011/11/11(Fr )11:22:33s1943MBThe current version number of the transmitter software is shown in this line. Through a comparison of the number shown here with the update version offered on the Internet download page of the corresponding product under www.graupner.de, you can determine whether a current update of the transmitter operating system is available.If applicable, the version number is also required for inquiries with the service department. DateRFIDFirmware VersiondatetimeSD-CARD1.234ABCDEF122011/11/11(Fr )11:22:33s1943MBIf necessary, select this line with the selection keys of the left or right touch pad and, as necessary, select the month or date fi eld. After activating the respective value fi eld with a tap on the center SET key of the right touch pad, the year, month or day can be set with the selection keys of the right touch pad. Another tap on the center SET key of the right touch pad will close the given entry. Years ranging from 2000 through 2135 are available for selection.The abbreviated day of the week to the right outside in brackets is automatically generated from the respective date.Notes:If the transmitter is connected to a PC as • described on page 43, the date and time can also be set through the PC program provided for the respective product via the Internet page at www.graupner.de.The date and time are protected against data • loss due to power failure by a buffer battery for situations like a battery change, see page 18.
267Detail program description - Info display TimeRFIDFirmware VersiondatetimeSD-CARD1.234ABCDEF122011/11/11(Fr )11:22:33s1943MBIf necessary, select this line with the selection keys of the left or right touch pad and, as applicable, the minute fi eld. After activation of the respective value fi eld by a tap on the center SET key of the right touch pad, the hour or minute can be adjusted with the selection keys of the right touch pad. Another tap on the center SET key of the right touch pad will close the given entry. In contrast, the seconds display cannot be set directly; it can only be restarted at "00" with a brief tap on the center SET key of the right touch pad.Note:If the transmitter is connected to a PC as • described on page 43, the date and time can also be set through the PC program provided for the respective product via the Internet page at www.graupner.de.The date and time are protected against data • loss due to power failure by a buffer battery for situations like a battery change, see page 18. SD cardRFIDFirmware VersiondatetimeSD-CARD1.234ABCDEF122011/11/11(Fr )11:22:33s1943MBIn this line the memory capacity of a memory card inserted in the transmitter, if applicable, is shown in MB.Depending on the memory capacity of the inserted micro SD or micro SDHC memory card, it may take several minutes until the correct value is shown after switching on the transmitter. availableFirmware VersiondatetimeSD-CARD1.2342011/11/11(Fr )11:22:33s1943MBavailable 1933MBDisplay of the available storage space in MB.As mentioned before, display of the available storage space – depending on the capacity of the inserted memory card – does not appear until some time has passed after switching on the transmitter.The display of the available storage space in relation to the total memory capacity is shown in the line below:datetimeSD-CARD2011/11/11(Fr )11:22:33s1943MBavailable 1933MB99%As mentioned before, display of the available storage space – depending on the capacity of the inserted memory card – does not appear until some time has passed after switching on the transmitter.
268 Programming examples - Winged modelsmc-16 HoTT programming Preparatory measures based on the example of a winged modelProgramming models in an mc-16 HoTT …… is easier than it may appear at fi rst!The primary prerequisite for "clean" programming, and this applies not only to the mc-16 HoTT but is also a principle for all programmable transmitters, is a mechanically correct installation of all remote control components in the model! Therefore, it should be ensured no later than on connection of the linkages that the servos are in their respective neutral position and their rudder lever is also in the desired position. Otherwise you should loosen the rudder and re-fasten it with an offset of a few lobes. If servos are positioned with the help of a servo tester, e.g. RC tester, order no. 2894.12, then the "correct" positions can be determined very easily. The possibility of changing the neutral position of a servo in practically every modern transmitter is only intended for fi ne-tuning. Greater deviations from "0" can result to further asymmetries in the course of the further signal processing in the transmitter. In the same manner: A car with a bent chassis does not get any straighter if only the steering wheel is trimmed to "straight"!An additional important point is the adjustment of the rudder paths: This should take place through a corresponding adjustment of the steering points, insofar as possible. Ultimately this is far more effi cient than extensive efforts with the path adjustments in the transmitter! In this case: Path adjustments serve fi rst and foremost for to compensate for the manufacturer-stipulated tolerances for the servos and their fi ne-tuning, and less for the compensation of carelessness.If two separate aileron servos are used for a winged model, the ailerons, controlled through the corresponding activated wing mixer – see the following pages – can be assigned with both the fl ap function and raised with the brake fl aps – however this would make more sense in a glider or electro glider than in a motor model.In this case the rudder arms – starting from the neutral position – should be tilted forward one lobe, pointing toward the nose, set to the respective servo. The mechanical differentiation achieved through this asymmetric assembly contributes to the fact that the brake effect of the elevated ailerons increases with their defl ection and, therefore, does not normally require a greater path upward than downward.Correspondingly, when planning to operated separately controlled fl ap servos, they should also be integrated into a crow system. Since the brake effect of this fl ap position referred to as a "crow position" is infl uenced less by the elevated ailerons than the downward defl ection of the fl aps, the rudder arms should be installed somewhat toward the rear in this case, tilted toward the trailing edge. As a result, there is a greater available path for the downward defl ection. With such a combination of lowered fl aps with raised ailerons, however, the latter should only be elevated moderately, because they have more of a stabilizing and controlling function than a braking function in this type of crow system.A "tip" for seeing the brake effect in this connection: lift the fl aps and look over and under the surface from the front. The greater the projected surface of the protruding rudder, the greater the brake effect.Outboard aileronsInboard camber-changing flaps(Similar asymmetric installation of rudder arms can be meaningful, e.g. for open-cowl fl aps or landing fl aps, even in a motorized model.)If a model is completed and mechanically attuned in this respect, you can basically begin with the programming of the transmitter. The following examples, an attempt is made to follow the practice of fi rst describing the general basic settings and then fi ne-tuning or specializing them in the subsequent steps. After the initial fl ight and over the course of the further fl ying in of a model, it may be necessary to occasionally adjust some of the settings. As a pilot's experience increases, however, so does the desire for enhancements and expansions of settings. For this reason, the sequence of options is not always adhered to or some options are even mentioned multiple times.Of course, just the opposite can also be the case, that not everyone of the described steps is relevant for a certain model, just as some users may miss the description of a certain step for their model …whatever the case may be, you should consider a logical assignment of the control mechanisms before you begin with the model programming.For models in which the emphasis is on the "motor", regardless of whether it is powered by an electric or combustion motor, there should be no problem in this respect, because the assignment of the two joystick units essentially lies in the four basic functions "Power regulation (= throttle)", "Side", "Altitude" and "Transverse"! However, in the menu …
269Programming examples - Winged models»Model type« (beginning on page 94)Tail typeMotor on C1NormalNoneAileron/camber flaps 1 AILM O D E L L T Y PEBrake Offset Input 1+100%SEL… you should determine whether you would like the minimum throttle position in the "front" or "rear", because "none (motor)" is entered by the program in the creation of a model memory as a basic principle.The difference between "none" and "idle front/rear" is not only the effect on C1 trimming, which covers the entire scope of joystick travel with "none" but with "idle front/rear" only has an effect in the idle direction. In the process, the "effective direction" of the C1 joystick is adapted accordingly, so that with a change from "front" to "rear" or vice versa, the rotational direction of the throttle servo or brake system do not have to be adapted as well. In addition, with an "idle front/rear" setting, a warning indication appears in the display for safety reasons and issues a warning beep, if the throttle joystick is too far in the full-throttle direction:#01 0:00hStoppuhrFlugzeitK780:00.04.1V0:00.000000:00hMVThrottletoohigh!H-J SandbrunnerGraubeleRX VOLT:4.9VIn any case, it will be necessary to give some thought to "special functions". With electro gliders, on the other hand, it is only occasionally different. In this regard, one must ask how the drive and brake system are actuated. Certain solutions have shown to be practical and others have shown to be less practical.For example, it is certainly less practical, if you have to release a joystick for the approach of a glider model in order to be able to appropriately control the spoilers or a crow position using one of the other controls. It may be more advantageous to either design the function of the C1 joystick to be switchable (see Example 4, beginning on page 279) or to leave the control of the brake system at the joystick and to control the motor through one of the other controls or even with a switch! Since this type of model does not normally have a motor, and just a "start assistance" function to either "lift" the model in the sky with full force or, in any case, to "tow" it with "half" force by a wind fi eld, When this is also mounted in a convenient to grip location, the motor can be switched on and off without letting loose of one of the joysticks – even during the landing approach.If you cannot decide to have your Graupner service location retrofi t a three-function control switch, order no. 33000.13, for this purpose then use preferably the single-pole, three-function switch, order no. 33001.25, and mount it to the side of the sender opposite from the hand in which you hold the model. In other words: If the model is started from the right hand, the motor switch should be mounted on the left side and vice versa.The idea is the same for the control of fl aps, regardless of whether only ailerons or fl aps covering the entire wingspan (combinations) are raised or lowered. A 3-position switch with a long grip generally suffi ces for control of camber fl aps, preferably mounted outboard on the throttle/brake joystick side There it is always accessible without having to let loose of the joystick.If everything is now in order, you can begin with the programming.
270 Programming examples - Winged models Initial steps for the programming of a new modelExample: Winged model with two ailerons and – initially – without motor propulsionIn the context of initial commissioning a new transmitter, in the selection menu …»General basic settings« (page 256)Battery typeBattery warningTouch SenseTop LCD contrastLi-IoDisplay lightRegion23.60V0EUROunlimGENERAL BASIC SETTINGSOwners name H-J SandbrunnerPre-set stick mode 1Pre-set DSC Output PPM10Pre-set Pitch min rearStick warning unlimPre-set modulationOwn phase nameOwn phase nameHoTT210Bottom LCD contrast 0Own phase name 1Voice volumeVario volumeTouch-beeps vol.7fr –––SEL SEL7fr –––7fr –––Power-on/off beep yes… some basic information should be entered. This serves various purposes:The fi rst three lines of this menu can be used to individually regulate, in increments between 0 and 10, the volume of voice and signal output emitted via the built-in loudspeakers or the transmitter's headset connector. The fourth line of this menu is used to record the transmitter owner's name and the lines "Pre-set stick mode", "Pre-set modulation", "Pre-set DSC Output" and "Pre-set Pitch min" are for the storage of pre-set values used as defaults for new models. These are then adopted on the activation of a new model memory in its basic settings, but can be changed there at any time.The "Top / Bottom LCD Contrast" lines can be used to adapt the contrast of respective displays to ambient light conditions as necessary by changing the standard pre-set "0" in a range of ±20 (as an alternative to the line with the same name in the »Secret mode« menu page 32). The setting in the "Display light" line determines how long display lighting remains illuminated after the transmitter is switched on or after the last key actuation.The selection of "yes/no" in the "Power-on/off beep" line determines whether the "recognition melody" is to sound when the transmitter is switched off or on again.The "Battery type" line indicates to the transmitter whether its power comes from a four-cell NiMH battery or a single-cell LiPo battery and the "Battery warning" line can be used to individually set the threshold for the battery warning. Make sure that you do not enter a value which is too low, so that you still have suffi cient time to safely land your model in the event of a battery warning.If necessary, the "Stick warning" line can be used to determine how long the transmitter should wait after the last activation of an operating element before issuing a visual and acoustic stick warning, followed about a minute later by the transmitter switching itself off. On the other hand, the setting made in the "Touch Sense" line is merely a personal comfort setting. The lower this number is, the more sensitive the touch pad will be to taps and vice versa.In contrast, the setting in the "Region" line is anything but a matter of taste and is determined by statutory regulations: Therefore, when in France, only commission the transmitter with the "France" setting.The ten "Own phase name" lines can be used to create one's own phase names, which are then valid throughout the transmitter, if none of the pre-set phase names appear appropriate. An entry itself is accomplished – as also for owner's name – by switching to a second display page and selecting the necessary characters from a character list.This menu can be exited after completing "general settings" with a return to the multi-function menu by way of the center ESC key of the left touch pad.To program a new model, now use the selection keys of the left or right touch pad to switch to the menu …"Model select" (page 69)…, and use the selection keys of the left or right touch pad to select a free model memory location.0304050106R16 free free free free00:12h free02Right after a tap on the center SET key of the right touch pad to confi rm this selection, the type of model to be programmed will be requested:
271Programming examples - Winged modelsSelect model type ( free model memory )Since the objective is to work with a winged model in this section, the symbol for a winged model is to be confi rmed with a tap on the center SET key of the right touch pad. The display switches back to the base screen.Notes:Of course, you can also use the predefi ned default • "winged model" supplied with the receiver as model memory 01 for the programming of your fi rst model.Once the "Select model type" option has been • opened, the process can no longer be canceled! Even if you switch off the transmitter, this selection must be made! After a selection has been made, the selected model memory can only be made "free" again by subsequent erasing.If battery voltage is too low, the model switchover • cannot be made due to reasons of safety. An appropriate message will appear in the screen:not possible nowvoltage too lowOnce this fi rst hurdle has been taken, the binding of the receiver built into the model to this model memory can be done in the menu …»Basic settings, model« (page 76 … 83). To this end, switch to the line "Module".Model nameStick mode 1n/aBASIC SETTINGS, MODELInfon/an/aModule n/aHoTT SEL BD1 BD2 BD3 BD4Note:After confi rmation of the model selection in the base screen, if you confi rm the message appearing in the screen for a few seconds …BIND. N/AOK… with a tap on the SET key of the right touch pad, this line is accessed automatically.In this line the binding process between model memory and receiver is initiated, as described in detail on page 77. Otherwise, you cannot address the receiver.Afterward, use the  selection key of the left or right four-way pad to move up to the fi rst line and begin with the actual model programming in the "Model name" line.Model nameStick mode 1n/aBASIC SETTINGS,MODELInfon/an/aModule bindHoTT The "Model name" can now be entered here and, on the next line, an informative note about the model can be entered if necessary in the same manner, by a brief tap on the center SET key of the right touch pad to switch to the character table. !"#$%&’()Model name Graub@ACDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ[¥]^_?+,–./0123456789:;¢ÇüéâäàåçêëèïîìÄÅÉæÆôöòûùÖÜ`abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz{|}~The pre-sets for "Stick mode", "Modulation" and "DSC Output" are adopted from data stored in the »General basic settings« menu and these should be reviewed and changed as necessary.In the menu …Model typeTail typeMotor on C1NormalNoneAileron/camber flaps 1 AILM O D E L L T Y PEBrake Offset Input 1+100%SEL… the principle arrangement of the servos in the model is selected and communicated to the transmitter. The following selections are available:"Motor at C1""none"• Trimming works independently of the joystick position and the "Brake settings" sub-menu of the »Wing mixers« menu, beginning page 160", is available without limitation.The "Throttle too high" warning message, see page 30 and/or 94, and the "Motor stop" option are deactivated.
272 Programming examples - Winged models"(Idle) front or rear“• C1 trimming is affected in the front or rear and the "Motor stop" option is activated. If the throttle joystick is too far in the full throttle direction when the transmitter is switched on, this will be indicated with the warning message "Throttle too high".In parallel with this, the "Brake settings" sub-menu of the »Wing mixers« menu, beginning page 160, will only then be available if the "Motor" column of the »Phase settings« menu, page 142, has the entry "none" for the currently active fl ight phase.In the next two lines, the principle arrangement of the servos in the model is selected and communicated to the transmitter:Tail typeMotor on C1NormalNoneAileron/camber flaps 1 AILM O D E L L T Y PEBrake Offset Input 1+100%SELTail type: "normal", "V-tail", "Delt/fl .wing" or "2 Sv EL 3+8"Aileron/camber fl aps: 1, 2 or 4 AI servos and 0, 1, 2 or 4 FL servosSince we want to actuate the brake system of the "Brake settings" sub-menu under the »Wing mixers« menu with the C1 joystick, we will leave the outer right setting in the "Brake Offset" line with "Input 1". With the "Offset value" to the left of this, you should only place the mixer neutral point at the point where the brake system is retracted or inactive. If, in the process, the offset is not place completely at the end of the control path, the rest of the path is "idle travel", which means the mixer is not infl uenced in this range of the joystick movement.By now at the latest, servos should be plugged into the receiver in the standard Graupner’ish sequence:Empfängerstromversorgungfrei oder QR2 links oder Sonderfunktionfrei oder QR2 rechts oder SonderfunktionSeitenruderQuerruder oder Querruder linksHöhenruder oder 1. Höhenruderfrei oder 2. Höhenruder od. SonderfunktionEmpfängerstromversorgungBremsklappen- oder Motorservooder Regler bei ElektroantriebQuerruder rechts oder Sonderfunkt.Wölbklappe oder Wölbklappe linksWölbklappe rechts od. frei oder Sonderf.frei oder WK2 links oder Sonderfunktionfrei oder WK2 rechts oder Sonderfunktion13 14 T 15 16 S77 8910 11 12Empfängerstromversorgungfrei oder Sonderfunktionfrei oder SonderfunktionTelemetrieanschlussEmpfängerstromversorgungfrei oder Sonderfunktionfrei oder SonderfunktionAnschluss für SUMO / SUMI-VerbindungEmpfängerstromversorgungEmpfängerstromversorgungComments:If a V-tail unit should move incorrectly either "high/• low" or "left/right", please observe the information in the table on page 62 in the right column. The same process applies for the ailerons and fl aps.The settings described in the following are based • on a model with "normal" tail unit and "none (motor)". The settings are adopted for models with a V-tail with practically no changes at all. However, the transfer of this information is not so simple for delta/fl ying-wing models. Therefore, a special programming example for this model type is provided on page 301.In the menu …»Servo adjustment« (page 102)0% 100%Servo 1Servo 2Servo 3Servo 4Servo 5Rev cent.100%150% 150%– travel + – limit +0% 100%100%150% 150%0% 100%100%150% 150%0% 100%100%150% 150%0% 100%100%150% 150%… servos can now be adapted for appropriate "direction of rotation", "neutral position", "travel" and "limitation" to the requirements of the model.In this sense, all settings which serve to compensate servos and make minor adaptations to the model are "necessary".Notes:The maximum possible throw of a Graupner servo • is 150 % per side, based on both mechanical and electrical reasons. For example, if the the sum of the values of the columns "Center" and "Servo travel" exceed this limit, the respective servo can no longer follow the control commands starting from this point. Therefore, please bear in mind that mixers and settings in the »Dual Rate / EXPO« menu also have an infl uence on servo travel. The settings options provided in this menu • for asymmetric servo travel do NOT serve for achieving differentiations for ailerons and/or fl aps. There are options better suited for this purpose in the »Wing mixers« menu.In the last column, "- limit +", the basic settings of 150 % can, and perhaps should be, signifi cantly reduced.
273Programming examples - Winged modelsThe values entered in this position act as a quasi "limiter", whereby the setting is actually for which point of travel the respective servo may not exceed, so that it does not start up mechanically and thus unnecessarily draw current. In this case it is the end of available mechanical play on the servo, rudder and/or steering which is decisive for the value to be set.An example of this would be the selection of a model with cruciform tail, with which the rudder moves in a wedge-shaped cutout of the elevator. In order to prevent the rudder on the elevator starting up and possibly blocking it, the travel is normally mechanically adjusted (at the linkage) so that the rudder does not start with the full throw of the joystick. As long as the rudder is only controlled with the corresponding joystick, there will not be any further problems with this. But at the moment, when in addition to the normal rudder signal a mixer also infl uences the rudder, such as an "aileron 2  4 rudder" mixer (aileron to rudder), it is possible that the two signals can sum to an excessive extent. A correctly set limit of travel intercedes precisely at this point and thus reliably prevents the mechanical starting of the rudder. The limit of travel should, however, not be too small, so that the rudder throw is permanently and excessively limited.Of course, the travel on both sides could, of course, also be reduced to the that a start-up would not even occur with an addition of the maximum values. With this method, however, the prevention of an actually occurring event would result in a permanent reduction of the normal rudder throw.The menu …»Stick mode« (page 104)globalChannel 1AileronElevatorRudderTrim0.0sTr. step – time +global 0.0sglobal 0.0sglobal 0.0s0.0s0.0s0.0s0.0s4444In addition to the generally interesting adjustment of the increments in the column "Tr. step" (number of trim increments for each "trim wheel click") for digital trimming – separate adjustments for each of the four trim wheels – in the case of the (later) programming of fl ight phases in the second column of this menu you can select whether the trimming of transverse, altitude and side should operate "globally" in equal measure over all fl ight phases or separately in each (fl ight) "phase".The "Time" column, on the other hand, is not of interest for this initial programming.The settings made up to this point are suffi cient to permit basic fl ight of winged and motorized models – though the latter does require a correctly set idle joystick direction in the "Motor on C1" line of the »Model type« menu. However, the "fi ne-tuning" is still missing. The fi ne-tuning certainly adds to the enjoyment of fl ying over the course of time. Therefore, if you can already fl y your model safely, you should delve into the menu…»Wing mixers« (page 160 … 175)… where various options are available, depending on the specifi cations made in the »Model type« menu, page 94.Since this section deals with a model having only 2 servos in the wings, the Multi-fl ap menu beginning on page 170 is not shown.Aileron differentialBrake settings0%Aileron 0%WING MIXERSElevator aileron 0%0%––––––rudder2345Therefore, we begin with the "Brake settings" sub-menu:offBRAKE SETTINGSIf this display appears, you model is equipped with a motor, contrary to the assumption of this section, and therefore you have selected "front/rear" instead of "none" in the line "Motor on C1" of the »Model type« menu, page 94. Therefore, change this setting temporarily or change the "yes" entry in the "Motor" column of the »Phase settings« menu, page 142, to "no" for the currently active fl ight phase – Phase 1 in this case.Phase 1Phase 2Phase 3Phase 4Phase 5Name Timer Sw.timeMotor0.1syes 0.1syes 0.1syes 0.1syes 0.1s––––no…
274 Programming examples - Winged modelsElevat. curveBRAKE SETTINGSNormalCrowAILE0%WK20%WK0%Diff. reductAfter this statement about mutual dependencies, back to the topic:If the ailerons are to be elevated for braking, an appropriate value is entered into the "Crow" line after activating the "AILE" column's value fi eld. In addition, a value should always be entered in the line below it, "Diff.Reduct" (differentiation reduction), which corresponds to the value you entered or would like to enter on the fi rst page of the »Wing mixers« menu in the line "Aile.diff." (see fi gure above)! With this entry, on actuation of the brake joystick, the set aileron differentiation is hidden again proportionally in order to increase the downward the throw of the raised ailerons and thus signifi cantly improve its effect in the braking phase.A setting of the " Elevat. curve" mixer is then only necessary if the fl ight speed of the model changes too dramatically on actuation of the brake system. In any case, you should try out the setting at a suffi cient and readjust, if necessary, whereby you should focus less on the fl ight position than on maintaining the "normal" fl ight speed of the model. Otherwise there is the risk that the model plunges when engaging the brake system, because it became too slow in the meantime:BrakeCurveoff PointOutputInput +100%–25%H+–100O U T P U T–25%ElevatorNormalAfter exiting the "Brake settings", the "Aileron differentiation can be set:This serves to eliminate the negative torque. The downward defl ected aileron normally generates a higher level of resistance during the fl ight than when defl ected upward the same distance, whereby the model is pulled to the "wrong" side. In order to prevent this, with the input of a differentiation of the travel of the respective servo defl ected downward is reduced accordingly. A value between 20 and 40 %, in this case, seldom arises, however, the "correct" setting must be sought.The option "AI 2  4 RU" (aileron  rudder) also serves a similar purpose, as well as for the comfortable control of a model. A value of about 50 % is a practical initial value. However, this function should be made switchable with the assignment of a switch if you ever have aerobatic fl ight ambitions. (The author, for example, switches off this mixer "automatically" when switching to the "Speed" fl ight phase, in which he assigns both options to the same switch accordingly.)The last option in the »Wing mixers« menu, the "El 3  6 Fl" mixer, is not yet of interest at the moment.If the model-specifi c settings were made thus far, the initial start can be considered. If course, at fi rst you should perform a "dry run", meaning you should carefully check all the settings once again on the ground. Incorrect programming can damage more than just the model! In case of doubt, ask the advice of an experienced model pilot.If you should fi nd during the testing that one or multiple settings must be made for the adjustment of the rudder effects to your control habits, the control throws are too long or short on the whole, you should adjust this in the … »Dual Rate / Expo« (page 120)… to your own requirements and habits."Dual Rate" establishes a relationship between joystick travel and control travel, see page 120:0%0%0%AileronElevatorRudderDUAL–––––––––SEL–––––––––100%100%100%EXPOSELOn the other hand, if the maximum throws are OK and only the reactions around the center position are to strong for more sensitive controls, then the "exponential" functions comes (additionally) into play: 0%0%0%AileronElevatorRudderDUAL––––––SEL–––––––––100%100%100%EXPOSELMove desired switchto ON position(ext. switch: ENTER)Normal3If a switch is also assigned, switching can even take place between two dual-rate/expo settings during the fl ight.
275Programming examples - Winged modelsThis is similar for the option …»Channel 1 curve« (page 128)Channel 1 C U R V ECurveoff PointOutputInput 0%0%?+–100O U T P U T0%With this option, one or multiple points of the control curve of the throttle/brake joystick can be infl uenced in such a way that a pleasant or even purposeful behavior is guaranteed.An example of this would be the "dead" travel of spoilers. The fl aps fi rst pass through this after a certain "idle travel" of the brake joystick from the wing. With a corresponding "bending" of the curve, the "dead' travel is covered more quickly. The spoilers come out from the wing earlier and then the remaining travel can be controlled with greater sensitivity. (This also applies for the control of a motor in the same manner, which can be controlled through C1 as an alternative.)Finally, the receiver's behavior in the event of a failure should certainly be established in the menu…»Fail Safe« (page 208)FAIL SAFEPoshold1234567 8 9 10111213141516DELAY : 0.25s STO… because "doing nothing" is the worst thing which can be done for a winged model.In the transmitter's home position, "Hold" is specifi ed and "Hold" means that the receiver continuously sends the last correctly recognized control impulse to the servos in the model. In the best case scenario the model fl ies straight ahead for an indefi nite amount of time and then hopefully "lands" somewhere without causing signifi cant damage! However, if something like this happens in the wrong place at the wrong time, the model may become uncontrollable and "tear" across the fl ight fi eld completely out of control, putting the pilot and/or spectators at risk. Therefore, it would obviously be benefi cial to program the the function "Motor off" at the very least, in order to prevent such risks.With electro gliders, on the other hand, the fail-safe setting "motor off" can also be used, for example, for outlanding, to reliably stop the motor or its propeller by immediately switching off the transmitter after the landing.The author usually prefers a "braking fi nish" within eyeshot to fl oating off "somewhere else".
276 Programming examples - Winged models Integration of an electric drive into the model programmingAn electric drive can be controlled in different ways: The simplest method to integrate one such drive into the model programming is with the use of a throttle/brake joystick (C1). However, since this is already specifi ed for the brake system in the course of the model programming described above, either the switchable solution described beginning on page 279 or even the use of an alternative control is possible. As a suitable alternative, one of the two 3-position switches would be better than one of the proportionals controls. However, either one of the two side proportional rotary controls are also well suited to activation of a motor without having to let go of the joystick. An alternative would also be one of the two-stage switches. Basically, whatever switch is used should be located where it is within convenient reach.Before we turn to the individual examples, it is important must be noted that all inputs in the »Control adjust« menu can be selectively programmed as fl ight-phase specifi c ("PH" in the "Type" column) or model memory specifi c ("GL" in the "Type" column)!However, since the drive should usually be available depending on the current fl ight phase, we recommend leaving the standard default "GL" ("global") in the "Type" column which your are using.0% +100%I5I6I7I8Typ SEL+100%0.0 0.0– travel + –time+0% +100%+100%0.0 0.00% +100%+100%0.0 0.00% +100%+100%0.0 0.0GLGLGLfr ---frfrfr---------offsetGLNormalA common option in the following examples 1 … 5, the automatic tracking of the elevator trimming in the power fl ight, should also be mentioned at the beginning of this section:If it becomes apparent after the initial power fl ights that the model must be continuously corrected with the elevator while the motor is switched on, this situation can be corrected by setting a free mixer and adjusting it accordingly. For this purpose, switch to the menu …»Free mixers«… and program one of the linear mixers, Linear MIX 1 … 8, or even one of the curve mixers, Curve MIX 9 … 12, from "channel controlling the motor" according to "Ele", for example:ELLinearMIX 1Typ 8from – Begr. +????????????––––LinearMIX 2LinearMIX 3LinearMIX 4LinearMIX 5to Adjust––––––––????––––On its second screen page, the required – usually low – correction value is entered:8Mix input Offset+–100O U T P U T0%ELLinear MIX 1+4%SYM ASY SETSTO+4%Note:The adjustment of a curve mixer is described in detail in the section »Channel 1 curve« starting on page 128. Example 1Proportional control usageIf one of these controls is used, the connection is very simple. Only the motor controller (speed control) has to be connected to a free servo connection 5 … 16 of the receiver. Bear in mind that, depending on the model type and number of aileron and fl ap servos, the output 2 + 5 or 6 + 7 are already linked. Therefore connect your speed controller to the next free input and assign the selected input – for example, "Inp. 8" – to one of the transmitter's proportional controls, for example the left-side proportional rotary control. This is done in the menu …»Control adjust« (page 108)Select the desired line with the  selection keys of the left or right touch pad. A tap on the the center SET key of the right touch pad will activate "Switch and control assignment". Now move the selected proportional control. After a short time, an entry, e.g. "Cn2", will appear in the inverse video fi eld.
277Programming examples - Winged modelsone column to the right, to the "- time +" column then move the selected control close to "full throttle" so the marker frame is only placed around one value fi eld. Now enter a value of at least 1 s …0% +100%I5I6I7I8Typ SEL+100%0.0 0.0– travel + –time+0% +100%+100%0.0 0.00% +100%+100%0.0 0.00% +100%+100%0.0GLGLGLfr ---frfrCn2---------offsetGLNormal1.0… with which a movement of the proportional control in the "ON" on direction which is too fast is processes move gently, and you can check immediately this by switching to the »Servo display«.Note:No delay is entered on the "OFF" side, so that the drive can be switched off instantly at any time. This does not additionally stress the drive, because it merely "runs down".The adjustment of the appropriate control travel and directions for the motor control (speed control) is normally carried out in the »Control adjust« menu in the "- travel +" column. Alternatively, these settings can also be made in the menu … »Servo adjustment« (page 102)+100% 100%Servo 4Servo 5Servo 6Servo 7Servo 8Rev cent.100%150% 150%– travel + – limit ++100% 100%100%150% 150%+100% 100%100%150% 150%+100% 100%100%150% 150%+100% 100%100%150% 150%.0% +100%I5I6I7I8Typ SEL+100%0.0 0.0– travel + –time+0% +100%+100%0.0 0.00% +100%+100%0.0 0.00% +100%+100%0.0 0.0GLGLGLfr ---frfrCn2---------offsetGLNormalHowever, since propulsion must usually be available, independent of the current fl ight phase, leave the default value "GL" in the "Typ" column – as already mentioned earlier in this section.If applicable, for necessary adjustment of appropriate control travel for the motor control (speed control), use one of the arrow keys to switch to the right into the "- travel +" column.0% +100%I5I6I7I8Typ SEL+100%0.0 0.0– travel + –time+0% +100%+100%0.0 0.00% +100%+100%0.0 0.00% +100%+100%0.0 0.0GLGLGLfr ---frfrCn2---------offsetGLNormalThis fi elds of this column can be use to set the travel required, even asymmetric if necessary.A simultaneous tap on the  keys of the left touch pad now will switch over to the »Servo display« where the selected proportional control can be activated to watch the the bars for channel 8 "wander" from one side to the other and back.However, if the proportional control is moved too fast – in practice – the resulting sudden motor acceleration can briefl y strain the entire drive train (too much). In this case, be sure to enter a value in the "- time +" column to counteract such a condition.Therefore, using one of the selection keys, switch Example 22-way switch usageThis variant realizes a purely ON/OFF function.On the receiver side, either a simple electronic switch or – if a gentle motor start-up, for example, is desired – an appropriate motor control (speed control) is required.With the exception of assigning a different operating element, the settings required for this are essentially the same as those described under Example 1. Therefore, the same comments and recommendations also apply. Apart from the infi nitely variable motor control under Example 1 and the two-stage motor control in this example, the selection of the two transmitter control types only has an effect on the type of timer control, see page 284.Only the nature of the assignment and representation of the selected switch in the display of the menu …»Control adjust« (page 108)As in example 1, change over to the line of a free input, activate the "Switch and control assignment" in the second column, page 56, then move the selected switch, in this case for example switch 2, from the desired motor OFF position in the direction of motor ON.0% +100%I5I6I7I8Typ+100%0.0 0.0– travel + –time+0% +100%+100%0.0 0.00% +100%+100%0.0 0.00% +100%+100%0.0 0.0GLGLGLfr ---frfr------offsetGLNormal2---Here again – as already mentioned earlier in this section – leave the standard default "GL" in the "Typ" column.
278 Programming examples - Winged modelsThe setting of the appropriate control travel for the motor control (speed control) is made in the "- Travel +" column. If the motor should up gently with the use of a motor control (speed control), an appropriate delay time can be set – as described in Example 1 – in the "- time +" column:0% +100%I5I6I7I8Typ+100%0.0 0.0– travel + –time+0% +100%+100%0.0 0.00% +100%+100%0.0 0.00% +100%+100%0.0GLGLGLfr ---frfr------offsetGLNormal2--- 1.1All other settings – as already mentioned earlier in the example – are made analogous to Example 1. Therefore, the same comments and recommendations also apply.Note:No delay is entered on the "OFF" side, so that the drive can be switched off instantly at any time. This does not additionally stress the drive, because it merely "runs down". Example 33-way switch usageThis variant realizes a three-stage speed setting, such as Motor OFF, "half" and full power.A corresponding motor control (speed control) is required on the receiver side.The required settings are basically the same as those described under Example 1 and 2. Therefore, the same comments and recommendations also apply.Apart from the infi nitely variable motor control under Example 1 and the three-stage motor control in this example, the selection of the operating element only has an effect on the type of clock control, see page 284, and the nature of the assignment.Here again – as already mentioned earlier in this section – leave the standard default "GL" in the "Typ" column.Put the desired 3-way switch into its middle position then activate "Switch and control assignment" above the column with the switch symbol, as described on page 56. Now put the selected 3-way switch forward, out of its middle position:0% +100%I5I6I7I8Typ+100%0.0 0.0– travel + –time+0% +100%+100%0.0 0.00% +100%+100%0.0 0.00% +100%+100%0.0 0.0GLGLGLfr ---frfr------offsetGLNormal7---Now put the activated switch from its forward position back into its middle position.Now move the marker frame to the left and into the column above the column now labeled with a second switch symbol instead of the previous label SEL. Reactivate "Switch and control assignment" for this column then move the 3-way switch out of its middle position toward the rear: 0% +100%I5I6I7I8Typ+100%0.0 0.0– travel + –time+0% +100%+100%0.0 0.00% +100%+100%0.0 0.00% +100%+100%0.0 0.0GLGLGLfr ---frfr------offsetGLNormal78The setting of the appropriate control travel for the motor control (speed control) is made in the "- travel +" column. The motor should rev up gently with a motor control (speed control), to this end a suitable delay time can be set – as described in examples 1 and 2 – in the "- time +" column:All other settings–as already mentioned earlier in the example–are made analogous to Example 1. Therefore, the same comments and recommendations also apply.Note:By shifting the neutral position and subsequent adjustment of travel, the "half throttle position" can be infl uenced in the »Control adjust« menu by reducing travel from the offset value on the side to which the neutral point has been shifted and adding it to the other side. For example, an offset value of -20 % results in +80 % on the minus side of the travel setting and +120 % on the plus side, and vice versa.
279Programming examples - Winged modelsTail typeMotor on C1NormalAileron/camber flaps 1 AILM O D E L T Y P EBrake Offset Input 1-90%SELThr. min frontThis idle path ensures that all brake settings remain at "neutral", even with minor deviations from the limit of the brake fl ap control. At the same time, the effective control path is automatically spread to 100 %.For this reason, in the next step it must be ensured that the infl uence of the C1 joystick on the motor can be infl uenced. For this purpose, switch to the menu …»Phase settings« (page 142)... and assign a meaningful name, such as "Normal", from the list for "Phase 1" after activation of the selection fi eld in the "Name" column. The asterisk in the second column indicates which phase is currently active. As long as no phase switch has been assigned, this is always Phase 1. "Phase 2" can be given, appropriate to the example, the name «Landing».In the "Ph.Tim" column you can assign a so-called fl ight phase timer for the measurement of the motor running time and/or the gliding times as necessary for each phase. You could, for example, assign one of the "Timers 1 … 3" to the "Normal" fl ight phase in order to measure the total motor runtime via the C1 joystick:»Model type« (beginning page 94)Here you fi rst specify in the "motor" line whether the throttle minimum position (= Motor "OFF" position) should be at the "front" or "rear" - as already discussed: In the following programming example, "Motor OFF" and "Brake OFF" are combined at "front":Tail typeMotor on C1NormalAileron/camber flaps 1 AILM O D E L T Y P EBrake Offset Input 1+100%SELThr. min frontNote:With the selection of "Throttle min front/rear" the trimming will then only have an effect in the "idle" direction of the motor and is not the same as with the "none" entry, having the same effect at every position of the C1 joystick. Since the C1 trimming is not normally used with electric drives, however, this has no further relevance.You adjust the "according to your model, in this case "normal".In the "Aileron/fl aps" line you enter the correct number of aileron and fl ap servos – in this example "2 AIL".In the last line you leave the standard entries for the selection of "Brake retracted = front". On the other hand, if the preference is for "Brake retracted = rear", select the "Brake offset" line and defi ne the offset point – as described on page 95 – as "rear". In the process, if the offset point is not placed completely at the end of the control travel, the remainder of the travel is "idle" up to this limit. Control E-motor and crow alternately with C1 joystickExample 4Before we discuss the programming of this fourth example or turn the to the expansion of the previously described basic programming, a few words should be said about the position of the throttle/brake joystick with "Motor OFF" or "Brake OFF". Normally the C1 control joystick is moved forward for the throttle control and backward for the extension of the brake. However, if for this type of "traditional" assignment, for example, a switchover of the brake system is to take place for the "Motor OFF" condition (joystick "back") then a switchover to "full brake" would take place immediately after the pre-set switchover time specifi ed in the »Phase settings« menu, and the opposite will take place when "brakes retracted" is switched over to propulsion causing the motor to switch over to "full power" within this time range …A "glider pilot" can make the best of this "Emergency" – normally with "brake retracted = front" – by switching to motor "ON" only if necessary so that power decreases, if applicable (and hopefully not forgetting to push the C1 joystick "forward" again when switching back). A typical "motor pilot", on the other hand, operates in the opposite manner, only switching to the brake if necessary, etc... You can also combine the "Zero point" of both systems to avoid confusion, whereby a "glider pilot" would tend prefer the "front" and a "motor pilot", on the other hand", would likely prefer the "rear". Whichever the case may be, the mc-16 HoTT transmitter permits both variants. In the following text, however, the combination of the two "OFF" positions to "front" is assumed. However, if you have a different preference, it is not a problem: The only difference from the described version lies in the logical selection of "Throttle min rear/front" and, if applicable, of a corresponding brake offset in the menu …
280 Programming examples - Winged modelsthe phase for the front switch position "normal" and "landing" for the rear position (or vice versa):PHASEASSIGNMENTPrior.CcombiABDEF2722LandingThese phase names then appear in all fl ight-phase dependent menus and, of course, also in the base screen of the transmitter.Now switch to the «Landing» fl ight phase and in the "Crow" line of the sub-menu …»Brake settings« (page 172)Elevat. curveBRAKE SETTINGSLandingCrowQRWK20%WK0%Diff. reduct.0%… of the »Wing mixers« menu, set the desired throw of the ailerons by actuation of the C1 joystick ("brake") upward. Then, if applicable, switch to the "FL" column in order to specify the desired through of the fl aps with C1 actuation downward (hidden in the fi gure above). This fl ap position is referred to as "Crow position" or "Butterfl y; see also page 172.In the line "Diff. reduct." (differentiation reduction), enter a value which corresponds to the value entered or want to enter on the fi rst page of the »Wing mixers« menu in the "Aile.diff." line.With the "Elevat curve" mixer the normally occurring "Upward tilting" of the model on the raising of the Phase 1Phase 2Phase 3Phase 4Phase 5Name Timer Sw.timeMotoryes 1.1sno 1.1syes 0.1syes 0.1syes 0.1s––––Normal Clk1LandingThen you must assigned these two fl ight phases to a switch with which you can switch between the two fl ight phases during the fl ight. In this case, a single switch is suffi cient. It should be easy to reach, however, so that you can still switch between "motor" and "brake" during a landing approach, for example, without having to release a joystick.The assignment of the selected switch takes place in the menu …»Phase assignment« (page 148)Select the switch symbol under "C" with one of the selection keys. Following a brief tap on the center SET key of the right touch pad, actuate the desired switch, e.g "2".PHASEASSIGNMENTPrior.C1 NormalcombiABDEF272Both switch positions, in other words ON (I) and OFF ( ), are initially assigned at the bottom right of the display to phase «1 Normal». Select this value fi eld with one of the selection keys then activate the phase selection list that was set up in the »Phase settings« menu with a brief tap on the center SET key of the right touch pad. For example, you name Phase 1Phase 2Phase 3Phase 4Phase 5Name Timer Sw.timeMotoryes 0.1syes 0.1syes 0.1syes 0.1syes 0.1s––––Normal Clk1LandingThen the timer is controlled through a corresponding control switch to be defi ned on the C1 joystick. As soon as you switch to the "Landing" fl ight phase, this fl ight phase timer is automatically stopped and hidden in the base screen. More about this can be found on page 156.Now move the marker frame over the "Ph.Tim" column to the "Motor" column to the right. Here you can decide with "yes/no" in which phase the motor is controlled by the throttle/brake joystick and the brake system to be adjusted in the "Brake settings" sub-menu of the »Wing mixers« menu should be shut off (= "yes") and vice versa (= "no"):Phase 1Phase 2Phase 3Phase 4Phase 5Name Timer Sw.timeMotoryes 0.1sno 0.1syes 0.1syes 0.1syes 0.1s––––Normal Clk1LandingNow move the marker frame once more to the right and enter an appropriate switching time after activation of the value fi eld of the "Sw.Time" column; for example:
281Programming examples - Winged modelsailerons can be automatically suppressed. The suitable correction values for the respective value must be tested out through fl ight. Set this mixer so that the fl ight speed of the model does not change too much with the brake system extended in comparison with the "normal" fl ight speed. Otherwise, there is the risk, among other things, that the model plunges when the brake system is retracted, e.g. for the extension of a landing approach which is too short.If everything is correctly set so far, only the motor is controlled with the C1 joystick in the "Normal" fl ight phase, whereas this should be switched off in the fl ight phase "landing" (Servo 1 in »Servo display« independent of "Throttle min front/rear" to -100 % or adequately for a servo travel setting deviating by 100 %, if necessary). In this fl ight phase the C1 joystick then only controls the raising of the ailerons and, if applicable, the lowering of the fl aps with the neutral point in the C1 control position selected per offset.
282 Programming examples - Winged models C1 joystick switchable between E-motor and spoilerExample 5If, contrary to the assumptions of the preceding Example 4, the model has additional spoilers or only spoilers, they can be incorporated into the control of the model by means of the following programming.Do this by programming the menus »Model type«, »Phase settings« and »Phase assignment« in the same manner as described under Example 4. The settings described there in the "Brake settings" sub-menu of the »Wing mixers« menu are only then relevant if an additional crow system is to be employed in parallel with the spoilers.With the settings described under Example 4, the control of the E-motor and, if applicable, that of a crow system will function as usual. Only the control of a spoiler connected to Output 8, for example, must additionally be programmed. For this purpose, switch to the menu …»Control adjust« (page 108)… and switch into the «normal» fl ight phase.Now use the selection keys to switch to the left into the "Typ" column to set the parameter in this line, e.g. "I8" from "GL(obal)" to "PH(ase)", so that the settings too follow become effective on a fl ight-phase specifi c basis.0% +100%I5I6I7I8Typ+100%0.0 0.0– travel + –time+0% +100%+100%0.0 0.00% +100%+100%0.0 0.00% +100%+100%0.0 0.0GLGLfr ---frfr------offsetGLNormalPHSELfr ---Afterward, switch to the "Offset" column and, following activation of the value fi eld with a brief tap on the SET key of the right touch pad, change the offset value for this Input 8 value fi eld now displayed in inverse video until the spoilers are again "retracted", e.g.:0% +100%I5I6I7I8Typ+100%0.0 0.0– travel + –time+0% +100%+100%0.0 0.00% +100%+100%0.0 0.0-95% +100%+100%0.0 0.0GLGLfr ---frfr------offsetGLNormalPHSELfr ---Confi rm this setting with a brief tap on the center ESC key of the left key pad or the center SET key of the right touch pad then switch to the left into the column above SEL. Now switch to the fl ight phase «Landing» then briefl y tap on the center SET key of the right touch pad. The display shows the window …0% +100%I5I6I7I8Typ+100%0.0 0.0– travel + –time+0% +100%+100%0.0 0.00% +100%+100%0.0 0.0+100%+100%0.0 0.0GLGLfr ---frfr------offsetGLLandingPHSELfr --- 0%Move desiredcontrol adj.Now move the C1 joystick As soon as this is recognized, "Cn1" will appear in the display instead of "fr":0% +100%I5I6I7I8Typ+100%0.0 0.0– travel + –time+0% +100%+100%0.0 0.00% +100%+100%0.0 0.0+100%+100%0.0 0.0GLGLfr ---frfr------offsetGLLandingPHSELCn1 --- 0%Leave the offset value in this fl ight phaseat "0 %". It may be necessary to change the leading symbol of the travel setting to reverse the control direction. Do this by switching the travel setting from +100 % to -100 % in the "travel" column.Now we are practically fi nished. Check the programming in the »Servo display« menu, which you can reach from the base screen of the transmitter as well as nearly every other menu position with a simultaneous tap on  keys of the left touch pad. You will discover that "Servo 1" (motor control) is controlled in the "Normal" phase and in the "landing" phase only the spoiler is controlled at "Servo 8" and, if applicable the aileron and fl ap servos – just as we intended.
283For your notes
284 Programming examples - Timer confi rmation with control or switchSEL0%0%0%C1C2C3–––C4CONTROL SWITCHCnt. 1free–85%STO–––––––––SELC1C2C3C4freefreeIn order to assign the control switch you just crated to the desired timer, switch to the menu …»Timers (in general)« (page 152 … 154)… and select the line "Top" with the selection keys. This is the standard line assigned to the stopwatch. In this line, move the marker frame over the "Timer" column to the right, to the column above the switch symbol, using the appropriate selection key of the left or right touch pad. Now tap twice on the center SET key of the right touch pad: The fi rst tap will activate the switch assignment, the second tap will call up the list of "expanded switches":Model timeBatt. timeTimer–––12:34h1:23h0:000:000s0s––––––AlarmTimerTop :StoppuhrCentr.Mitte :FlugzeitMovwünschten Schalterto die EIN Position(erw. Schalter: SET)Control/Logic/fix switchC2 C4 C5 C6C7 C8 FX FXi L1 L2C3C1Now select the previously programmed control switch, C1 in the example, and assign it to the timer with a brief tap on the center SET key of the right touch pad:ModeltimeBatt. timeTimer–––12:34h1:23h0:000:000s0s –––AlarmTimerTop : Stop watchCentr: Flight timC1The timer in the base screen now starts with movement of the C1 joystick toward full throttle and stops if you pull the C1 joystick back over the switching point. Example 1 of the preceding pagesIf you have decided to continue with the model programming described on the previous pages in Example 1 on page 276, fi rst switch to the menu …»Control switch« (page 135)… and select the line of a control switch which has not been assigned yet with the selection keys. After activation of the control assignment with a brief tap on the center SET key of the right touch pad, the following window will appear:SEL0%0%0%C1C2C3–––C4CONTROL SWITCHGeb. 10%STO–––––––––SELC1C2C3C4freifreefreefrei Move desiredcontrol adj.Now simply move the respective proportional control, e.g. the left side proportional rotary control from its motor "OFF" position toward the motor "ON" direction.Thereafter, change to the column above STO by using the appropriate selection key, move the selected control near its motor "OFF" position then Examples 4 and 5 of the preceding pagesIf model programming is to be continued for Example 4, page 279 or Example 5, page 282 as described on previous pages or, completely independent of this example programming, the C1 joystick (throttle/brake joystick) is to be used for power regulation, then a control switch can be used to automatically start and stop the stopwatch. For this purpose, fi rst switch to the menu …»Control switch« (page 135)… and select the line of a control switch which has not been assigned yet with the selection keys. After activation of the control assignment with a brief tap on the center SET key of the right touch pad, the following window will appear:SEL0%0%0%C1C2C3–––C4CONTROL SWITCHGeb. 10%STO–––––––––SELC1C2C3C4freifreefreefrei Move desiredcontrol adj.Now simply move the C1 joystick (throttle/brake joystick) from the motor "OFF" position in the motor "ON" direction.Thereafter, change to the column above STO by using the appropriate selection key, move the C1 joystick close to its motor "OFF" position then set the switch-point at the selected position with a brief tap on the center SET key of the right touch pad. The switch's state will be displayed at the right of the control number, e.g.: Timer confi rmation with control or switch
285Programming examples - Timer confi rmation with control or switchset the switch-point at the selected position with a brief tap on the center SET key of the right touch pad. The switch status is shown to the right of the control number:SEL0%0%0%C1C2C3–––C4CONTROL SWITCHSlide2free–85%STO–––––––––SELC1C2C3C4freefreeNote:Now place the switching point; but do not put it at the limit position of the control, because safe switching is not assured when doing so.Ct1 used in the example here should be "closed" in the "full throttle" direction and "open" below the switching point. Now switch to the menu …»Timers (in general)« (page 152 … 154)… and select the line "Top"with the selection keys. This is the standard line assigned to the stopwatch. In this line, move the marker frame over the "Timer" column to the right, to the column above the switch symbol, using the appropriate selection key of the left or right touch pad. Now tap twice on the center SET key of the right touch: The fi rst tap will activate the switch assignment, the second tap will call up the list of "expanded switches":Model timeBatt. timeTimer–––12:34h1:23h0:000:000s0s––––––AlarmTimerTop :StoppuhrCentr.Mitte :FlugzeitMovwünschten Schalterto die EIN Position(erw. Schalter: SET)Control/Logic/fix switchC2 C4 C5 C6C7 C8 FX FXi L1 L2C3C1Now select the previously programmed control switch "C1" then tap on the center SET key of the right touch pad.ModeltimeBatt. timeTimer–––12:34h1:23h0:000:000s0s –––AlarmTimerTop : Stop watchCentr: Flight timC1The stopwatch in the basic display now starts with movement of the proportional rotary control toward full throttle and stops if it is turned back again over the switch-point. Examples 2 and 3 of the preceding pagesIf you control your motor with a switch, on the other hand, you do not need the described control switch described above. It is completely suffi cient if you assign the same switch to the timer, so that it also begins to run when you switch on the motor.Tip:If the motor run time for an E-model is limited by the battery capacity, you can have the stopwatch count down. Enter the maximum permissible motor run time in the "Timer" column, e.g. "5 min", and shortly before expiration of permissible time, e.g. "30 s" before, have the transmitter issue an acoustic warning signal:Model timeBatt. timeTimer–––12:34h1:23h5:000:0030s0s –––AlarmTimerTop : Stop watchCentr: Flight tim7
286 Programming examples - Parallel operating servos Parallel operating servosA second servo running in parallel is often required, such as when brake fl aps or spoilers installed in the wings or the left and right elevator or a double fi n should be actuated by a servo or a large rudder fl ap should be simultaneously controlled by two servos due to high throw forces.In principle, this task could also be solved by connecting the servos together on the model side using V-cable. However, the disadvantage here is that servos combined in this manner can no longer be adjusted individually and separately from the transmitter – thus negating the potential for fi nely tuning respective servos to one another with a computerized remote control system. A similar situation is given for the so-called "Channel mapping" feature of the »Telemetry« menu. Here too there are certain limitations involved when compared to the transmitter's adjustment possibilities.The fi rst example, therefore, describes the coupling of two brake or spoiler servos, the second describes the operation of two or more throttle servos and the third describes the coupling of two elevator servos.The "two rudder servos" example on the next page describes the coupling of two rudder servos, whereas Variant 1 is preferable for applications of this type because the use of a cross-mixer« is quicker and easier to program. In contrast, the second variant, also described on the next page, additionally permits asymmetric and/or non-linear curves through use of the »Free mixer« menu.Two brake or spoiler servosIn a situation where there is one installed servo for operation of brake fl aps and/or spoilers in each wing half then the pre-set linear control characteristics for the »Channel 1 curve« menu should remain unchanged.Then connect one of the two servos to Output 1, provided for this purpose by standard, and the second to an arbitrary free receiver connection 5 … 16, such as Output "8". Subsequently switch to the menu …»Control adjust« (page 108)… and, using the selection keys, assign "Control 1" in the Input 8 line :0% +100%I5I6I7I8Typ SEL+100%0.0 0.0– travel + –time+0% +100%+100%0.0 0.00% +100%+100%0.0 0.00% +100%+100%0.0 0.0GLGLGLfr ---frfrCn1---------offsetGLNormalSince the spoiler on Output 1 can normally only be operated on a fl ight-phase dependent basis, it is strongly recommended that the "Typ" column for the input used is left at its "GL" default setting.Also the remaining values should be left at their default settings. If necessary, carry out the required servo travel adjustments in the »Servo adjustment« menu. There you can also adjust the travel of servo 1 and 8 to one another, if necessary.Multiple-motor aircraftAs described above, a model can also be operated with two or more motors.The fi rst throttle servo and/or the fi rst motor control is connected as usual to (receiver) Output 1 and each additional throttle servo and/or each additional motor control is connected to a free (receiver) Output 6 … 12. The inputs of respective assigned control channels are then each assigned to Control 1; for example :0% +100%I9I10I11I12Typ SEL+100%0.0 0.0– travel + –time+0% +100%+100%0.0 0.00% +100%+100%0.0 0.00% +100%+100%0.0 0.0GLGLGL---Cn1---------offsetGLNormalCn1Cn1Cn1Important notice:Since the motor control unit should be available regardless of a currently active fl ight phase, make sure to leave the standard default "GL" in the "Type" column.Two elevator servosTwo elevator servos should be switched in parallel. According to the receiver assignment plan, see page 61, the receiver output 8 is intended for the connection of the second elevator servo.This would be taken into account on the software side in the pre-confi guration of a corresponding mixer. You can fi nd this in the …"Model type" (page 94)In this menu, switch to the "Tail" line using the selection keys, activate the value fi eld with a brief tap on the center SET key of the right key pad then select the entry "2ELSv3+8":
287Programming examples - Parallel operating servosTail typeMotor on C1 noneAileron/camber flaps 1 QRM O D E L T Y P EBrake Offset Input 1+100%SEL2 EL Sv 3+8Then do the fi ne-tuning for travel of the two servos "in the now familiar manner" in the »Servo adjustment« menu.Two ruddersWe want to switch two rudders "in parallel". The second rudder is located at the free receiver output 8.Variant 1In the menu …»Dual mixer« (page 206)… select one of the cross-mixers and enter "8" and "RU" in its left and center value fi elds, as shown in the fi gure:Diff.DUAL MIXERMixer 1Mixer 28RUMixer 3Mixer 4?? ???? ???? ??0%0%0%0%The same defl ection "", which would take place through "Input 8" must not have an effect here. Therefore, you should make absolutely sure in the …»Control adjust« (page 108)0% +100%I5I6I7I8Typ SEL+100%0.0 0.0– travel + –time+0% +100%+100%0.0 0.00% +100%+100%0.0 0.00% +100%+100%0.0 0.0GLGLGLfr ---frfrfr---------offsetGLNormal… that "Input 8" "GL(obal)" is set to "free" so the control function is separate from the control channel over all fl ight phases.Alternatively, Input 8 can be set to "no control" in the »Mix only channel« menu on a fl ight-phase independent basis by setting Channel 8 to "MIXonly".MIX ONLY CHANNELMIXonlynormal1234567 8 9 10111213141516Variant 2This variant uses the …»Free mixers« (beginning page 193)… menu to set a "Tr RU  8". In the "Type" column, select the setting "Tr" so that the rudder trimming affects both rudder servos:8LinearMIX 1type RUfrom – Begr. +????????????––––LinearMIX 2LinearMIX 3LinearMIX 4LinearMIX 5to Adjust––––––––????––––TrAfterwards, switch to the graphic screen and set a symmetric mix of +100 %.RUMix input Offset8Linear MIX 1SYM ASY STO0%SET+100% +100%Here too, "Input 8" should also be programmed – if applicable, for all fl ight phases – to "free" by way of the »Control adjust« menu. However, control function "8" can be separated from control channel "8" more easily in the fl ight-phase independent »Mix only channel« menu, page 205:MIX ONLY CHANNELMIXonlynormal1234567 8 9 10111213141516
288 Programming examples - Using fl ight phases Using fl ight phasesUp to 8 different fl ight phases (fl ight conditions) can be programmed with settings independent of one another within each the model memory.Each of these fl ight phases can be called with a switch or a switch combination. This makes it possible to program different settings for various fl ight states, such as «Normal», «Thermal», «Speed», «Distance», etc., then make in-fl ight changeovers in a most convenient manner. However, with the fl ight phase programming you can also make slight modifi cations, e.g. of mixers, to try out by switching during the fl ight in order to fi nd the optimal settings for each model more easily.Before actual programming of fl ight phases can begin, consideration should be given to whether the digital trimming of transverse, altitude and side should be "GL(obal)" – in other words, applicable to all fl ight phases – or per "PH(ase)" – in other words, each fl ight phase individually variable.If you decide in favor of a phase-specifi c trimming of the elevator, for example, switch the menu …»Stick mode« (page 104)… and change the standard "global" default accordingly.The same applies for the number of trimming steps in the "Tr. step" column:globalChannel 1AileronElevatorRudderTrim0.0sTr. step – time +global 0.0sglobal 0.0sglobal 0.0s0.0s0.0s0.0s0.0s4444 Example 1 …… continuing with the previous programming of an electric glider with 2 aileron servos.AIAIELRUControl of the electric motor is accomplished, independent of the C1 joystick, with one of the two side proportional rotary controls or one of the two standard 3-way switches mounted into the switch panels. The motor's speed control is connected to receiver output 8 as described on page 276 and continued in Examples 1 and 2 This is why "none" was selected for the "Motor on C1" line in the »Model type« menu. This not only causes the column "Motor" in the »Phase settings« menu to be unavailable but also allows all options to be available without restriction in the "Brake settings" sub-menu of the »Wing mixers« menu.1st Step »Phase settings« (page 142)Phase 1Phase 2Phase 3Phase 4Phase 50.1s0.1s0.1s0.1s0.1sName Timer Sw.time––––NormalThermalSpeedLaunchInitially, one or multiple fl ight phases are provided with a specifi c identifi cation ("Name") for the respective fl ight status. This identifi cation has no infl uence on the programming of the transmitter; it only serves for an improved differentiation of the individual fl ight phases and is shown later in all fl ight-phase dependent menus and in the base screen.The selection of the respective line, a name and the setting of the switchover time is done in the "usual" manner, with a tap on the appropriate key(s) of the two four-way touch pads.Note:With the exception of Phase 1, which should always be assigned with the name "Normal" since it is always active, if the fl ight phases are deactivated, it is completely irrelevant which name is assigned to which phase!In everyday use by a model pilot, three to a maximum of four fl ight phases are usually completely suffi cient: "Start" with the climb settings• "Thermal" for "Flying high",• "Normal" for normal conditions and • "Speed" for high gear.• In the "Sw.time" column (switching time) …Phase 1Phase 2Phase 3Phase 4Phase 51.0s0.1s0.1s0.1s0.1sName Timer Sw.time––––NormalThermalSpeedLaunch… a "blend-in" time can be established for the time in which a changeover from any other fl ight phase into this given fl ight-phase is to be accomplished in order to permit a "smooth" transition for different servo
289Programming examples - Using fl ight phasespositions. Thus, an increased stress of the model under certain circumstances with a "hard" change of rudder or fl ap positions, for example, is prevented The "Status" column shows you the currently active fl ight phase with an asterisk "".2nd StepIn order to actually be able to switch between the individual fl ight phases, the assignment of one or multiple switches is necessary. Either one of the two three-way switches is ideally suited for switching between up to three fl ight phases.Each of the two switch end positions starting from the center position will be assigned to one of the fl ight phase switches A … F. The assignment of the switch takes place in the menu …»Phase assignment« (page 148)First select "C" with the marker frame. Then briefl y tap on the center SET key of the right touch pad and move the switch from its center position to one of its end-positions, for example, downward:PHASEASSIGNMENTPrior.C1 NormalcombiABDEF276Move the switch back to the center position and then select "D", and after activation of the switch assignment, move the switch to the other limit position, for example, to the top:PHASEASSIGNMENTPrior.C1 NormalcombiABDEF2767Now the 3-way switch is programmed. Now and additional switch could be assigned for the "start" fl ight phase, if applicable. In this case under "A", so that the "start" phase is always switched to from every other fl ight phase in parallel to the switching-on of the motor: PHASEASSIGNMENTPrior.C1 NormalcombiABDEF27672The given switch positions must then be assigned to respective fl ight phases (names). Although some fl ight phases have already been assigned to names, the phase name «1 Normal» will always initially appear at the right in the display; see the fi gures above.First move the 3-way switch to one of its limit positions, for example to the top, and switch with the marker frame in the display down to the right to set the fl ight phase name. Briefl y tap on the center SET key of the right touch pad to activate the entry fi eld then select the desired fl ight phase for this switch position, in this example «2 Thermal», with the selection keys:PHASEASSIGNMENTPrior.CcombiABDEF276722 ThermalProceed in the same manner for the other switch limit position, which is assigned the name "3 Speed".If applicable move Switch 2 and assign this switch combination the name "4 Start".A brief tap on the center ESC of the left touch pad or the center SET key of the right touch pad will complete the time name assignment.The fl ight-phase dependent model settings made before the assignment of phase switches are now in the fl ight phase «1 Normal». This is the phase which is called with the open «Start» switch in the center position of the 3-way switch.3rd Step In order to not have to carry out all previously made settings for the model in the "new" fl ight phase from the ground up, we recommend fi rst copying the already tested programming of the fl ight phase "Normal" to the other fl ight phases. This is carried out in the menu …»Copy / Erase« (page 72)Copy flight phaseErase modelCopy model –> modelExport to SDImport from SD =>
290 Programming examples - Using fl ight phasesHere, select the "Copy fl ight phase" menu item with the selection keys then briefl y tap the center SET key of the right touch pad.In the window which now appears, "Copy from phase", "1 Normal" is selected …7Copy from phase:35=>=>24618normal ThermalSpeed Launch… and a subsequent brief tap on the center SET key of the right touch pad will change the display to "Copy to phase". Now the target is to be selected (initially "2 Thermal") and confi rmed by another tap on the center SET key of the right touch pad. After confi rmation of the subsequent safety query, all settings are copied according to the selection.Proceed in the same manner with the other two phases ("1 Normal" to "3 Speed" and "1 Normal" to "4 Start").4th Step Now three or four phases are programmed, the settings are also copied and there is even a "soft" transfer, but … there are still no fl ight-phase specifi c settings.Now, if applicable, in order to adapt the fl ap positions to the different requirements of the individual fl ight phases, in the menu …»Control adjust« (page 108)… the standard default "GL" is fi rst changed to "PH" for "Phase" in the type column:0% +100%I5I6I7I8Typ SEL+100%0.0 0.0– travel + –time+0% +100%+100%0.0 0.00% +100%+100%0.0 0.00% +100%+100%0.0 0.0GLGLGLfr ---frfrfr---------offsetPHNormalThen switch to the "Offset" column and make the settings deviating from the "Normal" fl ight phase for the ailerons. However, switch to the desired fl ight phase beforehand, whose name is shown at the bottom in the display, appropriate to the switch position. Both positive and negative throw changes are possible. These settings are to be made separately for each fl ight phase:+100%I5I6I7I8Typ SEL+100%0.0 0.0– travel + –time+0% +100%+100%0.0 0.00% +100%+100%0.0 0.00% +100%+100%0.0 0.0GLGLGLfr ---frfrfr---------offsetPHThermal–7%5th Step Any necessary phase-specifi c trimming of the elevator is made with the help of the digital trimming of the elevator joystick. This requires that you have at least set the elevator trimming to "Phase" in the »Stick mode« menu – as already shown in this programming example.Alternatively, these settings can also be made in the »Phase trim« menu …Normal 0%ELThermal0%0%0%AI WK WK2ThermalSpeedLaunch0%0%0%0% 0%0%0%0% 0%0%0%0%QR20%0%0%0%6th Step In the menu …»Wing mixers« (beginning page 160)… the fl ight phase name of the newly activated fl ight phase appears at the bottom edge of the display. If the switch position is now changed, the name of the fl ight phase selected with the switch appears, but with the previously copied settings of the fl ight phase "Normal". Here you set you values phase-specifi cally for the aileron differentiation, the share of the mixture of transverse to side, and if applicable, also a mixture of altitude to transverse. (The latter increases the agility over the transverse axis when "Turning".)Aileron differentialBrake settings+33%Aileron +55%WING MIXERSElevator aileron 0%0%––––––rudder2345NormalNote:The list of displayed options depends on the number of servos entered in the "Ailerons/fl aps" line in the »Model type« menu.Now switch to the sub-menu …
291Programming examples - Using fl ight phasesAileron differentialBrake settings+33%Aileron +55%WING MIXERSElevator aileron 0%0%––––––rudder2345Normal… and enter the raised height of aileron brakes for individual fl ight phases in the "Crow" line.With "D.red" (differentiation reduction), you should enter the value previously set in the aileron differentiation line in order to suppress it again while breaking.In the "Elevat curve" sub-menu, enter a correction value for the elevator, see page 150.Note:The "Brake settings" sub-menu of the »Wing mixers« menu is switched "off" when: for the "Motor at C1 front/rear" column of the »Model type« menu (page 94) AND for the "Motor" column of the »Phase settings« menu (page 142), a "yes" is entered for the currently active fl ight phase. Change the fl ight phase, if applicable.
292 Programming examples - Using fl ight phases Example 2 …Glider with four fl ap wings, two large fl aps and tow couplingAIFLFLAIELRUThe following example is based on the assumption that you have already mechanically pre-adjusted the model and you have already ensured the correct defl ection of all rudders or checked this again in the scope of this programming and made adjustments, if applicable, through servo switching at the receiver and/or through the »Servo adjustment« menu.This programming example is based on an assignment of the receiver connections in accordance with the following diagram:Receiver power supplyfree or aux. functionfree or aux. functionRudder or elevator/rudder rightLeft aileronElevator or elevator/rudder left2nd airbrake or free or aux. functionReceiver power supplyAirbrake or 1st airbrakeRight aileronLeft flapRight flapAero-tow release or free or aux. functionfree or aux. function13 14 T 15 16 S77 8910 11 12Receiver power supplyfree or aux. functionfree or aux. functionTelemetry connectionReceiver power supplyfree or aux. functionfree or aux. functionSUMO / SUMI-connectionReceiver power supplyReceiver power supplyBegin with the new programming of the model in a free model memory location. Essentially, the »Basic settings, model« menu is used to bind the receiver to the transmitter. Enter a model name and select or review the selection of appropriate stick mode. Later on this menu will also be used to activate the range test before the start of fl ight operations.In the menu …"Model type" (page 94)… leave "Motor to C1" at "none" and the tail type at "Normal". Set "2 AIL 2 FL" into the "Aileron/camber fl aps" line.In the "Brake" line, program or leave "In1", because the brake and spoiler fl ap servos connected to 1 + 8 should be activated later with the corresponding C1 joystick as the control:Tail typeMotor on C1NormalnoneAileron/camber flaps 2AIL 2FLM O D E L T Y P EBrake Offset Input 1+90%SELSTOThe setting in the "Brake Offset" value fi eld defi nes the neutral position of all mixers specifi ed by the "Brake settings" sub-menu of the »Wing mixers« menu. Place this neutral point at approx. +90 %, insofar as the brake fl aps should be retracted in the front position of the C1 joystick. The remaining path between +90 % and the full throw of the joysticks, +100 %, is then assigned as idle travel. This assures that the rudders or fl aps addressed by the mixers of "Brake settings" remain in their "normal" positions even for slight deviations from the limit position of the C1 control. At the same time, the effective control path is automatically spread to 100 %.In the menu …»Control adjust« (page 108)… assign a switch, for example Input 9, to operate the aero-tow coupling. In order for this switch to work independently of the fl ight phase, leave the standard default "GL" in the "Type" column of this input. With "– Travel +" you can adjust the control travel for the switching of the switch:Using fl ight phases
293Programming examples - Using fl ight phases0% +100%I6I7I8I9Typ+100%0.0 0.0– travel + –time+0% +100%+100%0.0 0.00% +100%+100%0.0 0.00% +100%+100%0.0 0.0GLGLGLfrfr---------offsetGL frNormal10---With a simultaneous tap on the  keys of the left touch pad, the setting can be checked in the »Servo display«.Since the C1 control should actuate Servo 8 simultaneously with Servo 1, establish this link by way of the »Control adjust« menu.For this reason, also switch to the line before and assign "Control 1" to Input 8.0% +100%I6I7I8I9Typ+100%0.0 0.0– travel + –time+0% +100%+100%0.0 0.00% +100%+100%0.0 0.00% +100%+100%0.0 0.0GLGLGLfrCn1------------offsetGL frNormal10SELHowever, please note in this connection, that a non-linear control curve programmed in the »Channel 1 curve« menu has as little effect on this input as brake offset set to less than 100 %, which you can check very easily in the »Servo display« menu. You can reach this from nearly every menu position with a simultaneous tap on the  keys of the left touch pad:The travel, and if applicable also the direction of rotation, for spoiler servo 1 as well as the second spoiler servo connected to Output 8 can be adjusted in the menu …Servo adjustment (page 102)0% 100%Servo 1Servo 2Servo 3Servo 4Servo 5Rev cent.100%150% 150%– travel + – limit +0% 100%100%150% 150%0% 100%100%150% 150%0% 100%100%150% 150%0% 100%100%150% 150%In the Multi-fl ap menu of the …»Wing mixers« (beginning page 160)… you now enter the fi rst mixer values for the four wing fl aps; for example:FL-Pos.Diff.AI-Tr.AINormal AI+100%WK2FL0%+66% 0%+100%0%+100%0%+100%+33%0%+33%0%+100% +66% 0%0%FL +100%0% +100%Note:The parameter values shown here are model-dependent and must be determined by test fl ights.In the …AI determines the percentage share with which the two fl ap pairs "AI" and "FL" are to respond to aileron steering. Also check whether the ailerons are defl ected in the right direction during the adjustment of the parameter values. The adjustment range from -150 % … +150 % enables the correct throw direction adjustment regardless of the direction of rotation of the servos.AI-Tr. determines the percentage share with which aileron trimming should effect the AI and FL.Diff. the entry to specify aileron steering differentiation for AI and FL fl aps is made here. Refer to page 161 about the signifi cance of differentiation. The adjustment range from -100 % … +150 % enables the correct differentiation direction adjustment regardless of the direction of rotation of the aileron and fl ap servos.FL-Pos. The fl ight-phase specifi c positions for all camber fl aps present on the given model are set in this line. In the process, you can determine the positions the fl aps assume for each fl ight phase.Note:The values appearing in this line are based on the same data set as in the comparable position in the »Phase trim« menu, which is why changes always take effect in both directions.FL Since all inputs in the »Control adjust« menu are set to "free" by default, neither the ailerons nor the camber fl aps can be operated with these default settings. In this respect, you also leave the default entry here. However, if fl ap positions are to be varied with a switch or proportional control by the position specifi ed in the "FL-Pos." line, assign the desired control to Input 6 in the »Control adjust« menu and set the desired reaction to the movement of the control selected for this purpose by way of a percentage in this line.HRWK this mixer induces a partial reaction from aileron (AI) and camber fl aps (FL) during elevator activation.
294 Programming examples - Using fl ight phases The mixing direction is to be selected so that all fl aps are defl ected downward with the elevator pulled up and defl ected upward with the elevator pushed down (= hydroplane). The mix proportion is normally in the low double-digit range.Now, within the »Wing mixers« menu, switch to the "Brake settings" …Elevat. curveBRAKE SETTINGSNormalCrowAI+22%WK20%FL+66%Diff. reduct.WK2+33% 0%+33%Note:The "Brake settings" menu is switched "off" if: "Motor on C1 forward / back" in the »Model type« menu (page 94) AND the "Motor" column of the »Phase settings« menu, (page 142) are set to "yes" for the currently active fl ight phase. Change the fl ight phase, if applicable.Crow Further above in this text section, the C1 joystick was set for brake fl ap steering. In this line you determine the share with which the AI and FL should be included on actuation of C1 in the manner that both ailerons are defl ected "slightly" upward and both fl aps are defl ected as far downward as possible. Now with a simultaneous tap on the  keys of the left touch pad, a change to the »Servo display« menu can be affected for observation of servo movements and, in particular, to ensure that no infl uence on the fl aps takes place above the adjusted brake offset, e.g. +90 % and beyond to the throw limit of the C1 control ("Idle travel" of the C1 joystick).Diff. reduct. The value previously entered into the aileron differentiation line should also be entered in this "Differentiation reduction" line to fade this out during braking.Elevat. curve This line is used for the entry of any correction factor that may be required for the elevator, see page 174.Insofar as necessary, again check all fl ap throws and, by way of the »Servo adjustment« menu, adjust the servo center, the servo travel and the travel limit.It may also be time to start the initial fl ight testing, insofar as all global settings – that is to say, all fl ight-phase independent settings – are completed.Two additional fl ight phases are now to be set up below, each of which requires a somewhat different fl ap position.Therefore, switch to the menu …»Phase settings« (page 142)… and activate the assignment of phase names in the "Name" column with a brief tap on the center SET key of the right touch pad:Phase 1Phase 2Phase 3Phase 4Phase 50.1s0.1s0.1s0.1s0.1sName Fl.ph.Tim. Sw. time––––Now give Phase 1 – the "Normal phase" – that is also the phase which includes the previous settings, the name "Normal", which you select from a list with the selection keys.Phase 2 is given the name "Thermal" and Phase 3 is given the name "Speed". Now conclude the entries with a brief tap on the ESC key of the left touch pad or the SET key of the right touch pad:Phase 1Phase 2Phase 3Phase 4Phase 50.1s0.1s0.1s0.1s0.1sName Fl.ph.Tim. SW. time––––NormalThermalSpeedNow move the marker frame beyond the "Fl.ph.Tim" column to the right into the column "Sw. time" and set a "switching time" from any other phase into the given phase in order to avoid an abrupt phase change; in other words to avoid erratic changes of fl ap positions. Now try out different switching times. In this example we have specifi ed 1 s in each case:Phase 1Phase 2Phase 3Phase 4Phase 51.0s1.0s1.0s0.1s0.1sName Fl.ph.tim. Sw. time––––NormalThermalSpeedWhether or not one of the phases 1 … 8 currently has an assigned switch and the state of the switch can be seen in the "status" column at the far right.Symbol Meaning– No switch assigned+ Phase can be called via switchIndicates the currently active phaseSince, except for phase 1, all other phases are still designated with a "-" symbol, now switch in the menu to …
295Programming examples - Using fl ight phases»Phase assignment« (page 148)… and assign the previously defi ned fl ight phases to appropriate switches with which a selection from among three phases is possible.Since there is no particular priority here, assign for example switch "C" in the display to one of the two end settings of one of the two 3-way switches. Afterward put the selected switch again into its middle position, activate the switch assignment under "D" then move the selected 3-way switch again out of its middle position and into the other end position, as shown below:PHASEASSIGNMENTPrior.C1 NormalcombiABDEF267After the switch assignment is complete, use the selection keys to switch to the bottom right and activate the assignment of phase names with a brief tap on the center SET key of the right touch pad.Now close switch "7" by moving the selected 3-way switch forward.Assign the name "<2 Thermal>" to this switch position and leave the name of its "OFF" position as "<1 normal>".PHASEASSIGNMENTPrior.CcombiABDEF2672 ThermalPHASEASSIGNMENTPrior.CcombiABDEF2671 NormalFinally, move the 3-way switch to the rear toward its "6 o'clock position" and assign this switch position the name "<3 Speed>":PHASEASSIGNMENTPrior.CcombiABDEF2673 SpeedThe phase names selected in the programming are now shown, depending on the switch status, in all fl ight-phase dependent menus, see the table on page 140.Since we have already made some settings in fl ight-phase dependent menus, such as in the »Wing mixers« menu, we will now copy these settings to the «Thermal» fl ight phase. For this purpose, open the menu …»Copy / Erase« (page 72)… and switch to the "Copy fl ight phase" line:Copy flight phaseErase modelCopy model –> modelExport to SDImport from SD =>All eight possible fl ight phases are listed in "Copy from phase":Select the fl ight phase to be copied, e.g. 1. "1 Normal".7Copy from phase:35=>=>24618Normal ThermalSpeedWith a brief tap on the center 2. SET key of the right touch pad, switch the window to entry of the target memory "Copy to phase".Select phase "2 Thermal" as the target:3. 7Kopieren to phase:35=>=>4618NormalSpeedThermal2Confi rm the selection 4. with a brief tap on the center SET key of the right touch pad.A security query follows, who should be confi rmed 5. with "Yes":Phase to:to be copied?NO1 Normal 2 ThermalYESThen repeat the process with fl ight phase "3 Speed".6.
296 Programming examples - Using fl ight phasesNow we will program the required settings in the fl ight phase "Thermal" as an example.In order to vary camber fl ap positions in the «Thermal» phase, it is merely necessary to switch over to the menu …»Control adjust« (page 108)… then change Input 6 – as described beginning on page 108 – from "GL(obal)" to "PH(ase)" and fi nally assign it to an operating element. To do this, fi rst use the selection keys to switch into the "Typ" column for "I6" and change this setting from "GL" to "PH".0% +100%I5I6I7I8Typ+100%0.0 0.0– travel + –time+0% +100%+100%0.0 0.00% +100%+100%0.0 0.00% +100%+100%0.0 0.0GLGLfrCn1fr---------offsetGL frThermalPH---SELThereafter change one column to the right into the column above SEL …0% +100%I5I6I7I8Typ+100%0.0 0.0– travel + –time+0% +100%+100%0.0 0.00% +100%+100%0.0 0.00% +100%+100%0.0 0.0GLGLfrCn1fr---------offsetGL frPH---SELThermik… and now assign this input, as described in the section "Assigning transmitter controls, switches and control switches" on page 56, the left proportional slider in the middle console to, for example:0% +100%I5I6I7I8Typ+100%0.0 0.0– travel + –time+0% +100%+100%0.0 0.00% +100%+100%0.0 0.00% +100%+100%0.0 0.0GLGL Cn1fr---------offsetGL frPH---SELSl1ThermalThis control will allow the ailerons (2 + 5) and camber fl aps (6 + 7) to be continuously adjusted (as camber fl aps) with a mixer ratio yet to be set via the »Wing mixers« menu.If you assign the still free second three-stage switch to Input 6 instead, you can call three different FL positions of the ailerons (AIL) and camber changing fl aps (FL) as well as three elevator positions (Elev) in the "Thermal" fl ight phase, see the following page. (These three switch positions correspond to the center position and the two limit positions of the previously mentioned proportional rotary control.)Note:The FL and AIL fl ap positions in the two limit switch positions or in the switch center depend on the value set in the column "- Travel +" as well as the offset value and the mixer proportion set in the "Multi-fl ap menu" of the »Wing mixers« menu, see further below.Leave the (control) "- travel +" at its standard symmetric settings of + 100 % and the offset value at 0 %. Specifying a symmetric or asymmetric time for smooth switching between the three switch positions - in the example "1.0 s 1.0 s" - in the column "- Time +" is recommended:0% +100%I5I6I7I8Typ+100%0.0 0.0– travel + –time+0% +100%+100%0% +100%+100%0.0 0.00% +100%+100%0.0 0.0GLGL Cn1fr---------offsetGL frNormalPH---SELSl1 1.0 1.0In the "Multi-fl ap menu" of the …»Wing mixers« (beginning page 160)… menu, subsequently change only the values for "FL.pos" and "FL" in the «Thermal» fl ight phase:FL.pos It is here that AI and FL positioning takes place during the «Thermal» fl ight phase in the event that the assigned control (proportional control or 3-way switch) is in its neutral or middle position.FL.posDiff.Ail-tr.AIThermal AI+100%WK2FL0%+66% 0%+100%+100%–9%+100%+33%0%+33%0%+100% +66% 0%0%FL +100%0% +100%–11%FL Enter in this line the the share of infl uence for aileron and camber fl ap servos, when used as camber fl aps, is to be produced by the selected control (see above) or 3-way switch. Be sure to set these values high enough that the fl aps can be controlled with appropriate sensitivity, for example:Fl.posDiff.AiI-tr.AIThermal AI+100%WK2FL0%+66% 0%+100%+100%–9%+100%+33%0%+33%0%+100% +66% 0%0%FL +20% +25%–11%+25%+20%
297Programming examples - Using fl ight phasesA simultaneous tap on the  or  key combination of the right touch pad (CLEAR) will reset changed values back to their standard default values.Note:Due to the improved lift distribution, the degree of mix ratios should be set so that the camber fl aps are slightly "lower" than the ailerons.With a simultaneous tap on the  keys of the left touch pad, the reaction of the AI and FL servos can be checked in the »Servo display« by actuation of the selected camber fl ap control. (Push the C1 joystick to the front position so that the "AIL" and "FL" fl ap positions can be better followed on actuation of the corresponding control.) Caution:With aileron actuation the bars of the »Servo display« move in the same manner, for camber fl ap actuation they will move in the opposite manner.In the control's middle position, the – example's – • "FL-pos." setting only has a -9 % effect for the AI and -11 % for the FL.In one transmitter control end-position, AI and FL • are again closer to the neutral position because the mix ratio specifi ed in the example reduces the FL.pos setting, whereas …… in the other limit position, AIL and FL reach • the maximum downward offset prescribed by the mixer percentage.In order to set a – corrective – admix for the elevator, exit the "Multi-fl ap menu" and return to the base screen of the »Wing mixers« menu:Brake settings Aileron +50%WING MIXERSFlaps aileron +5%+5%––––––rudder2643ThermalMulti-flap menuIn the two limit positions of the three-stage switch the elevator is moved symmetrically in this example with +5 % (true to side). If, on the other hand, you use a proportional control, the elevator is defl ected according to the degree for the control position.Then make the settings for the "Speed" fl ight phase in the same manner.Notes:The digital trimming of transverse, altitude • and side work independently of these settings – depending on the setting selected in the»Stick mode« menu, page 104 – "global" or for each "phase".All setting values are model-dependent. Carry out • the settings on your fi nished model and/or during the fl ight.
298 Programming examples - Eight-fl ap wing Eight-fl ap wingThe standard features of the mc-16 HoTT support convenient control of up to 8 servos for aileron/camber fl ap functions.In the following we will consider a model without motor drive and without spoilers in the wings. The example is also based on the assumption that the model is already mechanically pre-adjusted, that the defl ection of all rudders to the correct side has been verifi ed, that these items will be checked again in the context of programming and that adaptations will be made as necessary via servo swapping at the receiver and/or in the Servo adjustment menu.The servos should be connected to a suitable receiver as follows: 7256121134910Rudder Receiver outputAileron 2 + 5Aileron 2 11 + 12Camber changing fl aps (exterior) 6 + 7Camber changing fl aps 2 (interior) 9 + 10Elevator 3Rudder 4For the control of all fl aps, up to two additional proportional controls are required in addition to the two joysticks or, alternatively up to two 2-way switches.In order to be able to control all servos, fi rst switch to the menu …"Model type" (page 94)… and select "4AIL 4FL" in the "Ailerons/fl aps" line.Tail typeMotor on C1NormalnoneAileron/camber flapsM O D E L T Y P EBrake Offset Input 1+100%SEL4 AIL 4 FLIn order to also actuate camber fl ap servos 6 + 7 (FL) and 9 + 10 (FL2) as ailerons, set the appropriate values in the "Multi-fl ap menu" of the …»Wing mixers« (beginning page 160)… menu, whereby aileron control of the two camber fl ap pairs is set in the "AI" line and the "Ail-tr." line is used to adapt aileron trimming.FL.posDiff.Ail-tr.AINormal AILE+100%FL20 0%+100+100%+100+100%+100+100%+77% +55%0%0%0%0%0%+100% +77% +55%0%FLAILE2 FLAP+88%+88%0%0%EL FL 0 0%+100+100%+100+100%+100+100%Any previous settings can be checked in the »Servo display« menu, which can be called from almost any menu position with a brief simultaneous tap on the  keys of the left touch pad. The servos 6 + 7, 9 + 10 and 11 + 12 now move • for the aileron control just like servos 2 + 5. Aileron trimming also affects all of these servos.The C1 joystick only actuates the servo connected • to receiver output 1.Caution:With aileron actuation the bars of the "Servo display" move in the same manner and in the opposite manner with camber changing fl ap actuation.The necessary fi ne-tuning of the servos is carried out in the …»Servo adjustment« (page 102)0% 100%Servo 1Servo 2Servo 3Servo 4Servo 5Rev cent.100%150% 150%– travel + – limit +0% 100%100%150% 150%0% 100%100%150% 150%0% 100%100%150% 150%0% 100%100%150% 150%… if necessary.In doing so, the basic programming of the eight-fl ap wing is completed.Camber fl ap positioning and fl ight phasesFirst program two or more fl ight phases in the »Phase settings« and »Phase assignment« menus. Also take this opportunity to change the standard default "global" for trim in the »Stick mode« menu, page 104 to "phase", thus allowing modifi cations to meet individual preferences. An example of fl ight phase programming can be found on page 288.One camber changing fl ap setting per fl ight phaseIf one camber fl ap position per fl ight phase is suffi cient, then in the Multi-fl ap meun" of the …»Wing mixers« (beginning page 160)… menu, use the "FL.pos" line to adjust the camber fl ap position(s) of servo pairs "AILE" (2 + 5), "AIL2" (11 + 12), "FLAP" (6 + 7) and "FL2" (9 + 10) for each programmed fl ight phase to meet your preferences.
299Programming examples - Eight-fl ap wingFL.posDiff.Ail-tr.AIThermal AILE+100%FL20 0%+100+100%+100+100%+100+100%+77% +55%–9%–7%–5%0%0%+100% +77% +55%0%FLAILE2 FLAP+88%+88%0%–12%EL FL 0 0%+100+100%+100+100%+100+100%Note:Whether positive or negative values must be set in the "FL.pos" line depends on the installation of the servos, among other things.However, if the alternative …variable camber fl ap positions per fl ight phase with a proportional rotary control setting is preferred,… then the basic settings for all 8 fl aps can be additionally varied on a fl ight-phase basis by way of a single control.This is accomplished via the …»Control adjust« (page 108)… menu, by assigning the same transmitter control in every fl ight phase to inputs 5, 6 and 11, for example the proportional slider, and in parallel, reducing travel to about 50 % or even less so that the trimming of fl aps has appropriate sensitivity. Deviating throw travel for individual fl ap pairs can also be matched to one another on a fl ight-phase specifi c basis by way of travel settings in a menu. For this purpose, you only have to switch the corresponding inputs from the standard default "GL" (global) to "PH" (phase):0% +25%I5I6I7I8Typ+25%0.0 0.0– travel + –time+0% +25%+25%0.0 0.00% +100%+100%0.0 0.00% +100%+100%0.0 0.0GLGL frfr---------offsetPH Sl1PH---SEL Sl1Thermal0% +100%I10I11I12I13Typ+100%0.0 0.0– travel + –time+0% +25%+25%0.0 0.00% +100%+100%0.0 0.00% +100%+100%0.0 0.0GLGL frfr---------offsetGL frPH---SELSl1ThermalNote:With the use of a switch, set the respective "Deviation" of the offset point symmetrically or asymmetrically in the "- Travel +" column.Elevator compensator with actuation of the camber changing fl apsIf it should become evident in the fl ight that a correction of the elevator is necessary after setting the fl aps, this correction can be made in the …»Wing mixers« (beginning page 160)... For this purpose, select the line "FL  EL" and enter an appropriate fl ight-phase specifi c value, for example:Brake settings Aileron +50%WING MIXERSFlaps aileron +5%+5%––––––rudder2643ThermalMulti-flap menuIf you have assigned the same control to the inputs 5, 6 and 11 – as specifi ed above – all eight fl aps move simultaneously while the elevator follows the set degree of mixture.Camber changing fl ap movement on elevator actuationCamber changing fl ap movement on elevator actuation – normally only used in "High gear" to increase the agility over the transverse axis – is also carried out in the "Multi-fl ap menu" of the...»Wing mixers« (beginning page 160)... menu. Enter the desired fl ight-phase dependent values in the line "EL  FL":FL.posDiff.Ail-tr.AIThermal AILE+100%FL20 0%+100+100%+100+100%+100+100%+77% +55%–9%–7%–5%0%0%+100% +77% +55%0%FLAILE2 FLAP+88%+88%0%–12%EL FL 5 5%+107+107% +9+ 9% +111+11%In addition to the two camber changing fl ap pairs (servos 6 + 7 and 9 + 10), the two aileron pairs (servos 2 + 5 and 11 + 12) are now tracked with the degree of mixture corresponding to the camber changing fl aps – normally opposite the elevator.
300 Programming examples - Eight-fl ap wingBrake settingsNote:The "Brake settings" menu is switched "off" if: "Motor on C1 forward / back" in the »Model type« menu, page 94, AND the "Motor" column of the »Phase settings« menu, page 142, are set to "yes" for the currently active fl ight phase. Change the fl ight phase, if applicable.The "Brake settings" sub-menu of the »Wing mixers« menu is also fl ight-phase specifi c and can be used to extend aileron pairs (2 + 5) and (11 + 12) upward as well as camber fl ap pairs "FL" (6 + 7) and "FL2" (9 + 10) downward, whereas the elevator is trimmed in parallel to this, see page 174.In order for the brake system to react to the C1 joystick as desired, however, the mixer neutral point (offset) of the brake system must be adjusted accordingly. This takes place in the menu …"Model type" (page 94)After selecting the "Brake Off." line, the C1 joystick is to be moved to the position at which the mixer for the brake system is to take effect – normally just before the forward limit position – and after selecting the appropriate value fi eld, the setpoint is defi ned with a brief tap on the center SET key of the right touch pad.If the C1 joystick is not moved over this point toward the pilot, all mixers of the brake system are carried along according to their respective degree of mixing. Below this point the mixer remains inactive, whereas the selection of "dead travel" is possible.If the model has additional brake fl aps or spoilers and your receiver has another free Output 1, you can also control this through the C1 joystick by connecting the spoiler servo to receiver Output 1. However, if you control the left and right spoiler each with its own servo, and not together, the receiver Output 8 is still available for the connection of the second spoiler servo. In this case, program the connection to the second spoiler servo as described in the section "Servos running in parallel" on page 286.Reduction of the aileron and camber changing fl ap differentiationFor the improvement of the aileron effect in the crow position, you should automatically suppress any programmed aileron differentiation. For this purpose, use "differentiation reduction" in the "Brake settings" of the »Wing mixers« menu to continuously reduce the degree of the aileron differentiation within an adjustable range when rudders are brought into crow position with the C1 joystick. For more about this, see text beginning on page 174.
301Programming examples - Delta and fl ying wingOf course, the general comments regarding the installation and the adjustment of the RC system to a model at the beginning of the wing model programming on page 268 also applies for delta and fl ying wing models! Similarly, the comments for test fl ying and fi ne-tuning the settings to the programming of fl ight phases also apply.leftrightDelta and fl ying wing models differ signifi cantly from a "normal" fl ight model due to their unique characteristic shape and geometry. The differences in the servo arrangement, on the other hand, are more subtle. For example, with "classic" delta/fl ying wing models, only two rudders are normally provided. They are responsible for both "transverse" and "height/depth", like the side rudder/elevator function on a V-tail unit.With more elaborate designs, on the other hand, it may be the case that one (or two) interior rudders have only an elevator function and the exterior ailerons only support the height/depth function, under certain circumstances. Even with a 4, or indeed up to 8, fl ap wing the use of camber fl ap functions and/or even a crow system is nowadays entirely possible. In all these cases, however, the following assignment of the receiver outputs should be used, see also page 61. Unneeded outputs a simply left free: Receiver power supplyReceiver power supplyAirbrake- or throttle servoor speed controller (electric motor)13 14 T 15 16 S77 8910 11 12Receiver power supplyTelemetry connectionReceiver power supplyfree or aux. functionfree or aux. functionSUMO / SUMI-connectionReceiver power supplyReceiver power supplyfree or aux. function or AIL2 / left EL free or aux. function or AIL2 / right EL free or aux. functionfree or flap / left elevatorfree or flap / right elevatorfree or aux. function or flap2 / left ELfree or aux. function or flap2 / right ELfree or aux. functionfree or aux. functionAIL / elevator leftAIL / elevator rightfree or aux. functionfree or rudderAccording to the assignment of the receiver outputs, in the menu … »Model type« (page 94)Tail typeMotor on C1 noneAileron/camber flaps 2 AILM O D E L T Y P EBrake Offset Input 1+100%SELDelt/fl.wing Delta and fl ying wing… the necessary settings are made:"Motor an C1" "none" or "Throttle min front/rear""Tail type" "Delt/fl .wing""Aileron/camber fl aps" "2AIL" (appears automatically). To the extent necessary, expand default "2 AIL" by 4 AIL or 1, 2 or 4 camber fl aps ("1 FL", "2 FL" or "4 FL")."Brake" stays as is, only interesting for a delta wing or fl ying wing of type "2/4 AIL 1/2/4 FL". In this case, refer to the text under "Brake offset" on page 95.These model type specifying settings primarily affect the functions made available in the »Wing mixers« menu. Therefore, the options are discussed separately for two-fl ap and multi-fl ap models in the following: Delta/fl ying wing of the type: "2AIL"Tail typeMotor on C1 noneAileron/camber flapsM O D E L T Y P EBrake Offset Input 1+100%SELDelt/fl.wing2 AILBy retaining the standard default "2 AIL" in the "Aileron/camber fl aps" line, elevator and aileron control, including the trim function, are automatically mixed by percentage on the software side. However, on the transmitter side, the percentage effect of the elevator and aileron joystick can be infl uenced in the »Dual Rate / Expo« menu, page 120.Settings in the menu …
302 Programming examples - Delta and fl ying wingThis is only then achieved for "2/4 AIL 1/2/4 FL" when, in the "Multi-fl aps menu", the …»Wing mixers« (beginning page 160)… menu is set appropriately in the "HR  WK" line to "Aileron, camber fl aps" or, if applicable, "Camber fl ap 2": FL.posDiff.Ail-tr.AINormal AILE+100%WK2FLAP0%0% 0%+100%0%+100%0%+100%0%0%0%0%+100% 0% 0%0%FLEL FL+100%+100%+100%+100%0%0%0%0%0%0% 0%0%Note:Contrary to the separately set aileron trimming, see below, the trimming is transferred proportionally to the set mixer value with the mixer "EL  FL".The following settings are model-specifi c and may not be adopted without checking that they are correct!In the top line of this "Multi-fl ap menu", analogous to "normal" four, six or eight fl ap wings, the effect of the aileron joystick will be set to aileron, camber fl ap and, if applicable to FL2. One line below, in the line "Ail-tr." line, will set the infl uence of aileron trimming on ailerons and camber changing fl aps.The setting of a differentiation is rather tricker due to the model type and should only take place based on a feel for the fl ight behavior of the model.The line "FL" should then be set to the standard default of +100 % in the "FLAP" (or "FL2") column – as shown – to 0 %, just to be safe.:»Wing mixers« (beginning page 160)… are, if need be, advantageous with the "Aileron  Rudder" mixers and are "played' with a great deal of "feel" for fl ying behavior with minor differentiation values. Aileron differentialBrake settings0%Aileron 0%WING MIXERSElevator aileron 0%0%––––––rudder2345NormalDue to the specifi c idiosyncrasies of this model type, additional settings lead to moments which cannot be compensated.Delta/fl ying wing of the type: "2 / 4 AIL 1 / 2 / 4 FL"Tail typeMotor on C1 noneAileron/camber flapsM O D E L T Y P EBrake Offset Input 1+100%SELDelt/fl.wing2 AIL 2 FLWith delta/fl ying wing constructions with more than two fl aps, more moments can be compensated for. For example, the "lifting" moment caused by the raising of the ailerons (= elevator effect) can be compensated for with camber changing fl aps lowered correspondingly wide ( = hydroplane effect).If you decide in favor of this model type and have assigned the receiver outputs in accordance with the connection plan shown above, the aileron function of the two (exterior) aileron servos will function correctly immediately, but not the elevator function of the two aileron servos and, if applicable, the (interior) camber changing fl aps. FL.posDiff.Ail-tr.AINormal AILE+100%WK2FLAP0%0% 0%+100%0%+100%0%+100%0%0%0%0%+100% 0% 0%0%FLEL FL+100%0%0%0%0%0%0%0%0% 0%0%Even though all inputs are set to "free" by default in the »Control adjust« menu, should a control be assigned sometime by mistake … then it will at least have no effect.The last line, "EL  FL", was explained at the beginning of this section.In principle, the author of this manual had programmed a delta model years ago operated with the mc-16 and a crow system as landing assistance … entirely without tilting moments through correspondingly attuned wing mixers "Brake  Aileron" and "Brake  Camber fl ap", whereby "Aileron" refers to the exterior rudder pair and "Camber fl ap" refers to the interior rudder pair. To achieve this now with the mc-16 Hott also, switch to "Brake settings" in the …»Wing mixers« (beginning page 160)… menu, and enter the values for the ailerons to be raised and the "fl aps" to be lowered in the "Crow" line so that the occurring moments compensate one another and the altitude of the model remains stable. In the process, however, you should leave the fl aps with enough "play" for the elevator function!!! Therefore, do not utilize the entire servo travel for the crow alone; for example:
303Programming examples - Delta and fl ying wingElevat. curveBRAKE SETTINGSNormalCrowAILE+55%WK20%FLAP+44%Diff. reductWK20% 0%0%You can ignore all other settings in this menu.Note:The "Brake settings" menu is switched "off" if: "Motor on C1 forward / back" in the »Model type« menu (page 94) AND the "Motor" column of the »Phase settings« menu, (page 142) are set to "yes" for the currently active fl ight phase. Change the fl ight phase, if applicable.Similarly, a modern, tapered fl ying wing air craft can also be operated. With some of these models there are also interior and exterior rudders: The prior is in front of the center of gravity and the latter is behind. A downward throw of the central rudder(s) increases the ascending forces and has an elevator effect. An upward throw has the opposite effect. On the exterior ailerons, on the other hand, the effect is just the opposite: A downward throw shows an elevator effect and vice versa. With appropriate adjustment of the "leading" mixer to the setting of curve mixers in order to achieve a supporting effect from the external rudder pair with only extreme joystick defl ection in the height/depth direction, "everything" is possible here. The author of this manual uses a curve mixer for his model, which is defi ned by a total of four points:Curve MIX 9CurvePointOutputInput 0%0%?+–100O U T P U T20%EL 513offIn this example the two interpolation points 1 and 2 are each at 0 % as well as the left edge point at +60 % and the right edge point at -65 %. In conclusion, the curve was rounded.In this case: Regardless of which type of servo arrangement was selected, any type of differentiation should be set with caution! On a tail-less model, differentiations show a single-sided height/depth elevator effect, so we urgently recommend beginning at least the initial fl ights with a setting of 0 %! Over the course of the further fl ight testing, under certain circumstances it may be advantageous to experiment with differentiations deviating from zero. With larger models, rudders in the winglets - the "ears" mounted on the wing ends - can be benefi cial. If these are controlled with two separate servos, with the use of one of the mixers in the menu ...»Dual mixer« (page 206)… the rudder signal can be "split" very easily and even differentiated, whereby the second rudder servo is connected to one of the still free receiver outputs. For a model with a "Delt/fl .wing" tail type, receiver output "5" should still be unoccupied and it can then be used as indicated below:Diff.DUAL MIXERMixer 1Mixer 25RUMixer 3Mixer 4?? ???? ???? ??+66%0%0%0%Differentiation is necessary in this case because, when fl ying curves, the respective exterior rudders will have a greater curve radius than the interior rudders, so this is comparable to the front wheel positions on a car when driving in curves.Note:The rudder can only be differentiated as programmed above!If these two rudders are also to defl ect outward upon actuation of a brake system with the C1 joystick, this can be achieved, for example, by setting an additional mixer "C1  5" with an appropriate travel setting. Set the mixer's offset according to personal preference, "front" (+100 %) or "rear" (-100 %), because the winglet rudder should defl ect outward only for proportional extension.Independent of this, fi nish up by uncoupling the "false" control function from the control channel to which the second servo was connected – even though all inputs in the »Control adjust« menu are "free" by default – by way of the fl ight-phase independent menu …»MIX-only channel« (page 205)... for safety's sake! In keeping with the above example, control channel 5 should therefore be set to "MIX only".
304 Programming examples - F3A model F3A modelF3A models are a part of the group of motor-driven winged models. They are powered by a combustion or electric motor. Models with electric motors can be used in both the electric acrobatic class F5A and are also competitive in the international model acrobatic class F3A.The basic comments and notices for the mechanical installation of a remote steering system, which was already referred to in the fi rst programming example on page 268, also applies, of course, for F3A models and does not need to be mentioned here again.Faultlessly constructed F3A models exhibit a largely neutral fl ying behavior. Ideally, they react with a good nature but precisely to control movements without the individual fl ight axes infl uencing one another.F3A models are controlled with ailerons, elevator and rudders. Normally, each aileron is actuated by a separate servo. There is also the regulation of the drive output of the motor (throttle function) and a retractable landing gear in many cases. The assignment of the channels 1 to 5, therefore, do not differ from the previously described winged models. The additional "Retractable landing gear" function is to be provided on one of the auxiliary channels 6 to 9. It is best to actuate the landing gear with a switch without center position. In addition, another mix offset for the carburetor can – if necessary – be provided. You normally use one of the two proportional controls on the transmitter, which actuates one of the unassigned auxiliary channels.Receiver power supplyfree or aux. functionfree or aux. functionRudderAileron or left aileronElevator or 1st elevatorfree or 2nd elevator or aux. functionReceiver power supplyThrottle servo or speed controller (electric motor)Right aileronfree or landing gear or aux. functionfree or fuel mixture or aux. functionfree or aux. functionfree or aux. function13 14 T 15 16 S77 8910 11 12Receiver power supplyfree or aux. functionfree or aux. functionTelemetrieanschlussReceiver power supplyfree or aux. functionfree or aux. functionSUMO / SUMI-connectionReceiver power supplyReceiver power supplyWith the assignment of auxiliary channels at the transmitter, we recommend making sure that the operating elements required for this are easily within reach, because during fl ight – especially in competition – you have "very little time" to release the joystick.Programming procedureSince the basic programming of the transmitter was already described in detail on pages 268 … 275, only F3A-specifi c tips are added here.In the menu …»Servo adjustment« (page 102)0% 100%Servo 1Servo 2Servo 3Servo 4Servo 5Rev cent.100%150% 150%– travel + – limit +0% 100%100%150% 150%0% 100%100%150% 150%0% 100%100%150% 150%0% 100%100%150% 150%… the settings for the servos are carried out. Experience has shown that working with at least 100 % servo throw is benefi cial, because the control precision is signifi cantly better if greater servo travel is used. This should already be taken into account during the construction of the model in the design of the rudder linkages. Check the servo's direction of rotation. The servo center should be adjusted mechanically, insofar as possible. Any corrections can be made on the software side in the third column during the initial test fl ights. Through the menu …"Model type" (page 94)… the idle trim is activated for Channel 1 (normally "rear", because full throttle is "front"). The trimming then only works in the idle direction:Tail typeMotor on C1NormalAileron/camber flaps 1 AILM O D E L T Y P EBrake Offset Input 1+100%SELThr. min rearThe remaining settings are made or left as shown in the fi gure.
305Programming examples - F3A modelAfter the model is test-fl own and trimmed, we recommend reducing trim travel for the elevator and ailerons The model has signifi cantly less of a reaction to a movement of the trim wheel. "Over-trimming" can be avoided, because with full trim travel, under certain circumstances, the movement by just one trimming step can have too strong of an effect: Therefore, the model which previously pulled slightly to the left, hangs somewhat to the right after the trimming. For this purpose, switch to the menu …»Stick mode« (page 104)… and reduce the number of trim steps in the "Tr.s tep" column appropriately:globalChannel 1AileronElevatorRudderTrim0.0sTr.s tep – time +global 0.0s0.0sglobal 0.0s0.0s0.0s0.0s0.0s444Phase2It may also be necessary to assign appropriate operating elements and inputs for other model features, e.g. retractable landing gear, fuel-mix, etc. Make these assignments with the …»Control adjust« (page 108) … menu where a specifi c input can be assigned to an operating element, for example, the landing gear can be assigned to an ON/OFF switch on Input 6 and the fuel-mix can be assigned to one of the proportional sliders in the middle console, e.g. the center slider to Input 7. However, since it involves fl ight-phase independent settings, leave the standard default "GL" in the "Type" column: +33%+33%+33%AileronElevatorRudderDUAL–––SEL–––––––––100%100%100%EXPOSELNormal–––(Some experts even use up to a +60 % exponential ratio.)Since (some) combustion motors do not react linearly to movements of the throttle joystick, through the menu …»Channel 1 curve« (page 128)… a "bowed" or, in other words, non-linear throttle curve can be set. Four-cycle motors with Roots pumps, in particular, such as OS Max FS 120, require a steep ascension of the curve in the lower speed range. However, the corresponding values must be adapted. The C1 control curve for the motor could appear as follows:Channel 1 C U R V ECurvePointOutputInput –50%0%1+–100O U T P U T0%Normalon1Only three interpolation points, "L" at -100 %, "H" at +100 % and "1" at -50 % give the control travel the rounded curve above.Basic procedure:Move the C1 joystick and, along with it the vertical • line in the graph display, toward idle to about 0% +100%I5I6I7I8Typ+100%0.0 0.0– travel + –time+0% +100%+100%0.0 0.00% +100%+100%0.0 0.00% +100%+100%0.0 0.0GLGLGL frSl2------------offsetGL frNormal2SELThe control travel of the operating elements must be adapted and can also be reversed with a negative travel setting. Note:A delay time can be specifi ed for raising and lowering the retractable landing gear, however, such a time delay is not effective for landing gear servo C 713 MG, order no. 3887.F3A models fl y comparatively fast and thus react "harshly" to the control movements of the servos. However, since small control movements and corrections are not optically perceptible, because this results in inevitable point deductions in competition, we recommend setting an exponential control characteristic of the joystick. For this purpose, switch to the menu …»Dual Rate / Expo« (page 120)Experience has shown positive results with values of approx. + 30 % on the ailerons, elevator and rudders, which you set in the right column with the selection keys. In order to be able to control the F3A model to run smoothly and cleanly:
306 Programming examples - F3A model-50 % of control travel then briefl y tap on the center SET key of the right touch pad.In order to attain the curve shape shown, raise this • point with the selection keys to approx. 0 % in the inverse video value fi eld in the "Point" line.Finally, round the characteristic curve by moving • the marker frame left, select with a brief tap on the center SET key of the right touch pad then change the value from "Off" to "On" with the selection keys.If additional interpolation points between the left ("L") and right ("H") end are necessary, repeat Steps 2 and 3 analogously.Since F3A models normally have two aileron servos, experience has shown that it is benefi cial to move both ailerons upward somewhat when landing. In the process, the model usually approaches somewhat slower and, above all, more steadily for the landing. In order to do this it is necessary to program mixers through the menu …»Free mixers« (beginning page 193)... accordingly.The ailerons are extended as landing assistance depending on the position of the throttle stick, starting from approximately half throttle toward idle. The further the joystick is moved toward idle, the more the ailerons defl ect upward. Just the opposite applies when "throttling"; the ailerons are retracted again in order to prevent a sudden rise of the model. In order to prevent the model from climbing with the aileron landing fl aps extended, the elevator must be mixed in somewhat.For this purpose, set the two linear mixers shown in the following display. The activation of the mixers takes place with one and the same switch, such as "8", to which both mixers must be assigned with identical switching direction. 5LinearMIX 1type C1from – Begr. +ELC1????????????––––LinearMIX 2LinearMIX 3LinearMIX 4LinearMIX 5to AdjustTr––––––––Then switch to the second respective display screen in order to adjust the respective mixing degrees. In both cases the mixer neutral point is at the C1 control center.Enter 0 % above the control center after selection of the ASY fi eld for both mixers and below the control center toward idle for:MIX 1: -60 % ... -80 % andMIX 2: -5 % ... -10 % ...Example Linear MIX 1:C1Mix input0%Offset0%5Linear MIX 1–70%SYM ASY SETSTOWith this, the base setup model of an F3A model is concluded.Compensation of model-specifi c errorsUnfortunately, there are nearly always minor model-specifi c "errors" through the mixers of a computer remote control which must be compensated for. However, before you begin with these settings, it should be ensured that the model is faultlessly constructed, optimally balanced over the longitudinal and transverse axes and the down thrust and side thrust are correct.Infl uence of longitudinal and transverse axes by the rudderThe actuation of the rudder often infl uences the behavior of the longitudinal and transverse axes. This is particularly disruptive in so-called knife-edge fl ying, in which the lift of the model with the rudder defl ected should be created by the fuselage alone. In the process, the model can rotate and change directions as though it were controlled with the ailerons and elevator. Therefore, a correction over the transverse axis (elevator) and/or the longitudinal axis (ailerons) must be made, if applicable.This can also be done easily with the »Free mixers« available in the mc-16 HoTT system. For example, if the model drifts away to the right over the longitudinal axis with the rudder extended in knife-edge fl ying, the aileron can be defl ected slightly to the left with the mixer. Changes in direction over the transverse axis can be performed analogously with a mixer on the elevator:Correction over the transverse axis (elevator)• Linear MIX 3: "Rudd  Elev"Asymmetric setting. The appropriate values must be tested in fl ight.Correction over the longitudinal axis (aileron)• Linear MIX 4: "Rudd  AIL"Asymmetric setting. The appropriate values must be tested in fl ight.Relatively small mixer values are usually suffi cient in this case, the range lies below 10 %, but can vary from model to model. With the use of curve mixers, the mix ratios can be adapted even more precisely to the corresponding throw of the rudder. Again, no values are indicated for this, because this would be model-specifi c.
307Programming examples - F3A modelVertical ascent and descentSome models have a tendency to deviate from the ideal line in vertical ascents and descents. In order to compensate for this, it is necessary to have a center position of the elevator dependent on the throttle joystick position. If, for example, the model begins to hold off on its own in the vertical descent with a throttled motor, some elevator must be mixed in at this throttle position.For this purpose, program a free mixer "C1  Elev". The corresponding mixer values are normally under 5 % and must also be tested in fl ight. Turning away over the longitudinal axis in idleIf the throttle is reduced, the model may begin to turn away over the longitudinal axis in idle. This can be counteracted with the aileron. However, the more elegant solution is to correct this effect with a free mixer "C1  Ail". The input values here are usually very low (approx. 3 %) and the settings should be made in calm weather. It often suffi ces to only use the mixer between half throttle and idle. Therefore program the mixer asymmetrically, if applicable.Turning away with the ailerons/landing fl aps extendedIf you move the ailerons upward for the landing, the result is often a turning away over the longitudinal axis due to various servo paths of the aileron servos or due to design precisions. Therefore, the model begins to automatically hang the left or right wing. This is also easy to compensate for with a mixer "C1  AIL" depending on the position of the ailerons/landing fl aps. The mixer must be switched on and off with the same switch with which you can switch the aileron/landing fl ap function on and off (see previous page). Therefore, it only works with the aileron/landing fl ap function activated. The appropriate value must be tested in fl ight. One additional comment regarding …"FAIL-SAFE setting"You utilize the safety potential of this option by the safety potential by programming at least the motor throttle position for combustion models to idle and the motor function for electrically powered models to stop for a Fail-Safe case. If interference should occur, the model is then less likely to fl y off on its own and cause damage to property or even personal injury. If you additionally program the fail-safe positions of the rudders to that the model fl ies in gently sinking circles in the event of a failure, there is a good chance that the model even lands relatively gently on its own in the event of a continuing connection failure. You also have suffi cient time to re-establish the connection if the entire 2.4 GHz frequency band is temporarily disrupted. In the receiver's condition as supplied, however, the servos maintain their last validly recognized position ("hold") in the event of a fail-safe situation. As described on page 208, you can defi ne a "Fail-safe position" for each receiver servo output (Fail-safe mode).SummaryThe settings described on this page are especially useful for the "expert" who would like to have an entirely neutral, precisely fl ying F3A model acrobatic model at his or her disposal. It should be mentioned this takes a lot of time, effort, instinct and know-how. Experts even program during the fl ight. To do this, however, is not suggested for an advanced beginner who ventures into an F3A acrobatic model. It would be best to turn to an experienced pilot and carry out the settings step by step until the model has the desired neutrality in its fl ight behavior. Then the pilot can begin to learn the not always easy to perform acrobatic fi gures with a model which fl ies faultlessly.
308 Programming examples - Helicopter models Helicopter models With this programming example, you must have already covered the description of the individual menus and you must be familiar with the use of the transmitter. In addition, the helicopter's mechanical construction should correspond exactly to the corresponding manual. The electronic capabilities of the transmitter should by no means be used to straighten out rough mechanical imprecision.As is often the case in life, there are also various ways and possibilities to achieve a specifi c goal when programming the mc-16 HoTT. The following example should provide you with a clearer structure for logical programming. If there are multiple possibilities, the simplest and most clearly arranged solutions are recommended fi rst. In order for the helicopter to function faultlessly later on, you are, of course, free to try out other solutions which may be better for you.The programming example is based on the clockwise-rotating STARLET 50 helicopter from Graupner with three pivot points each offset 120 ° of the swashplate type "3sv(2 Roll)", beginner adjustment without increased throttle curve; without heading-lock gyro system and without transmitter-side gyro infl uence of the "normal operating mode" and without speed regulator. This simple program was also consciously selected to demonstrate that a helicopter which fl ies really well can also be attained with relatively little (programming) effort. However, we do not want to dispense entirely with the enhancement possibilities: Therefore, after the basic description, you will fi nd adjustment information for the gyro effect, the speed regulators and for the fl ight-phase programming.Note:If you are not interested in the combustion helicopter described here, but a electric helicopter, please continue reading anyhow! With the exception of the omitted idle settings, you can practically adopt most of the settings described in the following unchanged.In the scope of the initial commissioning of a new transmitter, in the selection menu …»General basic settings« (page 256)Battery typeBattery warningTouch SenseTop LCD ContrastLi-IoDisplay lightRegion23.60V0EUROunlim.GENERAL BASIC SETTINGSOwners name H-J SandbrunnerPre-set stick mode 1Pre-set DSC Output PPM10Pre-set Pitch min rearStick warning: unlim.Pre-set modulationOwn phase nameOwn phase nameHoTT210Bottom LCD Contrast 0Own phase name 1Voice volumeVario volumeTouch-beeps vol.7fr –––SEL SEL7fr –––7fr –––Power-on/off beep yes… some basic information should be entered. This serves various purposes:The fi rst three lines of this menu can be used to individually regulate, in increments between 0 and 10, the volume of voice and signal output emitted via the built-in loudspeakers or the transmitter's headset connector. The fourth line of this menu is used to record the transmitter owner's name Select the characters for this from an extensive character list on the second display screen, which can be reached via
309Programming examples - Helicopter modelsthe  symbol with a brief tap on the center SET key of the right touch pad: !"#$%&’()Owners name@ACDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ[¥]^_?+,–./0123456789:;¢ÇüéâäàåçêëèïîìÄÅÉæÆôöòûùÖÜ`abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz{|}~H-J SandbThe pre-set for "Stick mode" can be selected according to the criteria described on page 258.The same applies to the pre-sets for "Modulation" and "DSC Output".The pre-set for "Pitch min" is a matter of personal control habits. The pre-sets established here for "Stick mode", "Modulation", "DSC Output" and "Pitch forward/back" will be initially adopted when a new model memory is created but they can also be freely changed within a given model memory location to any other available option.The settings in the "Top/Bottom LCD Contrast" lines determine the legibility of the given displays under poor light conditions and the setting in the "Display light" line determines how long display lighting remains illuminated after the transmitter is switched on or after the last key actuation.The selection of "yes/no" in the "Power-on/off beep" line determines whether the "recognition melody" is to sound when the transmitter is switched off or on again.The "Battery type" line specifi es whether the transmitter is supplied with current from a "NiMH or a “Lith." battery, and the "Battery warning" line below it specifi es the voltage at which the transmitter's low-voltage warning should trigger. Do not enter a value that is too low here, so you have enough time to land your helicopter.The setting made in the "Stick warning" line determines how long the transmitter will wait after the last actuation of an operating element before issuing visual and acoustic warning signals to indicate it is still switched on. Following the warning, you still have about one minute to actuate the transmitter so the warning will abate. Otherwise the transmitter will switch itself off when this minute expires.The value set in the "Touch Sense" line is a matter of adapting the transmitter to personal preferences. And, in the event the transmitter is to be operated in France, the setting in the "Region" line is important: The legal regulations in France require that the "FRANCE" option is selected instead of the default setting "EURO".Later on, the ten "Own phase name" lines can be used to create one's own phase names if none of the pre-set phase names appear appropriate.Once these settings have been taken care of, commissioning continues with the menu …"Model select" (page 69)Use the selection keys to pick a free memory location …0304050106R16 free free free free00:12h free02… and call it up with a brief tap on the center SET key of the right touch pad. In the display which then appears, use the  key of the left or right touch pad …Select model type (free model memory)… to select the "helicopter" model type. The display immediately switches to the base screen if the selection is confi rmed by a brief tap on the center SET key of the right touch pad. Notes:If the "Select model type" option has been • opened, the process cannot be canceled. Even if you switch off the transmitter, this selection must be made! In any case, you can undo this by subsequently deleting the respective model memory.If the "Throttle too high" warning appears, it can • be erased by turning the right-side proportional rotary control to its forward limit.If battery voltage is too low, the model switchover • cannot be made due to reasons of safety. An appropriate message will appear in the screen:not possible nowvoltage too lowOnce this fi rst hurdle is cleared, the connection of the receiver built into the model at this model memory must be made in the menu …
310 Programming examples - Helicopter models… which must be assembled from characters available on the second page of the "Model name" line: !"#$%&’()Model name Starle@ACDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ[¥]^_?+,–./0123456789:;¢ÇüéâäàåçêëèïîìÄÅÉæÆôöòûùÖÜ`abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz{|}~After entering the "Model name", the settings adopted from »General basic settings« for "Stick mode" and "DSC Output" are to be checked and changed as necessary for the given memory location.The entry fi eld in the "Info" line can be used if needed for a notice of up to 15 characters in length. This notice will then be helpful in the selection of models and so on.Another option is to be activated in the "Autorotation" line. Even if you are not an advanced pilot, the autorotation switch should at least be set as an emergency shutoff switch for the motor. Do this by selecting the "Autorotation" line with a brief tap on the center SET key of the right touch pad, activate the switch assignment, assign a 2-way switch, e.g. "2", an put it in its "ON" position.BASIC SETTINGS, MODELSET SETRF transmit onRF range test 99sDSC Output PPM102IAutorotationThe selected switch should be in a location on the transmitter which is easily within reach – without letting loose of a joystick – e.g. above the pitch joystick. »Basic settings, model« (page 84 … 92)... To this end, switch to the line "Module".Model nameStick modeModule1n/aBASIC SETTINGS, MODELn/aInfon/an/aStarletSELHoTT BD1 BD2 BD3 BD42345g/090911Note:After confi rmation of the model selection in the base screen, if you confi rm the message appearing in the screen for a few seconds …BIND. N/AOK… with a tap on the SET key of the right touch pad, this line will be accessed automatically.The line "Module" initiates a binding process between model memory and receiver, as described in detail on page 88. Otherwise, you cannot address the receiver.Afterward, use the  selection key of the left or right four-way pad to move up to the fi rst line and begin with actual model programming in the "Model name" line. Now give the model memory an appropriate name, …Model nameStick modeModule1n/aBASIC SETTINGS, MODELn/aInfon/an/aStarletSELHoTT BD1 BD2 BD3 BD42345g/090911Note:More more information about the setting of this "emergency shutoff", see the beginning of the second following double-page.Another tip:Make a habit of giving all switches a common switch-on direction; then a quick glance over the transmitter prior to the fl ight should suffi ce – all switches off. Setting options for the "Autorotation C1 position", "Motor stop", "Marking" and "Stick warning" are not yet of particular interest …… and the "Auto Trim" line should only be assigned to a switch if "Initial trimming" is to be performed on the helicopter in the context of a trimming fl ight. Following such a fl ight, this switch should be erased once again, for reasons of safety.Additional settings specifi c to helicopters are made in the menu …»Helicopter type« (page 98)In the "Swashplate type" line, select control for swashplate or pitch function. In this example: "3Sv(2rol)".The "Linearis. swashpl." line is not yet of interest.In the "Rotor direction" line, it is established whether the rotor – as viewed from above – turns to the right (clockwise) or left (counter-clockwise). In other words, whether it rotates counterclockwise or clockwise. In this example "right". Check the default for "Pitch min", which was adopted from »General basic settings«, to confi rm that the entry "front" or "rear" is in keeping with personal preferences or should be changed.
311Programming examples - Helicopter modelsLinearis. swashpl.Swashplate typeno1 ServoRotor direction rightHELTYPEPitch min. rearSELBoth "Expo throttle lim." as well as "Thr. limit warning", in bottom line of this display, are currently of no interest.By now, the servos should be plugged into the receiver in the intended sequence:Receiver power supplyReceiver power supply13 14 T 15 16 S77 8910 11 12Receiver power supplyTelemetry connectionReceiver power supplyfree or aux. functionfree or aux. functionSUMO / SUMI-connectionReceiver power supplyReceiver power supplyfree or aux. functionfree or aux. functionfree or aux. functionfree or aux. functionfree or aux. functionfree or aux. functionTail rotor servo (gyro system)Roll 1 servoPitch-axis 1 servofree or speed governor or aux. functionRoll 2 servofree or aux. functionThrottle servo or speed controllerGyro gainNote:Please note that on the newer Graupner-mc- and mx- remote control systems, the fi rst pitch servo and the throttle servo are swapped in comparison to older systems.Mix ratios and mix directions for swashplate pitch, roll and nick servos are already pre-adjusted to +61 % in the menu …»Swashplate mixer« (page 208)SWASH MIXERPitchRollPitch ax.+61%+61%+61%SEL. If the swashplate mixer should not follow joystick movements properly, fi rst change the mixing directions from "+" to "-" before changing servo directions in the menu …»Servo adjustment« (page 102)0% 100%Servo 1Servo 2Servo 3Servo 4Servo 5Rev cent.100%150% 150%– travel + – limit +0% 100%100%150% 150%0% 100%100%150% 150%0% 100%100%150% 150%0% 100%100%150% 150%... This menu can also be used to adapt travel and direction for individual servos. However, one must attempt to retain 100 % servo travel so as to achieve the best possible resolution and control accuracy. The direction of travel is determined with "Rev." and, in the process, make sure that the direction is correct. The tail rotor servo must run so that the nose (!) of the helicopter follows the tail joystick direction. In the menu …»Stick mode« (page 106)Thr trimPitch/thrRollPitch axTail rot.Trim0.0sTr. step – time +global 0.0sglobal 0.0sglobal 0.0s0.0s0.0s0.0s0.0s4444… the column "Tr. step" is used to set the increment size of each "click" on the digital trim keys. The C1 trimming only affects the throttle servo for the helicopter. At this point there is no need to go into the particulars of this trimming ("cut-off trim") once again. Please read more about this on page 58. (Thanks to digital trimming, trim values can be saved automatically when a model change is affected. In the mc-16 HoTT system these can even be stored automatically when a change of fl ight phase takes place.).An additional setting which is specifi c to helicopters can also be made in this menu in which you determine which function the trim slider on the pitch joystick should have. This is accomplished by selecting the "Throttle limit" setting in the "Throttle" line or leaving it as it is. This roughly corresponds to trim for the familiar idle trim function. If the trim indicator marker is moved all the way forward by "turning" the trim wheel (remember: "pitch min rear" = "throttle forward") the throttle limit will later take over the throttle limit for throttle enable seamlessly in the menu …
312 Programming examples - Helicopter models»Control adjust« (page 112 … 119)0%I13 +100%I14I15Tl16Typ+100%– travel + –time+0% +100%+100%0.0 0.00% +100%+100%0.0 0.00% +100%+100%0.0 0.0GLGLGLfrfrLv1---------offsetGLNormal0.0 0.0fr ---SET… where input "Tl16" is assigned and all other inputs are "fr(ee)" by default.This "Tl16" input serves as the throttle limiter. Its effect is exclusively on output "6", where the throttle servo is connected. The throttle limiter is assigned by default to the right-side proportional rotary control.Once again, as a reminder:With the user of the "throttle limiter" function, you • do not have to program a fl ight phase "throttle pre-selection". The throttle limiter does not control the throttle • servo; it only limits the travel of the throttle servo in the full throttle direction according to its position. The throttle servo is generally controlled from the pitch joystick via »Helicopter mixer« menu setting/s for throttle curve/s, which is why input 6 must absolutely remain "free". Refer to pages 180 through 182 in this manual about this. The C1 trimming also affects only the throttle servo • for the helicopter. At this point there is no need to go into the particulars of this trimming once again. Please read more about this on page 58. (Thanks to the digital trimming, trim can be automatically saved values with a model changeover as well as with a change of the fl ight phase).A detailed description of the idle run base setup • model and the adjustment of idle and throttle limit can be found beginning on page 117.Then switch to the "travel" column with the  selection key of the left or right touch pad and increase the now inversely highlighted value from +100 % to +125 % with a fully opened throttle limiter with a brief tap on the center SET key of the right touch pad:0%I13 +100%I14I15Tl16Typ+100%– travel + –time+0% +100%+100%0.0 0.00% +100%+100%0.0 0.00%+100%0.0 0.0GLGLGLfrfrLv1---------offsetGLNormal0.0 0.0fr ---+125%SETIn doing so, it is assured that the throttle limiter releases the entire throttle travel with the pitch joystick later during fl ight.Adjustment notice for electric helicopters:Since electric drive systems have no need for an idle setting, the basic confi guration of settings for an electrically-powered helicopter merely involves making sure that the control range of the throttle limiter is both higher and lower than the adjustment range of the speed controller (usually -100 % to +100 %) by a safe margin. If necessary, therefore, the adjustment of the "travel" setting of the throttle limiter described above must be modifi ed accordingly, for example, to symmetric 110 %. The further adjustment, however, can take place analogously to the combustion helicopter described here.With this process, you have not carried out the basic settings for the transmitter as they are needed again later for further model programming. The actual helicopter-specifi c settings take place primarily in the menu …» Helicopter mixer« (page 176 … 191)Channel 1Channel 1PitchThrottleTail rot.Tail rot. 0%Roll 0%ThrottleRollThrottleTail rot.NickNickThrottleTail rot.Swashplate rotationSwashplate limiter0%0%0%0°offGyro suppression 0%Gyro offset 0%NormalThe "Pitch" function appears right in the fi rst line. A tap on the center SET key of the right touch pad will cause a switch to the corresponding sub-menu. The graphic representation of the pitch curve appears here; it is initially only defi ned by the points "L" and "H":PitchCurveoff PointOutputInput –50%–50%?+–100O U T P U T0%NormalNow place point "1" in the center with a brief tap on the center SET key of the right touch pad:
313Programming examples - Helicopter modelsPitchCurveoff PointOutputInput 0%0%1+–100O U T P U T10%NormalAlways try to make due with these three points initially; more points can "over-complicate" the matter and are more of a burden at this point.The reference point for the hovering should generally be the mechanical center position of the pitch joystick, because this position comes closest to the normal control feel. Although the curve adjustment enables other settings, you must know exactly what you are doing. First set the pitch joystick in the center. The servos which you had previously set according to manufacturer specifi cations have their levers at positioned perpendicularly to the servo housing (normally). A hovering pitch value of 4° to 5° is now mechanically set at the control rods to the rotor blades. In principle, all known helicopters fl y with this setting. Then move the pitch joystick towards maximum pitch until the limit position. (The vertical line shows you the current joystick position.) Now change the pitch curve's point "H" with the selection keys of the right touch pad such that the main rotor's blades have a maximum pitch of about 9°. A value of +50 % should be about right.PitchCurveoff PointOutputInput +100%+50%1+–100O U T P U T1+50%NormalNote:A rotor blade adjustment gage, such as the Graupner pitch gage, order no. 61, is quite useful for reading the angle. Now move the pitch joystick toward the pitch minimum position until its limit position. Depending on the ability of the pilot, adjust the value of point "L" so that the blade angle of approach is 0 to -4°. Now a slightly pitched line arises at the hovering points, the so-called pitch curve, which can appear as follows:PitchCurveoff PointOutputInput –100%–75%1+–100O U T P U T1–75%NormalNow you can, if you like, move the marker frame upward with the selection keys to the "Curve" line and after activation of the value fi eld with a brief tap on the center SET key of the right touch pad, set the curve function of the mixer to "on".PitchCurvePointOutputInput –100%–75%1+–100O U T P U T1–75%NormalonIf you now switch to autorotation phase – at the bottom left of the display the fl ight phase name "Autorot" appears – the "old" pitch curve is again:PitchCurveoff PointOutputInput –50%–50%?+–100O U T P U T10%AutorotNow carry out the same setting as before in the normal phase. Only at point "H“ – at maximum pitch – is it possible to increase pitch angle by about 2°. In doing so, you will have somewhat more of an angle to catch the model later on (1).After setting pitch curve, move the autorotation switch back then return to the helicopter mixer menu selection with a brief tap on the center ESC key of the left touch pad. In that display, change to the "Channel 1  Throttle" line to set the throttle curve.The adjustment range for idle trim must fi rst be matched to the throttle curve. Do this by putting the pitch joystick into its minimum position then set point "L" to about +15 %. Channel 1Curveoff PointOutputInput 0%+15%L+–100O U T P U TThrottleNormal+15%With the throttle limiter closed and idle trim completely open, move the pitch joystick back and forth somewhat at the minimum limit position. The throttle servo may not move with it in the process. No you have established a seamless transition from the idle trim to the throttle curve. The further settings along the throttle curve must be carried out later in fl ight.
314 Programming examples - Helicopter modelsIf you switch from this graphic to the autorotation phase for testing purposes, the following appears instead of the accustomed representation:offC1 ThrottleAutorotThat means that this mixer is switched off and the throttle servo is switched to a fi xed value, which can be adjusted as follows: Return to the menu list with a tap on the ESC key. As long as you are still in the autorotation phase, new sub-menus are listed; specifi cally:Pitch–90%Tail rot. offset AR 0%Throttle position ARGyro suppression 0%Gyro offset 0%SELAutorotThe line "Thr. setting AR" is important. Enter the value to the right, depending on servo direction, to either approximately +125 % or -125 %. Pitch–125%Tail rot. offset AR 0%Throttle position ARGyro suppression 0%Gyro offset 0%SELAutorot In doing so, the motor is safely switched off in the autorotation phase (in case of emergency). Later, when you have gained enough experience to practice the autorotation fl ight, a more stable idle can be entered here.Adjustment notice for electric helicopters:Since the motor must also be shut off for electrically powered helicopters in case of an emergency, this setting is adopted without change. The further sub-menus are not important at the moment. By switching off "autorotation", it returns to the fi rst menu list.Select the "Channel 1  Tail rot." settings page in order to set static torque compensation for the tail rotor. In this case, also work with a maximum of three interpolation points; everything else is reserved for the experienced pilot. Do this by changing the heading-lock systems from their intended uniform pre-setting of 0 % at point "L" (minimum pitch) to -30 % and at the opposite end, at point "H" to +30 % (maximum pitch). These values may have to be corrected in fl ight. It may also be necessary to set point "1" in the middle.Channel 1Curveoff PointOutputInput 0%0%?+–100O U T P U T0%Tail rot.Now, for testing purposes, switch back to the autorotation phase. Here the setting is also deactivated; the tail servo no longer reacts to pitch movements (no torque usually arises when the main rotor is not powered). All additional interpolation points are not currently of importance yet.If, contrary to the default setting, the gyro has a transmitter-side sensitivity setting, another free proportional control will be needed. This can be assigned in the …»Control adjust« (page 112 … 119)… menu to "Gyr7" input. Activate the control assignment with a brief tap on the center SET key of the right touch pad then move the selected control until its control number appears in the display: 0%I5 +88%Thr6Gyr7I8Typ+111%– travel + –time+0% +100%+100%0.0 0.00% +100%+100%0.0 0.00% +100%+100%0.0 0.0GLGLGLfrSl1fr---------offsetGLNormal0.0 0.0SETfr ---Conclude this entry with a brief tap on the ESC key of the left touch pad then change to the column "- travel +" with the  selection key of the left or right touch pad. After a tap on the center SET key of the right touch pad, the gyro's maximum sensitivity can be set in the value fi eld displayed in inverse video, e.g. to 50 %. To this end, move the selected control into its middle position or, if applicable also to the side, such that only one value fi eld is displayed in inverse video:0%I5 +88%Thr6Gyr7I8Typ+111%– travel + –time+0% +100%+100%0.0 0.00% 0.0 0.00% +100%+100%0.0 0.0GLGLGLfrSl1fr---------offsetGLNormal0.0 0.0SETfr ---+50%+50%This produces a fi xed value for as long as the control remains at the right limit position. The correct value must be adjusted in fl ight.
315Programming examples - Helicopter modelsIn the process, however, always observe the adjustment instructions accompanying your gyro sensor, because your helicopter will not be able to fl y otherwise!To conclude this initial programming, a few words should be mentioned about the menu …»Channel 1 curve« (page 131)Channel 1 C U R V ECurveoff PointOutputInput 0%0%?+–100O U T P U T0%This function is a type of "convenient exponential curve" for the throttle/pitch joystick and the mixer functions connected to it.If ever, this curve should only be applied "cautiously" at the very end, when all adjustments have been made. It should never be used for the throttle/pitch adjustment! The over-lapping result in "nasty" effects.With this, all helicopter-specifi c settings which can be made on the "workbench" are now completed. The further fi ne-tuning must take place in fl ight. The fl ight-tested, (hopefully) minor (digital) trim settings are automatically saved. Larger deviations should fi rst be mechanically adjusted or adjusted according to the previously discussed settings.Further settingsFollowing this programming example, you have provided a helicopter with a basic adjustment for the hovering training and simple trips. Depending on your knowledge and experience as a pilot, additional functions can, of course, also be activated. If you want to fl y at different speeds and with different trimming, you activate the so-called "fl ight phases", which can be called with assigned switches as an alternative to the previously described "normal phase". For this purpose, fi rst open the menu …»Phase settings« (page 146)… whereby the symbols appearing in the second column, sometimes only after a switch assignment in the »Phase assignment« menu, have the following meanings:"–": no phase switch present"+": phase switch present"": currently active phasePhase 1Phase 2Phase 3Phase 40.1s0.1s0.1s0.1s0.1sName Fl.ph.Tim. Sw.time––––Autorot AutorotHowever, consider in advance whether these are to be implemented with individual switches or, more reasonably, with 3-way switches because as many as 7 fl ight phases can be activated in addition to the autorotation phase. The latter possibility is more logical and usually more clearly laid out.The "Autorot" line is already selected in the fi gure above. When activated, the autorotation phase always has precedence over any other phases you assign switches to. However, in the "Name" column you fi rst assign "meaningful" names to Phases 1 to 3, which are adopted from a list. These identifi cations serve for the better differentiation and are shown later in the base screen and for all fl ight-phase dependent menus, for example:Phase 1Phase 2Phase 3Phase 40.1s0.1s0.1s0.1s0.1sName Fl.ph.Tim Sw. time––––Autorot AutorotNormalHoverSpeedThen, in the fourth column from the left, enter the switching time with which the FROM phase should switch TO the next respective phase. Approximately 1 s should suffi ce:Phase 1Phase 2Phase 3Phase 41.1s1.1s1.1s0.1sName Fl.ph.Tim Sw. time––––Autorot AutorotNormalHoverSpeed 1.1sThis value can also be adjusted later according to your personal preferences. Please observe in the process that TO the autorotation phase, whose name is defi ned as "Autorot", is switched without a time delay. If necessary, enter the time with which a change FROM the autorotation phase to a different phase should be affected.In order to be able to switch between the individual fl ight phases, the assignment of the individual switches or the three-stage switch is necessary.The assignment of the switch takes place in the menu …»Phase assignment« (page 148)Under "C" and "D", for example, assign the one of the two standard 3-way switches mounted into the switch panels, e.g.:
316 Programming examples - Helicopter modelsPHASEASSIGNMENTprior.C1 NormalcombiABDEF67Now the given switch position must be assigned to the respective fl ight phase in the »Phase settings« menu. Since these phases already have names, the name «1 Normal» will initially appear at the right in the display. If the already assigned autorotation switch was activated, the following warning message appears in the display:PHASEASSIGNMENTprior.C1 NormalKombinationABDEF67AutorotAs a reminder:The autorotation phase has absolute precedence.Therefore, move the autorotation switch back again then put the selected switch, in the example the three-stage switch connected to switch plug-in locations 6 and 7, initially to one of its limit positions. Now use the selection keys to change to the bottom right and activate this entry fi eld:PHASEASSIGNMENTprior.CcombiABDEF2671 NormalNow use the selection keys to select the desired fl ight phase for this – for example "2 Hover" …PHASEASSIGNMENTprior.CcombiABDEF2672 Hover… and confi rm this selection with a brief tap on the center SET key of the right touch pad or go ahead and put the switch into its other limit position and defi ne the name for this new switch position, such as «3 Speed». PHASEASSIGNMENTprior.CcombiABDEF2673 SpeedThe switch's middle position then receives the name "1 Normal":PHASEASSIGNMENTPrior.CcombiABDEF2671 NormalNote:Exchanged or different name assignments for the three switch positions are, of course, also possible. Thus, for example, implementation of a programmed speed controller (as described beginning in the next column) can make a sequence like "normal / hover / acro" quite logical.The model settings made before the assignment of a phase switch are now in the fl ight phase "Normal". This is the phase which is called after the above defi nition in the switch center position.This normal setting, which was already tested in fl ight, can be copied to a different fl ight phase so that fl ying can take place in the same manner in every phase at fi rst. For this purpose, use the menu …»Copy / Erase« (page 72) Copy flight phaseErase modelCopy model –> modelExport to SDImport from SD =>With the operation of the fl ight phases, it is possible to carry out changes in the phase-dependent menu for each individual phase. Since the mc-16 HoTT system has digital trimming, in addition to the fl ight-phase dependent menu settings in the helicopter
317Programming examples - Helicopter modelsprogram, the trim positions of roll, nick and tail rotor joystick can also be selected for storage on a fl ight-phase dependent basis, see »Stick mode« menu, page 106: 0:00hStop watchFlight timK780:00.04.1V0:00.000000:00hMVH-J SandbrunnerNormal#02StarletRX VOLT:4.9VEnhancement recommendation: Rotational speed regulatorAt some point in time you may want to install a rotational speed regulator in the helicopter, such as mc-Heli-Control, in order to be able to fl y with speeds automatically kept at a constant. In the process, it is logical to couple the individual rotational speeds with the fl ight phases so that further additional adjustments are possible.It is mandatory for the transmitter-side programming that the rotational speed regulator was installed and programmed according to the manufacturer's instructions. Of course, the mc-16 HoTT here too offers multiple possibilities to realize various speeds in individual phases. A practical proposal which retains the throttle limiter function can be found beginning on page 181.If you have adjusted your helicopter according to this programming principle, it is not yet a competition helicopter, but it already permits sophisticated fl ying. You should only activate additional functions if the model fl ies faultlessly so that the (desired) improvements are also easy to follow. Insofar as possible, activate individual functions on an individual basis so that you can actually recognize and attribute the change. Bear in mind that it is not the quantity of functions used that distinguishes good pilots, but what they can do in terms of fl ying with relatively little.
318 FCC Information FCC InformationGraupner mc-16 HoTT #33016FCC ID: ZKZ-MC-16FCC Statement This device complies with Part 15C of the FCC 1. Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference. (2) This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause un desired operation.Changes or modifi cations not expressly approved 2. by the party responsible for compliance could void the user‘s authority to operate the equipment.NOTEThis equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.• Increase the separation between the equipment • and receiver.Connect the equipment into an outlet on a • circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected.Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV • technician for help. FCC Radiation Exposure StatementThis equipment complies with FCC radiation exposure limits set forth for un uncontrolled envirionment. Thisequipment should be installed and operated with a minimum distance of 20 cm between the antenna and your body.
319Declaration of ConformityytimrofnoC fo noitaralceD Konformitätserklärung gemäß dem Gesetz über Funkanlagen undTelekomunikationsendeinrichtungen (FTEG) und der Richtlinie 1999/5/EG (R&TTE)Declaration of Conformity in accordiance with the Radio and Telecomunikations Terminal EquipmentAct (FTEG) and Directive 1999/5/EG (R&TTE)Graupner GmbH & Co. KGHenriettenstraße 94-96D-73230 Kirchheim/Teckerklärt, dass das Produkt:declares that the productGeräteklasse:2Equipment classden grundlegenden Anforderungen des § 3 und den übrigen einschlägigen Bestimmungen des FTEG (Artikel 3 der R&TTE) entspricht. complies with the essential requirements of § 3 and the other relevant provisions of the FTEG (Article 3 of theR&TTE Directive).Angewendete harmonisierte Normen:Harmonised standards appliedEN 60950:2006 EN 301 489-1 V1.7.1EN 301 489-3 V1.4.1 EN 300 328 V1.7.1 Health and safety requirements pursuant to § 3 (1) 1. (Article 3 (1) a)) Protection requirement concernig electromagnetic compatibility § 3 (1) 2, Artikel 3 (1) b)) Measures for the efficient use of the radio frequency spectrum § 3 (2) (Article 3 (2))Kirchheim, 14. November 2011 Stefan Graupner, Geschäftsführer Stefan Graupner, Managing DirectorGraupner GmbH & Co. KG Henriettenstraße 94-96 D-73230 Kirchheim/Teck Germanyed.renpuarg@ofni :liaME0-227/12070 :leT Fax: 07021/722-188Gesundheit und Sicherheit gemäß § 3 (1) 1. (Artikel 3 (1)a)) Schutzanforderungen in Bezug auf elektromagnetische Verträglichkeit § 3 (1) 2, Artikel 3 (1) b))Maßnahmen zur effizienten Nutzung des Frequenzspektrums § 3 (2) (Artikel 3 (2))mc-16 HoTT - No. 33016GR-16 Dual HoTT - No. 335160678
320 Warranty Certifi cateGraupner GmbH & Co. KG, Henriettenstrasse 94 - 96, D-73230 Kirchheim/Teck guarantees this product for a period of 24 months from date of purchase. The warranty is only valid for the material or functional defects already present at the time of the purchase of the product. Schäden, die auf Abnützung, Überlastung, falsches Zubehör oder unsachgemäße Behandlung zurückzuführen sind, sind von der Garantie ausgeschlossen. Die gesetzlichen Rechte und Gewährleistunsansprüche des Verbrauchers werden durch diese Garantie nicht berührt. Bitte überprüfen Sie vor einer Reklamation oder Rücksendung das Produkt genau auf Mängel, da wir Ihnen bei Mängelfreiheit die entstandenen Unkosten in Rechnung stellen müssen.Graupner GmbH & Co. KG, Henriettenstrasse 94 - 96. D-73230 Kirchheim/Teck, Germany guarantees this product for a period of 24 months from date of purchase. The guarantee applies only to such material or operational defects which are present at the time of purchase of the product. Damage due to wear, overloading, incompetent handling or the use of incorrect accessories is not covered by the guarantee. The user´s legal rights and claims under guarantee are not affected by this guarantee. Please check the product carefully for defects before you are make a claim or send the item to us, since we are obliged to make a charge for our cost if the product is found to be free of faults.La société Graupner GmbH & Co. KG, Henriettenstraße 94-96, D-73230 Kirchheim/Teck, accorde sur ce produit une garantie de 24 mois à compter de la date d’achat. La garantie ne s’applique qu’aux défauts de matériel et de fonctionnement du produit acheté. Les dommages dus à une usure, à une surcharge, à l’emploi d’accessoires non compatibles ou à une manipulation non conforme sont exclus de la garantie. Cette garantie ne remet pas en cause les droits légaux des consommateurs. Avant toute réclamation ou retour de matériel, vérifi ez précisément les défauts ou vices constatés, car si le matériel est conforme et qu’aucun défaut n’a été constaté par nos services, nous nous verrions contraints de facturer le coût de cette intervention.Garantie-UrkundeWarranty certifi cate / Certifi cat de garantiemc-16 HoTT Set Order no. 33016Übergabedatum:Date of purchase/delivery:Date d’achat :Name des Käufers:Owner´s name:Nom de I`acheteur :Straße, Wohnort:Complete address:Adresse complète :Firmenstempel und Unterschrift des Einzelhändlers:Stamp and signature of dealer:Cachet et signature du détaillant : Warranty Certifi cateServicestellen / Service / Service après-venteGraupner ZentralserviceGraupner GmbH & Co. KGHenriettenstrasse 94 - 96D-73230 KirchheimService hotline (+49) 0 18 05 47 28 76*Monday … Friday9:30 - 11:30 & 13:00 - 15:00United KingdomGraupner ServiceBrunel DriveGB, NEWARK, NottinghamshireNG242EG (+44) 16 36 61 05 39SverigeBaltechno ElectronicsBox 5307S 40227 Göteborg (+46) 31 70 73 00 0SchweizGraupner ServiceWehntalerstrasse 37CH 8181 Hoeri (+41) 43 26 66 58 3LuxembourgKit Flammang129, route d’ArlonL 8009 Strassen (+35) 23 12 23 2FranceGraupner FranceGérard Altmayer86, rue St. AntoineF 57601 Forbach-Oeting (+33) 3 87 85 62 12EspanaAnguera HobbiesC/Terrassa 14E 43206 Reus (Tarragona) (+34) 97 77 55 32 0info@anguera-hobbies.com Ceská RepublikaSlovenská RepublikaRC Service Z. HnizdilLetecka 666/22CZ 16100 Praha 6 - Ruzyne (+42) 2 33 31 30 95Belgie/Belgique/NederlandJan van MouwerikSlot de Houvelaan 30NL 3155 Maasland VT (+31) 10 59 13 59 4ItaliaGiMaxVia Manzoni, no. 8I 25064 Gussago (+39) 030 25 22 73 2 * 0.14 cent / minute from a German Telecom landline. Calling price variations possible for calls from cell phones or from the land-lines of other providers.Wir gewähren auf dieses Erzeugnis eine Garantie vonThis product is warrantied forSur ce produit nous accordons une garantie de 24 Monatenmonthsmois
321For your notes
322 For your notes
323For your notes
HOPPING.TELEMETRY.TRANSMISSIONGRAUPNER GMBH & CO. KGPOSTFACH 1242D-73220 KIRCHHEIM/TECKGERMANYhttp://www.graupner.deChanges and delivery options reserved. Available only through dealerships. A directory of suppliers will be provided. No liability is accepted for print errors.Printed in Germany PN.QC-01Although the information provided in these instructions has been carefully scrutinized for viability, no form of liability can be accepted for errors, omissions or print errors. Graupner reserves the right to change the described hardware and software features at any time without prior notifi cation.

Navigation menu